JP2017029448A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance player's interest.SOLUTION: When predetermined conditions are satisfied, a specific performance, which reports a reporting mode for indicating one selected identification information, is executed. When the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance, setting means sets specific identification information determined by identification determination means as identification information selected by the specific performance, based on determination of a specific result by determination means. Further, when a situation, where predetermined period determination means does not execute determination during a performance period, continues, interruption means interrupts the performance period. Thus a situation, where the specific performance executed during a preset performance period progresses while the determination means does not execute determination, thus suppressing a loss of a sense of expectation toward the specific performance executed during the performance period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 94

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a pachinko machine has been proposed that executes a specific effect regardless of whether or not there is a change in the special symbol during the period from the start of the short-time gaming state to the end of the short-time gaming state.

JP 2002-045528 A

  In this case, since the specific effect is started even if the special symbol is not changed during the short-time game, the special symbol that is executed only within the specific period of the short-time game state is not changed. Can be seen for a long time.

  Therefore, there is a problem that a sense of expectation for a specific performance is lowered.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and aims to improve the interest of the player.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means. And, based on the determination result by the determination means, a determination period determining means for determining a period until the determination result is determined, and based on the determination result of the determination means being determined by a specific determination result, A privilege granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player, a plurality of different identification information set, and a player among the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means The identification information determination means for determining the specific identification information for notifying that the determination result is a specific determination result, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the identification means of the identification means in a predetermined production period 1 from the identification information When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect in which the different information is selected and the notification mode indicating the selected identification information is notified, and the specific effect executing means, the determination is performed. Setting means for setting the specific identification information determined by the identification information determination means as the identification information selected by the specific effect based on the determination of the specific determination result by the means; And an interrupting means for interrupting the effect period when the determination is not performed by the determining means for a predetermined period during the effect period.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the production period is set as a first production period from the start until the first period elapses, and the interruption means is the first production period. In one production period, the interruption is executed based on the fact that the case where the determination is not executed continues for the predetermined period.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the interrupting unit determines whether the determination by the determining unit is performed in the predetermined period until the first production period elapses. When the determination is not executed, the effect period is interrupted based on the elapse of the first effect period.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the determination period determining unit determines the determination result determined by the determining unit as the period until the determination result is determined. The period is determined such that a predetermined number of determination results are determined within the period.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means, and the discrimination means Based on the determination result by the above, a determination period determining means for determining a period until the determination result is determined, and the fact that the determination result of the determination means is determined by a specific determination result is advantageous to the player Among the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means and the identification means in which a plurality of different identification information is set. Identification information determination means for determining the specific identification information for notifying that the result is a specific determination result; and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the identification information of the identification means is 1 The identification information is selected When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect informing the notification mode indicating the selected identification information and the specific effect executing means, the specific determination is performed by the determining means. A setting means for setting the specific identification information determined by the identification information determination means as the identification information selected in the specific effect based on the determination of the result, and a predetermined value during the effect period. And a suspending means for suspending the effect period when the determination is not performed by the determination means.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest of a player can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the production period is set as the first production period until the first period elapses from the start, and the interruption means continues when the determination is not performed for the predetermined period in the first production period. Based on what is done, the interruption is executed.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest of a player can be improved.

  According to a third aspect of the gaming machine, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the interruption means performs the determination of the determination means during the predetermined period until the first production period elapses. If the determination is not performed, the effect period is interrupted based on the elapse of the first effect period.

  As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

  A gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, is a period until the determination period determining unit determines a determination result determined by the determining unit. As described above, the period is determined so that a predetermined number of determination results are determined within the production period.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest of a player can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. (A) is a front view of the first gear, (b) is a rear view of the first gear, (c) is a front view of the second gear, and (d) is a second gear. FIG. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive side slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a drive side slide member. It is a rear view of a drive side slide member. (A) is a front perspective view of a connection member, (b) is a front view of the connection member in the direction of arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26 (a), and (c) is an arrow in FIG. 26 (a). It is a rear view of the connection member in the XXVIc direction view. It is a rear view of a 2nd channel | path formation member and a connection member. It is a rear view of a 2nd channel | path formation member and a connection member. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal lifting unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. 29. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left swing unit. It is a front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit. It is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit in the state where a rotation member, a part of pitching device, and a guide member were removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. (A) is a front view of the one side rotation drive member and other side rotation member, (b) is sectional drawing of the one side rotation member and other side rotation member in the LIb-LIb line | wire of Fig.51 (a). is there. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit cut | disconnected by the plane containing the rotating shaft of a center transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. (A) is a front view of a rotation member, (b) is a side view of the rotation member in the arrow LIVb direction view of FIG. 54 (a). It is a rear view of the rotation member in the arrow LV direction view of FIG.54 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of a division member, (b) is a back perspective view of a division member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a division member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a division member. (A) And (b) is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned in the 1st area. (A) And (b) is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned in a 2nd area. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a pitching device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a pitching device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of a pitching device in the state where an arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arranged in a holding position. It is a front view of a pitching device in the state where an arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arranged in a separation position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the protruding position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is disposed at the immersion position. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism in a state in which the holding piece is arranged at the protruding position, and (b) is a partial enlarged view of the holding piece protruding and protruding mechanism taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. It is sectional drawing. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece in / out mechanism in a state in which the holding piece is disposed at the immersion position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the holding piece in / out mechanism in the LXIXb-LXIXb line of FIG. It is sectional drawing. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a back perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotation member. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the first section, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the second section. (A) to (d) is a state transition diagram every time the one-side rotation driving member is rotated 30 degrees. It is a state relationship figure which shows the relationship between the state of engagement or cancellation | release of the one side rotational drive member and other side rotational drive member with respect to a division member, and a phase. (A) to (c) is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. It is the partial expanded side view which expanded the part in the 1st area of a rotating member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left swing unit in the second embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of the tip wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the tip wall member, and (c) is a line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79 (b). It is sectional drawing of the main body member of a tip wall member, (d) is a front view of the main body member of a tip wall member. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit and the liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member in the arrow LXXXIXb direction view of Fig.89 (a), (c) These are the partial front views of a drive side slide member. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the change display of a symbol, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in case the combination of the symbol used as a stop is stopped-displayed. . (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in case the combination of the symbol which becomes a jackpot is stopped and displayed, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in execution of the time-short suggestion effect. is there. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in case a loss | notification was alert | reported in the time-short suggestion effect, (b) showed the example of the display mode in case a hit was alert | reported in the time-short suggestion effect. FIG. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of increase production. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of the roulette chance effect, (b) is the figure which showed the state in which the pitched ball is performing rocking | fluctuation operation | movement on a holding piece. . (A) is the figure which showed the state in which the ball fell out and dropped into the pocket in the roulette chance effect, and (b) is the figure which showed the state in which the ball fell into the hit pocket. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in case an additional production | presentation was performed, (b) showed the example of the display mode in case the lucky number for the extra production | generation was alert | reported in the increase production. FIG. It is a front view of back LED. It is the figure which showed the case where the one part lighting area | region of back LED was set to the lighting state of the lighting rate 100%. It is a front view of the rotating member when a part of the lighting area of the rear LED is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%. (A) is a front view of the back LED when the lighting state is set for each lighting region of the back LED, and (b) is a lighting state setting for each lighting region of the back LED. It is a front view of the rotation member in the case of performing. (A) is a front view of the back LED when the back LED makes 1/3 turn after setting the lighting state, and (b) is at the time when the back LED makes 1/3 turn after setting the lighting state. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the rear LED when the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section is corrected, and (b) is the case when the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section is corrected. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is the figure which showed the case where the ball | bowl in rocking | fluctuation operation | movement was arrange | positioned outside the detection range of a ball | bowl detection sensor, (b) is a figure in the ball | bowl in rocking | fluctuation operation within the detection range of a ball | bowl detection sensor. It is the figure which showed the case where it has arrange | positioned. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing about control of a stepping motor. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller, b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, and (c) is the first It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a classification selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the classification selection table for special figures. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the classification selection table for special figure 2. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the method of the state transfer of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st random number table, (b) is a block diagram which shows the structure of a fluctuation pattern selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal middle jackpot table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal out-of-place table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the short-term middle jackpot table, (b) is the model which showed typically the detailed content of the consecutive resort middle table contained in the short-term middle jackpot table FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time-shortage out-of-clock table, (b) The schematic which showed the detailed content of the table in the consecutive resort included in the time-short-out-of-time table typically FIG. (A) is the timing chart which showed the time change of the mode of the off roulette chance, (b) is the timing chart which showed the time change of the mode of the out roulette chance when the fluctuation is interrupted during the time reduction. is there. (A) is a timing chart showing the time change of the aspect of the winning roulette chance, and (b) is a timing chart showing the time change of the aspect of the winning roulette chance when the fluctuation is interrupted during the time reduction. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the game result setting table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the state setting table. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of ROM in an audio lamp control apparatus, (b) is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM in an audio lamp control apparatus. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of an operation scenario table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the upper raising / lowering unit table, (c) is the content of the table for specific opening It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the initial stage operation | movement table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the rotation position discrimination | determination table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the contact position storage area. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the lighting position storage area, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st storage area, (c) is the 2nd storage area. FIG. 6D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third storage area. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the state setting process at the time of injection performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the origin return process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the rocking | fluctuation effect process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fall control process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge | emission detection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the connection cancellation | release determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the execution command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the initial stage operation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 prize command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display number selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the stop type command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece in the second control example, and (b) is a front view of the holding piece in the second control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of arrangement | positioning of each ball | bowl detection sensor in a 2nd control example, and an area. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the amplitude discrimination | determination table in a 2nd control example. It is. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the rocking | fluctuation angle discrimination | determination table in the 2nd control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the rocking | fluctuation effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fall control process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the amplitude discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the rocking angle control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the execution command process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the arrangement | positioning specific process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process during rotation performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of non-specification performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process in rocking | fluctuation performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the timing chart which showed an example of the time-measurement change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of a middle fluctuation being set in the extended control mode in a 3rd control example, (b) is a 3rd control example, It is the timing chart which showed an example of the time change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of a detachment | departure middle change being set during consecutive resort mode. (A) is the timing chart which showed the time-measurement change of the production | presentation aspect in case a short-circuit fluctuation is determined after a detachment | short-circuit fluctuation is determined twice continuously in the extended control mode in the third control example. (B) is the timing chart which showed the time change of the production | presentation aspect when the detachment | short_circuit fluctuation | variation is determined 3 times continuously during consecutive resort mode. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in a 3rd control example. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for consecutive jackpots in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for renegade out in the 3rd control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the addition area | region selection table. . It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the contact position storage area in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the addition position determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in a 4th control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table in a continuous control in a 4th control example. (C) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the operation scenario table in the fourth control example, and (d) schematically shows the contents of the upper swing effect table in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning command process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the upper rock | fluctuation effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the operation | movement aspect of the left rocking | swiveling unit in case the left rocking effect is being performed in the fifth control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the pitch pressing effect in a 5th control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the left rocking | swiveling unit table in a 5th control example, (b) showed the content of the 1st left rocking | swiveling unit table in a 5th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second left swing unit table in the fifth control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fall control process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the notification effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pitch pressing effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning command process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed the display mode of the fluctuation | variation display performed in "normal mode" in the 6th control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed the display mode of the fluctuation | variation display performed in "preparation mode" in a 6th control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the symbol position selection table in a 6th control example. FIG. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display position selection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop position selection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the signal waveform of the lighting control command in the 1st control example.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 88, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball pulling lever 54b is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. A mouth 63, a first entrance 64, a second entrance 640a, a second variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1). (See below). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640a, the second variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640a. . Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second entrance 640a, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol out of normal, by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, probability variation jackpots A to K and normal jackpots A and B are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “probability variation jackpots A to K” are all jackpots with a maximum number of rounds of two, and after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. On the other hand, when “ordinary jackpot A, B” is reached, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a special symbol low probability state after a jackpot of two rounds.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball easily wins the second entrance 640a. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased. It means a game state in which a ball can easily win a prize at 640a. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is changed, which is longer than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 640b is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640a as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640b is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640a, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the change of probability or during the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640b opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric combination 640b is opened at the time and once the electric combination 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is opened. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the time of probability change or during a short period of time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a or the number of times the electric accessory 640b is released per time is not shown. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a. Consists of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that displays symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the through gate 67. And a second symbol display device 83 (not shown).

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  The second symbol display device 83 alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, the symbol of “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. If the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640b of the second entrance 640a. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second entrance 640a during the probability change and during the time reduction.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 640a during the probability change or in the short time may be increased by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640b per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640b may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation. If the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variation display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out. If there is, the symbol “x” is displayed as the symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the second symbol display device 83. A part of the three-symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 is provided through which a ball can win. When a ball wins the first winning slot 64, a first winning slot switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by the ON of the first winning slot switch. A jackpot lottery is performed at 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in front view, a second entrance 640a through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the second entrance 640a, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a is also one of the entrances through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 is the same as the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640a. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the second entrance 640a, for example, the first prize The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640a may be five.

  An electric accessory 640b is attached to the second entrance 640a. The electric accessory 640b is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640b is in a closed state (an overhanging state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second entrance 640a. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640b is in the open state ( In the retracted state), and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640a.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640b is opened (retracted) increases. Further, during the probability change and during the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640b is also longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640a during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where the ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball is won at the second entrance 640a is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. is there. However, as the type of jackpot that is selected when the jackpot is won, the selection ratio of the jackpot type that can acquire a relatively large amount of prize balls is set higher when the ball wins the second entrance 640a. Has been. On the other hand, the 1st entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory like the 2nd entrance 640a, and is in the state where a ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640a is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640a. 64, the ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lottery win lottery opportunity is obtained by winning the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during probability change and time reduction, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a to be in an open state and to easily win the second entrance 640a. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640a so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to be electrically driven. It is advantageous for the player to set the player in the open state and aim for a big hit by winning the second entrance 640a.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 82a is disposed at the upper left of the first winning hole 64, and a first specific winning port 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the first variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot win the first specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to a predetermined opening pattern according to the jackpot type at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, a promising jackpot A). As predetermined opening patterns, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that repeats opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds 20 times, and an opening pattern that performs opening for 0.052 seconds only once (opening pattern B). ) And are provided.

  The opening / closing operation according to the predetermined opening pattern by the first variable winning device 82a can be repeated, for example, twice (two rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done. In each round, even if the opening pattern is not completed, the first force is forcibly detected when it is detected that a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more balls have won the first specific winning opening 82. The variable winning device 82a is closed and the end of the round is set.

  A second variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long second specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640a becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. When the jackpot type is a type corresponding to the second specific winning port 65a, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a jackpot) where the ball is likely to win the second specific winning port 65a. As this special gaming state, the second specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won). That is, a longer opening time is set as compared with the jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened. Therefore, in the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened, in many cases, an upper limit number (for example, 10 balls) can be won with respect to the second specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it can be hoped that the second specified prize opening 65a is a jackpot type to be opened. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the second specified prize opening 65a can be noted. .

  The second specific winning port 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the second specific winning port 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, twice (two rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the second variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The second specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state in which the ball easily wins the second specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first entrance port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs major winning lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp, and an opening / closing plate of a second specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the lower side as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands via the input / output port 205. And send control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, various sensors 230, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

  6 and 7, the state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position is shown in FIG. 9. In FIG. 9, the second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 and the first path forming member of the left swinging unit 500. FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the raised position. 6 to 10 show a state in which the upper elevating unit 300 is disposed at the raised position.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and an upper elevating unit 300, a liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and a left swing unit are provided in the inner space of the rear case 210. 500, the rotation unit 600, and the light emitting decorative member 700 are accommodated.

  The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 211 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. The bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210 is provided with a concave portion having a frontal substantially circular shape at the center thereof, and the rotating unit 600 is accommodated in the concave portion. The liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper lifting / lowering unit 300, the left swing unit 500 and the decorative light emitting member 700 are the upper edge, left side edge and lower side edge of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. It is arranged in each part.

  The upper lifting unit 300 includes a lifting body 330 in which a plurality (four in this embodiment) are juxtaposed in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 8), and these lifting bodies 330 are independently in the height direction (FIG. 8). It is formed to be movable up and down (refer to FIGS. 12 and 13). In the state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, when the lifting / lowering body 330 is disposed at the raised position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 8). When 330 is placed in the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

  The liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is arranged in a vertical posture with its axis along the vertical direction and a pair of guide rods 451 arranged at a predetermined interval in the width direction, and both ends in the width direction of the guide rod 451 are arranged. A drive side slide member 420 and a driven side slide member 430 supported so as to be slidable are provided, and a drive motor 441 that drives the drive side slide member 420 to move up and down. The drive motor 441 drives the drive side slide member 420 up and down. As a result, the driven-side slide member 430 is moved up and down.

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 is raised, the drive side slide member 420 pushes the driven side slide member 430 upward against the action of gravity, while the drive side slide member 420 is lowered. As the drive side slide member 420 is lowered, the driven side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight.

  The drive side slide member 420 is provided with a second passage forming member 422, and the driven side slide member 430 is provided with a FIG. 3 side display device 81. When the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the connecting position between the raised position and the lowered position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 9). Further, when the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the upper region of the third symbol display device 81 is disposed on the back side of the upper lift unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

  The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that is swung in a direction in which the distal end side is moved up and down around the base end side. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the tip end side, the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the connecting position (see FIG. 9), and the tip end side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, When it is swung in the direction in which the tip side is swung down, it is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is released.

  The sphere flowing down the game area can flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 flows in when the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 9). The ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10). Then, the ball that has flowed in is sent to the game area through a passage, which will be described later, provided separately from the first passage formation member 520.

  The rotation unit 600 is an effect device configured to simulate a roulette. In other words, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotary disk) formed to be rotatable, and the wheel is formed by dividing the wheel in the circumferential direction, and a red or black color is given and a different number is displayed. A portion corresponding to the pocket (display plate 646 and partition plate 647), and the ball B thrown from the device (throwing device 650) on the inner peripheral side of the wheel is a portion of the portion corresponding to the plurality of pockets It is formed to fall on either.

  In a state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotating unit 600 is shielded from being visible to the player by the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, while the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is at the connected position. In the disposed state (see FIG. 9), a part of the member corresponding to the wheel (lower part) is exposed, and in the state in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed in the raised position (see FIG. 10), In addition to a part (lower part) of the corresponding member, there is a path from the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel to the part corresponding to the pocket after the ball B is thrown. These are exposed and are visible to the player.

  The light emitting decoration member 700 includes a case body formed of a light-transmitting material and a plurality of LEDs disposed in the case body, and a mode of light emitted from the LEDs (for example, an LED of a light emitting LED). By changing the number and the light emission time, an effect by light emission is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20, detailed configurations of the upper elevating / lowering unit 300, the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotating unit 600 and the light emitting decorative member 700 will be described. First, the upper lift unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper lifting unit 300. 11 and 12 show a state in which all the lifting bodies 330 arranged in parallel in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 12) are arranged at the raised position, and in FIG. 13, all the lifting bodies 330 are lowered. The state of being placed in position is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a plurality of elevating bodies 330 (four in the present embodiment) arranged in the width direction of the horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310, and each elevating body 330 is configured as follows. It is configured to be movable up and down between an ascending position (see FIG. 12) and a descending position (see FIG. 13). Next, with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each elevating body 330 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the upper lift unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear exploded perspective view of the upper lift unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a base member 310 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape and a space for housing the transmission device 350 between the base member 310 and the base member 310. A back cover 320 fastened and fixed to the back side, a lifting body 330 in which a rack 332 is accommodated between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect portion 331 is disposed on the front side of the base member 310; A driving device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 and generates a driving force necessary for the lifting operation of the lifting body, and a transmission device 350 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the lifting body 330 are mainly used. Prepare.

  The cover member 310 has a semicircular shape in which the center of a circle is disposed at the lower end and is recessed from the front side surface toward the back side. The cover member 310 includes a rack 332 of the elevator 330 from the back side surface. And a guide rib 312 protruding in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap in the left-right direction.

  The semicircular recessed portion 311 is configured with a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the effect portion 331 of the elevating body 330, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the effect portion 331 are vertically linear. Are placed at the matching positions. Thereby, when the effect part 331 moves upward, it can be moved to a position just before the position where it interferes with the semicircular recessed part 311 on the front side of the base member 310, and the vertical width of the base member 310 is secured. In addition, the ascending movement width of the effect section 331 can be ensured to be large.

  The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-like portion extending in the vertical direction, and protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11). Thereby, it can suppress that the raising / lowering body 330 moves to the left-right direction during a raising / lowering movement (a parallel movement or inclination operation | movement).

  In addition, by configuring the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recessed portion that is recessed from the front side to the back side, the area where the back side can be made invisible is widened as compared to a case where the space penetrates in the front-rear direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for disposing a mechanism portion (a portion such as a gear or a motor that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player).

  The back cover 320 includes a main body portion 321 configured in a case shape having an open front side and a lower side, a cylindrical shaft support portion 322 protruding from the main body portion 321 to the front side, and a front surface from the shaft support portion 322. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole drilled in a state in which the extending direction coincides with the vertical direction at a position displaced in the left-right direction, and a shaft support portion from the surrounding bottom portion where the upper shaft support portion 322 is projected. And a locking portion 324 formed in a rib shape along the radial direction of 322.

  The shaft support portion 322 is a portion that supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the lifting operation of the lifting body 330.

  The locking portion 324 is disposed on the upper side in the vertical direction and the lower side in the vertical direction with respect to the axis of the upper shaft support portion 322, and in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position or the lowered position, respectively. The end of the locking arc portion 351c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be contacted in the rotation direction.

  The elevating body 330 includes an effect portion 331 configured in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 that is fixed to the back surface of the effect portion 331 and extends in the vertical direction at a position spaced from the rear side surface of the effect portion 331. .

  The rendering unit 331 is a portion where a circular liquid crystal panel is disposed inside a circular outer frame, and a rendering is performed by displaying patterns and figures on the liquid crystal panel.

  The rack 332 includes a slide shaft 332 a that protrudes to the back side and protrudes to a position where the rack 332 is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the back cover 320.

  A plurality of slide shafts 332a are not provided in a projecting manner, but one is provided in a projecting manner. Therefore, since the number of guide holes 323 can be reduced to one (can be reduced), a large moving distance of the rack 332 can be secured while suppressing the space for arranging the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can be brought into contact with the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, the rack 332 can be moved in the left-right direction even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at one position. Can be prevented. Thereby, when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, the effect part 331 can be prevented from swinging in the left-right direction, and the gap between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 can be prevented from fluctuating and the meshing relationship can be prevented from deteriorating. be able to.

  The drive device 340 includes a drive motor 341 that is a drive source fastened and fixed to the back cover 320, and a drive gear 342 that is rotated by rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and transmits a drive force to the transmission device 350. .

  The transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support 322 and meshed with the drive gear 342, and is meshed with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and supported by the shaft support 322. A second gear 352.

  As described above, the plurality (four in the present embodiment) of the lifting bodies 330 include the independent drive motors 341. Therefore, in addition to the operation in which all the lifting bodies 330 move up and down in conjunction, It can be moved up and down individually. In addition, since the technical idea of each raising / lowering body 330 is common, below, the raising / lowering body 330 arrange | positioned at the left end of FIG. 11 is demonstrated, and description about the other raising / lowering body 330 is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16 (b) is a rear view of the first gear 351, and FIG. 16 (c) is a front view of the second gear 352. FIG. 16D is a rear view of the second gear 352.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b), the first gear 351 has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and a main body portion 351a in which gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. And an extension length of about half of the tooth height of the gear teeth on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 351a (the pitch circle C1 connecting the contact points of the teeth to be engaged) Abutment portion 351b that is formed to project radially in the overhang length), and a latch that protrudes in an arc shape centering on the axis along the direction parallel to the axis from the back side surface of main body portion 351a Arc portion 351c.

  The abutting portion 351b has an arc shape with a radius r centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, and a tooth thickness (arc) of about two to three gear teeth formed on the main body portion 351a. (The tooth thickness in the range of approximately 45 to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 351a is made longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, the strength in the circumferential direction can be ensured as compared with the gear teeth of the main body portion 351a.

  The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose circumferential tip can be brought into contact with the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the back cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. There is a role.

  As shown in FIG. 16C and FIG. 16D, the second gear 352 is composed of two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the back side, and an intermediate plate 353 configured in a donut plate shape. And a deformed gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially deformed tooth shape, and a spur gear shape formed on the back side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with a rack 332 (see FIG. 15). Transmission gear portion 355.

  The intermediate plate 352 is formed so as to protrude outward in the radial direction from the tips of the gear teeth of the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) can be brought into contact with each other by overlapping in the direction parallel to the tooth surface (see FIG. 17). It is possible to suppress movement in the direction parallel to the tooth surface during the elevating operation of 330.

  The deformed gear portion 354 is a portion engaged with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and has gear teeth on the outer peripheral surface. A main body portion 354a to be formed, a receiving portion 354b that is formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a where gear teeth are not formed, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (on the right side of FIG. 16C) And adjacent gear teeth 354c provided adjacent to the end portion).

  The receiving portion 354b is a counterclockwise front view from the adjacent gear teeth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (the side on which the first gear 351 is engaged with the adjacent gear portion 354c when the elevating body 330 is moved upward) ) At a disposition angle of about two gear teeth (about 30 to 50 degrees), and the tip surface of the contact portion 351b in a state where the transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support portion 322. Of the adjacent gear teeth 354c between the curved wall portion 354b1 and the circumferential tooth surface of the adjacent gear teeth 354c. , And a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed at a pitch circle extending to a pitch circle C2 in which the contacts of the teeth to be engaged are connected. Therefore, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 is an overhang length that is about half the radial length of the side surface on the opposite side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the adjacent gear tooth 354c. In a state of being integrally formed with the connecting wall part 354b2, the connecting wall part 354b2 projects in the radial direction.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, in the state where the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322, the second gear 352 is curved along the arc shape with the radius r formed by the tip surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is disposed, the adjacent gear tooth 354c is disposed outside the arc having the radius r (on the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear tooth 354c has the radius r). The formation is made at a position that does not interfere with the circle).

  Next, the ascending / descending operation of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20. Since the ascending operation and the descending operation have the same operation path, the ascending operation will be described here, and the description of the descending operation will be omitted.

  17 to 20 are front views of the lifting body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the lifting operation of the lifting body 330 is illustrated in time series. 17 illustrates a state in which the lifting body 330 is disposed at the lowered position. In FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. The state where the distance rising operation is started and the end portion in the circumferential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 begins to engage with the adjacent gear teeth 354c of the second gear 352 is illustrated, and in FIG. 19, the state illustrated in FIG. The state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in the front view and the contact between the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear teeth 354c is released. FIG. 20 shows a state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down when the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is transmitted to the rack 332 via the drive gear 342 and the transmission device 350. The More specifically, the driving force of the drive gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the drive gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351, The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, so that the lifting body 330 moves up and down.

  In the lowered position illustrated in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 332 a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the back cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 17, the first gear 351 is brought into contact with the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351 c of the first gear 351 and the lower locking portion 324 of the back cover 320. Is rotated mechanically in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (the direction in which the rack 332 is lowered).

  As a result, even if there is a load that causes the drive gear 342 to over-rotate due to poor control of the drive motor 341 and to rotate the first gear 351 further clockwise from the state shown in FIG. Since the rotation of the first gear 351 is mechanically prevented, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation where the rack 332 is lowered can be avoided, so that the slide shaft 322a (see FIG. 15) is pressed against the lower surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15), and the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the process in which the elevating body 330 moves upward, the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351 b whose circumferential tooth thickness is larger than that of the other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear teeth 354 c. Therefore, a load transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 (a load due to the weight of the elevating body 330) can be received by the contact portion 351b having a higher strength than other gear teeth. The durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

  Since the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 extends to the pitch circle C1 and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 extends to the pitch circle C2, the contact portion 351b is connected in the state of FIG. It approaches to the position which rubs with wall part 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be brought into contact with each other at a portion close to the base of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.

  Further, since the adjacent gear tooth 354c is connected to the connecting wall portion 354b2 on one side surface in the circumferential direction, the strength against the load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the overhang length in the radial direction of the side surface on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 is shortened, resistance to deformation of the adjacent gear teeth 354c in the direction perpendicular to the tooth height direction increases, and the connecting wall portion Since the 354b2 is formed integrally with the adjacent gear teeth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion receiving the force applied to the adjacent gear teeth 354c is increased. The resistance against the circumferential deformation of the adjacent gear teeth 354c increases. Thereby, it can suppress that the adjacent gear tooth 354c breaks when receiving the contact part 351b of the 1st gear 351.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the arcuate tip of the abutting portion 351b and the adjacent gear teeth 354c abut in a state immediately after the elevating body 330 is disposed at the ascending position. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, transmission of the driving force in the rotational direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. The

  Therefore, the force that supports the weight of the lifting body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351, and the lifting body 330 starts to move in the falling direction, so that the second gear 352 moves the rack 332 down. Rotate in the direction to move downward (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, since the contact portion 351b is disposed in the range in the direction in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c rotate (inside the circle formed by the tip of the adjacent gear teeth 354c), the second gear When rotating 352, it is necessary to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c by the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

  Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the axial side of the first gear 351. It is decomposed into Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  The axial component Fa is not in a direction in which the first gear 351 can be rotated, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (in a structure that does not expand and contract in the radial direction), the contact portion is caused by the axial component Fa. It is difficult to push 351b outside the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

  The circumferential component Fb is directed in the rotational direction of the first gear 351, but the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other at a point, and therefore slip between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b. Since the first gear 351 is difficult to rotate, it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b outside the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c by the circumferential component Fb.

  Accordingly, the adjacent gear tooth 354c prevents the contact portion 351b from being pushed outside the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, so that the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating, and the second gear 352 and The state of the elevating body 330 is maintained.

  The abutting portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are both formed in an arc shape with a radius r centering on the first gear 351, and as shown in FIG. 19, the circumference of the first rotating gear 351 is Since the contact is made per surface along the direction, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received using the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. Thereby, even if the stop of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the raised position, the first gear 351 can be prevented from over-rotating, and the drive motor 341 is stopped. Can be prevented from affecting the operation mode of the elevating body 330.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates and stops until the locking arc portion 351c comes into contact with the upper locking portion 324. 18 to 20, the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushes the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, so that the second gear 352 is rotated. 354c is aligned with the second gear 352, and in the state shown in FIG. 20, a state in which the adjacent gear tooth 354c abuts against the tooth tip surface of the abutting portion 351b can be reliably formed.

  From the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, and therefore the second gear 352 is restricted from rotating in the direction in which the rack 332 is moved upward (clockwise in FIG. 20). Is done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354 b 1 has a curved wall portion 354 b 1 along the arc shape of the radius r formed by the tip surface of the contact portion 351 b in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the circular arc having the radius r (on the second gear 352 side), only the first gear 351 is rotated in the same rotational direction (from the state shown in FIG. 19). It can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction of FIG.

  At this time, since the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker than other gear teeth (approximately two to three gear teeth), the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderately increased. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops at an intermediate phase from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b is the same. The rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted.

  Further, the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions can be restricted while the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderated. That is, even if the second gear 352 rotates clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b abuts against the tooth tip surface of the abutting portion 351b, so that the direction of the load is described in detail above. The rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted in the same manner as when the provided gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact. Therefore, since the rack 332 is restricted from moving in both the up and down directions in a state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling in the elevating body 330. The restriction in both the upper and lower directions (particularly, the restriction in the upward direction) is difficult to be performed by the conventional crank mechanism, and is achieved for the first time by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in this embodiment. Is.

  As described above, the shape of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 can prevent the second gear 352 from rotating in a state in which the lifting body 330 is disposed at the raised position. Therefore, it is unnecessary to continuously apply the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a magnitude greater than its own weight in order to maintain the lifted position in the raised position, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

  In addition, although it is possible to maintain the lifting body 330 at the raised position using the dead center of the crank mechanism, there is a problem that the crank mechanism increases in size in accordance with the moving distance of the lifting body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, a crank mechanism is not required, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so the transmission portion can be reduced in size.

  A method for canceling the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, another member that interferes with the contact portion 351b is not provided in the rotation direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the reverse direction. Therefore, the first gear 351 is allowed to rotate in the direction in which the elevating body 330 is lowered (the clockwise direction in FIG. 20).

  When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19 and further rotated in the same direction, the restriction in the rotational direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact portion 351b When the distal end surface is separated from the adjacent gear teeth 354 c), the elevating body 330 can be lowered. That is, the rotation restriction of the second gear 352 can be released by the rotation operation of the first gear 351, and the first gear 351 can perform another operation to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

  Next, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 includes a drive side slide member 420 that has a rendering portion 422 a having a circular liquid crystal portion and moves up and down, and a member that moves up and down following the drive side slide member 420. A driven-side slide member 430 having a third symbol display device 81, and the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are connected to a common guide bar 451 and configured to operate in the same direction. Is done.

  FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 includes a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-shaped members, a drive-side slide member 420 configured to be movable up and down in the vertical direction, and driving thereof. A driven slide member 430 that is arranged above the side slide member 420 and configured to be movable in the vertical direction, a drive device 440 that generates a drive force for the drive side slide member 420 to move up and down, and generated from the drive device 440 The transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 for transmitting the drive force to the drive side slide member 420 and guiding the operations of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430, and the lower ends of the pair of base members 410 And the lower front plate member 460 connected to the drive side slide member 420 and the left side of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 And a cover member 470 which is disposed on the front side of the upper, and mainly includes a.

  The base member 410 is a main body member 411 configured as a vertically long plate-like member, and a U-shaped concave portion that is disposed at a position that coincides with the upper and lower ends of the main body member 411 in the vertical direction and opens to the front. A guide rod support portion 412 that is configured, and a member that is arranged on the inner side (side closer to the other base member 410) than the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 and extends to the front side of the main body member 411. A first shaft support portion 414 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the opposite side of the locking portion 413 across the vertical line drawn from the stop portion 413, the guide rod support portion 412, and the first A downward regulating member 415 that is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 414 and restricts the downward movement of the drive side slide member 420, and is arranged below the first pivotal support portion 414 and protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411. A second shaft support 416, the elevation regulating member 417 for regulating the upward movement of the driven sliding member 430 while being axially supported on the second shaft support portion 416 mainly comprises a.

  The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450 and is formed with an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In this embodiment, when the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, the opening on the front side of the guide rod support portion 412 is closed, and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support portion 412.

  The locking portion 413 is a portion that vertically contacts the lower side surface of the fall preventing portion 435 of the driven side slide member 430, and the driven side slide member 430 is further lowered from the contact state. To regulate.

  The descending restricting member 415 and the ascending restricting member 417 are members that rotate as the drive-side slide member 420 moves up and down and have a role of restricting the movement of the driven-side slide member 430, and will be described in detail later.

  The drive-side slide member 420 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 at both left and right ends, and is moved up and down by a slide operation of the rack 452.

  The driven-side slide member 430 does not have an independent driving device, and is supported by the guide rods 451 so that the left and right ends can slide. In addition, the driven-side slide member 430 moves up and down following the up-and-down operation of the drive-side slide member 420. The driven-side slide member 430 includes a main body member 431 that has the third symbol display device 81 and is elongated in the left-right direction, a function unit 432 that is disposed at both ends of the main body member 431 in the left-right direction, and a function unit thereof A guide hole 433 which is a hole drilled in the vertical direction in 432 and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and a hook-like part 434 which is extended and inclined in the laterally outward direction at the lower end of the functional part 432, The fall prevention part 435 extended mainly in the back side inside the guide hole 433 of the upper end part of the function part 432 (side adjacent to the other guide hole 433) is mainly provided.

  The hook-shaped portion 434 is a portion that is hooked by the rise restricting member 417. In the state where the driven side slide member 430 is disposed at the lowered position, the rise restricting member 417 wraps around and is hooked on the engagement surface 434a which is the upper side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434 (see FIG. 29), and the driven side slide. It is possible to prevent the member 430 from moving in the upward direction (for example, it is possible to prevent the member 430 from bouncing due to a drop reaction). Further, the hook-shaped portion 434 is inclined upward, and the engaging claw portion 417e of the upward restriction member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination. Therefore, the engagement between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the upward restriction member 417 causes the left-right direction. Wobble can also be suppressed.

  Note that the shape of the distal end portion of the hook-shaped portion 434 (the outer side of the distal end portion of the engaging claw portion 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the portion on the right side in FIG. 29)) is based on the movement locus of the engaging claw portion 417e. Is also shaped to fit below. Therefore, even when the engaging claw portion 417e and the hook-like portion 434 are engaged and a load is applied to each other, the lifting restricting member 417 can be rotated.

  The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 that is rotated by the drive force of the drive motor.

  The transmission device 450 includes a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, and is supported by the guide rods 451 so as to be slidable, and the drive side slide member 420 is fastened and fixed, and the drive gear 442. A rack 452 meshed from the inside (inside the pair of drive gears 442) and a vertically long plate-like contact wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the tooth base of the rack 452 to the front side are mainly provided.

  The abutting wall 453 has a role of rotating the ascending restriction member 417 to the release side and a role of moving the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442 by receiving the urging force of the ascending restriction member 417. The details will be described later. To do.

  The lower front plate member 460 is bent in such a manner that the left and right end portions are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410 and the center portion is offset by a predetermined amount on the back side compared to the left and right end portions. A main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 drilled along the left-right direction in the left half of the main body member 461 (in a manner of rising and tilting toward the outside), and extending above the main body member 461 And a cylindrical passage portion 463 whose upper end is opened to the front side.

  The guide hole 462 is a long hole through which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring storage member 423 is slidably guided.

  The cylindrical passage portion 463 is a cylindrical member through which a sphere can pass, and the second passage formation of the drive side slide member 420 is performed in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the coupling position (see FIG. 31). A sphere that passes through the member 422 and flows down passes therethrough.

  With reference to FIGS. 23 to 25, a detailed configuration of the drive side slide member 420 will be described. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive side slide member 420.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disk having a main body member 421 configured as a plate-like member elongated in the left-right direction and an effect portion 422 a configured from a circular liquid crystal. A second passage forming member 422 whose portion is fastened and fixed to the central portion of the main body member 421 from the front side, and a groove through which a sphere can pass to the left in front view from the disk portion; A wiring housing member 423 whose one end is pivotally supported at the lower left end of the forming member 422 when viewed from the front and whose other end is supported by the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460, and a second flow path forming member 422. And a connection member 424 that has a passage portion that is pivotally supported along the circumferential direction of the shaft and serves as a portion for introducing a sphere into the groove portion 422b of the second flow path forming member 422.

  The main body member 421 opens to the front side in a guide portion 421a that constitutes a part of a cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted and a portion that extends from the center portion to the left in front view. And a discharge opening 421c formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction with a size equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere at the lower left end of the groove 421b. .

  The guide portion 421a is a groove portion having an arc-shaped cross section that is open to the back side and extends in the vertical direction. The open portion is closed by a rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450, thereby guiding the guide rod. A cylindrical portion into which 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted is configured.

  The groove portion 421b is a member that forms a spherical passage in cooperation with the second passage forming member 422, and the sphere flowing down along the groove portion 421b is discharged to the back side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421c. The

  The second passage forming member 422 includes an effect portion 422a composed of a circular liquid crystal, and a shaft support portion 422b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from a disk portion disposed on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the back side, A sensor member 422c that is disposed below the shaft support portion 422b and detects the passage of the sphere, and a groove that opens to the back side with a width that allows the sphere that has passed the sensor member 422c to flow down. A shape that can accommodate the connecting member 424 between the groove portion 422d having the same shape, the guide portion 422e constituting the cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and the shaft support portion 422b and the sensor member 422c. And an accommodation recess 422f that is recessed.

  The shaft support portion 422b is a portion on which the connection member 424 is supported. In a state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the coupling position, the sphere that has flowed down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c through the connection member 424, and then passes through the passage formed by the groove portions 422d and 421b. To do.

  The wiring housing member 423 is a member that houses the wiring that is extended from the lower front member 460 and the like and connected to the effect portion 422a and the like, and is a length that is pivotally supported by the left lower end portion of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. A main body 423a that is a bar-shaped portion having a U-shaped cross section and a columnar slide shaft 423b that protrudes from the lower end of the main body 423a to the back side are mainly provided.

  The main body portion 423a is a member that stores wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and is configured in a curved shape that is convex in a direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. The Accordingly, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape in the vicinity of the pivot support position with the second passage forming member 422, and the wiring can be prevented from being bent and disconnected.

  The slide shaft 423b is a bar-like portion that is inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

  Next, the configuration of the connection member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member 424, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member 424 in the direction of arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26A, and FIG. FIG. 27 is a rear view of the connection member 424 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the connecting member 424 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is supported in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 424a. A plate-like upper side wall 424b provided, and a curved plate-like lower side wall 424c disposed opposite to the upper side wall 424b with a length equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere below the upper side wall 424b when viewed from the front. Connecting the upper side wall 424b and the lower side wall 424c to the back side and connecting cover 424d, which is covered between the upper side wall 424b and the lower side wall 424c, and is wound around and connected to the cylindrical part 424a. And a torsion spring 424e that mainly applies a downward biasing force (counterclockwise in FIG. 25B) to the member 424.

  The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases as it approaches the axis of the tubular portion 424a from the radial end portion of the tubular portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. It is a plate-like part.

  The lower wall portion 424c is a plate-like portion that is curved along an arc centering on the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and a space that allows a sphere to pass therethrough is provided between the lower wall portion 424c and the upper wall portion 424b. Arranged.

  The connection cover 424d is a plate member that suppresses spilling of a sphere passing through the connection member 424 to the back side. In addition, the open part of the connection member 424 configured on the opposite side (front side) of the connection cover 424d is closed by the bottom part of the housing recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 coming into contact with the front side. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl spills from the open part of the connection member 424. FIG.

  With reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, the operation of the connecting member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. FIG. 27 shows a downwardly inclined state in which the open portion constituted by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 faces the left-right direction, and in FIG. 28, the connection is made in comparison with the state of FIG. FIG. 27 corresponds to a separated state (see FIG. 41), which will be described later, and FIG. 28 corresponds to a separated state (see FIG. 41), in which an open portion constituted by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the member 424 faces obliquely upward. This corresponds to a communication state (see FIG. 42) described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connection member 424 can rotate around the shaft support portion 422b while being accommodated in the accommodation recess 422f of the second passage formation member 422. The front side end surfaces of the upper side wall part 424b and the lower side wall part 424c are brought into contact with the bottom part of the housing recess 422f.

  In the state shown in FIG. 27, the housing recess 422f is formed in an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower wall portion 424c in a portion opposed to the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424. The curved wall portion 422f1 and the surface opposed to the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 in the inclined state (see FIG. 42). An opposing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface.

  Since the curved wall portion 422f1 is brought into contact with the lower wall portion 424c in the radial direction in the downwardly inclined state of the connecting member 424, the displacement of the connecting member 424 in the axial radial direction can be suppressed.

  Therefore, even if the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connection member 424 is loosened (a state where the gap is large, for example, a state where the dimension is between 0.5 mm and 1 mm), the connection member When 424 is in the downward inclined state, the posture of the connecting member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.

  On the other hand, when loosening the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connection member 424, since the operation resistance generated in the shaft support portion is reduced, the connection is made unless a load from other members occurs. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downward inclined state by the action of gravity and the biasing force of the torsion spring 424e. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the connection member 424 is maintained in the upwardly inclined state even when no load is generated from other members.

  The opposing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the sphere from the connection member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In the present embodiment, the surface facing the curved wall portion 422f1 is curved, so that the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c.

  The upward inclined state is formed in a communication state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 of the left swing unit 500 are communicated. In this state, since the lower wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball that rolls and passes through the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1, and the sensor member 422c Passing through the opening, it flows down the groove 422d.

  On the other hand, the downward inclined state is formed in a separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 of the left swing unit 500 are separated. In this state, the lower wall portion 424c extends to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower wall portion 422c and the wall surface (the sensor member 422c) of the housing recess 422f disposed to face the lower end portion. The dimension between the first wall and the wall surface extending vertically upward is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere, so that the sphere is prevented from passing through the connecting member 424 (the sphere is discharged from the lower end).

  Therefore, as described later, even when the sphere reaches the connection member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the sphere can be stopped by the connection member 424.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33, the raising and lowering operations of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 will be described. First, the positional relationship among the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 29 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. 29 and 30 show a state in which the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are disposed at the lowered position, and the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 are not shown. The transmission member 450 is visible. In FIG. 29, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 on the right side when viewed from the front are partially enlarged, and the rack immediately before the contact wall 453 and the release convex portion 417c of the raising restricting member 417 come into contact with each other. The outline of 452 is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven side slide member 430, in the lowered position, the fall prevention portion 435 is brought into contact with the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from the lower side, and the hook-like portion 434 is raised. It abuts on the regulating member 417 from above. As described above, the driven-side slide member 430 is configured to be restricted from moving in both the upper and lower directions, so that the driven-side slide member 430 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical direction at the lowered position.

  In addition, the rising restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are disposed across the guide rod 451 inserted through the guide hole 433, and these can be brought into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven side slide member 430. It is possible to suppress the portion 432 from rattling in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even if a disturbance occurs in the driven slide member 430 at the moment when it is placed at the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is struck by a player, the driven slide member 430 will rattle. And the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Further, since the vertical position of the ascending restriction member 417 and the locking portion 413 are shifted, the functional portion 432 is rattled in an oblique direction (for example, the direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the rising restriction member 417). This can be suppressed. Therefore, even if a disturbance occurs in the driven slide member 430, such as when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is struck by the player at the moment when it is placed at the lowered position, the driven slide member 430 may rattle. And the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  In addition, since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the ascending restriction member 417, the locking portion 413 is disposed at a position far from the drive side slide member 420, and the lock portion 413 is driven side slide. It is possible to make it difficult to prevent the member 420 from moving up and down. Therefore, the design freedom of the drive side slide member 420 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is disposed in front of the raising restricting member 417, and the height of formation of the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450 (the protruding length from the vicinity of the tooth base of the rack 452). Therefore, the lowering restriction member 415 and the abutting wall 453 are not in contact with each other in the rotational direction of the lowering restriction member 415. Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the ascent restriction member 417, the hook-like portion 434 and the lowering restriction member 415 do not contact in the up-down direction.

  On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a protruding plate 453a that protrudes from the upper end portion of the abutting wall 453 to the front side, and the protruding plate 453a can be brought into contact with the lowering restriction member 415 in the rotation direction.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. In FIG. 31, the drive-side slide member 420 is lifted from the lowered position and disposed at the connection position, and the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. In FIG. 31, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 on the right side when viewed from the front are partially enlarged.

  In a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the coupling position, a sphere can be introduced into the connection member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the rise restricting member 417 is a member that covers the flange-like portion 434 from the upper side before the upper end portion of the abutting wall 453 is brought into contact with the rise restricting member 417. It is possible to rotate between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the released state shown in FIG. The release state is not limited to the state of FIG. 31, and means a state in which the rise restricting member 417 is rotated from the vertically upper side of the bowl-shaped portion 434 to the posture in which the rise restricting member 417 is retracted.

  The rise restricting member 417 includes a cylindrical portion 417a that is pivotally supported by the second pivotal support portion 416, an extension plate 417b that extends linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 417a, and one of the extension plates 417b. A release protrusion 417c that protrudes vertically from the end (lower end), an engagement protrusion 417d that protrudes vertically from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and the engagement protrusion In the engaged end portion of 417d, the engagement portion extends in parallel with the extending direction of the hook-like portion 434 and is disposed above and inward of the tip end portion of the hook-like portion 434 (upper left of the enlarged view of FIG. 29). A claw portion 417e, a separation inclined portion 417f that is inclined downward on the upper side surface of the protruding end portion of the engaging convex portion 417d, and one end portion of the cylindrical member 417a are wound around the main body member 411 of the base member 410. The rise restricting member 417 is wound inward by being locked. Mainly it includes a spring 417g torsion biasing (Figure 29 enlarged view counterclockwise direction), the.

  The extending plate 417b extends upward from the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. As a result, when the release convex portion 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved away from the driven slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

  In the engaged state, the engaging claw portion 417e engages with the hook-shaped portion 434 even when the driven-side slide member 430 moves upward (the engaging claw portion between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the functional portion 432). 417e), the movement of the driven slide member 430 is strongly suppressed.

  The releasing operation of the rise restricting member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the abutting wall 453 is brought into contact with the release convex portion 417c, while the ascending restriction member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. From this state, when the rack 452 is moved up to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end of the abutting wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, so that the rising restricting member 417 is rotated outward (clockwise in FIG. 31). ), And the engaging convex portion 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).

  In other words, the release operation of the ascending restriction member 417 can be performed only by the ascending operation of the rack 452. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where a separate solenoid member that performs the release operation of the rise restricting member 417 is provided separately, the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) also serves as the drive device that performs the release operation of the rise restricting member 417. And the number of drive devices can be reduced (product cost can be reduced). Moreover, it can suppress that the raise control member 417 is operated carelessly.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the rise restricting member 417 is operated according to the arrangement of the rack 452, compared to the case where the rise restricting member 417 is operated by another drive source (solenoid or the like), It is possible to prevent malfunction due to the timing of the operation of the rack 452 and the rise restricting member 417 not matching each other, and when the driven side slide member 430 moves upward, the rise restricting member 417 is surely shifted to the release state. Can be made. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being lifted while the rise restricting member 417 is engaged, and an excessive load being applied to the hook-like portion 434 and the engagement convex portion 417d of the rise restricting member 417.

  Further, since the rack 452 is moved upward and the lift restricting member 417 is shifted to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 and the lower end of the driven slide member 430 are brought into contact with each other, the rack 452 continues to move upward. Only when the driven-side slide member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 are separated from each other, an engaged state (see FIG. 29) is configured to prevent rattling of the driven-side slide member 430, while the driven-side slide In a state where the member 430 and the driving side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, a release state (see FIG. 31) is formed, and a driving force necessary for raising the driven side sliding member 430 can be suppressed.

  Here, as in the present embodiment, when the drive-side slide member 420 pushes up the driven-side slide member 430 during the ascending operation of the drive-side slide member 420, the driven-side slide member 430 and the engagement portion are released. Can be performed by pushing up the driven slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to establish an engagement state that can be released by the pushing force of the driven slide member 430, and it is difficult to perform strong engagement. It becomes. Also, in this case, there is a problem that the driven slide member 430 vibrates due to the reaction that occurs when the driven slide member 430 and the engaging portion are released, and the posture becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engagement is released by rotating the ascent restricting member 417 and retracting the ascent restricting member 417 from above the hook-like portion 434 of the driven slide member 430. The force that can be applied to the driven side slide member 430 and the force that rotates the ascending restriction member 417 can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force that suppresses the upward movement of the driven-side slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force necessary for release.

  In addition, since the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 do not come into contact with each other when the lifting restricting member 417 is released, the driven side slide member 430 is less likely to react, and the driven side slide member 430 is released. Can stabilize the posture.

  In the connected state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive side slide member 420 and the cylindrical passage portion 463 of the lower front plate member 460 are communicated with each other. As a result, the sphere that has flowed down the second passage forming member 422 can be discharged to the cylindrical passage portion 463.

  32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. FIG. 32 illustrates a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is lifted from the state illustrated in FIG. 31 and the projecting plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is coming into contact with the descending restriction member 415. In FIG. 32, the drive side slide member 420 is lifted from the state shown in FIG. 32, and the state where the convex plate 453a is disposed at the lifted position on the upper side of the drop restricting member 415 is illustrated. In FIG. 33, the vicinity of the lowering restriction member 415 is partially enlarged.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417 c of the rise restricting member 417 is brought into contact with the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 are arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction, and the direction in which the release convex portion 417c contacts the contact wall 453 is also left-right symmetrical. Therefore, the release convex portion 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive side slide member 420, and it is possible to suppress the drive side slide member 420 from rattling in the left-right direction during the raising / lowering operation.

  Since the rise restricting member 417 is urged in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 by the torsion spring 417g, a load in the left / right inward direction of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c. It can be applied. As a result, the drive side slide member 420 is urged in a certain direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the drive side slide member 420 during the raising / lowering operation can be stabilized.

  Further, when the driving-side slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c is a mode in which the driving-side slide member 420 is returned to the center position, The rise restricting member 417 is asymmetric in the left-right direction.

  That is, on the side where the abutment wall 453 moves in the direction approaching the release convex portion 417c, the rise restricting member 417 is further rotated to the release side, whereby the deformation amount of the torsion spring 417g is increased and the biasing force is increased. While the force to push back the contact wall 453 increases, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated in the direction opposite to the release side on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release convex portion 417c, whereby the torsion spring 417g. The amount of deformation is reduced, the urging force is reduced, and the force pushing the contact wall 453 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.

  Since the drive gear 442 and the rise restricting member 417 are disposed on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the urging force of the torsion spring 417g acts in a direction to separate the rack 452 from the drive gear 442, so that the drive side slide member 420 is It is possible to prevent the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 from approaching each other in the left-right direction and increase the drive resistance (the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

  That is, when the drive-side slide member 420 rattles in the left-right direction and the rack 452 moves in the direction approaching the drive gear 442, the ascending restriction member 417 is wound outward (the engagement convex portion 417d is the left-right outer side of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400). , The amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased, and the biasing force is increased to increase the biasing force to push back the drive side slide member 420, while the rack 452 is driven. When moving in a direction away from the gear 442, the guide bar 451 supports the rack 452, so that the rack 452 is separated from the drive gear 442 more than the gap provided in the support structure between the guide bar 451 and the rack 452. Is regulated. As a result, the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is narrowed, and it is possible to prevent the meshing resistance from becoming excessive, and the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is widened, resulting in tooth misalignment. This can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged at the raised position, the lower side surface of the projection plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is the release projection 415c of the lowering restriction member 415. Abuts the upper side (locked state).

  The projecting plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 that is inclined upward toward the left and right outer sides on the lower side surface.

  The descending inclined member 415 includes a cylindrical portion 415a that is pivotally supported by the first pivotal support portion 414, an extension plate 415b that extends linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and one of the extension plates 415b. A release convex portion 415c that is vertically projected from the end portion (upper end portion) and has a tip formed in a semicircular shape, and one end portion is engaged with the main body member 411 of the base member 410 while being wound around the cylindrical portion 415a. A torsion spring 415d that mainly biases the lowering restricting member 415 in the inner winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) when stopped.

  As illustrated in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering restriction member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held in the raised position, and the power consumption of the drive motor 441 can be reduced.

  Also, the rotation operation of the lowering restricting member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed when the rack 452 is raised and the protruding plate 453a gets over the release protruding portion 415c of the lowering restricting member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the lowering restricting member 415 can be generated by the driving motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can also be used, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Returning to FIG. 30, the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the lowering restricting member 415, the raising restricting member 417, and the contact wall 453 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 30) compared to the raising restricting member 417, and the abutting wall 453 can abut on the ascending restricting member 417 in the direction perpendicular to FIG. The lower side surface of the lowering restricting member 415 can come into contact with the front side surface of the contact wall 453.

  Returning to FIG. The lowering restriction member 415 and the contact wall 453 are contacted in the front-rear direction. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the abutting wall 453 and the rise restricting member 417 are abutted in the left-right direction (left and right direction in FIG. 33), and the abutting wall 453 and the descending restricting member 415 are in the front-rear direction (FIG. 33 paper surface). In the vertical direction). As a result, rattling of the drive-side slide member 420 in the left-right direction can be suppressed by the rise restricting member 417, and the front-rear direction (direction parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442) can be prevented by the drop restricting member 415. Shaking can be suppressed.

  Therefore, the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be prevented from relatively reducing the area of the meshing surface due to the relative movement in the direction parallel to the tooth surface, and the rack 452 can be tilted forward in a state where the rack 452 is disposed at the raised position. Can be prevented.

  When the rack 452 is lowered by rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction in which the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the convex plate 453a applies a load to the release convex portion 415c, whereby the lowering restriction member 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 33). As a result, the locking by the lowering restriction member 415 is released, and the driving side slide member 420 can be lowered. That is, the release by the lowering restricting member 415 can be released by the driving force of the driving motor 441 (can also be used as a driving source), so that the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the lowering restricting member 415 is unlocked by the lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420, the operation timing is shifted and the lowering restriction is controlled as when the lowering restricting member 415 is rotated by another drive source. It is possible to prevent the drive-side slide member 420 from being lowered before the restriction of the member 415 is released, so that an overload is generated in the drive source and the lowering restriction member 415.

  In the structure in which both the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are maintained at the raised position in the raised position as in this embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 is locked at the raised position of each member. However, in this case, the structure for connecting and separating the driven-side slide member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 becomes complicated and the cost increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 is held in the raised position by locking the driven side slide member 420, and therefore the driven side slide member 430 and the driven side slide member 420 are maintained in the raised position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the configuration required for this purpose (only the driving device 450 and the driving side slide member 420 can be provided). Further, the interlocking of the driven side slide member 430 with the drive side slide member 420 is based on the action of gravity, thereby simplifying the structure between the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420. it can.

  When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven-side slide member 430 descends on the rack 452, but the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. 22) become dirty, for example, because the guide rod 451 becomes dirty. ) Is large, the descending speed of the driven slide member 430 may be smaller than the descending speed of the rack 452. Even in this case, when the driven-side slide member 430 comes into contact with the rise restricting member 417, the hook-like portion 434 acts on the separation inclined portion 417f of the rise restricting member 417, so that the rise restricting member 417 can be rotated. The rising restriction member 417 and the hook-shaped portion 434 can be engaged by the own weight of the driven side slide member 430.

  Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swing unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the first variable winning device 82a and the first specific winning port 82 of the game board 13, and the balls that have won the first specific winning port 82 are displayed. A flow path is provided on the inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b that detects that a ball has passed between the first variable winning device 82a and the first specific winning port 82 is disposed. The sensor member 82b is a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

  FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swing unit 500 is configured in such a manner that the first passage forming member 520 is hung downward and to the right when viewed from the front, and is a unit that produces effects by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 that forms a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 that is pivotally supported by the base member 510, and a base. A driving device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 and generates a driving force of the first passage forming member 520; a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520; And a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the first specific winning port 82 of the game board 13.

  The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 formed of a L-shaped plate body in front view, a shaft support hole 512 formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right end portion in front view of the main body member, and the shaft support. A first wall portion 513 that is disposed vertically above the hole 512 and has a planar plate shape with its surface facing in the front-rear direction, and one or more spheres leftward from the lower left end of the first wall portion 513 in front view. A second wall portion 514 configured in a curved plate shape that is disposed with a space therebetween and directs the surface in the left-right direction, and a sphere that is disposed on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514 A downflow passage 515 that flows down, a shaft support portion 516 that is disposed in the lower left side of the shaft support hole 512 in front view and protrudes in a columnar shape on the front side, and a latch that is disposed around the shaft of the shaft support portion 516. A wall 517 and a detection sensor 518 disposed above the shaft support 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device; To prepare for.

  The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted, and the first passage forming member 520 is swung around the shaft support hole 512.

  The 1st wall part 513 is provided with a pair of guide wall part 513a extended from the left-right direction both ends to the front side.

  The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517a having an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517b extending to the lower right in front view. .

  The arc wall portion 517 a is an end surface of the detection sensor 518 and extends to a circumferential end surface of the shaft support portion 516.

  The first passage forming member 520 is a long rod-shaped distribution base member 521 that is a member supported by the shaft support hole 512, and is disposed on the front side of the distribution base member 521. And a passage cover member 522 that is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which a sphere can flow down between the base member 521 and the sorting base member 521.

  The distribution base member 521 has a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a that constitutes one side of the flow path of the sphere, and one sphere along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b disposed at a position separated by a gap V1 and a shaft support portion 521c that protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and is inserted through the shaft support hole 512. A long hole 521d formed in a plate-like portion extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c along the extending direction, and a rear side from an end portion on the hanging plate portion 521a side of the intermediate plate portion 521b. And the gap V1 along the left side surface of the distribution convex portion 521e as viewed from the rear side, and a distribution convex portion 521e configured such that the width decreases toward the radially outer side of the shaft support portion 521c. The upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a that extends to the front side Mainly and a curved wall portion 521f which is curved along the arc shape having a center.

  The drooping plate portion 521a has a shape in which the lower side from the middle portion is bent downward as compared with the upper side from the middle portion, and the front plate thickness portion is scraped and thinned at the lower end portion of the ball feeding portion. 521a1 is provided.

  The gap V1 is a space through which a sphere that has reached the right side of the front surface of the distribution convex portion 521e passes in the front direction.

  The passage cover member 522 extends in the form of a plate from the plate-like plate-like portion 522a that covers the front side of the sorting base member 521, and from both ends in the short-side direction of the plate-like portion 522a toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 522b are mainly provided.

  The plate-like portion 522a is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and a ball receiving portion 522a1 bent at the back side in a portion disposed on the front side of the ball feeding portion 521a1 of the sorting base member 521 at the lower end thereof. Prepare.

  The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions for rolling the sphere that has passed through the gap V1, and the inclination angle changes at the intermediate portion as in the case of the hanging plate portion 521a. Therefore, the flow velocity of the sphere can be changed at the intermediate portion. it can.

  A step is provided on the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b inside the tip portion. The step has a role of decelerating the sphere by displacing the rolling sphere in a direction facing the upper and lower wall portions 522b (a direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion).

  Further, the sphere that has reached the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed toward the back side by the ball feeding portion 521a1 and the ball receiving portion 522a1. Thereby, the speed of the sphere before discharge can be reduced, and the discharge of the sphere can be stabilized.

  The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the drive gear 532 is engaged with the main body gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

  The transmission device 540 includes a main body gear portion 541 that is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 516 and meshed with the drive gear 532, and a first passage forming member that protrudes in a columnar shape from the eccentric position of the main body gear portion 541 to the front side. An eccentric convex portion 542 inserted into the long hole 521d of 520, a radial extension extending from the main body gear portion 541, and a contact with the locking wall portion 517 are possible, and the gap between the detection sensors 518 can be passed. Extending portion 543 mainly.

  The cover member 550 is connected to the plate-shaped main body member 551 that covers the base member 510 and the first specific winning opening 82 at the right end of the main body member 551 when viewed from the front, and the rear side end is the first. A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 that comes into contact with the wall portion 513, and a pair of guide wall portions 553 that extend downward from the left and right end portions of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the back side surface of the main body member 551. Prepare mainly.

  The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps with the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The sphere that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 flows down between the guide wall portions 513a and 553.

  With reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described. 38 to 40 are front views of the swing operation unit 500. FIG. 38 to 40, the illustration of the cover member 550 is omitted, the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 viewed in cross-section at the middle position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is shown, and the passage cover member The outer shape is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  38, the state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position is shown in FIG. 39A. In FIG. 39A, the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. In the state where the minute convex portion 521e is disposed at the intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a, in FIG. 39 (b), the first passage forming member 520 swings a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). FIG. 40 shows a state immediately before contacting the connecting member 424, and FIG. 40 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. The

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 occurs when the transmission device 540 is rotated and the position of the long hole 521d is moved along with the movement of the eccentric convex portion 542.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the long hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect perpendicularly. To do. Therefore, since the load given to the eccentric convex part 542 is directed to the shaft support part 516 when the first passage forming member 520 starts to rotate, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load that rotates the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the attitude of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying a driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  Further, at the release position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is disposed in the gap of the detection sensor 518 and is in contact with the end portion of the arc wall portion 517a. That is, the extending portion 543 has both a role as a portion used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a rotation preventing member.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the left side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and is discharged out of the game area through the flow-down passage 515. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510 at an intermediate position between the release position and the connection position. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped by the distribution convex portion 521e (it remains on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).

  As shown in FIG. 39B, the distribution convex portion 521 e is disposed between the pair of guide wall portions 513 a of the base member 510 in a state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 contacts the connection member 424. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped by the distribution convex portion 521e (while remaining on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e, stay). Thereby, in the state of FIG. 39B, the sphere passes through the first passage forming member 520, is sent to the connecting member 424, and the sphere is prevented from reaching the opposing wall portion 422f2.

  Here, since the opposing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 in the upward inclined state (see FIG. 42), the upper end portion is connected to the connecting member 424 in the downward inclined state (see FIG. 41). It is set as the aspect which protrudes from the lower end part of the upper side wall part 424b to front view left side. Therefore, when the sphere is sent to the connection member 424 in the downward inclined state and the sphere collides with the upper end portion of the opposing wall portion 422f2, the opposing wall portion 422f2 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39 (b), since the introduction of the sphere into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, it is possible to prevent the sphere from colliding with the opposing wall portion 422f2. It is possible to prevent the opposing wall portion 422f2 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 40, at the connecting position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the long hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect perpendicularly. To do. Therefore, since the load given to the eccentric convex part 542 is directed to the shaft support part 516 when the first passage forming member 520 starts to rotate, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load that rotates the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the attitude of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying a driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  In addition, the extended portion 543 of the transmission device 540 comes into contact with the inclined wall portion 517b at the coupling position. Thus, the extension portion 543 is compared with a case where a load is locally applied to the extension portion 543 while stabilizing the phase of stopping the transmission device 540 by abutting the extension portion 543 against the inclined wall portion 517b. The durability of 543 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that reaches the first wall portion 513 and passes between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the right side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and moves to the front side through the gap V1. Rolling along the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (see FIG. 37) of the passage cover member 522.

  The flow of the sphere in the connected state will be described. First, the ball that has won the first specific prize opening 82 through the first variable prize-winning device 82a from the game area moves back and forth through the introduction cylindrical part 552 (see FIG. 36) toward the back side, and the first wall part When contacted with 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide wall portions 513a and 553, moves back and forth toward the front side through the gap V1 of the first passage forming member 520, and the upper and lower wall portions of the passage cover member 522 Roll over the lower wall of 522b.

  That is, before the sphere flows down inside the first passage forming member 520, the sphere is sent in the front-rear direction. For this reason, even if the balls are supplied to the first specific winning opening 82 in a daisy chain, the balls can be smoothly flowed into the first passage forming member 520 by suppressing the balls from jumping. Further, the direction of the speed of the sphere can be changed by flowing down the sphere sent in the front-rear direction along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), and the sphere smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520. Can be made.

  As for the 1st channel | path formation member 520, the extending direction changes the boundary base member 521 and the channel | path cover member 522 on the boundary of an intermediate part. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the intermediate portion to the proximal end side (the shaft support portion 521c side), and from the intermediate portion to the distal end side (the opposite side of the proximal end side). Is extended along a straight line Y2 inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

  Therefore, the speed of the sphere rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower when it reaches the intermediate portion from the base end side than when it moves from the intermediate portion toward the distal end portion. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

  Further, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is configured in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the direction in which the ball is sent from the first passage forming member 520 at the connection position (see FIG. 42) The angle with the direction (vertical direction) in which the sphere is introduced into the sensor member 422c can be reduced. Thereby, ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the first passage forming member 520 is swung by the rotation of the transmission device 540, and the path through which the sphere flows down is switched by the arrangement of the distribution convex portions 521e.

  Here, when a wall member disposed opposite to the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed, the distribution convex portion 521e approaches the wall member to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. When the configuration is adopted, when the sphere stays in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the sphere is caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, which may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position illustrated in FIG. 40, an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution convex portion 521e and the second wall portion 514, and the distribution convex portion. A wall member is not disposed on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 across the 521e and is opened. Therefore, a situation in which the ball is bitten in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and malfunction can be prevented.

  With reference to FIG.41 and FIG.42, the connection of the flow path of the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 is demonstrated. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500. FIG. 41 and 42, the second passage forming member 422 is viewed in cross section so that the connection member 424 is visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The distribution convex part 521e shown in figure is visible.

  41 and 42 show a state in which the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 31), and in FIG. 41, the left swing unit 500 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 38). FIG. 42 shows a state in which the left swing unit 500 is disposed at the coupling position (see FIG. 40).

  When the first passage forming member 520 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the distal end of the first passage forming member 520 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, Rock. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, for example, even if the stop position of the driving side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from the ideal position, It is possible to suppress the generation of a gap between the tip of the passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the sphere from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424, and to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. Can do.

  As the connecting member 424 is swung, the lower wall portion 424c on which the sphere flowing down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in a direction approaching the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the sphere is prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. This makes it possible to stabilize ball feeding.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower side wall 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicated with the groove 422d (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the sphere can be rolled along its descending slope, and the sphere can be sent to the second passage forming member 422 in a stable manner.

  The swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting the passage of the sphere of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) or the sensor member 422c. For example, in the state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the coupling position shown in FIG. 42, the number of detected balls of the sensor member 82b and the sensor member 422c matches (the sphere remains on the first passage forming member 520). The first passage forming member 520 starts swinging toward the release position (see FIG. 41) at the timing, thereby preventing the ball from being discharged out of the game area from the tip of the first passage forming member 520. can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, balls are distributed by the movement of the distribution convex portion 521e, and the first passage forming member 520 is swung so that the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 are brought into contact with each other. The driving force necessary for the contact and the operation of forming the flow path of the sphere is also used (covered by the driving force of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) that operates the first passage forming member 520). Since the states are synchronized, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation where a sphere is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged out of the game area from the tip of the first passage forming member 520.

  The distribution convex portion 521e is disposed on the upper end portion of the distribution base member 521, and defines a wall path of a sphere that flows down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36) (forms an upper end). Doubles as As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts compared to the case where the other parts are distributed, and to ensure that the balls distributed to the first passage forming member 520 side are suspended from the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member. 522 can be introduced into the passage between the two.

  Next, the rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 77. 43 is a front view of the rotation unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit 600. 45 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotation unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in a container shape with one side opened, a guide member 620 covered on one side of the case member 610, and the cases. A driving mechanism 630 disposed between the member 610 and the guide member 620 facing each other, a rotating member 640 rotated by the driving force of the driving mechanism 630, and a pitching disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640 The apparatus 650 mainly includes a guide member 680 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640.

  The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front surface. It is formed in a container shape whose side is open. The guide member 620 is formed in a disc shape with an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed (adhered) to the standing tip of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. Thus, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the internal space.

  The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotating member 640 so as to be displaceable, and a connection link action groove 621 and an undulating link action groove 622 are recessed in the front surface thereof. The connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section extending along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connection link member 644 and the undulation link, which will be described later, of the rotation member 640. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are respectively inserted.

  In addition, the groove widths of the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are set to dimensions that are equal to or slightly larger than the diameters of the insertion portions 644 a and 648 a of the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link operating groove 621 and the undulating link operating groove 622.

  When the rotation member 640 is driven to rotate, the connection link operation groove 621 acts on the connection link member 644 to increase or decrease the interval between the divided members DV (see FIG. 73), while the undulation link operation groove 622 It acts on the undulating link member 648 to undulate the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, with reference to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described.

  49 is a front view of the rotation unit 600 in a state where the rotation member 640, a part of the pitching device 650, and the guide member 680 are removed, and FIG. 50 is a schematic front view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Such a two-dot chain line is illustrated as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each working groove 621, 622.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link working groove 621 has a large-diameter portion 621a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R1 around the axis O, and an arc shape with a radius R2 around the axis O. And a pair of connecting portions 621c that connect the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to be larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).

  The undulating link working groove 622 includes a large-diameter portion 622a that is curved in an arc shape with a radius R3 around the axis O, a small-diameter portion 622b that is curved in an arc shape with a radius R4 around the axis O, and these large-diameter portions. It consists of a pair of connection part 622c which connects between 622a and the small diameter part 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to be larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).

  In the present embodiment, the large-diameter portion 621a and the small-diameter portion 621b of the connecting link working groove 621 and the large-diameter portion 622a and the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link working groove 622 are arranged concentrically about the axis O. In this case, the axis O coincides with the rotation center when the rotating member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the large diameter portions 621a and 622a and the small diameter portions 622a and 622b of the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 act on the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648, respectively. By suppressing the force, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Further, the pair of connection portions 621c of the connection link action groove 621 are arranged at positions that are different in phase by 180 degrees. Similarly, the pair of connecting portions 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions that are different in phase by 180 degrees. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, a force that is applied to the connecting link member 644 from one connecting portion 621c of the connecting link operating groove 621 and a force that is applied to the connecting link member 644 from the other connecting portion 621c. Can be offset. Similarly, the force applied to the undulation link member 648 from one connection portion 622c of the undulation link operation groove 622 can be canceled out from the force applied to the undulation link member 648 from the other connection portion 622c. Thereby, since the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. .

  In this embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link working groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link working groove 622 are formed to have different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion of the undulation link operation groove 622. When the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted into the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into one of the portions 622b. The working groove 621 is inserted into either the large diameter part 621a or the small diameter part 621b.

  Since the connection portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the interval of the divided member DV or displacing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, the insertion portion receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portions 621c and 622c. By preventing the 644a and 648a from being inserted through the connecting portions 621c and 622c at the same time, the necessary driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the drive mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for rotationally driving the rotary member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a leading gear (first gear) to the pinion gear 632. A central transmission body 634 having a transmission gear train meshed with the transmission gear 633a), a gear 634a meshed with the last gear (second transmission gear 633b) of the transmission gear train, and the central transmission member 634 The one side distribution gear train and the other side distribution gear train in which the leading gear (first distribution gears 635a, 636a) meshes with the gear 634a, and the last gear (first gear of the one side distribution gear train and the other side gear train). 3 side distribution drive gears 635c, 636c) are mainly provided with one side rotation drive member 637 and other side rotation drive member 638 having gears 637a, 638a meshed with each other. The second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

  The one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are members that become the end of the transmission path (the output end in the drive mechanism 630) that transmits the rotation drive force generated from the drive motor 631. While rotating itself by the rotational driving force, the rotating member 640 is rotated by the rotation. Here, the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 51A is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51B is a one-side rotation member 637 and the others on the LIb-LIb line in FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a side rotation member 638. FIG.

  Since the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 are members formed in the same shape, only the one side rotation driving member 637 will be described, and the other side rotation driving member 638 will be described. Only the code | symbol is attached | subjected in the figure of FIG. 51, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed in a disc shape, and engagement portions 637b are recessed in a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. It is formed.

  The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) in the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and has a width (interval between opposing surfaces) from the open side toward the recessed back side. ) Is narrowed in a front view (a view in the axial direction). As will be described later, by rotating the one-side rotation driving member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotating member 640 through the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotating member 640 is thereby transmitted. Can be rotated.

  The one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed with a connecting wall 637c that partially connects the opposing inner surfaces of the engaging portion 637b. The connecting wall 637c is formed in a shape that curves in an arc shape when viewed from the front (axial view) around the axis of the one-side rotation drive member 637, and at the open side (one-side rotation drive member 637) of the engaging portion 637b. Only the inner surfaces on the outer edge side) are connected to each other, and the inner surfaces on the back side of the recessed portion of the engaging portion 637b are not connected.

  Here, when the rotation member 640 is driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637, engagement and release of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one side rotation drive member 637 increases, a large output is required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, the reinforcement against the impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to be engaged. And weight reduction can be achieved effectively. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

  Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed on the case member 610 except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the center transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back side of the guide member 620. Here, a structure for holding the central transmission member 634 to the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 cut along a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the center transmission body 634 is formed in a hat shape having a circular shape when viewed from the front and having a recessed central portion, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the recessed portion at the center, and the outermost edge. A protruding portion 634b is formed to protrude in a flange shape outward in the radial direction from the portion.

  On the back side of the guide member 620, a pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIG. 47 and FIG. 48) are overlapped at three positions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction (that is, at positions that are 120 degrees apart). The protruding portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 facing each other. Thereby, the center transmission member 634 can be rotatably held by the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

  That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52) relative to the guide member 620 can be restricted by bringing the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the axial direction (left-right direction in FIG. 52) relative to the guide member 620 is restricted by bringing the protruding portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 into contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. it can.

  In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634). Therefore, the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634 can be in a circumscribed relationship (that is, in point contact) with each other. Thus, the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Further, the structure in which the outer edge side (the overhanging portion 634b) of the central transmission member 634 is held in this manner allows the recessed portion at the center of the central transmission member 634 to be pivoted to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. There is no need to support the space, and a space for disposing the components for the shaft support becomes unnecessary. Therefore, a space for disposing the pitching device 650 to be described later can be secured.

  Next, the operation of the drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and shows a state in which the central transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the drive mechanism 630, a central transmission member 634 is disposed at a position concentric with the axis O that is the rotation center of the rotation member 640, and the second transmission is transmitted to the gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged in a meshed state. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are disposed at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees (that is, positions facing each other with the axis O interposed therebetween).

  Therefore, when the drive motor 631 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and with the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b, The central transmission member 634 is rotated.

  When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are rotated in accordance with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotation is caused by the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution gear. The gears 635c and 636c are transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638, and the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 rotate. Is done.

  Thus, since the central transmission gear 634 is engaged with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a, the central transmission gear 634 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, thereby the one-side rotational drive member. 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the driving of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is disposed concentrically with the axis O of the rotation member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one side and other side rotation drive members 637, 638 are viewed in the direction of the axis O. 2, the rotating member 640 can be disposed on the inner side (axial center O direction side) than the outer edge portion. That is, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation drive members 637 and 638 are not protruded outward from the outer shape of the rotation member 640, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

  In the state where the guide member 620 is disposed on the case member 610, the engagement portions 637b of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are arranged radially outward from the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engaging portions 637b and 638b and the engaged portion 641. Thus, the rotating member 640 can be rotated.

  In this case, the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are different in phase by 180 degrees (that is, positions that face each other with the axis O interposed therebetween). Therefore, as will be described later, the position where the driving force is applied to the rotating member 640 (the engaging position) can be separated as much as possible, and the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  Further, the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 are arranged in postures (rotational positions) in which phases of the engaging portion 637b and the engaging portion 638b are different from each other. That is, when one of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is not engaged with the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. (One and the other are prevented from being disengaged at the same time). Therefore, as will be described later, the transmission of the driving force from the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 to the rotation member 640 can be suppressed, and the rotation of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.

  Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. As described above, the rotating member 640 is an annular member that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotating mechanism 630, and has a posture concentric with the central transmission member 634 and the guiding member 620. It is arrange | positioned at the front side. In the present embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60.

  54 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 as seen in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality (30 in this embodiment) of divided members DV, and the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly along the circumferential direction. By this, it is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front.

  In this case, the plurality of divided members DV are formed such that the distance between the adjacent divided members DV can be changed. That is, the rotating member 640 includes a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a second interval in which the divided members DV are narrower than the first interval. The second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed. In addition, between the 1st area S1 and 2nd area S2, the space | interval of the division members DV changes from the 1st space | interval in these 1st areas S1 to the 2nd space | interval (or the reverse) in 2nd area S2. A section to be formed is formed.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a front perspective view of the divided member DV, and FIG. 56 (b) is a rear perspective view of the divided member DV. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the divided member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the divided member DV. 56 to 58, the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent divided member DV is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to understand the connecting structure of the divided members DV.

  Here, in this embodiment, a part to be detected 641c is formed on a part (15 in this embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV The formation of the detected part 641c is omitted. The other parts of the divided member DV in which the detected part 641c is formed and the divided member DV in which the formation of the detected part 641c is omitted are the same except for the presence or absence of the detected part 641c. Therefore, in the following, the divided member DV where the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the divided member DV where the formation of the detected portion 641c will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the divided member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a back side main body 642 in which the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the back side, and a front side of the back side main body 642. A front side main body 643 disposed on the front side, a connecting link member 644 whose base end is rotatably supported between the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and a front side of the front side main body 643. The plate holding member 645, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 that are displaceably held by the plate holding member 645, and the front side main body 643 and the plate holding member 645 are slidably disposed. An undulating link member 648 is mainly provided.

  As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that is engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotary drive members 637 and 638 of the drive mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape in front view. The rear side main body 642 is disposed in a posture protruding from the rear side on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 56B).

  On the attachment surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the back side main body 642, a facing portion 641a facing the back surface of the back side main body 642 with a predetermined interval is formed. The facing portion 641a and the back side body The outer edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the surfaces facing the 642. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the floating of the divided member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.

  In addition, a pair of sliding rollers 641b formed in a columnar shape are rotatably supported on the attachment surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the back side main body 642. The sliding roller 641b has its rotational axis orthogonal to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV) and its outer peripheral surface can contact the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. Arranged in posture. Thereby, the sliding resistance when the division member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a plate-like detected portion 641c is formed on the opposite side of the surface of the engaged portion 641 that is attached to the back side main body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-like portion detected by the detection sensor 684 disposed on the guide member 680, and has a horizontal posture on the back surface of the back-side body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV). The

  The back side main body 642 is a part that is placed on the front surface of the guide member 620 and slides on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 rotates, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in front view. In a state where the rotation member 640 is disposed on the guide member 620, the back side main body 642 is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each back side main body 642 is arranged in a radial straight line centered on the axis O (see FIG. 54).

  The back-side main body 642 has a connecting link opening 642a and a undulating link opening 642b, which are groove-like openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, on the front side on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 57). A shaft support portion 642c that is formed and supports the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between the front side main body 643 (shaft support portion 643b) and a bent portion that protrudes from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 58). 642d.

  The connection link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is slidably inserted. By the insertion of the insertion portion 644a into the connection link opening 642a, the division member The DV can be connected to the adjacent divided member DV via the connecting link member 644. Further, the connecting link member 644 causes the tip of the insertion portion 644 a inserted through the connecting link opening 642 a to be inserted into the connecting link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620.

  The opening width of the connecting link opening 642a is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connection link opening 642a.

  When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a is connected to the connection link opening 642a. , The posture of the connecting link member 644 can be allowed to change with the action from the connecting link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connecting link member 644 with respect to the back side main body 642 can be generated, and the interval between the divided members DV can be increased or decreased.

  The undulation link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is slidably inserted. The undulation link member 648 guides the distal end of the insertion portion 648a inserted into the undulation link opening 642b as a guide member. The undulation link action groove 622 of 620 is inserted.

  The opening width of the undulating link opening 642b is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link 648 can be slid (guided) along the extending direction of the undulation link opening 642b.

  When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is acted on by the undulation link action groove 622 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a is moved to the undulation link opening 642b. The display board 646 and the partition board 647 can be undulated by being slid along.

  As described above, the shaft support portion 642c is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (the lower side in FIG. 57), so that the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is viewed from the front side with the engaged portion 641. It can be pivotally supported at the overlapping position. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotation driving members 637 and 638, and the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement is adjacent. It can be easily transmitted to the divided member DV to be transmitted through the connecting link member 644.

  The bent portion 642d protrudes from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (upper side in FIG. 58), and the protruding tip is opposed to the back surface of the back side main body 642 with a predetermined interval. The inner edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the facing surface of the rear-side main body 642 and the bent portion of the projecting tip. Thereby, the floating of the division member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620 can be suppressed.

  Further, the bent portion 642d is disposed in such a posture that the base portion thereof can be brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge portion of the guide member 620, and the facing interval between the base portion of the bent portion 642d and the above-described sliding roller 641b is as follows. The guide member 620 is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the radial width. Thereby, since the displacement of the dividing member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be regulated, the main body member DV (back side main body 642) is kept in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Thus, the guide member 620 can be displaced in the circumferential direction.

  The front-side main body 643 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape having a substantially the same size as the back-side main body 642, and is a undulation that is a groove-like opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A link slide groove 643a, and a shaft support portion 643b that is formed on the back surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 58) and supports the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between the back side main body 642 (the shaft support portion 642c). And a support plate 643c that protrudes from the front and supports the partition plate 647 in a rotatable manner.

  The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably disposed, and extends in parallel with the undulating link opening 642b. That is, the undulating link member 648 is slid along the undulating link slide groove 643a, thereby sliding the insertion portion 648a along the undulating link opening 642b.

  The back-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643 have a width dimension on the other side in the longitudinal direction smaller than a width dimension on the one side in the longitudinal direction in a front view. In other words, the rotary member 640 is formed in a wedge shape in a front view in which the width dimension of the portion located on the inner circumference side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion located on the outer circumference side. Therefore, the 2nd space | interval in 2nd area S2 can be made smaller, the division member DV can be adjoined, and the space required for arrangement | positioning of the rotation member 640 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, in the second section S2, the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are in contact with the adjacent back side main body 642 and front side main body 643 in the circumferential direction (see FIGS. 54 and 73). .

  The connecting link member 644 is a long member, and the base end side thereof is rotatably supported by the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and a columnar insertion portion at the tip end side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a protrudes in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connection link member 644, and, as described above, the connection link of the guide member 620 through the connection link opening 642a of the back side main body 642 in the adjacent divided member DV. The working groove 621 is inserted.

  The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be approximately the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connection link opening 642a and the connection link working groove 621. Therefore, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the positional deviation of the divided member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link 644 can be suppressed to the minimum, and the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained constant. Thereby, since the positional variation of the to-be-detected part 641c can be suppressed, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71) can be improved.

  The base end side (that is, the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of the main bodies 642 and 643) that is rotatably supported by the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 of the connection link member 644 is from the connection link opening 642a. Is also disposed at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the proximal end side of the connecting link member 644 is disposed at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in a front view (viewed in the direction of the axis O of the rotating member 640).

  As a result, the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are rotated. When the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the divided member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via the connecting link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  The undulating link member 648 is a member that is slidably held in the undulating link slide groove 643a of the front side main body 643. A cylindrical insertion portion 648a is formed on the back side, and an action groove 648b is formed on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a protrudes in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644, and as described above, the insertion portion 648a is formed in the undulation link working groove 622 of the guide member 620 through the undulation link opening 642b of the back side body 642. It is inserted.

  The action groove 648 b is a portion for acting on the actuated portion 646 d of the display plate 646 by sliding the undulating link member 648, and causing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 to undulate. It is formed in a groove shape extending linearly along the sliding direction, and an actuated portion 646d of the display plate 646 is slidably inserted between the opposing surfaces of the groove portion.

  The display plate 646 includes a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, a shaft portion 646b and a connecting shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an opposition groove 648b of the undulating link member 648. And a plate-like part 646d inserted between the surfaces. Since the actuated portion 646d is formed by bending in a substantially S shape when viewed from the front, when the undulating link member 648 is slid, the actuated portion 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement, The display plate 646 can be rotated with the shaft portion 646b as a rotation center.

  The partition plate 647 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a trapezoidal shape in front view, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b. And a shaft support portion 647c that is formed and rotatably supports the connecting shaft 646c of the display plate 646.

  Here, as described above, the rotation unit 600 is configured to simulate a roulette that rotates a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are continuously arranged in the circumferential direction and drops a pitched ball into one of the pockets. A space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 of the one divided member DV and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent divided member DV is defined as a pocket, and the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) has red Alternatively, a black color is added and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed.

  In this embodiment, one display board 646 is given a green color and a predetermined mark (star shape) is displayed. Moreover, only the display board 646 located in 1st area S1 is visually recognized by the rotation member 640 from a player. That is, the display board 646 positioned in the second section S2 is shielded by other members disposed on the front side thereof, and cannot be viewed by the player.

  The plate holding member 645 includes a shaft support portion 645a that rotatably supports the shaft portion 646b of the display plate 646, and a shaft support portion 645b that rotatably supports the shaft portion 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the shaft support by 645a and 645b.

  In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated about the shaft portion 646b as the center of rotation as the undulating link member 648 slides. Then, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated about the shaft portion 647b as a rotation center. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the divided member DV in a state arranged in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) It is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member DV in the state arrange | positioned in 2nd area S2. 59 and 60 show a state in which a part of the structure is seen through for easy understanding, and illustration of the connecting link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d is omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 59, in a state where the divided member DV is disposed in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is formed in the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) in the undulation link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid and displaced to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640, the axis O side), Accordingly, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is arranged in a horizontal posture, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is arranged in an upright posture.

  The horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface of the back-side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV), and the standing posture is the plate of the partition plate 647. The portion 647a is in a posture to be orthogonally parallel to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV).

  As shown in FIG. 60, in a state where the divided member DV is disposed in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is a large diameter portion 622a in the undulating link working groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). Is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid and displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, opposite to the axis O). Thus, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal posture toward the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647 and placed in an inclined posture, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is moved from the standing posture. The display plate 646 is tilted toward the plate portion 646a and is disposed in an inclined posture.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the display board 646 and the partition board 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support part 647c, the display board 646 is rotated by the slide displacement of the undulating link member 648. The partition plate 647 can also be rotated through the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c.

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide the undulation link action groove and the undulation link member for each of the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be shared. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, in this embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (that is, the state where the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is set in a horizontal posture and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is set in a standing posture), the rotation action due to the weight of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) is used. Thus, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.

  That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is lifted upward, it can be rotated by its own weight in a direction tilted downward, thereby forming a horizontal posture and rotating the display board 646 (self-weight). Is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, whereby the partition plate 647 can be lifted to form a standing posture. Therefore, even when rotation is hindered by adhesion of dirt or dust, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the display plate 646 is set such that the protruding length of the plate portion 646a from the shaft portion 646b is larger than the protruding length of the partition plate 647 from the shaft portion 647b of the plate portion 647a. Therefore, the center of gravity of the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the partition plate 647 can be brought close to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. 59 is formed. Can be performed more reliably and promptly by utilizing the weight of the display board 646.

  Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. The pitching device 650 is a device for pitching the ball B onto the rotating member 640, and is housed in a central recess in the central transmission member 634 of the drive mechanism 630 and disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 69.

  61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching device 650. FIG. In FIG. 62, a state in which the holding piece protruding / retracting mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651 is illustrated, and the passage member 655 is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pitching device 650 includes a case body 651 formed in a container shape with the front side open, an arm rotation mechanism 660 and a holding piece protruding and retracting disposed inside the case body 651. It mainly includes a mechanism 670, a passage member 655 disposed on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B formed in a spherical shape from a translucent material.

  The case body 651 includes a bottom wall portion 651a that is substantially circular in front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b that is erected from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a radially outer side from the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. A projecting wall portion 651c that projects in the form of a flange toward the end, and the projecting wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the guide member 620, whereby the standing end (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b. Is disposed at a position substantially matching the front surface of the rotating member 640 (the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

  A sphere holding portion 652 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. In the sphere holding portion 652, a spherical recess having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the sphere B is formed on the front surface, and the recess serves as a holding position (initial position) of the sphere B. That is, when the sphere B is disposed on the sphere holding portion 652, the sphere B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

  In this case, the pitching device 650 is arranged in a posture in which the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is positioned at the lowermost position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B becomes the outer wall portion. The inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of 651b rolls and is held on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65.

  FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is disposed at the holding position, and FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed at the separation position. It is a front view of the pitching device 660 in the state. 64 and 65 show a state where the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651, a front case 662 disposed on the front surface of the rear case 661, A crank member 663 and an arm member 664 that are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664. Prepare.

  The rear case 661 is provided with shafts 661a and 661b projecting thereon, and a crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. A gear 663a with which the pinion gear 676 is engaged is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the crank member 663, and a pin portion 663b is provided at a position eccentric from the rotation center (the shaft 661a). The arm member 664 is linearly provided with a slide groove 664a through which the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted, and has a rotational center (shaft 661b) with respect to the slide groove 664a. ), A curved portion 664b having a shape in front view obtained by dividing the annular shape in half is formed.

  Therefore, the drive motor 665 is rotationally driven in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the crank member 663 is rotated through the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is rotated. By acting on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction about the shaft 661b.

  That is, the arm member 664 has the holding position (see FIG. 64) for holding the sphere B on the sphere holding portion 652 with the bending shape of the bending portion 664b being aligned with the outer peripheral portion of the sphere holding portion 652, and holds the bending portion 664b on the sphere. It is possible to rotate (swing) between the separation position (see FIG. 65) where the sphere B is separated from the portion 652 and dropped from the sphere holding portion 652 to the inner peripheral passage 651c1.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b (a range of a central angle of about 90 degrees on the side (downward side) separated from the shaft 661b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like body that is curved along the inner peripheral surface of the bending portion 664b. A shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side of the cantilever plate 664c is rotatably supported by the bending portion 664b, and the distal end side. Is maintained in a posture lifted upward (inward in the radial direction) by the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 disposed on the back side (outer peripheral surface side).

  Therefore, in the state where the arm member 664 is disposed at the holding position, when the sphere B is held by the sphere holding portion 652, the cantilever plate 664c is pushed down around the shaft 664c1 by the weight of the sphere B, While the limit switch 667 is turned on, when the sphere B is not held by the sphere holding portion 652, the cantilever plate 664c is brought up as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the sphere B in the sphere holder 652 can be detected.

  In this case, the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the depression of the ball holding portion 652 are formed to have a size that allows the ball B to be displaced in a state where the arm member 664 is disposed at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the recess of the sphere holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when an external force (vibration) is input as the pachinko machine 10 is hit or shaken by the player, the ball B can be displaced in accordance with the input of the vibration. That is, when the ball B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced along with the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on / off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, the input of the external force to the pachinko machine 10 can be detected using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

  Returning to FIG. 61 and FIG. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated to the separation position, the ball B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of the outer wall portion 651b, and the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 is moved. It hold | maintains on the holding piece 677 in a protrusion position (refer FIG. 68). The holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed such that the holding piece 677 can be retracted between the protruding position and the retracted position. The retaining piece 677 is retracted into the retracted position, so that the ball B has a plurality of rotation members 640. Are thrown onto any one of the divided members DV (display plate 646). Here, the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69.

  66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position, and FIG. 67 is a holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position. FIG.

  FIG. 68A is a front perspective view of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position, and FIG. 68B is a view taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 69 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 69 (b) is an LXIXb-LXIXb line in FIG. 69 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the holding | maintenance piece protrusion / extraction mechanism in 670.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece protruding / retracting mechanism 670 is formed to be curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651, and is disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651. A rear case 671, a front case 672 disposed in front of the rear case 671, a slide member 673 slidably held between opposing surfaces of the rear case 671 and the front case 672, and the slide member A driving motor 675 and a pinion gear 676 for driving 673, and a holding piece 677 which is projected and retracted with the sliding displacement of the sliding member 673.

  The back case 671 includes two sets of one pair of roller members 674 opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and holds the slide member 673 so as to be slidable between the sets of roller members 674 facing each other. Further, the rear case 671 includes a sliding base 671a having a rectangular plate shape as viewed from above and extending from one end side (lower part) in the circumferential direction to the front side. The upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672 are provided. The slide displacement (protrusion to the front side and immersion to the back side) of the holding piece 677 is guided to the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) of the head.

  The slide member 673 has a pin portion 673a projecting from one circumferential side end (lower portion) thereof, and a rack gear 673b meshed with the pinion gear 676 is disposed on the inner circumferential side at the other circumferential side end (information portion). Engraved along the surface. In addition, a sliding groove 677a into which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extended in a substantially Z shape. That is, one end side (the right side in FIG. 66) of the sliding groove 677a is offset to the front side from the other end side (the left side in FIG. 66).

  Therefore, the drive motor 675 is rotationally driven in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675 is rotated, so that the slide member 673 is slid and displaced via the rack gear 673b. By causing the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 to act on the sliding groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be protruded to the front side or immersed in the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 is slidably displaceable between a protruding position where the holding piece 677 protrudes to the front side (see FIG. 68) and an immersion position where the holding piece 677 is immersed to the back side (see FIG. 69).

  Here, the upper surface of the holding piece 677 is located on the back side (the right side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)) and the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner peripheral passage 651c1). A curved surface 677b that is concentrically curved and continuously communicates with the inner circumferential passage 651c1 in the circumferential direction, and is continuous with the edge of the curved surface 677b and toward the front side (left side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). Ascending inclined surface 677c which is inclined upward in accordance with this, and a descending inclined surface 677d which is continuous with the edge of the ascending inclined surface 677c and is inclined downward toward the front side are formed.

  Therefore, in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position (see FIGS. 68A and 68B), the holding piece 677 is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolls on the inner peripheral passage 651c1 to bend the holding piece 677. The ball B reaching the surface 677b is restricted from rolling to the front side (left side in FIG. 68 (b)) by the rising inclination of the rising inclined surface 677c and held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b). Can do.

  On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is immersed from the protruding position to the back side and disposed at the immersed position (see FIGS. 69A and 69B), the front side of the front case 672 causes the back side (FIG. 69B). ) The ball B whose movement to the right side is regulated is moved over the rising inclined surface 677c and positioned on the falling inclined surface 677d as the holding piece 677 is displaced in the immersion direction (back side). Thereby, the sphere B can roll along the descending slope of the descending slope 677d, and the sphere B can be thrown onto the front side (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  The curved surface 677b is smoothly connected to the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on both sides in the circumferential direction, so that the sphere B that has fallen from the ball holding portion 652 and rolled on the one inner peripheral passage 651c1 is bent by the holding piece 677. It can pass over the surface 677b and roll to the other inner peripheral passage 651c1. That is, the sphere B can be reciprocated between the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on the one circumferential side and the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on the other circumferential side via the curved surface 677b. Further, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner peripheral passage 651c1, when the ball B loses momentum and its rolling is converged, the ball B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. Can be made.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the passage member 655 is disposed on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersing operation (immersion to the immersing position) of the holding piece 677 is divided member DV (display) of the rotating member 640 And a return passage 655b serving as a passage for returning the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.

  The ball feeding passage 655a has a groove portion 655a1 having substantially the same width as the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 and extending to the front side, and a front surface from the groove portion 655a1. The front portion 655a2 that is continuous with the side edge portion and that is substantially flush with the display plate 646 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and the front portion 655a2 are erected from both sides in the width direction and the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 A pair of facing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same spacing as the spacing between the partition plates 647 is provided.

  Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is inserted into the immersion position, the ball B rolled on the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove portion 655a1 and the extending direction of the groove portion 655a1 is received. , The ball B can be thrown while suppressing rattling.

  Further, the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV, and the opposing interval of the pair of opposing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the opposing interval of the partition plate 647 of the dividing member DV. The formed sphere B can be smoothly arranged on the display plate 646 of the divided member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotation member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotation position) where the partition plate 647 of the divided member DV coincides with the facing portion 655a3 based on a detection result by a detection sensor 684 described later.

  The return passage 655b is provided on the downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface that rolls to the downstream side when the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is received on the upstream side, and on the downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1. And a standing portion 655b2 that is curved and formed so that the rolling direction of the sphere B is directed to the back side.

  In the front view of the pitching device 650, the rolling portion 655b1 is arranged on the inner peripheral side edge of the rotating member 640, and on the downstream side is arranged on the front side of the ball holding portion 652b. Further, the rolling portion 655b1 is formed to be inclined downward from the upstream side toward the downstream side, and the downstream side is inclined downward toward the ball holding portion 652.

  A ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and a return guide 681b of a guide member 680 described later. When the ball B is pushed out toward the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B rolls down the rolling part 655b1 and is dropped to the ball holding part 652 while being guided by the standing part 655b2. The

  Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. As described above, the guide member 680 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member disposed along the lower portion of the rotating member 640, and guides the sphere B on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 at the time of conveyance accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 640 (that is, And a detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotation position) of the rotation member 640. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

  70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base portion 681 disposed on the case member 610, a plate-shaped transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base portion 681, and a rear side of the transmission plate 682. Are mainly provided with a cantilever plate 683 and a plurality (six in this embodiment) of detection sensors 684 disposed on the base portion 681.

  The base portion 681 is a member formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape at a central angle of about 120 degrees (that is, a shape that curves in an arc shape when viewed from the front), and a guide surface 681a is formed on the inner peripheral surface side thereof. . The guide surface 681a is disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member 640 and faces the sphere B disposed on the divided member DV (that is, a space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, the ball B that is disposed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and is conveyed along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is supported from below.

  Further, on the inner peripheral surface side of the base portion 681, a return guide 681b connected to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a is formed. The return guide 681b is a portion for sending the ball B conveyed along with the rotation of the rotation member 640 to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, and is formed with a width dimension smaller than that of the guide surface 681a and in the radial direction. By being formed in a shape protruding inward, it is arranged to face the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

  Therefore, when the ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotating member 640, the return guide is provided by the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the divided member DV. The ball B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Accordingly, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the ball B is pushed inward in the radial direction by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.

  Here, even if the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to the position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is inclined downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate The sphere B can be dropped along the descending slope of 647 to the return passage 655b. However, in this case, since the sphere B is transported upward by the time the sphere B starts rolling by its own weight, the drop position when the sphere B is dropped becomes high, and the partition plate 647 Since the ball B is dropped after being rolled along the descending inclination, the momentum when the ball B is dropped is large. Therefore, there is a possibility that the return passage 655b is damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the return guide 681b is provided, so that the drop position when the ball B is dropped into the return passage 655b can be lowered, and the ball B slides on the return guide 681b. Since the ball is sent to the return passage 655b, the pitching speed can be reduced. As a result, damage to the return passage 655b can be suppressed.

  The transmission plate 682 is a part facing the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 with a predetermined interval (interval capable of holding the sphere B), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is a part. The passage member 655 extends upward to a position facing the ball-sending passage 655a (front portion 655a2). Thereby, it can suppress that the ball | bowl B pitched to the division member DV of the rotation member 640 from the pitching apparatus 650 jumps out outside.

  Further, the transmission plate 682 is not only the divided member DV on which the ball B is thrown (that is, the divided member DV having the same phase as the front surface portion 655a2 of the ball feeding passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the divided member DV (of the ball B). Since the split member DV adjacent to the downstream side in the transport direction is also formed with a size (width dimension) that can partially face each other, the violence of the ball B thrown from the pitching passage 655 a The sphere B can be easily transported to the return guide 681b.

  On the other hand, the transmission plate 682 has a size (width dimension) that allows the divided member DV to which the ball B is thrown and the divided member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the divided member DV to face each other, and the divided member DV to be thrown. And it does not face with respect to the division member DV located in the downstream rather than the adjacent division member DV. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 on the downstream side in the conveyance direction of the ball B (right side in FIG. 70) and the return guide 681b, and the player can visually recognize the conveyance of the ball B. Easy to do.

  Since the entire transmission plate 682 is made of a light-transmitting material, the player can see through the member and the ball B located on the back side. Therefore, the pitched ball B passes through the pitching passage 655a and falls between the display plate 647 and the transmission plate 682 of the divided member DV, and is supported by the guide surface 681a by the rotation of the rotating member 640. The player can visually recognize a series of modes to be conveyed.

  The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681). The cantilever plate 683 has one end in the circumferential direction pivotally supported on the base 681 by a shaft 685, and the other end in the circumferential direction is supported by the elastic force of a leaf spring of a limit switch (not shown) disposed on the base 681. The posture is lifted upward (inward in the radial direction).

  In a posture in which the other circumferential end of the cantilever plate 683 is lifted upward, the limit switch is turned off. When the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B The cantilever plate 683 is pushed down with the shaft 685 as the center of rotation due to the weight, and the limit switch is turned on. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 is arranged at an appropriate position (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  On the other hand, when the sphere B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 and the weight of the sphere B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is less than or equal to a predetermined value, the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. Return to, and turn off the limit switch.

  The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and is formed as a non-contact sensor in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged to face each other, and its detection region (light emitting unit and light receiving unit). Are disposed on the movement locus of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54), and are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Note that the interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1.

  Therefore, a plurality (six in this embodiment) of divided members DV adjacent in the circumferential direction can be arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensors 684, respectively, and the rotating member 640 corresponds to a predetermined amount (that is, corresponding to the first interval). The divided member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction each time it is rotated by the amount of rotation).

  In this case, as described above, the part to be detected 641c is formed on a part (15 in this embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV The formation of the detected part 641c is omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed is disposed, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned on. The detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed can receive light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and the detection signal is turned off (see FIG. 76). As a result, as will be described later, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on the combination of detection results of the detection sensors 684.

  In the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV are respectively performed by the six detection sensors 684, so 64 (= 2 to the sixth power). Street combinations can be formed. In this case, since the number of divided members DV is 30, the detection sensor 684 detects which divided member DV of the plurality of divided members DV is located at the reference position, as will be described later. It can always be determined based on the result.

  Next, the operation of the rotation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. First, an operation of changing the interval between the divided members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

  FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640. 73A is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73B is a portion of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

  In order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, FIGS. 72 and 73 show only the back-side main body 642, the connecting link member 644, and the undulating link member 648 among the components of the divided member DV. In addition, FIG. 73 illustrates a state where the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 are hatched.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the rotating member 640 is a member formed to be rotatable around the axis O (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620), and the plurality of divided members DV are arranged in the circumferential direction. It is formed in an endless shape connected to the. That is, each divided member DV is rotatably supported at the base end side of the connecting link member 644 by the rear side main body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the distal end side of the connecting link member 644 is adjacent to the rear side of the divided member DV. The connection link action groove 621 is inserted through the connection link opening 642 a in the main body 642.

  As described above, the back side main body 642 of the divided member DV has the sliding roller 641b on one side in the longitudinal direction and the bent portion 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction abutting on the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the attitude with respect to the guide member 620 is such that the axis O is positioned on the longitudinal extension of the back side main body 642 (that is, the axis O is radiated around the axis O). Maintained in a straight posture). That is, only movement while maintaining the posture is allowed.

  In this case, since the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link action groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (side rotatably supported) of the connection link member 644 than the small-diameter portion 621b, such a connection link. In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the action groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the connection link member 644 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642. As a result, the back side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (rear body 642) in the first section S1 can be a large interval (first interval).

  On the other hand, the small-diameter portion 621b of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (side rotatably supported) of the connection link member 644 than the large-diameter portion 621a. In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73 (b)), the rear surface of the connection link member 644 is oriented along the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642. The side main bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (rear body 642) in the second section S2 can be set to a small interval (second interval).

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 640 is an effect device formed to simulate a roulette, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display board 646 (plate part 646a). That is, the presentation is performed by making the player visually recognize the identification information displayed on the display board 646. Therefore, in consideration of the player's visibility, the display board 646 (display of identification information) is preferably large, and in order to secure variations in the effect, the number of display boards 646 (of the identification information) It is preferable that there are many types).

  In this case, in consideration of the player's visibility, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display board 646) needs to have a certain size or more, and the size is maintained. However, when the number of identification information displayed (the number of display plates 646) is increased, the diameter of the rotating member 640 increases, so that the rotating member 640 does not fit in a predetermined arrangement space, while the rotating member 640 is adjusted to fit in the predetermined space. When the diameter is reduced, the number of identification information displayed (the number of display plates 646) decreases, and it becomes impossible to ensure variations in effect.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the dividing member DV is connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and the first interval S1 that is narrower than the first interval in the first interval S1. As described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) positioned in the first section S1 can be formed in the rotating member 640 while being able to form the second section S2 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at intervals of 2. The player visually recognizes the display board 646 located in the second section S2 by other members.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the plurality of divided members DV are all connected at the first interval, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space necessary for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to increase the number of identification information displayed (the number of display plates 646) while ensuring a certain size or more of display of identification information (that is, display plate 646). As a result, it becomes impossible to ensure the player's visibility and variation of the effect.

  Here, as described above, in the first section S1, the divided member DV is arranged in a horizontal posture (a posture parallel to the moving plane of the divided member DV) in the display plate 646. The identification information displayed on 646 can be easily seen by the player.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the second section S2, the divided member DV is in a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is lifted up from the horizontal posture in the first section S1. Interference with DV can be suppressed, and the divided members DV can be brought closer to each other accordingly. That is, the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 can be reduced. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space required for the arrangement can be suppressed.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is disposed on the upper surface of the front-side main body 643 so as to be able to be displaced (rotated), and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is disposed adjacent to the divided member DV (plate holding). The upper surface of the member 645) can be lifted upward (that is, a position where it does not interfere) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the divided member DV can be brought close to a position where the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are in contact with each other. That is, the 2nd space | interval in 2nd area S2 can be made narrower. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space necessary for arranging the rotating member can be suppressed.

  Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 viewed from the front is illustrated.

  74 (b), 74 (c), and 74 (d) correspond to the states rotated 30 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is illustrated in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 indicates a two-dot chain line. Used to illustrate.

  Here, as described above, the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 are formed in the same shape. In the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by these, the same driving operation will be described only for the driving operation by the one side rotating driving member 637, and the description of the driving operation by the other side rotating driving member 638 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the one-side rotational drive member 637 has a movement locus of the engaging portion 637b partially in relation to a movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. It arrange | positions in the position which overlaps and it can be rotated in the state which made the engaging part 637b engage with the to-be-engaged part 641 in the overlapping part. Note that the circular movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a smaller diameter than the circular movement locus of the engaged portion 641.

  When the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the divided member DV through the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. Then, the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via each connecting link member 644, whereby the rotating member 640 is rotated. Rotated in the direction.

  In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the rotation amount of the rotation member 640 relative to the unit rotation amount of the one side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the rotation amount of the one side rotation drive member 637 required to rotate the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased). ). Accordingly, the apparent reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axis O of the rotating member 640, the rotational torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotational driving of the rotating member 640 (especially rotational driving from the stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the driving motor 631 of the driving mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, the drive mechanism 630 includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and another-side rotation drive member 638, which are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed at different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members DV can be suppressed. That is, even when the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members DV endlessly in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force from each of the rotation driving members 637 and 638 can be applied to the two most spaced apart members of the rotating member 640 (the plurality of divided members DV), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 is changed. Can be stabilized.

  In this case, in the state of the divided member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 that is pivotally supported by the divided member DV is first inserted through the large diameter portion 621a in the connecting link working groove 621 of the guide member 620. , A second state inserted through the small-diameter portion 621b, and a third state inserted through the connection portion 621c, in the present embodiment, the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other side The rotational driving member 638 can apply a driving force to the divided member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging portions 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV in the third state). ).

  Accordingly, it is possible to apply a driving force to the divided member DV that is in a state in which the interval between the adjacent divided members DV is changed from the first interval to the second interval (or vice versa). Since the divided member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c, the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 in which the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly (movement of each divided member DV in the circumferential direction) is performed. The divided member DV that receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c is directly driven by the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638, so that the plurality of divided members DV are endless. It is possible to stably displace (rotate) the entire rotating member 640 connected to the.

  Note that the period during which the driving force is transmitted from the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 to the divided member DV completely coincides with the period in which the divided member DV is in the above-described third state. It is not necessary, and it is sufficient if the period during which the former driving force is transmitted and the period in the latter third state overlap at least partially.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link working groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link working groove 622 are formed at different phases. That is, when the divided member DV is in the third state described above, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 disposed in the divided member DV is formed in the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link working groove 622. It is inserted.

  Therefore, when the dividing member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 supported by the dividing member DV passes through the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link working groove 621. Thereafter, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link working groove 622 (or vice versa).

  Accordingly, the reaction force is not received from both the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622 at the same time, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be varied. As a result, the required driving force can be dispersed, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, since the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are arranged with their phases (rotation positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b) different from each other, the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is performed. Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the phase of engagement or release of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 with respect to the divided member DV. In FIG. 75, the upper state diagram corresponds to the one side rotation drive member 637, and the lower state diagram corresponds to the other side rotation drive member 638. In FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or released state.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engaging portion 637b among the engaging portions 637b formed at the three positions of the one-side rotation driving member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. If the phase at the time of starting the rotation is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotary drive member 637 is in the first position until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (that is, until it rotates 100 ° from the reference position). One engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the divided member DV. On the other hand, when the phase is approximately 100 ° to 120 °, the engagement is released. Thus, the transmission of the driving force to the split member DV is released.

  Thereafter, the second engaging portion 637b and the third engaging portion 637b among the engaging portions 637b formed at three positions of the one-side rotation driving member 637 are the first engaging portion 637b. The same engagement and disengagement state (that is, engagement at a rotation angle of approximately 100 ° and release at a rotation angle of approximately 20 °) is repeated.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, with respect to the other-side rotation drive member 638, the engagement portions 638b formed at the three locations are respectively engaged and released in the same manner as in the case of the one-side rotation drive member 637 described above. (That is, the engagement between the rotation angles of about 100 ° and the release between the rotation angles of about 20 °) are repeated.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638 are arranged with different phases (the rotational positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b). The In other words, the other side rotational drive member 638 has a phase in which the first engagement portion 638b of the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions starts to engage with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. The phase is set approximately 40 ° behind the phase (reference position) at which the first engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 starts engagement.

  As a result, one side of the one side rotation drive member 637 or the other side rotation drive member 638 is on the one side while the engagement with the divided member DV is released (that is, transmission of the driving force is released). The phases (rotational positions) of the engaging portions 637b and 638b are set such that the other of the rotation driving member 637 or the other side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the divided member DV. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the state in which the engagement with the divided member DV is released at the same time in both the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638. As a result, the transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 is suppressed from being intermittent, and the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly, when transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent, Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the interval between the divided members DV is easily increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture of the rotating member 640 as a whole becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if one of the one side rotation driving member 637 or the other side rotation driving member 638 is in the released state, the other is engaged, and the driving force is applied to the rotation member 640. Can be formed, so that the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.

  Next, the operation for detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each rotation amount of the rotating member 640, and shows a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the divided member DV is developed on a straight line.

  In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, reference numerals “A to F” are shown for the detection sensor 684, and reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown for the divided member DV. The detection state is illustrated by the sign “ON, OFF”. In FIG. 76, the detected portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.

  Here, in the description of FIG. 76, each of the detection sensors 684 is replaced with a detection sensor A, a detection sensor B,... Using the reference numerals “A to F” “1 to 10, 30” attached in the drawing. The divided members DV are referred to as a first divided member DV, a second divided member DV,..., A 30th divided member DV, and are distinguished from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first divided member DV reaches a phase (rotational position) that can be detected by the detection sensor A, the second divided member DV starts to the sixth divided member DV. The divided members DV are arranged in phases that can be detected by the detection sensors B to F, respectively.

  Therefore, in the detection sensors A and C to F, the light received by the light receiving part of the light emitted from the light emitting part is blocked by the detected parts 641c of the first divided member DV and the third to sixth divided members DV. Thus, the detection state is turned on by detecting the detected portion 641c, while the detection sensor B can receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion and does not detect the detected portion 641c. Therefore, the detection state is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the divided member DV is moved in the circumferential direction (FIG. 76 (a) and FIG. 76 (b)). The divided member DV that is the detection target of each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned on by the light shielding of the third to seventh divided members DV (detected portion 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned off. The

  As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the divided members DV to be detected by the detection sensors A to F are changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned on by the light shielding of the third to sixth divided members DV and the eighth divided member DV (detected portion 641c), while the detection state is detected. In the sensor E, the detection state is turned off.

  Thereafter, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount, the divided member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one), and this is changed to the number of divided members DV (this embodiment). If the number of repetitions is 30 (that is, 30 in the embodiment) (that is, the rotating member 640 is rotated once), the state shown in FIG.

  In this case, as described above, there are two types of rotating member 640, one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and one in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of divided members DV in the circumferential direction, the detected portions 641c are arranged at predetermined intervals that are unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement means a combination of presence / absence of the detected portion 641c (that is, the detection sensor A) even if any six adjacent divided members DV are extracted from the 30 divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction. The detection state of -F) means the arrangement | sequence from which all differ.

  Therefore, a table of such combinations (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F are associated with the divided members DV to be detected at the time of detection) is created in advance and stored in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. Thus, each time the detection sensors A to F perform detection, the phase (rotation position) of the rotating member 640 can be grasped by referring to the table. That is, it is possible to determine which divided member DV of the plurality (30 in this embodiment) of divided members DV is located at the reference position.

  Here, the rotation member 640 is provided with a slit continuous in the circumferential direction, and the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added. The rotation amount (phase) of the rotating member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure such as a light reception failure of the light receiving unit of the detection sensor 684 occurs, a deviation occurs between the amount of rotation of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative number of pulses, and the phase of the rotating member 640 is accurately determined. Can no longer be detected. That is, when a detection failure occurs even once, it affects the subsequent detection results, and every time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detected portions 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 and the movement of the plurality of detected portions 641c. Since the plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) arranged on the locus are provided, the phase (rotation position) of the rotation member 640 is detected based on the combination of detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the detection sensors A to F, and the past of the detection sensors A to F can be used to detect the phase of the rotating member 640. Therefore, even if a detection failure has occurred in the past, it is not affected by the detection failure, and the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected accurately.

  As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, each time the rotation member 640 is rotated by a rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV, the combinations of detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be made different. That is, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected with the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to any divided member DV (that is, any pocket of the rotating member 640 simulating roulette) among the plurality of divided members DV coupled in the circumferential direction. be able to.

  Further, in this way, the arrangement interval of the detection sensors A to F is set with reference to the interval of the divided members DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are divided members DV in the first section S1). The space required for the arrangement of the detection sensors A to F is compared with the case where the interval of the divided members DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference. Can be easily secured, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are arranged at positions where the detected part 641c of the divided member DV can be detected in the second section S2, a space for arranging these detection sensors A to F is secured. Therefore, there is a limit to narrowing the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are arranged on the first section S1 side, the setting of the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is not limited, and the first The interval of 2 can be made a narrower interval. As a result, the space required for the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV are respectively performed by the six detection sensors 684, so that 64 (= 2 6) combinations can be formed.

  In this case, since the number of the divided members DV is 30, the number of the five detection sensors 684 is sufficient (that is, 32 (= 2 to the 5th power) combinations can be formed). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (not shielded by the detected portion 641c), and therefore in a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to the state. The timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 cannot be obtained.

  On the other hand, by using six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection results of all the six detection sensors 684 are off (the state in which the detection part 641c is not shielded from light). ) Can be avoided. That is, in at least one detection sensor 684 out of the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (shielded by the detected portion 641), so that all phases (rotations) Position), the timing for obtaining the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.

  FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view in which a portion in the first section S1 of the rotating member 640 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the divided member DV has the plate portion 646a arranged in a horizontal posture and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (FIGS. 57 and 58). The side surface (the left side in FIG. 77) opposite to the reference) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV.

  In the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed such that the side surface of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b is curved in an arc shape (see an enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the plate portion 646a is rotated about the shaft portion 646b and arranged in a horizontal posture, the display plate 646 has a plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV on the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b. Can be suppressed, and as a result, the distance between the opposite side (arc-shaped side surface) of the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a and the side surface of the plate holding member 645 can be narrowed.

  As a result, in the first section S1, when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to be relatively displaced in the direction of narrowing the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 Such a relative displacement can be regulated by the side surface being in contact with the side surface of the plate holding member 645. Therefore, it can suppress that the to-be-detected part 641c of these division member DV shifts in the direction which narrows those intervals, As a result, the improvement of the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 can be aimed at.

  On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the end of the connecting link opening 642a in the rear side main body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV (the end on one side in the extending direction, FIG. ) (Below) (see FIG. 73 (a)), when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to be relatively displaced in the direction of widening their interval (first interval), The phase displacement can be regulated by the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 being in contact with the terminal end of the connection link opening 642a. Therefore, it can suppress that the to-be-detected part 641c of these division member DV shifts in the direction which widens those intervals, As a result, the improvement of the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 can be aimed at.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always opened has been described. However, the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is disposed at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. The tip wall member 2560 for opening and closing the passage is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment. 78 shows a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the left swinging unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges the sphere to the right rear side of the first wall 513, the extending direction of the sorting base member 2521, and the long holes 2521d. A first passage forming member 2520 whose extending direction is substantially straight and a tip wall member 2560 for opening and closing the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 are mainly provided.

  The base member 2510 includes a side flow down passage 2515 that extends rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. In addition, although the external shape of the introduction cylinder part 552 differs from the external shape of the introduction cylinder part 552 in 1st Embodiment, since the technical idea is the same, description is abbreviate | omitted in this embodiment.

  The side flow down passage 2515 is a passage that discharges the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  The first passage forming member 2520 includes a sorting base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The sorting base member 2521 has a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a that constitutes one side of the sphere flow-down passage, a long hole 2521d that extends along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. The second distribution convex portion 2521g disposed opposite to the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side of the front view of FIG. 5 and the rear side toward the front side of the hanging plate portion on the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in the front view And a discharge recess 2521h that is recessed from the side surface.

  The hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion of the lower wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (left side in FIG. 78) is cut and recessed at the lower end portion, and a passage cover member at the lower end portion. A shaft support hole 2521a3 that is formed in a circular shape in a direction opposite to the passage cover member is provided on the opposite side to 2522.

  The recessed portion 2521a2 is a recessed portion that forms an opening on the lower surface of the first passage forming member 2520 in cooperation with the recessed portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The distal end wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the recessed portion 2521a by a rotating operation.

  The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body portion 2561a of the tip wall member 2560 is supported by a pin member on a rod, and is disposed at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522. The

  The 2nd distribution convex part 2521g is a part comprised by the substantially same shape as the distribution convex part 521e, Comprising: The part which distribute | arranged the ball | bowl which reached | attained the 1st wall part 513 to right and left. The discharge concave portion 2521h is disposed with a space larger than the diameter of the sphere between the first wall portion 513 and reaches the first wall portion 513 to the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in front view. The distributed balls are introduced from the discharge recess 2521h into the side flow down passage 2515 and then discharged out of the game area.

  The passage cover member 2522 has a plate-like plate-like portion 2522a that covers the front side of the distribution base member 2521, and extends in a plate-like shape from both ends in the short-side direction of the plate-like portion 2522a toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are mainly provided.

  The plate-like portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described above in the first embodiment, and a shaft support hole 2522a2 that is formed in a circular shape coaxially with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the sorting base member 2521 at the lower end portion. Prepare. The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the tip wall member 2560.

  The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are provided with a recessed portion 2522b1 which is recessed at a position facing the recessed portion 2521a2 and forms an opening through which a sphere can pass in cooperation with the recessed portion 2521a2.

  The distal end wall member 2560 is disposed between the sorting base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 and rotates into a rod-like pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. A main body member 2561 having a substantially Z-shape in front view that is pivotally supported and a torsion spring 2562 that urges the main body member 2561 clockwise in front view is mainly provided.

  The torsion spring 2562 is configured in such a manner that one arm is fixed to the distal end of the passage cover member 2522 and the other arm abuts on a locking pin 2561e protruding from the distal end wall member 2560 on the back side.

  With reference to FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 will be described. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560. FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 taken along the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 79 (a) and 79 (d), the shape of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position ( A state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the coupling position (see FIG. 81) is illustrated in FIG. 79 (d).

  As shown in FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 includes a cylindrical main body 2561a that is coaxially supported by the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78), and a radial direction from the main body 2561a. A plate-like plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, a flow-down hole 2561c formed in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the main body portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b on the opposite side A curved wall portion 2561d extending along an arc centered on the main body portion 2561a from the end of the main body portion, and a locking pin protruding in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a at the distal end portion of the curved wall portion 2561d 2561e and a portion disposed on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with the main body member 2561a as a boundary, and are configured in a shape smaller than the opening at the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520. A pushing portion 2561F, mainly comprises.

  The plate portion 2561b is formed such that the length in the radial direction of the main body portion 2561a (length in the extending direction) is longer than the dimension in the short direction (vertical direction in FIG. 80) of the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. The Thereby, the rotation stop position of the tip wall member 2560 in the urging direction of the torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to a position where the plate portion 2561b and the upper wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b abut (FIG. 79 (d)).

  In the released state (see FIG. 79D), the curved wall portion 2561d stops its flow by colliding with the abutting wall 2561d1 disposed opposite to the ball that has flowed down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving below the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is disposed on the back side of the abutting wall 2561d1. By rolling on 2561d2, it has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow down.

  Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, and in FIG. 80, the state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position is shown. In FIG. A state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise as viewed from the front is illustrated, and in FIG. 82, a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the coupling position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by the outline at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in front view. And is retained between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall 513, the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the discharge recess 2521h is disposed on the front side of the side flow down passage 2515. Thus, the ball can flow down the side flow down passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the balls from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 80, the sphere introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stays in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next sphere enters the discharge recess 2521h. Thus, the next sphere can be kept outside (upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation trajectory at the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g.

  In the sphere held on the outside (upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation locus at the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g, the first passage forming member 2520 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g guides. By being arranged at a position along the right wall portion of the wall portion 513a, it is introduced to the left side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g and supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. The Thereby, even if a plurality of spheres reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, it is possible to keep only one sphere introduced into the discharge recess 2521h.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position, the first passage is formed from the base end portion (left end portion in FIG. 80) toward the distal end portion (right end portion in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured so as to be inclined upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the sphere supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 remaining, Flows toward the base end by the action of gravity, so that the sphere can be prevented from falling from the front end.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the state between the release position and the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is It rides on the tip of the part 2521g and stops flowing down. Accordingly, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed between the release position and the coupling position, the balls are supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Can be prevented.

  Also, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the tip. Therefore, if the opening at the tip is always open, the ball remains between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 and the state shown in FIG. May fall from the tip end portion of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be caught in another unit (the rotating unit 600 or the like (see FIG. 5)), causing a malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the distal end wall member 2560 is disposed at the opening of the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as an opening lid. Can be reliably prevented from dropping from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is left in front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. And is moved to the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and the extending direction of the first passage forming member 2520 It flows down along.

  At the coupling position, the pushing portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 and the wall surface of the housing recess 422f of the driving side slide member 420 abut (the wall surface of the housing recess 422f is disposed on the displacement locus of the pushing portion 2561f). The curved wall portion 2561d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in the direction projecting outward from the first passage forming member 2520 (counterclockwise in FIG. 82). That is, the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is caused by a change in the position of the first passage forming member 2520, so that the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can also be used as the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. Thereby, reduction of product cost can be aimed at.

  At this time, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated to a position where the plate portion 2561b is in a surface position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b at the connection position, thereby smoothly smoothing the sphere that has reached the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520. (Without jumping as in the case where a step is generated between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and 2561b), the ball can be sent to the flow-down hole 2561c.

  The sphere that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c rolls on the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d, thereby being guided to the sensor member 422c of the driving side slide member 420. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d plays a role of stopping the sphere that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and a role of guiding the sphere sent from the first passage forming member 2520 through the flow down hole 2561c. It is used for both.

  In addition, in the connection position (refer FIG. 82), since the board part 2561b is made into a surface position with the lower wall part 2522b (refer FIG. 78) of the channel | path cover member 2522, before reaching a connection position, it is. The plate portion 2561b enters the inner side (upper side in FIG. 82) than the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the sphere can only pass through the flow-down hole 2561c after reaching the connection position (a state where the sphere is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d is ensured until the connection position is reached).

  Thereby, even when the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated from the coupling position toward the release position in a state where the sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the sphere is at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. Can be reliably prevented from falling off. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are sent in succession.

  Referring to FIG. 83, a description will be given of a case where a plurality of balls are continuously sent to first passage forming member 2520. 83 (a) to 83 (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. FIG. 83 (a) to 83 (c), the spherical passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially viewed in cross section, and in FIG. 83 (a), the first passage A state in which the forming member 2520 is disposed at the coupling position is illustrated. In FIG. 83B, the first passage forming member 2520 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 83A. 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the tip wall member 2560 is rotated. The state is shown.

  Further, in FIGS. 83A to 83C, a sphere that flows down continuously from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 83A, the push-in portion 2561f is in contact with the housing recess 422f in the connected state, and includes a recessed portion 2561f1 on the lower side of FIG. 83A starting from the contacted position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed closer to the shaft support portion 516 than the arc C21 centering on the shaft support portion 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, the tip wall member 2560 starts to rotate due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 2562 as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from FIG. In FIG. 83 (a), a sphere arranged on the right side across the curved wall portion 2561d is referred to as a feed sphere P21, and a sphere arranged on the left side is referred to as a residual sphere P22.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters inside the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 comes into contact with the contact wall 2561d, and the flow of the residual sphere P22 stops.

  On the other hand, since the feed ball P21 is disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, the flow-down is not stopped by the abutting wall 2561d, and passes through the flow-down hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520. The ball can be sent.

  In this case, the feeding ball P21 may be lifted to the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 2561d (see FIG. 83 (b)), and the upper wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b is opposed to the moving direction of the curved wall portion 2561d. Therefore, when the feed ball P21 is pushed by the wall portion, it can be ensured that the feed ball P21 passes through the flow-down hole 2561c. Thereby, the diameter of the opening of the flow down hole 2561c can be suppressed to the same extent as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow down path of the sphere flowing down the flow down hole 2561c can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall portion 2561d is connected to the drive side slide member 420. Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side when moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a portion for rolling the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall thereof. The feed ball P21 is caused to flow down while the distance between the lower end portion of 2561d2 and the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (the first passage is formed until the feed ball P21 divides and flows down). By stopping the member 2520 at the position shown in FIG. 83 (c) or slowing down the velocity near the position shown in FIG. 83 (c), it is ensured that the ball flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. To do It can be.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven side slide member 430 has been described. However, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 3400 in the third embodiment has a third symbol display. The device 81 is disposed on the left side of the driven slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 3400 in the third embodiment illustrating the lifting / lowering operations of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 3430 in time series. 84 to 88, the left and right members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 is partially enlarged.

  84 shows the state immediately after the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 contacts the driven slide member 3430. In FIG. 85, the rack 452 is moved up from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 86 illustrates a state where the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the raised position, and FIG. 86 illustrates a state where only the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered from the state illustrated in FIG. 85 and disposed at the lowered position. 86, the driven slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 86, and the separation action surface 434b which is the lower side surface of the bowl-shaped portion 434 is brought into contact with the separation inclined portion 417f of the rise restriction member 417 and the rise restriction member. FIG. 88 shows a state where 417 is rotated by a predetermined amount. In FIG. 88, the driven side slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state shown in FIG. State dynamic side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated.

  84 to 88, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a drive side slide member 420, a driven side slide member 3430, a drive device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front. It mainly includes a plate member 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and operates in a manner that prevents the driven-side slide member 3430 from dropping.

  In the base member 410, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 are disposed only in the left part of the front view, and the right part of the front member is omitted.

  The driven-side slide member 3430 has a main body member 3431 configured to be elongated in the left-right direction with the third symbol display device 81 decentered from the left-right center position to the left in front view, and the left-right direction of the main body member 3431 A function part 432 arranged at both ends, a guide hole 433 which is a hole formed in the function part 432 in the vertical direction and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and the lower end part of the function part 432 rises leftward and rightward. A hook-shaped portion 434 extending in an inclined manner, a fall prevention portion 435 extending on the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end portion of the functional portion 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433), Is mainly provided.

  The main body member 3431 includes a locking protrusion 3431a that protrudes leftward in a front view at the upper end thereof. The locking projection 3431a is a portion that is locked by a solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and is prevented from dropping. The locking projection 3431a is inclined downward as its upper surface goes toward the tip in the protruding direction.

  The solenoid 3480 includes a bar member 3481 that can protrude and retract to the right in front view, and the lower surface of the bar member 3481 is inclined upward as it goes toward the tip in the overhang direction. The solenoid 3480 is in an immersive state when energized, and is in an overhanging state when not energized. In this overhanging state, the tip of the bar member 3481 protrudes to the left and right center sides from the tip of the locking projection 3431a. Consists of.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged close to the left side of the front view. As a result, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the left and right regions of the third symbol display device 81 are collected in one place (on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84), By configuring as a large region, the degree of freedom of the size of the movable member that can be disposed in the vacant region can be improved.

  Since the third symbol display device 81 is arranged close to the left side when viewed from the front, the load applied from the driven side slide member 420 to the rack 452 becomes asymmetrical (the left side becomes larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to tilt the postures of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 84, the wiring housing member 423 is disposed at the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. At this time, the center of gravity position G31 of the wiring storage member 423 is arranged on the left side from the center position of the driving side slide member 420, so that the driving side is driven by the wiring storage member 423 and the weight of the wiring stored in the wiring storage member 423. There is a possibility that the slide member 420 receives a load and tilts counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  As described above, since the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily inclined counterclockwise when viewed from the front, rattling during the raising / lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 is prevented. It can be limited to the backlash between the state where 452 keeps the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) and the state where the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise when viewed from the front (drive side slide). It is possible to suppress the member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting clockwise from the horizontal posture.

  Therefore, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 arranged on the left side of the front view guide the raising / lowering operations of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 while effectively suppressing the inclination of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452. To do. On the other hand, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not inclined on the right side when viewed from the front, it is not necessary to dispose the lowering restriction member 415 and the rising restriction member 417 outside the functional unit 432 on the right side when viewed from the front. Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive-side slide member 420 is placed in the raised position, the wiring housing member 423 rises compared to the state shown in FIG. 84, and the center of gravity position G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. Moved to the left in front view.

  Therefore, the load in the direction in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise when viewed from the front increases, and the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the protruding plate 453a is brought into contact with and supported by the lowering restriction member 415. Thereby, it can suppress that the attitude | position of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 inclines counterclockwise in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is arranged at the raised position, the locking projection 3431 gets over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking projection 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481. .

  At this time, when the bar member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking projection 3431, the locking projection 3431 can get over the bar member 3481. As a result, the locking projection 3431 can be placed on the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without conducting electricity to the solenoid 3480.

  As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered while the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the raised position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 is engaged with the locking projection 3431a of the driven-side slide member 3430. , The driven slide member 3430 is prevented from moving downward in conjunction with the drive slide member 420, and the driven slide member 3430 is maintained in the raised position.

  At this time, the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is shifted from the center position to the left side of the front view, and the center of gravity position is shifted to the left side, so that the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side. Moreover, it can suppress that the driven side slide member 3430 falls.

  That is, when the center of gravity position of the driven side slide member 3430 is at the center in the left-right direction, the driven side slide member 3430 may wobble clockwise or counterclockwise due to vibration or the like. If the driven-side slide member 3430 is tilted clockwise when viewed from the front in a state where the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side, the locking convex portion 3431a may be displaced from the bar member 3481.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the gravity center position of the driven side slide member 3430 is shifted to the left side of the front view, the driven side slide member 3430 is inclined clockwise from the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) due to vibration or the like. Is suppressed.

  Therefore, the latching convex portion 3431a easily tilts in the direction of approaching the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the abutment of the latching convex portion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained, so that the latching convex portion 3431a becomes the rod member 3481. It is suppressed that it slips off.

  Accordingly, the driven-side slide member 3430 can be stably maintained at the raised position without disposing the solenoid 3480 on both sides of the driven-side slide member 3430 in the left-right direction, so that the number of disposed solenoids 3480 can be reduced. The operation of the driven side slide member 3430 can be made favorable.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the bar member 3481 is in an immersive state, the driven side slide member 3430 falls. In the process in which the driven-side slide member 3430 falls, the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the lowering restriction member 415 are displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the hook-like portion 434 is caught by the lowering restriction member 415 and causes a malfunction. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the hook-shaped portion 434 falls in a state of being in contact with the separation inclined portion 417f of the rise restricting member 417, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated outwardly (counterclockwise in FIG. 87) ( Released state).

  As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engaging claw portion 417e of the rise restricting member 417, The hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed so as to face the vertical direction (engaged state).

  As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the state is changed from the released state to the engaged state when the ascent restricting member 417 is rotated with respect to the bowl-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 3430, so that there is no change in posture. Increase the load and posture change required to change the release state and engagement state compared to the case where the release state and engagement state are changed by the elasticity of the member be able to. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the engaged state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven-side slide member 3430 and the ascending restriction member 417 are engaged.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated by the fall of the driven side slide member 3430. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive device in order to form the engagement state of the ascending restriction member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the opposing wall portion 422f2 projects from the lower end portion of the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 in the downward inclined position. However, the driving-side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment is curved. An opposing wall portion 4422f2 disposed to face the wall portion 422f1 is configured as a planar wall portion extending in the vertical direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member 4420 as seen in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a). FIG. 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420. 89 (a) and 89 (c), the drive-side slide member 4420 is viewed in cross-section at the center position of the connecting member 4424 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 89 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). 89 (a) and 89 (b) illustrate the downwardly inclined state of the connecting member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) illustrates the upwardly inclined state of the connecting member 4424.

  The connection member 4424 includes an extended claw portion 4424f that extends rightward from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b.

  The extended claw portion 4424f is disposed to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in the upwardly inclined state, is concavely curved in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and as shown in FIG. (B) Left and right direction) A pair of recessed portions are provided in the intermediate portion.

  The 2nd channel | path formation member 4422 is provided with the opposing wall part 4422f2 arrange | positioned facing the curved wall part 422f1. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion extending in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the recessed portion is disposed in a manner that does not interfere with the extending claw portion 4424f and is shown in FIG. 89 (a). In the state, it extends to a position overlapping with the extended claw portion 4424f.

  According to the present embodiment, in the downwardly inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (a), there are no portions (projections or the like) that are damaged when the sphere collides with the path of the sphere. When a ball is sent from 520 to the connecting member 4424, the member can be prevented from being damaged by colliding with the ball.

  In the upward inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (b), the extended claw portion 4424f and the opposing wall portion 4422f2 guide the sphere, so that the sphere can be prevented from being clogged in the vicinity of the sensor member 422c.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 179. In this control example, regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in a probable variation state, the normal symbol time-short state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the normal symbol normal state (low probability state). ing. More specifically, it is compared with a case where a big win is obtained by a special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol 1 lottery) executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64. Then, if the winner of the special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol 2 lottery) executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a, The jackpot type that can be acquired (the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened) is easily selected. That is, in the short time state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is easily opened, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily executed. It becomes easy to win the prize ball. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player in the short time state of the normal symbol. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, it becomes difficult to open the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is difficult to be executed (the lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed). Therefore, it is difficult to obtain a large amount of prize balls even if it is a big hit. Therefore, the normal state of the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the short time state of the normal symbol.

  In addition, although details will be described later, in this control example, when a big hit is made in the short time state of the normal symbol, the short time state of the normal symbol is set with a high probability (for example, 97.5%) after the end of the big hit. This short time state of normal symbols continues until the next big hit. That is, when the big win is made once in the short time state of the normal symbol, the big hit and the short time state of the normal symbol are repeated with a high probability (97.5%). Therefore, as long as the short-time state continues to be set after the jackpot, it is possible to repeatedly win the jackpot without reducing the number of possessed balls, which is an advantageous state in which a large amount of winning balls can be expected. Hereinafter, a state in which a short time state of a normal symbol that is continued until the next big hit is set is referred to as a “renso mode”.

  On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, even if the jackpot is won, it is difficult to set the short time state of the normal symbol after the jackpot ends. Further, even if the normal symbol time-short state is given, most of the set time-short states are completed before the special symbol lottery is executed seven times. That is, most of the short time periods of normal symbols set after jackpot are 7 times or less (1 time or 7 times). As mentioned above, if you win the jackpot during the short state at this time, you will move to the “renso mode” with a high probability (97.5%), but you will win again with a limited number of lotteries after the jackpot ends. Since it is difficult to become, in many cases, it returns to the normal state of a normal symbol without making a big hit. That is, it is easy to repeat the normal state (low probability state) of a normal symbol in which the number of held balls is likely to decrease and the jackpot where it is difficult to obtain a prize ball (the jackpot that opens the first variable winning device 82a). Therefore, the normal state of the normal symbol is a disadvantageous state for the player. Hereinafter, for the convenience of explanation, the normal state (low probability state) of a normal symbol is referred to as “normal mode”. Further, the short-running state with a limited number of times that may shift after the end of the jackpot (which ends when a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries are executed after the end of the jackpot) is referred to as a “preparation mode”.

  By providing a “renso mode” which is advantageous to the player and a “normal mode” which is disadvantageous to the player, the game can be sharpened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous.

  First, with reference to FIG. 90 to FIG. 96, aspects of various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 90 and FIG. 91 (a) are diagrams showing an example of the fluctuation display (fluctuation pattern effect) executed when the special symbol lottery is executed in the “normal mode” (normal state of the normal symbol). FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. 92 are diagrams showing an example of the production mode executed in the jackpot when the jackpot in the “normal mode”, and FIGS. 93 to 96 are jackpots. In the case of the transition to the “preparation mode” after the end (one or seven time saving periods are given), an effect mode suggesting whether or not to transition from the “preparation mode” to the “renso mode” It is the figure which showed an example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 90 and FIG. 91A, a description will be given of an effect mode in a case where the variable display is executed in the “normal mode”. In the “normal mode”, the number (number) displayed on the effect section 331 of the upper elevating unit 300 notifies whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. More specifically, any one of five types of numbers (predetermined) selected in advance by the player is displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d constituting the effect unit 331. The jackpot is notified. On the other hand, when a number different from any of the five types of predetermined numbers is displayed on at least one of the display units 331a to 331d, the special symbol is informed.

  A combination of five types of numbers indicating the special symbol lottery results is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), a combination of five types of numbers is placed inside a vertically long, substantially rectangular small region Ds2 formed on the right side of the front view in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (Lucky number) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 90 (a), five types “2”, “7”, “13”, “17”, and “25” are displayed as combinations of five numbers (lucky numbers) determined in advance. ing. In addition, on the large screen Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the characters “Let's get a lucky number !!” are displayed. With these display contents, five types of numbers (“2”, “7”, “13”, “17”, “25”) displayed as lucky numbers are displayed on the effect section 331 to display special symbols. The player can easily recognize that it will be a big hit. The five types of lucky numbers displayed in the small area Ds2 can be selected by the player from the game menu screen, for example. This game menu screen is a screen displayed by operating the frame button 22 in a game stop state, for example. By configuring the lucky number to be selectable by the player, the combination of numbers (designs) displayed on the effect section 331 when the special design is won is set to the player's favorite numbers (designs). Can do. That is, the winning symbol can be changed according to each player's preference.

  In addition, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a reserved symbol indicating the current number of reserved balls is displayed inside a vertically long, substantially rectangular small region Ds1 formed on the left side when viewed from the front. In the example of FIG. 90 (a), since the number of reserved balls is four, four reserved symbols displayed as black circles are displayed in the small area Ds1. By visually recognizing the number of reserved symbols, the player can easily recognize the number of reserved balls.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (a), when lottery for a special symbol is started, variable display of symbols is executed on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, a number different from the lucky number is displayed on at least one display section (see FIG. 90B). FIG. 90 (b) shows the display unit 331a and the display unit 331a and the display unit 331c and the display unit 331c with different numbers (“8” and “1”) different from the lucky numbers in the display of the change of deviation. The part 331d shows an example in which the lucky numbers (“17” and “2”) are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the off-combination combination is stopped and displayed on the effect production unit 331, the characters "sorry ..." appear in the large area Dm on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the lottery result of the special symbol this time has been missed.

  In addition, the number displayed on each display part 331a-331d of the production | presentation part 331 is set to a different aspect by whether it is a lucky number. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90B, when any number defined as the lucky number is displayed, white numbers are displayed (display units 331a and 331d). On the other hand, when a number different from the lucky number is displayed, the number is displayed in black characters (display units 331b and 331c). By changing the number display mode according to whether or not the number is a lucky number, the player can more easily recognize whether or not the number displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d is a lucky number. be able to.

  In this control example, the lucky number is displayed in white and the numbers other than the lucky number are displayed in black. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lucky number may be displayed in red letters so that it can be easily distinguished whether it is a lucky number, the lucky number background is set to red, and the numbers other than the lucky number are set to white. By doing so, it may be configured to be easily distinguishable whether it is a lucky number, or may be configured to be easily distinguishable whether it is a lucky number by increasing the character size of the lucky number.

  As shown in FIG. 91A, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, one of the five types of lucky numbers is displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d. In the example of FIG. 91A, among the five numbers (“2”, “7”, “13”, “17”, “25”) that are lucky numbers, “17”, “25”, “ “2” and “13” are displayed as white numbers. In addition, a lucky number is displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d, and characters “successful!” Are displayed on the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With these display contents, it is possible to easily recognize that the player has won a big hit.

  In this control example, four types out of the five types of lucky numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed on the display units 331a to 331d one by one to notify the jackpot. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports a jackpot by not defining a lucky number but displaying only the same number on each display part 331a-331d. As a result, it is only necessary to focus on whether or not the same numbers are aligned, and it is not necessary to collate the lucky number with the numbers displayed on the respective display units 331a to 331d. Can be made easier. Further, for example, the symbol variation display may not necessarily be executed by the display units 331a to 331d, and the symbol variation display may be executed by the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, since each display part 331a-331d can be abbreviate | omitted, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, the yield rate during production can be improved by reducing the number of parts. In addition, the failure rate can be reduced.

  Next, the effect executed in the jackpot during the “normal mode” will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, the first variable winning device 82a repeats the opening for 0.6 seconds and the closing for 0.9 seconds 20 times per round (opening pattern A). ) And an opening pattern (opening pattern B) that opens once for 0.052 seconds per round. 91 (b) and 92, the jackpot effect when the opening pattern A is set will be described.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the jackpot in which the release pattern A is set. Here, in the “normal mode”, when the big hit type for which the opening pattern A is set is selected, first, the drive side slide member 420 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 are connected. Placed in position. Thereafter, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern A. By connecting the driving side slide member 420 and the first passage forming member 520 before setting the opening pattern A, all the balls that have won the first variable prize-winning device 82a are shown as the first passage forming member. It can flow down to the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 via 520. In this control example, each time a ball that has entered the first variable prize-winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 (every time the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422). A time-shortening suggestion that suggests whether or not the time-short state of the normal symbol is set is executed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the characters “Look for lucky numbers!” Are displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the lucky numbers displayed when notifying the jackpot are continuously displayed on the display units 331a to 331d even during the jackpot. In addition, in the effect unit 422a of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, a variable display of symbols is executed. By these display contents, among the five types of lucky numbers (refer to the small area Ds2), the remaining one type of numbers different from the numbers displayed on the display units 331a to 331d is displayed on the effect unit 422a. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the time saving state advantageous to the player is set. The symbol change display executed in the rendering unit 422a is stopped every time the sphere reaches the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 (the passage of the sphere is detected by the sensor member 422c).

  FIG. 92A is a diagram showing a case where a ball that has entered the first variable prize-winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 and a disconnection is notified. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when an outage is notified, the lucky number (see the small area Ds2) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different from the effect unit 422a. 3 "is stopped and displayed. In addition, for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the characters “failure ...” are displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is uncertain whether or not the time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot. Even if the release is notified, if the release period of the release pattern A remains, the change display of the symbols (see FIG. 91B) is resumed in the effect section 422a. That is, as the ball is entered (winned) into the first variable winning device 82a, the variation display is executed more frequently, so that it is possible to make the player want to positively win the ball into the first variable winning device 82a. . Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing a case where a ball that has entered the first variable prize-winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 and the time-short state of the normal symbol is notified. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when it is determined that the sphere has passed the sensor member 422c of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, “7”, which is one type of lucky number, is given to the effect section 422a. Stopped display. That is, out of the five types of lucky numbers, numbers different from the four types of lucky numbers that are stopped and displayed on the display units 331a to 331d in order to notify the jackpot are stopped and displayed. In addition, for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the characters “Great success !! Roulette chance GET !!” are displayed. With these displays, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the mode is shifted to the “preparation mode” (ordinary symbol time-short state) after the jackpot ends.

  In this control example, a number (symbol) different from the lucky number is displayed on the effect section 422a when the mode does not shift to the “preparation mode”, and is defined as the lucky number when the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. Although one number (symbol) is configured to be displayed on the rendering unit 422a, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect may be executed in which an image of a wall is displayed on the effect unit 422a at the start of a big hit, and the displayed wall gradually collapses every time a passage of a sphere is detected by the sensor member 422c. And as the wall collapses, the lucky number displayed behind the wall is exposed, and the wall is completely collapsed so that the lucky number can be obtained ("Preparation mode" is notified). May be. In this way, each time a ball that has won the first variable prize-winning device 82a is detected by the sensor member 422c, the player can perform an effect as if the acquisition of a lucky number is approaching. On the other hand, the ball can be launched more positively during the jackpot. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be increased.

  In this control example, when the “preparation mode” is notified, the lucky number is displayed on the effect unit 422a. However, the numbers (designs) displayed on the effect unit 422a are not necessarily lucky. It is not limited to numbers. A symbol unrelated to the lucky number may be displayed. For example, a symbol with a letter “V” may be displayed to notify the transition to the “preparation mode”.

  In this control example, in the jackpot where “open pattern A” is set, the variable display is executed every time the sphere is detected by the sensor member 422c. However, the variable display (“ Notification of whether or not to shift to “preparation mode” may not be performed. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a variable display only once during a jackpot. Specifically, for example, an effect (variation display) is executed to determine whether or not a lucky number is displayed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls passes through the sensor member 422c. Also good. With this configuration, the ball can be launched more actively in order to quickly know whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode”. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved. In this case, when the number of spheres that have passed through the sensor member 422c before the final round of the jackpot ends is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10), the “preparation mode” is entered during the ending period. It may be configured to notify whether or not the transition is made, or may be configured to notify whether or not the transition is made to the “preparation mode” when the big hit is completed and the first variation display is executed. As a result, even when a predetermined number of balls cannot be entered into the first variable winning device 82a during the jackpot, it is notified whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode”. Therefore, the player can be made to accurately grasp the game state after the big hit. Further, it is not necessary to fix the number of balls to be awarded to the first variable prize-winning device 82a before the presentation (variation display) of whether or not the lucky number is displayed, and “open pattern A”. May be varied by lottery or the like every time a big hit is set.

  In the present control example, in the jackpot where the “open pattern A” is set, the variable display is performed every time the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which performs a variable display, whenever the passage of a ball | bowl is detected by the sensor member 422c predetermined times (for example, 2 times, 5 times, etc.). With this configuration, even when the ball continuously wins the first variable winning device 82a, it is possible to leave a sufficient time interval between the completion of each change and the start of the next change. (It is possible to prevent the start condition of the next fluctuation from being satisfied during the fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to make the player confirm the result of each variation display more reliably.

  Although not shown in the figure, whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” is immediately notified in the case of a big hit of an opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which the opening for 0.052 seconds per round is performed only once. The That is, when shifting to the “preparation mode” after the big win, the lucky number is displayed on the effect section 422a when the first variable winning device 82a is opened regardless of whether or not the ball has won. On the other hand, when not shifting to the “preparation mode”, a number (symbol) different from the lucky number is displayed when the first variable winning device 82a is opened.

  The jackpot in which the “open pattern B” is set will be described in detail. The jackpot for which “open pattern B” is set is composed of an opening period of 3 seconds, a round period of 0.052 seconds (for two rounds), an interval period of 0.5 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds. Has been. That is, the jackpot ends in about 6.6 seconds. Using this 6.6 seconds, the effect display unit 422a executes the symbol variation display. Then, when shifting to the “preparation mode” after the jackpot, the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the effect section 422a when 5.6 seconds have elapsed, and the lucky number is continuously displayed for the remaining approximately one second of the jackpot. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the player has shifted to the “preparation mode”. On the other hand, when shifting to the “normal mode” after the big hit, a number different from the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the effect section 422a. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize the shift to the “normal mode”. By executing the effect of whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” during the jackpot in which the “open pattern B” is set, the effect section 422a can be focused during the jackpot period. That is, even if the “opening pattern B” in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened for only a short time (0.052 seconds) (that is, it is very difficult to win a prize ball) is set, During the opening period, the player's attention can be diverted from the first variable winning device 82a. Therefore, since it is difficult to recognize that the “open pattern B” is a set big hit, it can be recognized as if it is one mode of the variation effect selected in the “normal mode”. That is, the player can be made to recognize as if the mode is shifted directly from the “normal mode” to the “preparation mode”. Accordingly, the “opening pattern A” is a big hit that is set, and the lucky number is given to the effect section 422a by the time suggestion effect executed by winning the ball to the first variable winning device 82a during the big win. Even if you do not go through multiple stages of being displayed, it can be recognized that there is a case to shift to "preparation mode", so whether it is easier for the player to shift to "preparation mode" Can be felt. Therefore, the motivation for the game of the player can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96, an example of an effect in the case of shifting to the “preparation mode” after the jackpot ends (one or seven time-short periods are given) will be described. As described above, in this control example, when a big hit is made in the short-time state of a normal symbol, the “long game mode” (the next big hit) is advantageous to the player with a high probability (for example, 97.5%) after the big hit. It shifts to a normal symbol time-short state that continues until In the “renso mode”, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. When the special symbol 2 is won by lottery, the jackpot type (probable jackpot H to K, normal jackpot B) that opens the second specific winning opening 65a is selected, so that more prize balls are given to the player. Can be earned. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with one goal of shifting to the advantageous “renso mode”.

  In order to shift from the “normal mode” to the “renso mode”, it is basically necessary to shift to the “preparation mode” and win a jackpot during the “preparation mode”. For this reason, whether or not it is a big hit in the “preparation mode” is one of the most important scenes in the game because it affects the degree of advantage of the player who plays the game in the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, in this control example, in this “preparation mode”, a relatively large (flashy) “rensou mode suggestion effect” (see FIGS. 94 and 95) accompanied by the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 (see FIG. 45). Is configured to run.

  Although the details will be described later, in this “renso mode suggestion effect”, the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 during the rotation operation of the rotary member 640 (see FIG. 45) configured to simulate roulette. Depending on the type of the pocket (display plate 646 and partition plate 647) in which the sphere B falls, an effect of notifying whether or not the mode has been shifted to the “continuous villa mode” is executed. More specifically, 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 are divided into hit pockets and release pockets, and the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 falls into the hit pocket. By doing so, it is notified that the mode has been shifted to the “renso mode”. A back LED 625 is provided on the back side of the rotating member 640 (see FIG. 97). The back LED 625 is controlled to be lighted so that the back side of the hit pocket is in a lighting state and the back side of the detached pocket is in a light-off state. Therefore, by visually recognizing the lighted pocket, the player can easily recognize the position of the hit pocket.

  Specifically, the “renso mode suggestion effect” includes an effect of setting (lighting) a winning pocket (effect of increasing the lucky number) and an effect of throwing the ball B into one of the pockets of the rotating member 640 (roulette chance) Production) and ending production. In the lucky number increasing effect, each time a ball enters the second entrance 640a, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number). By increasing the number of hit pockets, it is possible to make the player feel as if it has become easier to shift to the “renso mode”, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the lottery to determine whether or not to increase the winning pocket, whether or not the transition to the “renso mode” has been confirmed (whether it is a chance variation of the big hit or the “renso mode” in the holding ball) Depending on whether or not there is a probability variation jackpot, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is varied. Specifically, when the transition to the “renso mode” is confirmed, the winning pocket increases with a high probability (a rate of 25% every time a ball enters the second entrance 640a). Is determined. On the other hand, if the transition to the “renso mode” has not been confirmed, or it has been decided to return to the “normal mode” without transitioning to the “renso mode” (the last in the set short-term period) If the special symbol lottery is off, the increase in the winning pocket is determined with a low probability (a rate of 5% every time the ball enters the second entrance 640a). When the transition to the “Spanso mode” is confirmed, the winning pocket is more likely to be increased, so that the player's expectation for the “Spansole mode” is improved by increasing the winning pocket. Can do.

  Before the winning pocket is increased, a pocket with the same number as the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as the winning pocket. That is, the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used to notify the special symbol jackpot in the “normal mode” (see FIG. 91 (a)) and to the “preparation mode” after the jackpot ends. In addition to a role for notifying whether or not to shift (see FIG. 92B), it also serves as a role for notifying whether or not the mode is shifted to the “village mode”. Since the lucky number is used for various notifications that are advantageous to the player, the player can easily understand the result of each effect by grasping the lucky number. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more understandable presentation. In addition, a special symbol jackpot notification in the “normal mode”, a “preparation mode” (normal symbol time-saving state) executed in the jackpot, and a “ream mode” executed in the “preparation mode” With the notification, an effect for the purpose of acquiring all lucky numbers is executed. Therefore, these three types of different notifications can make the player feel as if they were one production. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect with a sense of unity.

  The details of the lucky number increase effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the lucky number increasing effect. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), during the lucky number increase effect, the characters “Preparing roulette chance” are displayed on the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the roulette chance effect is executed by the rotating member 640 configured to imitate the roulette.

  In addition, below the letters “Preparing for roulette chance”, the letters “Right-stroke to increase your lucky number !!” are displayed. When this character is displayed, the player is informed that there is a possibility that the winning pocket may be increased by striking the ball toward the right side of the game board 13 (right hitting) while the lucky number increasing effect is being executed. Can be notified. Therefore, in the “preparation mode” in which the lucky number increase effect is set, the player can make a right-handed strike, so that a special symbol 2 lottery that is advantageous to the player in the short time state of the normal symbol is executed. It becomes easy. Therefore, since the game can be performed under the player's advantageous conditions, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 93 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the winning pocket (lucky number) increases in the lucky number increase effect. As shown in FIG. 93, during the execution of the lucky number increase effect, when the winning (entry) to the second entrance 640a is detected and the winning pocket winning lottery is won, an additional symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The winning pocket (lucky number) is notified. That is, the characters “10 GET !!” are displayed in the large area Dm. Thereby, since it can alert | report that the winning pocket increased one place with respect to a player, a player can be pleased. When the increase of the hit pocket is notified, the back side of the hit pocket is set to the lighting state. Thereby, the position of the hit pocket in the rotating member 640 can be easily determined.

  In the first control example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number) when the ball enters the second entrance 640a. The opportunity to increase the pocket (lucky number) is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs the lottery of whether to increase a winning pocket (lucky number) triggered by having passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and according to elapsed time (for example, end of jackpot It is good also as a structure which performs the lottery of whether to increase a hit | chucking pocket (lucky number) every 3 second (s) from, or according to the number of the ball | bowl ejected (for example, every time 5 ball | bowl is launched) It is good also as a structure which performs the lottery of whether to increase a hit pocket (lucky number).

  In the first control example, during the execution of the lucky number increase effect, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is made different depending on whether or not the transition to the “renso mode” is confirmed. However, the variation of the lottery probability may be further increased. For example, when the transition to “renso mode” is confirmed and when it is undecided whether or not to transition to “renso mode” (the number of start prizes in the short-running state is the short-term period The probability (ratio) that the increase in the hit pocket is determined may be different between the case where it is determined that the mode is not shifted to the “ream home mode”. Specifically, for example, when the transition to the “renso mode” is confirmed at the time of the lottery, a relatively high probability (for example, 25% of the case where the player enters the second entrance 640a) If the winning pocket (lucky number) is increased at a ratio of (the ratio), and it is determined that the mode does not shift to the “renso mode”, the probability is relatively high (for example, the second entrance 640a). The winning pocket may be increased at a rate of 5% when the ball enters the ball. In addition, when it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “renso mode”, the probability between the above two cases (for example, a ratio of 10% when entering the second entrance 640a) It may be configured so that the hit pocket is increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have variations in how to increase the winning pockets, so that the interest in the lucky number increase production is further improved. In this case, the probability that the hit pocket is increased may be varied according to the number of time reductions set as the “preparation mode”. That is, when the “preparation mode” with one short-time period is set, the probability that the pocket is increased is lower than when the “preparation mode” with seven short-term periods is set. May be. More specifically, for example, the winning pocket (lucky number) may be increased at a rate of 8% when the shortening period is 1 and 12% when the shortening period is 7 times. As a result, it is possible to predict a short time period from the increase of the winning pocket (lucky number), so it can be expected to shift to the “renso mode” by increasing the winning pocket. In addition, it is possible to expect 7 short time periods that are advantageous to the player (there are many opportunities to shift to the “renso” mode).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, the roulette chance effect that is one of the effects constituting the “renso mode suggestion effect” will be described. In this roulette chance effect, as described above, it is an effect for notifying whether or not the mode shifts to the “village mode” depending on whether or not the ball B falls into the winning pocket.

  When the roulette chance effect is executed, first, a character “ROULET chance” is displayed on the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and a “sphere in a glowing pocket is displayed below the character. When it falls, the text “Renso mode” is displayed. This allows the player to understand that the ball B falls into the pocket whose back side is set to the lit state among the pockets of the rotating member 640 and shifts to the “ream mode”. .

  FIG. 94B is a view showing a state in which the arm member 664 of the pitching device 650 is rotated (see FIG. 65) and the swinging motion is performed on the holding piece 677 where the ball B is in the protruding position. In FIG. 94 (b), the hitting pocket of the rotating member 640 is indicated by hatching, and the detached pocket is indicated by white.

  In the roulette chance effect, when the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second) or less, the ball B is dropped into a target pocket (either a disengagement pocket or a hit pocket). (The holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position). By causing the sphere B to swing once on the holding piece 677 and dropping the sphere B after the period of swing becomes small, it is possible to make it seem as if the sphere B is falling naturally. That is, when the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677, attention can be paid to the operation of the ball B, so that the player's interest in roulette chance performance can be improved. In the following description, among the roulette chance effects, a series of effects from when the ball B is thrown toward the holding piece 677 until it falls into one of the pockets is referred to as a swing effect.

  FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the sphere B comes off and falls into the pocket. Here, when the ball B comes off and falls into the pocket, specifically, when the swing effect is executed without winning a big win in the special symbol lottery during the “preparation mode” (the start of the swing effect) At the time, the deviation fluctuation is being executed or the fluctuation is stopped). In this case, since the transition to the “long play mode” has not been determined at the start of the swing effect, control is performed so that the ball B falls into the release pocket.

  When the swing effect is started without the big hit of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. The ball B is controlled to fall from the holding piece 677 in accordance with the arrangement. In addition, the word “sorry” is displayed on the rendering unit 422a of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the transition from the “preparation mode” to the “renso mode” has failed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined at the start of the swing effect that the transition to the “ream home mode” is established, as shown in FIG. The ball B is controlled to fall from the holding piece 677 in accordance with the arrangement of the pockets. In addition, the word “great success” is displayed on the rendering unit 422 a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the shift to the “renso mode”.

  When the ball B comes off and falls into the hitting pocket or the hitting pocket, the cantilever plate 683 of the guide member 680 is pushed down by the weight of the ball B as described above, so that the limit switch is turned on. By detecting the ON state of the limit switch, it is possible to easily determine that the ball B has fallen normally. When the fall of the sphere B is detected, the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 is stopped. In other words, the pocket with the number (identification information) indicating the result of the current “renso mode suggestion effect” (the pocket where the ball B has dropped) is stopped immediately below the holding piece 677 as the ball B drops. The Therefore, the player can easily recognize the result of the effect by observing the same position (directly below the holding piece 677) in each “renso mode suggestion effect”. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect in which the result of the effect is easier to understand.

  As described above, the arrangement of the pockets while the rotating member 640 is rotating is monitored by monitoring the outputs of the detection sensors A to F (see FIG. 76) arranged on the guide member 680. It is determined by the combination. That is, the type of the pocket disposed immediately below the holding piece 677 is determined by the combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F (rotational position detection sensor 684). In the following description, the position immediately below the holding piece 677 is referred to as a drop position.

  In this control example, in the state where the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677, the pocket type of the drop position is specified (determined) from the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F. Then, according to the discrimination result, the type of the pocket (the pocket adjacent to the pocket currently placed at the fall position) placed next to the fall position after the pocket currently placed at the fall position is discriminated. Is done. Next, the pocket type to be placed at the falling position matches the pocket type (whether it is a hit pocket or a disengagement pocket) that causes the ball B to fall in the present swing effect, and the ball B swings. When the period of the operation is a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) or less, the sphere B is dropped with respect to the pocket arranged next to the dropping position.

  Here, not the type of the pocket at the drop position but the type of the pocket to be arranged at the next drop position by the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is actually determined after the ball B is determined to be dropped. This is because it takes time until the ball reaches the pocket at the drop position. In other words, the drive motor (holding piece motor) 675 is driven to cause a time lag until the ball B actually falls after the holding piece 677 starts to move to the immersive position. If it is configured to determine the pocket type of the drop position and execute the drop control of the sphere B (the movement of the holding piece 677 to the immersive position), the time until the sphere B actually drops becomes long. For example, the ball B may fall after the target pocket passes. Further, for example, while the ball B is falling on the ball sending passage 655a, the partition plate 647 provided on the right side of the front face of the pocket arranged at the dropping position is moved by the rotation operation, so that the ball B is sent. The passage 655a and the partition plate 647 may be sandwiched, which may hinder the rotation operation of the rotating member 640.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the type of the pocket to be placed next at the drop position and the drop control of the sphere B based on the discrimination result are executed before the pocket is placed at the drop position. It is configured to do. That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersive position at a timing at which the ball B can be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the dropping position). And can be immersive. Therefore, the sphere B can be more reliably dropped into the targeted type of pocket. Therefore, the ball B falls into the hit pocket even though it does not shift to the “renso mode”, or conversely, the transition to the “renso mode” is confirmed, It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from coming off and falling into the pocket.

  In this control example, the type of the pocket arranged at the dropping position next to the pocket arranged at the dropping position is determined, and the falling control of the sphere B is executed. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the type of the pocket two or three pockets ahead of the current drop position is determined in advance, and the drop control of the ball B with respect to the determined pocket is executed. With this configuration, the drop control can be executed with more margin, so that the ball B can be reliably dropped with respect to the target type of pocket.

  When the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is stopped based on the detection that the ball B has come off or dropped into the hit pocket, and after a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, An ending indicating the end of the “mode suggestion effect” is started. In the ending, the result of the effect is notified again on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the rotating member 640 is set in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotation operation in the “ream mode suggestion effect” (that is, the clockwise direction in front view). Rotate. This rotating operation is performed until the rotating member 640 is disposed at a position where the ball B dropped from the holding piece 677 can be rolled to the return passage 655b (for example, five pockets counterclockwise). continue. In the process of rotating the rotating member 640, when the pocket in which the sphere B has fallen in the upper right direction of the front view with respect to the return passage 655b is arranged, the sphere B falls from the opening of the pocket to the return passage 655b. . When the sphere B falls into the return passage 655b, the sphere B rolls along the inclination of the rolling portion 655b1 and is disposed on the sphere holding portion 652. In this way, during the ending, the ball B is returned to a state where it can be thrown by the pitching device 650, so that the effect of dropping the ball B into any of the pockets is executed in each “renso mode suggestion effect”. can do.

  When the rotation operation for returning the sphere B executed during the ending to the sphere holding unit 652 is completed, the rotation member 640 is kept in a stopped state until the “ream mode suggestion effect” is executed next. Be drunk. That is, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 after the “renso mode suggestion effect” is completed differs depending on the pocket in which the ball B has fallen. The time until the end of the rotation operation can be shortened by adopting a configuration in which the rotation of the rotation member 640 is not returned to a predetermined position but is simply rotated by five pockets from the position where the ball B is dropped. Therefore, the operation of the rotating member 640 can be reliably terminated during the ending of the “renso mode suggestion effect”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, an extra effect that is executed in order to make the player expect to shift to the “preparation mode” or the “renso mode” in the “normal mode” will be described. The term “addition” here means adding (adding) the number of winning pockets (number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance production of “renso mode suggestion production”. If a “renso mode suggestion effect” is executed in the meantime, the number of hit pockets is increased by the number added in the additional effect. By adding a winning pocket (lucky number), it is possible to make it seem as if it is easier to win in the roulette chance effect, so that the player's expectation for the roulette chance effect can be enhanced.

  Whether or not to perform the extra effect is determined by a lottery (an extra lottery) executed when the winning at the first entrance 64 is suspended in the “normal mode”. In this extra lottery, the ratio of determining the extra effect differs according to the contents of each reserved ball. Specifically, the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “preparation mode” (a jackpot in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set) and the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “renso” mode are included in the holding ball. (The probability variation jackpot in the short time state of the normal symbol) exists (when it is confirmed that the roulette chance effect is successful), the execution of the extra effect is determined at the highest rate (25%). On the other hand, when the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “renso mode” and the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “preparation mode” are not included in the holding ball (when the roulette chance effect is not executed) The execution of the extra effect is determined at the lowest rate (5%). Furthermore, when the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “preparation mode” is not included in the holding ball and the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “preparation mode” is included (only the execution of the roulette chance effect) Is confirmed and the production result is unconfirmed), the execution of the extra production is determined at an intermediate ratio (15%) between the two cases described above.

  In this way, since the lottery result included in the holding ball is more advantageous for the player, it is configured so that the execution of the extra effect is more easily determined. It can be expected that the game will be advantageous for the player by digesting the holding ball. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  Next, a specific aspect of the extra effect will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 96 (a), when the number of reserved balls increases in the “normal mode”, the number of reserved symbols (designated with black circles) displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 increases by one. It becomes three. In addition, when the execution of the extra effect is determined by the extra lottery executed when the number of the reserved balls increases, the characters “Add !!!! + 1” are displayed on the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, “+1” indicating the cumulative number of additions is displayed below the lucky number displayed in the small area Ds2. The display of the additional number for the small area Ds2 is performed until an effect that increases the number of pockets per number added in the “renso mode suggestion effect” is executed when the “renso mode suggestion effect” is executed. Continue to be displayed. On the other hand, when the extra effect is executed but the “ream mode suggestion effect” is not executed (when the holding ball does not include the jackpot that sets the short-time state), the execution of the extra effect is decided. The cumulative number of additions continues to be displayed until the reserved balls that have been triggered are digested (the lottery of special symbols based on the reserved balls ends).

  FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when one winning pocket (lucky number) is added by the extra effect, and then the “renso mode suggestion effect” is started during the digestion of the reserved ball. is there. As described above, the “renso mode suggestion effect” is executed when the special symbol is a big hit in the “normal mode” and the short time state of the normal symbol is set after the big win is over. Therefore, at the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”, the lucky numbers (that is, “17”, “25”, “2”, “13”) displayed at the time of the big hit notification to each of the display units 331a to 331d. In addition, the lucky number displayed when the “preparation mode” is notified (that is, the symbol “7”) continues to be displayed on the effect section 422a (see FIG. 96B).

  In addition, when the “ream home mode suggestion effect” is started in the added state, an effect of notifying the lucky number added in the additional effect in the “normal mode” is executed as a part of the lucky number increase effect. The Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the characters “Lucky number added” are displayed for the large area Dm. Then, a character “5GET !!” is displayed below the character. Since this character is displayed inside a balloon that is generated from the location where the cumulative number of additions is displayed, the player has had a lucky number of “5” added by the addition effect before the big hit I can recognize that. Further, the pocket of the rotating member 640 corresponding to the lucky number notified by this effect is newly set as a winning pocket. That is, the pockets with the number “5” are set in a lighting state. By performing an effect in which the winning pocket (lucky number) increases, it is possible to feel as if the chance of being notified of the winning (transition to the “village mode”) is increased in the roulette chance effect that is subsequently executed. be able to. Therefore, a player's sense of expectation for roulette chance production can be enhanced.

  Thus, in the present control example, in the “normal mode”, an extra effect that is easy to be executed as the lottery result advantageous to the player is held is provided. Thereby, the player can be expected to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the extra effect. For example, an extra effect is usually executed when a jackpot type for which “preparation mode” is set after the jackpot is put on hold, so it is usually a big jackpot (when the bonus effect is not executed). The game can be played with higher expectations. This is because, if the jackpot is reached, the expectation to shift to the “preparation mode” will increase.

  In addition, if the player wins the game as expected, the player can recognize that the player has a higher expectation level for shifting to the “preparation mode” than when normal (when the extra production is not executed). In the jackpot game, it can be expected more strongly that the lucky number is displayed on the effect section 422a. In addition, at the time of performing the extra effect, the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “renso mode” is pending compared to the case where the transition to the “renso mode” is not confirmed. Since the execution ratio of the extra production is configured to be high, when the “preparation mode” is notified as expected by the player, the player expects that the transition to the “renso mode” is higher than usual. Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the “renso mode”. Therefore, by executing the extra effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation step by step, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In this control example, it is confirmed that the transition to the “ream mode” is confirmed within the range of the holding ball, and the transition to the “preparation mode” is confirmed within the range of the holding ball. The ratio (probability) at which the extra effect is executed is different in the three cases of the case where even the “preparation mode” is not shifted (25%, 10%, 5%, respectively), but the extra effect is executed. The lottery probability of whether or not may be divided into more detailed cases. More specifically, for example, when all of the reserved balls are out of play, an additional effect is executed at a rate (probability) of 3%, and the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot is included in the held balls, and the jackpot type is When only the jackpot type that shifts to the “normal mode” after the jackpot is included, an additional effect may be executed at a rate (probability) of 5%. 7% if the reserve ball includes a jackpot type that shifts to “preparation mode” and it is determined that the game will not shift to “renso mode” at the time of the extra lottery You may comprise so that a production | presentation may be performed by the ratio (probability). Here, the case where it is confirmed that the mode is not shifted to the “renso” mode is, for example, in a state where only the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot type to which one short time period is given is suspended, This is the case, for example, when a lottery is executed by adding a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery result. Furthermore, when only the transition to the “preparation mode” is confirmed at the time of the extra lottery, the extra presentation is determined at a rate (probability) of 10%, If the transition has been confirmed, an additional effect may be executed at a rate (probability) of 25%.

  By comprising in this way, it can classify | categorize into a finer stage and can have the expectation with respect to various advantageous states. That is, it can be expected to be a big hit at the time when the extra effect is executed more than usual (when the extra effect is not executed). This is because a big hit will increase the degree of expectation for the transition to the “preparation mode” and the transition to the “renso mode”. And when it is a big hit as expected by the player, it can be expected that the shift to the “preparation mode” is notified more than usual in the big hit. This is because if the transition is made to the “preparation mode” after the presentation effect, the degree of expectation for the transition to the “renso mode” increases. Furthermore, if the player wins a big hit as expected by the player, the player is more strongly expected to be notified of the winning (ie, the transition to the “renso mode”) by the roulette chance effect performed in the “preparation mode”. Can be made.

  Next, the lighting control of the rear LED 625 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 102. As described above, the back LED 625 is provided to make the contact pocket of the rotating member 640 shine from the back side. As shown in FIG. 97, the rear LED 625 is composed of three arc-shaped LED bars 625a, 625b, and 625c, and these are combined to form an annular shape when viewed from the front. In addition, as shown in FIG. 97, each LED bar 625a, 625b, 625c is provided with six lighting regions with four LED chips densely arranged at equal intervals (lighting regions A1 to A18). By lighting each of the lighting regions A1 to A18, a region having substantially the same area as one pocket of the rotating member 640 can be emitted. Therefore, by turning on the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket, it is possible to make the hit pocket look shiny.

  Here, each LED chip included in the rear LED 625 is controlled to be turned on by a known LED driver. Based on the lighting control command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the LED driver can switch the ratio between the on period and the off period (DUTY ratio) of the LED and vary the lighting frequency. For example, when a lighting control command indicating that the ON period is 80% (DUTY ratio 80%) and the frequency is 320 Hz is output to the LED driver, the LED driver performs 80% of a period (1/320 seconds). The width ON period and the 20% time width OFF period are set repeatedly. This operation is continued until a new lighting control command is received.

  A method for designating the ON period by the lighting control command output to the LED driver will be described more specifically. The above-described data (lighting rate data) indicating the length of the on period (lighting rate) is composed of data of a plurality of bits (for example, 8 bits). If the lighting rate data is 00H (0 in decimal notation), it means 0% lighting rate (DUTY ratio), and if the lighting rate data is FFH (255 in decimal notation), the lighting rate (DUTY ratio). It means 100%. Also, the lighting rate is set to increase at equal intervals as the lighting rate data goes from 00H to FFH. For example, when 80H (128 in decimal notation) is set as the lighting rate data, the lighting state is 50% (that is, 128/255).

  The reference signal (synchronization signal) that serves as a reference for the LED lighting frequency can be generated by the LED driver itself (set to free run) or input from the outside of the LED driver. The synchronization signal (external synchronization signal) can be used. Whether to run free or use an external synchronization signal can be specified by a lighting control command. When an external synchronization signal is input to the LED driver, it is not necessary to set a lighting frequency by the lighting control command.

  Further, the position of the on period can be changed by a lighting control command in one cycle in which the LED is turned on and off. That is, the LED on period can be set simultaneously with the detection of the synchronization signal, and the LED off period can be set after the end of the on period. For example, the LED off period can be set simultaneously with the detection of the synchronization signal, An on-period can be set after the period ends.

  A specific example of the lighting control command for setting the position of the on period will be described in detail. The setting start position of the on period is specified by 8-bit data, for example. More specifically, one period is divided into 255 equal parts, and it is possible to designate from which section the on-period is started by 8-bit data. If the data specifying the position of the on period is 00H, the on period is started from the first section of one period divided into 255 equal parts (that is, simultaneously with the start of one period). If the data specifying the position of the on period is 1EH (that is, 30 in decimal notation), the on period starts from the 31st section of one cycle divided into 255 equal parts.

  The lighting control command includes data for designating a lighting area. That is, it is possible to set a lighting rate, a lighting frequency, a lighting phase, and the like described above by designating part or all of the lighting regions A1 to A18. The setting of the lighting area is specified by data of 3 bytes (24 bits), for example. Specifically, bits corresponding to each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 are set (for example, the lighting areas A1 to A18 are correlated in order from the lower bits), and the lighting areas corresponding to the ON bits are set. Thus, the lighting state designated by the lighting control command is reflected by the LED driver.

  Thus, the LED driver for controlling the LED of this embodiment is configured to be able to accept a lighting control command including a plurality of data. The plurality of data is output by a serial transfer method such as an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) method. That is, the data corresponding to various lighting control data (serial data) such as the lighting rate from the sound lamp control device 113 and what data (the number of bits of the data) is the serial data currently being output. And a signal (serial clock) indicating.

  More specifically, for example, from the audio lamp control device 113, as serial data, it corresponds to 24-bit data corresponding to the lighting area, 8-bit data corresponding to the lighting rate of the designated lighting area, and the lighting frequency. 8-bit data, 8-bit data indicating the setting start position of the ON period, and the like are output. The LED driver outputs a signal (so-called ACK) indicating that the data has been normally received to the sound lamp control device 113 every time data is received, for example, for 8 bits. The voice lamp control device 113 waits until ACK is received, and when ACK is received, outputs the next 8-bit data. As a result, data reception omission can be prevented. In addition, the output order of various types of data output by the sound lamp control device 113 is fixed every time, and the order of the data types output from the sound lamp control device 113 is also stored in the LED driver. It is possible to easily grasp what data is received. Each data is output in synchronization with a serial clock that repeats ON (1) and OFF (0) at a predetermined frequency (for example, 100 kHz). That is, the bit indicated by the serial clock in the output data is on depending on whether the serial data is on (1) or off (0) when the serial clock is on (1). Or is off.

  Here, a specific example of the mode of the serial clock and serial data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example of a lighting control command including a serial clock and serial data. The serial clock and serial data can be set to either on or off values, respectively. Depending on the state of serial data when the serial clock is on (1), the data of each bit constituting the lighting control command can be notified. In this example, a command for setting a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% for the lighting areas A1 and A2 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 234, the serial clock and serial data are set to ON (1) when data is not output. When outputting the lighting control command, the serial data is shifted from on (1) to off (0) while the serial clock is on (1). With this displacement, the LED driver can easily recognize that the lighting control command is to be notified from now on.

  When the serial data is shifted from ON (1) to OFF (0) and the start of output of the lighting control command is notified, first, lighting area data (data specifying which of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is to be output). Is output. This data is composed of 24 bits, and is output in three portions of 8 bits. As shown in the figure, the serial data is set to ON while the output of the lighting control command is notified and the serial clock is repeatedly turned on and off twice. That is, it is notified that the 0th bit and the 1st bit of the lighting area data are on. Although not shown in the figure, the serial data is set off while the serial clock is repeatedly turned on and off 22 times thereafter. That is, it is notified that the 3rd to 24th bits of the lighting area data are all off. As a result, the LED driver can easily recognize that the current lighting control command is a command for notifying the lighting state of the lighting areas A1 and A2 corresponding to the 0th bit and the 1st bit of the lighting area data. Can do.

  Note that the serial data ON period is configured so that the start of the serial data is earlier than the timing when the serial clock rises from off to on, and the end of the serial data is later than the timing when the serial clock falls from on to off. It is comprised so that it may become. As a result, the serial data can be kept on more reliably during the period when the serial clock is on. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that it is determined that the OFF data is received on the LED driver side even though the ON data is output, and to notify various data more accurately. For the same reason, the start of the serial data off period is configured to be earlier than the timing at which the serial clock rises from off to on, and the end of the serial data from the timing at which the serial clock falls from on to off. It is configured to be slow.

  The lighting area data is output in three portions of 8 bits, and an ACK is returned from the LED driver for each of the three outputs (notifies that the LED driver has received each 8-bit data normally) Then, data for 8 bits is output as lighting rate data. As described above, in this specific example, since the lighting rate 100% (binary notation 11111111B) is notified, the serial data is set ON while the serial clock is set ON 8 times. Accordingly, “11111111B” can be notified to the LED driver as the lighting rate data. Although illustration is omitted, other data (8-bit data corresponding to the lighting frequency, 8-bit data indicating the setting start position of the ON period, etc.) is also output according to the same rule. When all the data constituting the lighting control command is output, the serial clock is first set to the on (1) state, and then the serial data rises from the off (0) state to the on (1) state. . When the serial data rises from the off (0) state to the on (1) state while the serial clock is on (1), it is possible to notify the LED driver that all data has been output.

  Thus, in this control example, the lighting state can be accurately notified by using two types of signals of the serial clock and the serial data. Since there is no need to use different wirings for each data type, the number of wirings can be saved. Therefore, the unit price of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of wires.

  Note that the LED driver is not limited to receiving the lighting control command in the above-described manner. For example, a driver that can specify the position and length of the ON period with a simpler lighting control command may be employed. For example, you may use the LED driver which can receive the lighting control command which matched the lighting state of each area at the time of dividing one period into 8 equally with respect to each bit of 8-bit data. Specifically, in order from the least significant bit, sections that are earlier in time are associated, a section corresponding to a bit of 1 data is turned on, and a section corresponding to a bit of 0 is turned off. For example, if the control data is 07H (that is, 00000111B in binary notation), among the sections obtained by dividing one cycle into eight equal parts, the first three sections are turned on and the latter five sections are turned off. Thereby, since the lighting control command output from the MPU 221 to the LED driver can be simplified, the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced. Moreover, you may employ | adopt as a LED driver the variable LED current value (anode voltage value) of each lighting area | region A1-A18.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a state in which the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to a lighting state (lighting rate 100%) and the other lighting areas are set to a light-off state (lighting rate 0%). . In addition, what is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 98 is the outer shape of the rotating member 640 disposed on the front surface of the rear LED 625. As shown in FIG. 98, each of the divided members DV (each pocket) disposed in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) in which the divided members DV (each pocket) are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval. The arrangement matches the arrangement of the lighting areas A1, A2, A12 to A18.

  FIG. 99 is a view showing the appearance of the rotating member 640 when the lighting state shown in FIG. 98 is set. As shown in FIG. 99, when the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, the pockets P2, P28, and P30 disposed on the front surface of the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 look shiny. (Hatch display location in FIG. 99). Thus, by setting the lighting region arranged on the back side of the winning pocket to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, it is possible to make the winning pocket look shining. Therefore, the player can easily discriminate from the appearance of the hit pocket and the release pocket.

  The rear LED 625 is controlled to follow the rotating member 640 and rotate at the same rotational speed as the rotating member 640 around the rotation axis O of the rotating operation of the rotating member 640. Therefore, since the lighting region with a lighting rate of 100% can follow the hit pocket during the rotation of the rotating member 640, it is possible to keep the hit pocket in the roulette chance effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the correspondence between the lighting position and the hit pocket from being lost and the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the release pocket.

  As described above, the rotating member 640 includes a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and a second interval in which the divided members DV are narrower than the first interval. The second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed, and a total of 30 divided members DV are formed in an annular shape in a front view in the circumferential direction. On the other hand, the back LED 625 has 18 lighting areas arranged at equal intervals. That is, since the rotation member 640 can only make 18/30 rotations while the back surface LED 625 makes one round, the type of each divided member DV (pocket) and the lighting area arranged on the back side of the divided member DV (pocket) The type is shifted according to the progress of the rotation operation. For example, in the example of FIGS. 98 and 99, the lighting area A17 is set to a lighting rate of 100%, so that the pocket P2 looks shining. When the LED 625 is rotated until the back LED 625 makes a round, the pockets disposed on the front side of the lighting region A17 change. That is, while the back LED 625 makes a round, the rotating member 640 moves by 18 pockets, so that the type of the pocket arranged on the front side of the lighting region A17 is changed to the pocket P20. Therefore, if the same position is continuously kept on, the apparent pocket that is lit changes every time the back LED makes a round, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in this control example, it is configured to correct the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 every time the back LED makes 1/3 round (that is, in units of one LED bar), and the hit pocket is always set. It is controlled so that it looks shiny. More specifically, every time one of the LED bars matches the correction section RA shown in FIG. 98, the lighting state of the LED bar that matches the correction section RA is adjusted to the deviation from the arrangement of the rotating member 640. Correction (switching).

  Here, the correction section RA is a section that is shielded from being visible to the player by the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 arranged at the raised position. For this reason, even if the lighting state of each lighting area arranged in the correction section RA is switched, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to visually recognize the switching. In other words, the player's appearance is always maintained as if the hit pocket is always shining. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely distinguish the hit pocket and the release pocket from the appearance of the pocket.

  Next, the lighting state correction (switching) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example in which pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30 are set as hitting pockets. In this control example, when the “renso mode suggestion effect” is started, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated, the arrangement of the LED bars 625a and the correction section RA first coincide with each other. Lighting control of the lighting area is started. Here, whether or not the correction section RA and the LED bar 625a are aligned is detected by a rotational position detection sensor 684 (not shown) for detecting the rotational position of the rear LED 625.

  In the example of FIG. 100, when the LED bar 625a is first arranged to coincide with the correction section RA after the rotating member 640 starts rotating, the pocket arranged at the drop position is the pocket P1. (See FIG. 100B). In this case, the type of pockets (pockets P25 to P30) for 6 pockets (pocket pockets or disengagement pockets) in the traveling direction of the rotating operation from the pocket P1 is opposite to the traveling direction of the rotating operation. 12 types of pockets (pockets P1 to P12) are read in the direction, and lighting states corresponding to the types of the pockets are set for the lighting regions A1 to A18. That is, the types of the pockets P25 to P30 are read, and the lighting states corresponding to the lighting areas A7 to A12 are reflected. Further, the types of the pockets P1 to P12 are read, and the lighting states corresponding to the lighting areas A6 to A13 are reflected.

  More specifically, of the pockets P25 to P30, since the pockets P28 to P30 are hit pockets, the corresponding lighting areas A10 to A12 are set to lighting states with a lighting rate of 100%. Since the pocket P3 and the pockets P9 to P11 are the winning pockets among the pockets P1 to P12, the lighting area A15 corresponding to the pocket P3 and the lighting areas A3 to A5 corresponding to the pockets P9 to P11 are turned on. The lighting state is set to 100% (see FIG. 100 (a)). Thereby, the pocket P3 and the pockets P28 to P30 of the lower half of the rotating member 640 (arrangement that can be visually recognized by the player) look shiny (see FIG. 100B). Therefore, the player can easily recognize that these shining appearance pockets are hit pockets. The type of each pocket P1 to P30 (whether it is a hit pocket or a release pocket) is stored in a hit position storage area 223k provided in the RAM 223.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the back LED 625 and the rotating member 640 when the back LED 625 makes 1/3 round from the state of FIG. As shown in the figure, the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are maintained in the state set in FIG. That is, the lighting areas A3 to A5, A10 to A12, and the lighting area A15 make 1/3 rounds at the same rotational speed as the rotating member 640 while maintaining the lighting state with the lighting rate of 100%. Thus, the LED bar 625b is arranged to coincide with the correction section RA. Since the rear LED 625 rotates in the state described with reference to FIG. 100, each of the lighting areas A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b has a lighting state corresponding to the type of pocket P25 to P30 (whether it is a hit pocket or not). It remains. However, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the arrangement order of the pockets in the correction section RA is the arrangement of the pockets P13 to P30. That is, if the rotation operation is continued while maintaining the lighting areas A7 to A12 of the LED bar 625b, the lighting corresponding to the pockets P25 to P30 is performed for the six pockets P13 to P18. The state will be applied. Therefore, there is a possibility that the correspondence between the hit pocket and the disengagement pocket is broken, and the player is confused.

  Therefore, in this control example, when any of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction section RA, the lighting state of the lighting area constituting the LED bar included in the correction section RA is corrected (switched). It is configured as follows. More specifically, six types of pockets arranged in the correction section RA are read from the head of the section (that is, in the order in which they are arranged in the non-correction section NA by the rotation operation), and read out. Control is performed so that the lighting state corresponding to the type is reflected in each lighting region included in the correction section RA. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the types of all the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA and the lighting state of the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket are shifted.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a case where the states of the lighting areas A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b are corrected according to the types of the pockets P13 to P18. As described above, of the pockets P13 to P18, there are two hit pockets, P15 and P16. That is, of the six pockets to be arranged in the non-correction section NA in the future by the rotation operation, the third and fourth pockets become the hit pockets. Accordingly, the third and fourth lighting regions A9 are arranged among the lighting regions A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b so that the third and fourth pockets look shiny. , A10 are set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% (see FIG. 102). As a result, the appearance of the pockets P13 to P18 arranged in the non-correction section NA by the rotation of the rotating member 640 in the future will appear in advance corresponding to the type of each pocket (lighting state with 100% lighting rate, or 0% lighting rate). Can be set to the off state).

  Thereafter, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, every time any of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction section RA, the lighting state of the lighting area constituting the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA Is corrected. Thereby, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in the appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket shines and the detached pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-corrected section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the release pocket.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a configuration for determining the cycle of the swinging operation when the ball B is performing the swinging operation on the holding piece 677 will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the movable case 677 and the front case 672 arranged on the back side with respect to the sphere B that swings at the upper part of the movable piece 677 have a substantially oblong rectangular shape. An opening 678 is provided. A sphere detection sensor 679 for determining whether or not the sphere B is arranged on the near side is provided inside the opening 678. When the sphere B is not arranged on the front side of the sphere detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103A), the output of the sphere detection sensor 679 is L (low). On the other hand, when the sphere B performs a swinging operation so that the sphere B is arranged on the front side of the sphere detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103B), the sphere B is detected and the output of the sphere detection sensor 679 is output. H (high). In this control example, when the ball B is performing a swinging motion, the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B is determined based on an interval (period) in which the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is H. For example, if the period from when the H output of the sphere detection sensor 679 is detected (see FIG. 103B) until the next H output is detected is 1 second, the sphere B is currently performing This means that the half of the period of the swinging motion is 1 second, and therefore the swinging motion period is determined to be 2 seconds.

  As described above, in this control example, in a state where the ball B is performing the swinging operation, the cycle of the swinging operation is discriminated, and the ball B is allowed to fall when the predetermined period (1 second) or less is reached. Is configured to do. In other words, the cycle of the swinging operation is sufficiently short, and even when the ball B is dropped, the ball B is dropped at a timing that does not cause the player to feel unnatural. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having the impression that the type of the pocket where the ball B falls is intentionally operated in the roulette chance effect. Therefore, the production can be enjoyed to the end without causing doubt about the result of the roulette chance production.

  Note that the holding piece 677 in this control example has a width that can hold the sphere B sufficiently above the sphere B when the amplitude of the swinging motion of the sphere B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second). For this reason, the sphere B can be reliably dropped by immersing the holding piece 677 into the immersive position in a state where the amplitude of the swinging motion of the sphere B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second).

  Next, a description will be given of a method for driving various drive motors (upper lift motor 341, liquid crystal lift motor 441, left swing motor 531, rotation motor 631, throwing motor 665, holding piece motor 675). These various drive motors are composed of, for example, known stepping motors, and a plurality of these drive motors are provided in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. These various drive motors are driven by corresponding motor control ICs (motor drivers). Specifically, a command including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver). Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives the corresponding drive motors based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC that can set the operation for a plurality of drive motors, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided. Alternatively, the drive motors corresponding to the different actors may be operated. When a motor control IC (motor driver) that can set the operation for a plurality of drive motors is adopted, information for specifying the type of the drive motor is included in the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps and the like. And output it.

  Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described using the upper elevating motor 341 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the upper elevating motor 341 based on the set command, the operation is performed on the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 every time one step of operation is performed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that it has been made is output. With this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has operated from the origin (retreat) position. That is, the origin (retreat) position is set to a 0 step position, and the value is updated by 1 each time an execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, the value is incremented by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (retreat) position to the end point (extension) position. Further, the value is subtracted by 1 every time one step operation is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (extension) position to the origin (retraction) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operation position of each accessory based on the value of the step counter.

  Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement that is set for each accessory, and is a position that shifts in origin return based on power-on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is the origin position. If the origin sensor is not on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor is turned on. The accessory is varied until it is detected (that is, various drive motors are driven). This origin position becomes the reference position for the operation of each accessory. Note that the above-described step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory reaches the origin position by the origin return (that is, when the origin sensor detects ON). As described above, the value of the step counter is updated one by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

  Next, an example of control of various drive motors (here, the upper lift motor 341) by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, one round in four steps) will be described as an example. The rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

  First, FIG. 104 (a) is a diagram showing an outline of an upper lift motor 341 composed of a stepping motor. The upper lifting / lowering motor 341 is configured such that a portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited by sending excitation control data from the sound lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. Specifically, excitation is performed by the motor control IC by excitation control data constituted by a 4-digit binary number corresponding to “A, B, C, D” shown in FIG. Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any one of A, B, C, and D) of the upper lift motor 341 is “1”, the excitation is performed, and the excitation control data is “0”. If so, it is not excited. For example, if the excitation control data is “1100”, A and B are excited, and C and D are not excited. The excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 104 (b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 has an excitation counter used for selecting and setting one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 104 (b)). Is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from “0”, and when the value of the excitation counter becomes “3”, the value returns to “0” when the value is updated. It has become. Each time this excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, excitation of each part is immediately performed based on the excitation control data (that is, the upper elevating motor 341 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Furthermore, the excitation counter can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of “0” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” starting from “0”. When updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the upper elevating motor 341 is opposite to that when updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether the direction is positive or negative) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of accessory for which an operation is set. Note that the maximum value of the excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once in one step (that is, it takes 360 steps for one rotation of the motor), the excitation counter is updated in the range of “0” to “359”. It becomes a loop counter.

  Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the upper elevating motor 341 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104B is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the excitation table that defines the excitation control data and the state of the upper lift motor 341 that is excited based on the excitation control data that is defined in the excitation table. . Note that, as shown in FIG. 104B, excitation control data is defined for each value of the excitation counter in the excitation table.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), excitation control of “1100, 0110, 0011, 1001” in the order of excitation counters “0” to “3” as sequence data corresponding to the upper lifting motor 341. Each data is defined. When “1100”, which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “0”, is set, the positions A and B of the upper lifting motor 341 are excited. When “0110”, which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “1”, is set, the positions B and C of the upper lifting motor 341 are excited, so the excitation counter value is “0”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from this state. In addition, when “0011” that is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “2” is set, the positions of C and D of the upper lifting motor 341 are excited, and the excitation counter value is “1”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise. When “1001”, which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “3”, is set, the positions A and D of the upper lift motor 341 are excited, so the excitation counter value is “2”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from this state. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 104, each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 in the positive direction, the upper elevating motor 341 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the upper elevating motor 341 rotates by 90 degrees counterclockwise.

  As described above, the control of the upper elevating motor 341 has been described with a simplified operation model. However, the upper elevating motor 341 actually used in this embodiment has one excitation counter (that is, one excitation counter). It can be rotated by 1 degree (every update). That is, when changing each accessory, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 as many times as the number of steps to be changed, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set every time the excitation counter is updated. Each accessory can be varied accurately.

  As described above, in this control example, by setting a command to the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of performance operations using an accessory.

  In addition, a unique motion pattern (motion scenario) corresponding to the production is set for each accessory. Although details will be described later, this operation pattern (operation scenario) defines commands set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time.

  Further, in this control example, it is determined based on the number of steps that the various drive motors have operated whether or not the various drive motors have been operated based on the command set for the motor driver. That is, based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times the execution signal received from the motor driver is received each time one step of operation is set by the motor driver, has the operation set for each drive motor been completed? It is determined whether or not, but is not limited to this. For example, an elapsed time after setting a command for operating various drive motors may be measured, and it may be configured to determine whether the operation of the various drive motors has been completed based on the elapsed time. .

<Electric Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, display setting in second symbol display device 83, and display in third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 105, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display on the third symbol display device 81. Is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the above setting.

  For the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the first per random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. A first per-type counter C2 used to perform, a stop-type selection counter C3 used to select an out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and a first initial used to set initial values of the first per-random number counter C1 A value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 139). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a common execution area and a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a first winning prize is provided. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a. A special symbol lottery is executed based on various counter values stored in the common execution area. On the other hand, the various counter values stored in each holding area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a are put on hold until the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied. In this control example, only the lottery of the special symbol 1 is suspended, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is not suspended. For this reason, when the entrance to the second entrance 640a is detected, the lottery for the special symbol 1 is not held, and various counter values are stored in the common execution area when the symbol is not changing. The lottery for symbol 2 is executed.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is normally used. The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 139).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640a. It is stored in the common execution area of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 of the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 106B) includes a first per-random number table for a low probability and a first per-random number table for a high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers that are big hits is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when the special symbol is a big hit, and in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). The values are added one by one, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640a Are stored in the common execution area of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, a random number that is out of the special symbol If so, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same common execution area or special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In the first per random number counter C1, there are 40 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0-39” is a first per random number for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)). Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 40 while the total number of random number values is 1000, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/25”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 41 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “500 to 540” is the first random number table 202a (FIG. 106 (b) ))). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 41 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 24.4”. That is, the probability that the special symbol is a big hit is almost the same when the special symbol has a high probability (the probability of the special symbol being changed) and when the special symbol has a low probability. This is because the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example has little benefit for the player just by making a big hit in the “normal mode”. In other words, as described above, in the “normal mode”, the first variable winning device 82a is likely to be a big hit when the first variable winning device 82a is opened (that is, the number of winning balls that can be acquired is relatively small). After that, it shifts to the “normal mode” again without shifting to the “renso mode”. Therefore, since it is easy to repeat the big hit and the normal mode with a relatively small number of winning balls, it is disadvantageous for the player while staying in the “normal mode”.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, it is very advantageous for the player by shifting to the “ream home mode”. In order to shift to the “renso mode”, it is necessary to make a big hit mainly during the “preparation mode”. In order to shift to the preparation mode, a big hit that is given a short-time state in the “normal mode” It is necessary to allocate a type. Therefore, the jackpot in the “normal mode” simply plays the role of shifting to the “preparation mode”, and the player plays the game in the “normal mode” with the main purpose of becoming the jackpot itself. is not. In this situation, if the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is made extremely low compared to the high probability state of the special symbol, instead of shifting to the “renso mode” or “preparation mode”, Since there is a case in which even the jackpot, which is the previous stage, is not won, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game will be significantly impaired. Therefore, in this control example, the probability of winning a big hit is almost the same in the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol, and in either case, it is configured so that it is relatively easy to win the big hit. Yes. Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation that the jackpot, which is the previous stage of the “renso mode” and the “preparation mode”, does not continue for a long time, so that the player's motivation for the game can be kept high.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106C). The correspondence relationship between the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the determined jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this control example, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops other than the reach symbol. ”(For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and“ stop completely ”(for example, in the range of 0 to 89) that does not generate reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball wins the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640a. Are stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the fine fluctuation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 139) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 110 (b)) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. , Stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 110 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number that is the winning set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 110 (a)) matches, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there is one random number value that is hit by the normal symbol, and the value is “5”. This random number value is stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that a special symbol jackpot is “1/240”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In FIG. 5, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is “5”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended, “○ And the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds x once". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds x once" when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (ordinary symbol). As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640a is opened “one second × twice”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the second entrance 640a is opened. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance 640a is opened only "one second x twice" when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  Thus, in this control example, the probability of hitting the normal symbol at the low probability of the normal symbol is significantly lower than that at the high probability of the normal symbol. By reducing the number of times the mouth 640a is opened and reducing the one opening period of the second entrance 640a, the sphere can be second in a low probability of a normal symbol (ie, “normal mode”). It is configured to make it difficult to enter the entrance 640a. As a result, when the normal symbol has a low probability (that is, the “normal mode”), the player can enter the second entrance 640a to win a relatively large number of winning balls (the second specific prize opening 65a is opened). It is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method of aiming at the jackpot type to be played. If an irregular gaming method is performed and the second specific prize opening 65a is continuously won as a jackpot to be opened, the payout rate greatly exceeds the payout rate in the design of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, there is a risk of causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. On the other hand, in this control example, it is extremely difficult to enter a ball into the second entrance 640a when the normal symbol has a low probability (ie, “normal mode”). It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from executing an irregular game method of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in the “normal mode”. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a designed payout rate.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 139).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like. In the main control device 110, in the big win lottery or the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the ROM 202 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and fixed value data.

  FIG. 106A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 106a, the ROM 202 has a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-kind selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting table 202e, and a state setting table 202f. Is provided at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 106B) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored as described above. Specifically, 40 determination values of “0 to 39” are defined as the jackpot determination values in the low probability state of the special symbol, and “500” as the jackpot determination values in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol. 41 determination values of “˜540” are defined. A special symbol when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize matches one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)). Is determined to be a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 106 (c)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is assigned to each big hit type. It is defined in association. Here, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 106C is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b described above. As shown in FIG. 106 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b is a special type 1 hit type selection table 202b1 that is used to determine the big hit type when the special symbol 1 is won by lottery. And a special category 2 hit type selection table 202b2 used for determining the jackpot type when the special symbol 2 is won by lottery. First, details of the type selection table 202b1 per special figure 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the type selection table 202b1 per special figure. In the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1, eight types of jackpots of "probable variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot G" and "normal jackpot A" are associated with the possible values of the first hit type counter C2. The type is specified.

  More specifically, “probability big hit A” is associated with the range where the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”. As described above, the first hit type counter C2 is a counter that can take 1000 values of “0 to 999”. Among these, since the number of judgment values for “probable big hit A” is five, “0-4”, the probability of becoming “probable big hit A” in the case of a big win in the special symbol 1 lottery is 0.5%. (5/1000).

  The “probable jackpot A” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and the second specific prize opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or ten balls have been won) in each round. is there. If the player continues to hit the ball continuously, 10 balls can be fully won to the second specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds elapses. A relatively large amount (300) of prize balls can be obtained. In addition, after the “probability big hit A” is completed, the state shifts to a special symbol probability variation state, and the normal symbol shifts to a short time state. In addition, the short-time state of the normal symbol given after the end of “probability big hit A” is regardless of the state at the time of winning (“normal mode”, “preparation mode”, or “rendori mode”). Continue until the next big hit. That is, after the “probability big hit A” is completed, the process directly shifts to the “renso mode” without going through the “preparation mode”. Since a relatively large amount of award balls can be obtained and the player directly shifts to “renso mode”, which is the most advantageous for the player, “probability jackpot A” is a jackpot type that can be selected in the special symbol 1 lottery. The jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, especially in the “normal mode”, when the jackpot is notified (the lucky number is displayed on all the effect units 331a to 331d), the player is strongly expected to become “probable jackpot A”. Can be made.

  The range in which the first hit type counter C2 is “5-84” is associated with “probability big hit B”. Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are “probable big hit B” is 80 from “5 to 84”. In this case, the probability (ratio) of “probability big hit B” is 8% (80/1000).

  “Probability variation jackpot B” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a is an opening pattern A (an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.6 seconds and the closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). Is a jackpot that is opened and closed according to. The maximum open time per round is 12 seconds (0.6 seconds x 20 times), which is shorter than the maximum open time (30 seconds) of the second specific prize opening 65a, and one open period is Since it is as short as 0.6 seconds, it is difficult to continuously win the ball. Accordingly, since the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one jackpot is smaller than that of the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened, compared with the jackpot type in which the second specific winning slot 65a is opened. It is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the number of prize balls.

  In addition, after the “probability big hit B” is completed, the state shifts to a special symbol probable state. In addition, the type of the short time state of the normal symbol given after the end of the “probable big hit B” is the gaming state at the time of becoming the “probable big hit B” (the short state of the normal symbol or the low probability state of the normal symbol) It depends on what is). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, when “probability big hit B” is obtained in the short time state of the normal symbol, the state shifts to the short time state of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit. That is, it shifts to the “renso mode”. As described above, the “renso mode” is the most advantageous state for the player, so that the player can be pleased with the “probable big hit B” in the short time state of the normal symbol.

  On the other hand, if the probability of a normal symbol is low (non-temporal short state) is “probable big hit B”, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol continues until the special lottery ends seven times. To do. That is, the process proceeds to the “preparation mode”. As described above, if the special symbol is a big hit in the “preparation mode”, the game proceeds to the “renso mode” which is most advantageous to the player with a high probability (97.5%). Therefore, in the “preparation mode” that shifts after the “probability big hit B” ends, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that it will be a big hit. In addition, if the limited number of lotteries (seven times) does not result in a big win, it will not shift to the “renso mode”, so there is anxiety about returning to the “normal mode” without making a big hit, It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for shifting to the “renso mode”. Therefore, the interest of the player in the “preparation mode” can be improved.

  Note that, as described above, in the short time state of the normal symbol, since it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640a, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is basically executed. In other words, it is unlikely that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is executed in the “normal mode”. However, since the lottery of special symbol 1 is held up to 4 times, “probability big hit B” in “preparation mode” may be included in the holding ball when it shifts to “preparation mode” There is sex. In this case, it is harsh for the player not to shift to the “renso mode” (transfer to the “preparation mode”). Therefore, in this control example, when the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 digested during the “preparation mode” or when the ball is accidentally launched in the direction of the first entrance 64 in the “renso” mode. In order to provide relief, when the normal symbol is in the short-time state (“preparation mode” or “renso mode”), when “probable big hit B” is set, the mode is shifted to the “renso mode”. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling dissatisfied with the game and to make the game more enjoyable. Similarly, for other probability variation jackpots (that is, “probability variation jackpots C to G”) defined in the type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1, when winning in the short time state of the normal symbol, It is configured to shift to the “village mode”.

  The range of the first hit type counter C2 from “85 to 274” is associated with “probability big hit C”. Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are “probable big hit C” is 190, “85 to 274”. In this case, the probability (ratio) of “probable big hit C” is 19% (190/1000).

  “Probability variation jackpot C” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a has an opening pattern A (an opening pattern in which a 0.6 second opening and a 0.9 second closing are repeated 20 times). Is a jackpot that is opened and closed according to. Therefore, as in the case of “probable big hit B”, the number of prize balls that can be earned in one big win is reduced. Disadvantageous.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when “probability big hit C” is obtained in the time shortened state of the normal symbol, the time shifts to the probability changed state of the special symbol and the time shortened of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit is reached. Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the “renso mode”. On the other hand, when “probability big hit C” is obtained in the low probability state (non-time-short state) of the normal symbol, the special symbol lottery is completed and the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the short state of the normal symbol that continues until. That is, the process proceeds to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the end of “probability jackpot C” has a smaller number of special symbols than “preparation mode” set after the end of “probability jackpot B”. In the state), “probability jackpot C” is more disadvantageous than “probability jackpot B”.

  The range in which the first hit type counter C2 is “275 to 774” is associated with “probability big hit D”. Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are “probable big hit D” is 500 from “275 to 774”. In this case, the probability (ratio) of “probability big hit D” is 50% (500/1000).

  “Probability variation jackpot D” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a is an opening pattern A (an opening pattern in which a 0.6 second opening and a 0.9 second closing are repeated 20 times). Is a jackpot that is opened and closed according to. Accordingly, the number of award balls that can be obtained in a single jackpot is reduced in the same way as “probability jackpot B” and “probability jackpot C”, so that the prize ball is compared with the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. It is disadvantageous to the player in terms of number.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when “probability big hit D” is obtained in the short time state of the normal symbol, the transition to the probable state of the special symbol is made, and the short time of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit is obtained. Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the “renso mode”. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is “probable big hit D” in the low probability state (non-short-time state) of the normal symbol, the state shifts to the probability-change state of the special symbol, but the short-time state of the normal symbol is not set. That is, since it does not shift to the “preparation mode”, there is no chance to shift to the “renso mode”. Therefore, when “probability jackpot D” is set in “normal mode” (non-probability change state), “probability jackpot A” that directly shifts to “renso mode” and “probability jackpot that shifts to“ preparation mode ”after jackpot Compared to the case of “B” or “probability big hit C”, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  The range in which the first hit type counter C2 is “775 to 804” is associated with “probability big hit E”. Of the 1000 decision values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of decision values that are “probable big hit E” is 30 from “775 to 804”. Then, the probability (ratio) of “probability big hit E” is 3% (30/1000).

  The “probable jackpot E” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which the opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once) in each round. is there. The maximum opening time per round is 0.052 seconds, which is a significantly shorter opening period than when the second specific winning opening 65a is opened or when the opening pattern A is set. It becomes difficult for the first variable prize-winning device 82a to win a ball, and in many cases, the big hit ends without winning one ball. Therefore, the “probable jackpot E” is one of the jackpot types that are most disadvantageous in terms of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when “probability big hit E” is obtained in the time shortened state of the normal symbol, the time shifts to the probability changed state of the special symbol, and the time shortened of the normal symbol continues until the next big hit. Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the “renso mode”. On the other hand, when “probability big hit E” in the low probability state (non-short-time state) of the normal symbol, as well as “probable big hit B”, it shifts to the special symbol probable state and after the jackpot ends, It shifts to the short time state of the normal symbol that continues until the special symbol lottery ends seven times. That is, the process proceeds to the “preparation mode”. Except for “probable jackpot A”, which shifts directly to “renso mode”, it is a kind of jackpot type in which “preparation mode” (normal symbol time-short state) continues for the longest number of lotteries, so “normal mode” In the case of “probability big hit E”, the player is more advantageous than “probability big hit C” in which the number of lottery times in the “preparation mode” is small and “probability big hit D” that does not shift to the “preparation mode”.

  The range in which the first hit type counter C2 is “805 to 874” is associated with “probability big hit F”. Of the 1000 decision values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of decision values that are “probable big hit F” is 70 from “805 to 874”. Then, the probability (ratio) of “probability big hit F” is 7% (70/1000).

  “Probability variation jackpot F” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which the opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once). Therefore, similarly to “probability jackpot E”, it is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player in terms of the number of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when “probability big hit F” is obtained in the short time state of the normal symbol, the transition to the probable state of the special symbol is made and the short time of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit is obtained. Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the “renso mode”. On the other hand, if the probability of a normal symbol is “probable big hit F” in a low probability state (non-short-time state), the special symbol lottery is completed and the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the short state of the normal symbol that continues until That is, the process proceeds to the “preparation mode”. Since the “preparation mode” set after the end of “probability variation jackpot F” is less than the “preparation mode” set after the end of “probability variation jackpot B” or “probability variation jackpot E”, In the “normal mode” (non-probability variation state), “probability variation jackpot F” is more disadvantageous than “probability variation jackpot B” and “probability variation jackpot E”. On the other hand, compared to “probability big hit D” in which “preparation mode” is not set, a chance to shift to “renso mode” is given although it is only once, which is advantageous to the player.

  The range of the first hit type counter C2 “875-974” is associated with “probability big hit G”. Of the 1000 decision values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of decision values that are “probable big hit G” is 100, “875-974”. In this case, the probability (ratio) of “probability big hit G” is 10% (100/1000).

  The “probable change jackpot G” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which 0.052 seconds are opened only once) in each round. is there. Therefore, as with “probability variation jackpot E” and “probability variation jackpot F”, this is one of the most disadvantaged jackpot types for the player in terms of the number of winning balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when “probability big hit G” is obtained in the short time state of the normal symbol, the transition to the probable state of the special symbol is made and the short time of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit is obtained. Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the “renso mode”. On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is “probable big hit G” in a low probability state (non-time-short state), the state shifts to a special symbol promiscuous state, but, as in “probable big hit D”, the normal symbol is short Is not set. That is, since it does not shift to the “preparation mode”, there is no chance to shift to the “renso mode”. Therefore, when “probability jackpot D” is set in “normal mode” (non-probability change state), “probability jackpot A” that directly shifts to “renso mode” and “probability jackpot that shifts to“ preparation mode ”after jackpot It is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of “B”, “Chemical variation jackpot C”, “Probability variation jackpot E”, and “Probability variation jackpot F”.

  “Normal big hit A” is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is “975 to 999”. Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are “ordinary jackpot A” is 25, “975 to 999”. In this case, the probability (ratio) of “ordinary jackpot A” is 2.5% (25/1000).

  “Normal jackpot A” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a is an opening pattern A (an opening pattern in which a 0.6 second opening and a 0.9 second closing are repeated 20 times). Is a jackpot that is opened and closed according to. Therefore, the number of winning balls that can be acquired is smaller than that of the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened, as in “probability jackpot B” to “probability jackpot D”. On the other hand, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is larger than the jackpot type in which the opening pattern B is set. Therefore, in terms of the number of winning balls, “normal jackpot A” is more disadvantageous than “probability jackpot A”, but is more advantageous than “probability jackpot E” to “probability jackpot G”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when “normal jackpot A” is obtained in the normal symbol time-short state, the special symbol shifts to the low probability state, but the normal symbol does not shift to the short-time state. . That is, the process proceeds to the “normal mode”. For this reason, when “normal jackpot A” is set in the “preparation mode”, the player shifts to the “normal mode” regardless of the remaining number of time reductions, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with other jackpot types. In addition, when “normal jackpot A” is set in the “renso mode”, the “normal mode” is shifted to the “normal mode” after the big jackpot, and therefore the “renja mode” that is most advantageous to the player is ended. For this reason, in the “preparation mode” and “renso mode”, a “normal jackpot A” results in a disadvantageous result for the player.

  On the other hand, if “normal jackpot A” is obtained in the low probability state (non-short-time state) of the normal symbol, the special symbol lottery will be completed once after the jackpot is over and the special symbol will shift to the low probability state. It shifts to the short state of the normal symbol that continues until it is done. That is, the process proceeds to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the end of “normal jackpot A” has fewer special symbol lottery times than the “preparation mode” set after the end of “probability jackpot B” and “probability jackpot E”. In the “normal mode” (non-probability changing state), “normal jackpot A” is more disadvantageous than “probability jackpot B” and “probability jackpot E”. On the other hand, compared to “probable big hit D” and “probable big hit G” where “preparation mode” is not set, it is advantageous for the player because it gives a chance to shift to “renso mode” although it is only once. Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 referred to in order to determine the big hit type when the special symbol 2 is won by lottery will be described. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the type selection table 202b2 for special figure 2. This special figure 2 per type selection table 202b2 is associated with the possible values of the first per type counter C2, and five types of jackpots of "probable variation jackpot H" to "probability variation jackpot K" and "normal jackpot B". The type is specified.

  The range in which the first hit type counter C2 is “0-4” is associated with “probability big hit H”. Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are “probable big hit H” is 5 from “0 to 4”. In this case, the probability (ratio) of “probability big hit H” is 0.5% (5/1000).

  “Probable variation jackpot H” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won). Therefore, in the same way as “probable bonus jackpot A”, the player has more prize balls than the jackpot type (“probable bonus jackpot BG”, “normal jackpot A”) in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened. Can be earned. In addition, as for all the jackpot types that can be determined when the special symbol 2 is won in the lottery, the second specific winning opening 65a is opened in the same manner as the “probable variation jackpot H” and the “probability variation jackpot A” described above. The Therefore, when a big win is won by the special symbol 2 lottery, it is more advantageous than the big win by the special symbol 1 lottery in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained (excluding “probable big hit A”).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, when “probability big hit H” is reached, regardless of the state at the time of winning (whether or not the normal symbol is in a short-time state), the state shifts to a special symbol probable state. The normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot shifts to a short time state. That is, it shifts directly to the “renso mode”. Therefore, especially in “normal mode” (non-time-short state), when “probable big hit H”, the player is compared with the jackpot type that shifts to “preparation mode” or the jackpot type that shifts to “normal mode”. It will be advantageous.

  The value “5” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with “probability big hit I”. Of the 1000 decision values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of decision values that are “probable big hit I” is one. The probability (proportion) of “probability jackpot I” is 0.1% (1/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, when “probability big hit I” is obtained in the short time state of the normal symbol, the state shifts to the probable state of special symbol and to the short time state of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit. And migrate. That is, it shifts to the “renso mode”. On the other hand, if “probability big hit I” is obtained in the low probability state (non-time-short state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the probable state of special symbols in the same way as “probable big hit B” and “probable big hit E”. At the same time, after the jackpot is over, a transition is made to the normal symbol time-saving state that continues until the special symbol lottery ends seven times. That is, the process proceeds to the “preparation mode”. Except for “probable jackpot A” and “probable jackpot H” that shifts directly to “renso mode”, this is a kind of jackpot type in which “preparation mode” (normal symbol time-short state) continues for the longest number of lotteries. Therefore, when “probable big hit I” in “normal mode”, the number of lottery times in “preparation mode” is small, “probable big hit C”, “probable big hit F”, “normal big hit A”, and “preparation mode”. It is advantageous to the player as compared with “probability variation jackpot D” and “probability variation jackpot G” that do not shift.

  As described above, when the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol is “probable big hit I”, the transition to the “preparation mode” in which the short-term period is 7 times is “normal mode”. This is to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640a. More specifically, even if any probability variation big hit (that is, “probability big hit H to K”) is obtained in the “normal mode” due to the lottery of the special symbol 2, the mode is shifted to the “ream mode”. In the case of the configuration, there is a possibility that a player hits the ball aiming at the second entrance 640a (so-called right-handed) in the “normal mode” for the purpose of shifting to the “renso mode”. There is sex. If the game mode is changed from “Normal mode” to “Renso mode” directly due to an irregular gaming method, there is a possibility that a lot of prize balls will be paid out. May cause unforeseen disadvantages. Therefore, in this control example, when the big winning is made by lottery of the special symbol 2, the gaming state after the big winning is made different depending on whether or not the time when the big winning is the short time state of the normal symbol. It is configured. By configuring in this manner, the merit for the player when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the “normal mode”) can be eliminated. Can be prevented (suppressed). Thereby, since the payout rate of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall can be more surely contained within the design range, it is possible to easily predict the sales of the hall.

  The value “6” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with “probability big hit J”. Of the 1000 decision values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of decision values that are “probable big hit J” is one. The probability (ratio) of “probability jackpot J” is 0.1% (1/1000).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 108, when “probability big hit J” is obtained in the normal symbol time-short state, the special symbol time-shifted state is entered, and the normal symbol time-saving is continued until the next big hit. Transition to the state. That is, it shifts to the “renso mode”. On the other hand, if the probability of a normal symbol is low (non-short-time state) is “probable big hit J”, the special symbol lottery is completed and the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the short state of the normal symbol that continues until. That is, the process proceeds to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the end of “probability jackpot J” has a special symbol than “preparation mode” set after the end of “probability jackpot B”, “probability jackpot E”, and “probability jackpot I”. Since the number of lotteries is small, in the “normal mode” (non-probability variation state), “probability variation jackpot J” is more disadvantageous than “probability variation jackpot B”, “probability variation jackpot E”, and “probability variation jackpot I”. On the other hand, compared to “probable big hit D” and “probable big hit G” where “preparation mode” is not set, it is advantageous for the player because it gives a chance to shift to “renso mode” although it is only once. Become.

  The range of the first hit type counter C2 from “7 to 974” is associated with “probability big hit K”. Of the 1000 decision values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of decision values with “probable big hit K” is 968 with “7 to 974”. Then, the probability (ratio) of “probability big hit K” is 96.8% (968/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, when “probability big hit K” is obtained in the short time state of the normal symbol, it shifts to the probable state of the special symbol and goes to the short time state of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit. And migrate. That is, it shifts to the “renso mode”. On the other hand, when “probability big hit K” in the low probability state (non-time-short state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the special symbol probable state, but it is the same as “probability big hit D” and “probable big hit G”. The short time state of normal symbols is not set. That is, since it does not shift to the “preparation mode”, there is no chance to shift to the “renso mode”. Therefore, when “probability big hit D” is obtained in the “normal mode” (non-probability change state), it is the most disadvantageous for the player.

  “Normal big hit B” is associated with the range where the first hit type counter C2 is “975 to 999”. Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are “ordinary big hit B” is 25 of “975 to 999”. In this case, the probability (ratio) of becoming “normal jackpot B” is 2.5% (25/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, when “ordinary big hit B” is obtained in the normal symbol time-short state, the special symbol shifts to the low probability state, but does not shift to the normal symbol time-short state. That is, the process proceeds to the “normal mode”. For this reason, as with “normal jackpot A”, when “normal jackpot B” is set in “preparation mode”, it shifts to “normal mode” regardless of the remaining number of times, so it is compared with other jackpot types. It is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, when “normal jackpot B” is reached in the “renso mode”, the mode is shifted to the “normal mode” after the big jackpot, and thus the “renso mode” that is most advantageous to the player ends. Therefore, in the “preparation mode” and the “renso mode”, the “normal jackpot B” results in a disadvantageous result for the player.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol is in a low probability state (non-short-time state), it will shift to the special symbol low probability state, and after the jackpot ends, the special symbol lottery will end once. It shifts to the short state of the normal symbol that continues until it is done. That is, the process proceeds to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the end of “normal jackpot B” is a lottery of special symbols than “preparation mode” set after the end of “probable jackpot B”, “probability jackpot E” and “probability jackpot I” Since the number of times is small, in the “normal mode” (non-probability variation state), “normal jackpot B” is more disadvantageous than “probability variation jackpot B”, “probability variation jackpot E”, and “probability variation jackpot I”. On the other hand, compared to “probable big hit D”, “probable big hit G”, and “probable big hit K” in which the “preparation mode” is not set, there is a chance to shift to the “renso mode” although it is only once. This is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, in this control example, there are provided a plurality of jackpot types with different numbers of winning balls that can be obtained and states after the jackpot (“normal mode”, “preparation mode”, or “renso mode”). By providing a wide variety of jackpot types, it is possible to make the player more interested in which jackpot type will be used when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In this control example, even when the special symbol 2 is a big hit in the “normal mode”, a big hit (that is, “probable big hit H”) or a “preparation mode” is entered. However, it is not always necessary to provide all of these jackpots (that is, “probable variation jackpot I” and “probability variation jackpot J”). For example, in the case where a big win is won by lottery of special symbol 2, “probable big hit K” is determined with a probability of 97.5%, and “normal big hit B” is determined with a probability of 2.5%. Also good. In other words, if the big win is won by the special symbol 2 lottery in the “normal mode”, the game shifts to the “normal mode” again after the big win (in the case of “probable big hit K”), or the short time period is 1 after the big win. It may be configured to shift to the “preparation mode” (in the case of “normal jackpot B”). With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the demerits of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640a in the “normal mode”, so that the irregular gaming method (“normal mode”) can be more reliably performed. In this case, it is possible to prevent a gaming method of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640a.

  Next, state transition performed by determining the jackpot type based on the special symbol 1 type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 107) and the special symbol 2 type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 108). This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing conditions for going back and forth between the three types of states (“normal mode”, “preparation mode”, or “long villa mode”) in this control example. First, the state transition in the “normal mode” (non-short-time state) that is the most disadvantageous for the player will be described. This “normal mode” is shown on the upper side of FIG. As shown in FIG. 109, when the “normal mode” is a big win, the game state is shifted to another game state. As described above, the jackpot probability in this control example is approximately equal to 1 / 24.4 in the low probability state of the special symbol and 1/25 in the high probability state of the special symbol. For simplification, the jackpot probability is expressed as 1/25 in FIG. As described above, since the “normal mode” is a low probability state (non-short-time state) of the normal symbol, it is difficult for the player to basically open the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a. Specifically, the ball is launched aiming at the first entrance 64. Therefore, since the lottery for the special symbol 1 is executed, the jackpot type is basically determined from the type selection table 202b1 for the special symbol 1.

  In the “normal mode” (probability variation non-short-time state and non-probability variation non-time-short state), when winning a special symbol 1 lottery, “probability variation big hit D” (50%) or “probability variation big hit G” at a rate of 60% (10%) is determined (see FIG. 107). When these jackpot types are found in the “normal mode”, the mode shifts to the “normal mode” again after the jackpot is over (see the upper left in FIG. 109). That is, the “normal mode” is looped. Even if you win “Probability jackpot D” or “Probability jackpot G”, you can win relatively few prize balls, so continue to win “Probability jackpot D” and “Probability jackpot G”. In many cases, the number of possessed balls consumed in the “normal mode” is larger than the number of prize balls obtained with a jackpot. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol 1 is won by lottery, it becomes one of “probability big hit B, C, E, F” and “normal big hit A” at a rate of 39.5%. In this case, after the jackpot is over, the state shifts to the “preparation mode” (non-probability change non-short-time state) (see the upper center portion of FIG. 109). In other words, since the transition to the state where it is relatively easy to shift to the “ream home mode” is made, it is more advantageous to the player than “probability big hit D” and “probability big hit G”.

  And if it becomes “probable big hit A” that wins 0.5% of the big win in the special symbol 1 lottery, it shifts directly to the “renso mode” after the big win ends (in FIG. 109). See upper right). In this “renso mode”, as described above, the short-time state that continues until the next jackpot and the jackpot that makes it easy to obtain a relatively large amount of prize balls (“probable jackpot H” to “probable jackpot K”, “normal jackpot B”). ) Is easily repeated, which is most advantageous to the player.

  Thus, in the “normal mode” (probability non-time-short state, non-probability non-time-short state), the same state (ie, “normal mode”) is looped at a rate of 60% in the case of a big win, while 40 %, It is configured to shift to a “preparation mode” or a “village mode” that is more advantageous than the current state. Therefore, paying attention to the state after the big hit, the player can play the game.

  Next, the state transition in the “preparation mode” that is more advantageous to the player than the “normal mode” described above (easy to shift to the “renso mode”) will be described. This “preparation mode” is shown in the center of FIG. Since the “preparation mode” is a short time state of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is easily opened. Therefore, since the player basically plays the game aiming at the second entrance 640a, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn. However, if the lottery of the special symbol 1 has been put on hold before the big hit or during the big hit, the “preparation mode” is started, and then the lottery of the special symbol 1 that has been put on hold is executed. For this reason, in the “preparation mode”, when a player plays a game as usual, a special game 1 lottery or a special design 2 lottery may occur.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in the “preparation mode”, the game shifts to another state when the jackpot is reached or the short-term period of the normal symbol given after the previous jackpot has passed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, in the “preparation mode”, when a normal jackpot is won at a rate of 2.5% (in the case of “normal jackpot A” in the lottery of the special symbol 1) , And the special symbol 2 lottery results in “normal jackpot B”), the system shifts to “normal mode” after the jackpot is over (see the lower left in the center of FIG. 109). In other words, since the player falls to a disadvantageous state, the player can play a game in the “preparation mode” in the hope that the player will not normally win a big hit.

  On the other hand, the probability variation jackpot to win at a rate of 97.5% in the “preparation mode” (if the symbol of special symbol 1 becomes “probable bonus jackpot A” to “probability variation jackpot G”, or the symbol of special symbol 2) In the case of “Probability variation jackpot H” to “Probability variation jackpot K”), the mode shifts to “renso mode” (see the central portion of FIG. 109). For this reason, since the player can expect a large amount of prize balls to be acquired by the “renso mode”, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 109, in the “preparation mode”, when the set number of short times (1 or 7 lotteries for special symbols) has elapsed, it is disadvantageous compared to the current situation, as in the case of a normal jackpot. Shift to “normal mode”. For this reason, the game in the “preparation mode” can be performed in the expectation that one of the probable big hits will be made before the time-saving count has elapsed. In general gaming machines, the short-time state of normal symbols is such that it is difficult to reduce the number of balls, and the benefit of jackpot does not change depending on whether it is a big hit in the short-time state or a big hit in the non-short-time state Is almost. On the other hand, in this control example, it shifts to the “long-run mode”, which is most advantageous for the player, by hitting a probable big hit during the “preparation mode” (short-time state), but the “normal mode” (non-short-time state) ) Even if it becomes a big hit, the “normal mode” where the majority is the most disadvantageous loops. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which whether or not a promising big hit can be won during the short-running state greatly affects the subsequent development. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the “renso mode” shown at the bottom of FIG. 109 will be described. Note that, as described above, the “renso mode” is a short time state of a normal symbol, so that the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is easily opened. Therefore, since the player basically plays the game aiming at the second entrance 640a, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn. In addition, in many cases, the “renzo mode” is shifted from the “preparation mode” in which the special symbol 2 is easily drawn, so the “renso mode” is set in a state where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is suspended. That is rare. Therefore, in the “renso mode”, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is basically executed.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 109, in the “renso” mode, there is a possibility that a transition to another state may occur only when a special symbol wins. Specifically, in the “renso mode”, when the “ordinary jackpot B” determined at a rate of 2.5% in the case of the big jackpot due to the special symbol 2 lottery, (See the lower left side of FIG. 109). In other words, the player falls to the most unfavorable state, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, when it becomes “probable big hit H” to “probable big hit K”, which is determined at a rate of 97.5% in the case of winning big wins by special symbol 2 lottery, after that jackpot ends, it will switch back to “renso mode” Migrate (loop through “renso mode”). For this reason, in the “renso mode”, as long as one of the probable jackpots continues to be won, a jackpot that allows a relatively large amount of winning balls (a jackpot that opens the second specific winning opening 65a) and the following Since the short time state of the normal symbol that continues to the big hit is repeated, it is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the “renso mode”, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the expectation that he / she will continue to win a promising jackpot, so that the player ’s interest in the game in the “renso mode” is improved. Can do.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to shift to the “preparation mode”, which is a portion of the big hit in the “normal mode” and easily shifts to the “renso mode”. Then, by winning one of the probable jackpots in the “preparation mode”, the mode shifts to the “renso mode” after the jackpot. In this “renso mode”, it is easy to become a jackpot that can win a large amount of prize balls, and when it becomes a probable jackpot determined at a rate of 97.5% in the case of the jackpot, after the jackpot, again “renso” Mode "is set. Thus, by continuing to win the winning jackpot, a large number of prize balls can be obtained continuously, which is very advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform the game with the expectation that the player will shift to the “renso mode” and loop the “renso mode” more times. The interest in games can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 110 (a)) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. Specifically, as described above, “5” is defined as the determination value that is a hit for the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol (see FIG. 110A). In addition, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of a normal symbol in a high probability state (short-time state) of the normal symbol (see FIG. 110A). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, referring to the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 and the second per-random number table 202c, It is determined whether or not there is.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table that defines the variation time of the symbol variation indicating the lottery result of the current special symbol in association with the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1. Details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 110B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in this control example. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202d is for determining the variation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, “normal mode”). The normal medium jackpot table 202d1, the normal medium loss table 202d2 for determining the change time when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the normal state of the normal symbol, and the short time state of the normal symbol (ie, “preparation mode”) , Or “Renso mode”), when the special symbol lottery result is a big win, the short / medium big hit table 202d3 for determining the change time, and the special symbol lottery result in the normal symbol short time state In addition, there is provided a time reduction / decrease table 202d4 for determining the variation time. Each of these tables will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS.

  First, the normal middle jackpot table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium jackpot table 202d1. As described above, the normal medium jackpot table 202d1 is a data table used for determining the variation time (variation pattern) when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the normal symbol. There are two types of big hit variation patterns: normal variation (7 seconds) and long variation (10 seconds), and for each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used as a judgment value. Is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), “0 to 99” for the normal variation (7 seconds) and “100 to 198” for the long variation (10 seconds). It is defined as the judgment value of the type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from this normal middle big hit table 202d1.

  FIG. 111 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal dropout table 202d2. As described above, the normal miss table 202d2 is a data table used for determining the variation time (variation pattern) when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal symbol in the normal state. There are two types of deviation patterns: a deviation normal fluctuation (7 seconds) and a deviation long fluctuation (10 seconds). For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is used as a judgment value. Is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), “0-150” for out-of-normal fluctuation (7 seconds) and “151-198” for out-of-long fluctuation (10 seconds). It is defined as the judgment value of the type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the special symbol is lost in the normal state of the normal symbol, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the normal medium big hit table 202d1.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the contents of the short-time middle big hit table 202d3. As described above, the short / medium / big hit table 202d3 determines the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win in the normal symbol's short time state (that is, “preparation mode” or “renso mode”). It is a data table used for this purpose. There are nine types of fluctuation patterns in the case of a big hit during the short time state: short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), middle fluctuation (3 seconds), and long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to long fluctuation G (72 seconds). Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 112, in the short time state of the normal symbol, the variation pattern (variation time) varies depending on the previous jackpot type and the number of lotteries (variation number) of the special symbol executed after the last jackpot has ended. Is configured to be selected. This is to ensure a sufficient effect period for executing the “renso mode suggestion effect” (see FIGS. 93 to 95) in the “preparation mode”. It should be noted that the “renso mode suggestion effect” executed in the “preparation mode” is a fixed effect with an effect time of 90 seconds. However, as described above, there are two types of maximum number of fluctuations in the “preparation mode”: one time or seven times (see FIGS. 107 and 108). Furthermore, even in the “preparation mode” in which seven short-term periods are set, if a big hit occurs before the seven fluctuations are completed, the state is changed to another state before all seven fluctuation displays are executed. Transition. For this reason, the number of lotteries for the special symbol in which the “preparation mode” continues varies depending on the set number of times and the lottery result during the time-short state.

  Therefore, in this control example, in order to be able to shift from the “preparation mode” to another mode at the same timing regardless of the set number of times and the lottery result during the time reduction state, A variation pattern (variation time) is selected in accordance with the number of times of variation (the number of lotteries of special symbols) after the jackpot ends. The selected variation time is the same time (90 seconds, which is the production time of the “renso mode suggestion effect”), regardless of the set number of times (1 or 7) and the lottery result during the time. ) Is configured to end all the variable display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to sufficiently secure the production period of the “renso mode suggestion production” executed in the “preparation mode”. Moreover, since the production time of the “renso mode suggestion production” can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of production styles with different production times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the storage capacity.

  The specified contents of the short / medium / big hit table 202d3 will be described more specifically. As shown in FIG. 112, when the previous jackpot type was any of “probable jackpot A, D, G, H, K”, the number of fluctuations since the jackpot ended (the number of lotteries for special symbols) Regardless of (), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected with reference to the table for extended resorts (at the time of big hit) shown in the lower part of FIG. This table for consecutive houses (at the time of big hit) is used to determine the variation pattern (variation time) in the “village mode”. It should be noted that regardless of the number of fluctuations (the number of lotteries for special symbols), the fluctuation time is determined as “renso mode” after “probability big hit A, D, G, H, K” shifts to “preparation mode”. This is because there is nothing. In other words, when the normal symbol is in a short time state after the end of each jackpot, it is always in the “renso mode”, so there is no need to secure the “renso mode suggestion effect” stage.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 112, in the table for consecutive resorts (at the time of big hit), a short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) is associated with the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 99” as the fluctuation type. Yes. On the other hand, in the range where the variation type counter CS1 is “100 to 198”, middle variation 3 seconds is associated as the variation type. As described above, in the “renso mode”, since the variation time shorter than the variation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the “normal mode” is determined, Can be executed quickly. In addition, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the “renso mode” from becoming monotonous.

  As shown in FIG. 112, when the previous jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot B, E, I”, the variation time varies depending on the number of variations after the jackpot (number of lotteries for special symbols) ( Variation pattern) is determined. More specifically, after the “probable variation jackpot B, E, I”, when the first special symbol lottery is won, the long variation A as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. Thereby, since the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) and the production time of the “renso mode suggestion effect” can be matched, the timing when the preparation mode ends and a big hit is given, It is possible to match the timing when the “production” ends.

  In addition, after “probability big hit B, E, I”, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the long fluctuation B (87 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Is determined. Here, details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113. In this control example, when the special symbol is not selected in the “preparation mode”, the variation time is independent of the value of the variation type counter CS1. A middle fluctuation of 3 seconds is determined. For this reason, after “probability big hit B, E, I”, if the first special symbol lottery is missed and the big lottery is won in the second lottery, middle fluctuation 3 seconds and long fluctuation B 87 The “preparation mode” is completed after a total fluctuation time of 90 seconds with the second, resulting in a big hit. In other words, after “probability big hit B, E, I”, even if a big win is won by the special symbol lottery executed for the second time, the fluctuation time until the “preparation mode” is ended is shown as “renso mode suggestion effect” To 90 seconds, which is the production time of "".

  Similarly, after “probability big hit B, E, I”, even if the special symbol lottery is won for the 3rd to 7th times, the fluctuation that indicates that the special symbol that has been executed up to that big hit will be lost Long fluctuation C so that the total of the fluctuation time of display (middle fluctuation) (3 seconds x number of misses) and the fluctuation time of the big display (any one of long fluctuations C to G) indicating a big hit is 90 seconds. A variation time of ~ G is set. For example, when the big hit is made for the fifth time after the end of the jackpot, the fluctuation times of the first to fourth fluctuation display are 3 seconds each (middle fluctuation), and the fluctuation time of the fifth fluctuation display is 78 seconds ( Since the long fluctuation E) is determined, the total fluctuation time is 90 seconds (3 seconds × 4 + 78 seconds). Therefore, in the “preparation mode” in which seven short-term periods are set, if any of the first to seventh fluctuations (special symbol lottery) is a big win, it will be executed before the big hit The total of the change time of the change display (middle change) corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol made and the change time of the change display (long change A to long change G) corresponding to the jackpot is “the recreation mode suggestion effect” Can be adjusted to 90 seconds, which is the production time. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the production period of the “renso mode suggestion production” executed in the “preparation mode”. Moreover, since the production time of the “renso mode suggestion production” can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of production styles with different production times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the storage capacity.

  If the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) after “probability big hit B, E, I” has exceeded seven times, the table for consecutive resorts shown in the lower part of FIG. The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to (time). When the transition is made to the “preparation mode” after the “probability big hit B, E, I” is completed, 7 times are set for a short time period. This is because when the short time state of the normal symbol continues for more than the number of times, it means the “renso mode”.

  Here, even when the transition to the “renso mode” is made after the “probable jackpot B, E, I” is completed, the time / medium jackpot table 202d3 is referred to, and therefore 7 times after the “renso mode” is entered. When the jackpot is within, a long variation time (72 seconds to 90 seconds) is set. If a long variation time is set in the “renso” mode, the period until the big hit becomes long, and there is a possibility that the game may be delayed. In this regard, in this control example, when the big symbol is won by lottery of special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) that “probability big hit I” is determined is as low as 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “renso mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to draw the special symbol 1. That is, while the “renso mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “renso mode” loops), the “probable jackpot B” and the “probable jackpot E” do not occur. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “renso mode” becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 112, after “probable variation jackpot C, F, J”, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a long variation A as a variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. Thereby, since the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) and the production time of the “renso mode suggestion effect” can be matched, the timing when the preparation mode ends and a big hit is given, It is possible to match the timing when the “production” ends.

  In addition, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) after “probability big hit C, F, J” is two times or more, the table for consecutive resorts shown at the bottom of FIG. 112 (at the time of big hit) The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to FIG. When shifting to the “preparation mode” after the end of “probability jackpot C, F, J”, the time-saving period is always set once, so after “probability jackpot C, F, J” ends, 2 This is because when the short time state of the normal symbol continues for more than the number of times, it means the “renso mode”.

  As shown in FIG. 112, when the previous jackpot type is “ordinary jackpot A, B” and the first special symbol lottery is won, the previous jackpot type is “probable jackpot C, F, J”. As in the case of “”, the long variation A (90 seconds) is determined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Thereby, since the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) and the production time of the “renso mode suggestion effect” can be matched, the timing when the preparation mode ends and a big hit is given, It is possible to match the timing when the “production” ends.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation time is not defined when the number of fluctuations (the number of lotteries for special symbols) is two or more. There is no case where the mode is shifted to the “renso mode” after the end of “normal jackpot A, B” (see FIG. 107 and FIG. 108). This is because the “preparation mode” always has one short time period.

  In this way, the short / medium / big jackpot table 202d3 shows that the total variation time until the big win is obtained regardless of the time / times of the “preparation mode” or the special symbol lottery result in the “preparation mode”. It is configured to coincide with 90 seconds, which is the production time of the “suggesting production”. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the production period of the “renso mode suggestion production” executed in the “preparation mode”. Moreover, since the production time of the “renso mode suggestion production” can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of production modes with different production times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the storage capacity.

  Also, the time-saving medium / big hit table 202d3 is configured such that the variation time in the “renso mode” is shorter than that in the “normal mode”. Thereby, a game can be speedily executed in the “renso mode”. In addition, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the “renso mode” from becoming monotonous.

  Here, even when the transition to the “renso mode” is made after the “probable jackpot C, F, J” is completed, the time / medium jackpot table 202d3 is referred to, so the first time after the “renso mode” is entered. When a big hit is made, a long fluctuation time (90 seconds) is set. If a long variation time is set in the “renso” mode, the period until the big hit becomes long, and there is a possibility that the game may be delayed. In this regard, this control example is configured so that the probability (proportion) that “probability big hit J” is determined becomes a very low probability of 0.1% when the big win is obtained by drawing the special symbol 2. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “renso mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to draw the special symbol 1. In other words, while the “renso mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “renso mode” loops), it does not become the “probable variation jackpot C” or the “probability variation jackpot F”. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “renso mode” becomes long.

  Next, the time reduction / removal table 202d4 will be described with reference to FIG. At this time, the short / short-out table 202d4 determines the variation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal symbol in the short-time state (that is, the “preparation mode” or the “renso mode”) as described above. It is a data table used for this purpose. There are four types of fluctuation patterns in the case of a deviation in the short-time state: short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), middle fluctuation (3 seconds), long fluctuation A (90 seconds), and long fluctuation G (72 seconds). Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 113, in the short-time state of the normal symbol, the variation pattern (variation time) varies depending on the previous jackpot type and the number of lotteries (number of variations) of the special symbol executed after the last jackpot has ended. Is configured to be selected. This is to ensure a sufficient performance period (90 seconds) for executing the “renso mode suggestion effect” (see FIGS. 93 to 95) in the “preparation mode”, as in the case of the short-term middle big hit table 202d3. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when the previous jackpot type was any of “probable jackpot A, D, G, H, K”, the number of fluctuations since the jackpot ended (the number of special symbol lotteries) Regardless of (), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected with reference to the extended resort table (at the time of detachment) shown in the lower part of FIG. This extended resort table (at the time of detachment) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the “longue mode”. It should be noted that regardless of the number of fluctuations (the number of lotteries for special symbols), the fluctuation time is determined as “renso mode” after “probability big hit A, D, G, H, K” shifts to “preparation mode”. This is because there is nothing. In other words, when the normal symbol is in a short time state after the end of each jackpot, the “renso mode” is always set, and therefore it is not necessary to secure the rendering period (90 seconds) of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. It is.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 113, in the range table (at the time of detachment), the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 160” is associated with the short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) as the fluctuation type. Yes. On the other hand, the range of the variation type counter CS1 “161 to 198” is associated with a middle variation of 3 seconds as the variation type. As described above, in the “renso mode”, since the variation time shorter than the variation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the “normal mode” is determined, Can be executed quickly. In addition, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the “renso mode” from becoming monotonous. Further, in the “renso mode”, when the special symbol lottery is off, the middle fluctuation (0.2 seconds) is less likely to be selected than in the case of winning. As a result, in the “renso mode”, the relatively long (3 seconds) variation time is determined, so that a sense of expectation for the special symbol jackpot can be enhanced. Therefore, since the game can be performed paying attention to the variation time, it is possible to prevent the game in the “renso mode” from becoming monotonous and to improve the interest in the game.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when the previous jackpot type was any of “probable jackpot B, E, I”, the varying time ( Variation pattern) is determined. More specifically, after the “probable big hit B, E, I”, when the first to sixth special symbols are not selected, the variation pattern is displayed regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Middle fluctuation (3 seconds) is determined. On the other hand, after “probability big hit B, E, I”, when the 7th special symbol lottery is missed, the long fluctuation G (72 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Is determined. As a result, after “probability big hit B, E, I” ends, it shifts to “preparation mode” (seven short time periods), and when all of the seven special symbol lotteries are out, The total can be 90 seconds (3 seconds × 6 + 72 seconds). In other words, the total variation time from the end of the “preparation mode” to the transition to the “normal mode” can be matched with the production time of the “renso mode suggestion effect”.

  If the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) after “probability big hit B, E, I” has exceeded seven times, the table for consecutive resorts shown in the lower part of FIG. The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to (time). When the transition is made to the “preparation mode” after the “probability big hit B, E, I” is completed, 7 times are set for a short time period. This is because when the short time state of the normal symbol continues for more than the number of times, it means the “renso mode”.

  Here, even when the mode shifts to the “renso mode” after the end of the “probability big hit B, E, I”, the time reduction / rejection table 202d4 is referred to, and therefore 7 times after the “renso mode” is entered. If the deviation is continuous, a long fluctuation time (72 seconds) is set. If a long variation time is set in the “renso” mode, the period until the big hit becomes long, and there is a possibility that the game may be delayed. In this regard, in this control example, when the big symbol is won by lottery of special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) that “probability big hit I” is determined is as low as 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “renso mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to draw the special symbol 1. That is, while the “renso mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “renso mode” loops), the “probable jackpot B” and the “probable jackpot E” do not occur. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “renso mode” becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 113, after “probability big hit C, F, J”, when the first special symbol lottery is lost, the long fluctuation A as the fluctuation pattern is independent of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. Thereby, since the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) and the production time of the “renso mode suggestion effect” can be matched, the “preparation mode” with one short time period ends and the “normal mode” The timing for shifting to “and the timing for completing the“ renso mode suggestion effect ”can be matched.

  In addition, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) after “probability big hit C, F, J” is two times or more, the table for consecutive resorts shown at the bottom of FIG. The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to FIG. When shifting to the “preparation mode” after the end of “probability jackpot C, F, J”, the time-saving period is always set once, so after “probability jackpot C, F, J” ends, 2 This is because when the short time state of the normal symbol continues for more than the number of times, it means the “renso mode”.

  Here, even when the transition to the “renso mode” is made after the “probability jackpot C, F, J” is completed, the time reduction / rejection table 202d4 is referred to, so the first time after the “renso mode” is entered. When the special symbol lottery is missed, a long variation time (90 seconds) is set. If a long variation time is set in the “renso” mode, the period until the big hit becomes long, and there is a possibility that the game may be delayed. In this regard, in this control example, when the big symbol is won by lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) that the “probable big bonus C” is determined is 0.1%, which is an extremely low probability. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “renso mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to draw the special symbol 1. In other words, while the “renso mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “renso mode” loops), it does not become the “probable variation jackpot C” or the “probability variation jackpot F”. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “renso mode” becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when the previous jackpot type is “ordinary jackpot A, B”, when the first special symbol lottery is lost, the previous jackpot type is “probable jackpot C, F, J”. As in the case of “”, the long variation A (90 seconds) is determined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Thereby, since the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) and the production time of the “renso mode suggestion effect” can be matched, the timing at which the “preparation mode” ends and the mode shifts to the “normal mode” And the timing at which the “renso mode suggestion effect” ends can be matched.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation time is not defined when the number of fluctuations (the number of lotteries for special symbols) is two or more. There is no case where the mode is shifted to the “renso mode” after the end of “normal jackpot A, B” (see FIG. 107 and FIG. 108). This is because the “preparation mode” always has one short time period.

  As described above, in the time reduction / disengagement table 202d4, the total variation time until the preparation mode ends regardless of the number of time reductions in the “preparation mode” is 90 seconds, which is the production time of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. Configured to match. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the production period of the “renso mode suggestion production” executed in the “preparation mode”. Moreover, since the production time of the “renso mode suggestion production” can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of production modes with different production times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the storage capacity.

  Further, the time-shortening / disengagement table 202d4 is configured such that the variation time in the “renso mode” is shorter than that in the “normal mode”. Thereby, a game can be speedily executed in the “renso mode”. In addition, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the “renso mode” from becoming monotonous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, a description will be given of the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the rendering mode when the number of time reductions of seven normal symbols is set in the “preparation mode”. FIG. 114 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the number of time reductions for normal symbols is set to seven and all special symbols are not selected by lottery. That is, it is a diagram showing a case where a loss is notified in the roulette chance effect.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (a), when the variation effect corresponding to the deviation is executed seven times in the “preparation mode”, the first (time reduction 1) to the sixth (time reduction 6) variation display is a variation of 3 seconds. Time is set. On the other hand, in the seventh variation display (time reduction 7), a variation time of 72 seconds is set. Then, when the seventh special symbol lottery is completed, the normal symbol time-short state is ended due to the passage of the time-saving number of times, and the process proceeds to the “normal mode”. In the total 90 seconds, the “renso mode suggestion effect” is executed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), when the jackpot ends and the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”, first, a lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93 (a) and (b)) is executed. Is done. As described above, this lucky number increasing effect is an effect of executing a lottery every time a ball enters the second entrance 640a and increasing the lucky number (winning pocket) when the lottery is won. . This lucky number increase effect is an effect whose effect time is fixed for 20 seconds.

  When the lucky number increasing effect is finished, a roulette chance effect (see FIGS. 94 and 95) is started. As described above, the roulette chance effect is an effect of notifying whether or not to shift to the “renso mode” depending on the type of the pocket where the ball B falls. This roulette chance effect is an effect whose effect time is fixed for 65 seconds. After the end of the roulette chance effect, a 5-second ending effect is set to notify the end of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. The effect time of the ending effect may be extended depending on the game situation in the “preparation mode”.

  In this way, the “renso mode suggestion effect” of this control example is basically a 90-second effect of a 20-second lucky number increase effect, a 65-second roulette chance effect, and a 5-second ending effect. Are executed in this order. The variation time of each variation display (variation representation) executed in the “preparation mode” is set in accordance with the effect time of 90 seconds, seven variation displays are executed without interval, and all variation displays are displayed. When completed, the “renso mode suggestion effect” is configured to end. As a result, although the “preparation mode” has not ended, the “renso mode suggestion effect” has ended, or conversely, the “renso mode” has endured in spite of the completion of the “preparation mode”. It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the “suggest” effect is continuously executed, and to link the gaming state and the executed effect. Therefore, the player can be made aware of whether or not the current state is the “preparation mode” by the effect to be executed.

  By setting the lucky number increase effect to 20 seconds, the roulette chance effect can be executed in consideration of the lottery results of all the special symbols executed in the “preparation mode”. That is, when the special symbol lottery is executed without interruption, the seventh lottery is executed after 18 seconds at the longest, so whether or not the special symbol lottery result executed for the seventh time is a win. A roulette chance effect can be started after making a determination and determining whether or not to shift to the “renso mode” according to the determination result. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to shift to the “village mode” in the middle of the roulette chance production, and there is no need to perform processing such as rewriting the result in the middle of the production, and the result of the production at the start of the roulette chance production Therefore, the processing load during the execution of the roulette chance effect can be reduced.

  Next, referring to FIG. 114 (b), when the number of time reductions for normal symbols is set to 7 and it is missed by lottery for all special symbols, a special is displayed in the middle of 7 fluctuation displays corresponding to the miss. An effect mode when the symbol lottery is interrupted will be described. That is, a case where a period during which a ball does not enter the second entrance 640a occurs during the “preparation mode” will be described. In FIG. 114B, since the ball has not entered the second entrance 640a for 5 seconds after the second fluctuation display is completed, the second fluctuation display and the third fluctuation display are shown. The case where the fluctuation stop state for 5 seconds occurs is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs during the “preparation mode”, the effect time of the lucky number increase effect and the roulette chance effect is not changed. That is, when the “preparation mode” is started, a lucky number increase effect for 20 seconds is executed, and then a roulette chance effect for 65 seconds is executed. On the other hand, the execution period of the ending effect is extended for 5 seconds in accordance with the fluctuation stop period. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the ending effect is executed for 10 seconds. As described above, in this control example, when the variable stop state occurs in the “preparation mode” and the period of the “preparation mode” has shifted from 90 seconds, the effect time of the ending effect can be varied. Is configured to absorb the deviation. Thereby, even if the fluctuation stop state has occurred, the period in the “preparation mode” and the production period of the “renso mode suggestion effect” can be matched.

  In this control example, by varying the production period of the ending effect, the fluctuation stop period is absorbed so that the period in the “preparation mode” and the production period of the “renso mode suggestion effect” are matched. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect time of the lucky number increase effect may be varied, or the effect period of the roulette chance effect may be varied. Further, it may be configured to interrupt the “ream mode suggestion effect” at the time when the change stop is detected, and to restart the effect when the change start is detected thereafter.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), a description will be given of the relationship between the effect mode and the variation time when the special symbol lottery is won in the “preparation mode”. FIG. 115 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where a special symbol lottery is won in the fourth special symbol lottery, in which the number of time reductions for normal symbols is set to seven. As shown in FIG. 115 (a), in the special symbol lottery executed in the “preparation mode”, the first (time reduction 1) to the third (time reduction 3) are missed, and the fourth (time reduction 4) is a big hit. Then, 3 seconds is set as the change time for the first (time reduction 1) to 3rd (time reduction 3) change display, and 81 seconds (long change D) is set as the change display time for the fourth (short time 4) change display. Is done. As a result, the total variation time can be matched with 90 seconds, which is the production period of the “renso mode suggestion production”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), the “renso mode suggestion effect” of 90 seconds in total, which is a 20-second lucky number increase effect, a 65-second roulette chance effect, and a 5-second ending effect, ends. At the timing, the “preparation mode” can be terminated. Therefore, since the gaming state and the effect to be executed can be linked, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the current state is the “preparation mode” by the effect to be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (b), when the number of times of normal symbols is set to 7 times and the special symbol lottery is won for the fourth time, the special symbol lottery is performed in the middle of the 4th variable display. A production mode when the operation is interrupted will be described. That is, a case where a period during which a ball does not enter the second entrance 640a occurs during the “preparation mode” will be described. In FIG. 115 (b), since the ball has not entered the second entrance 640a for 40 seconds after the third fluctuation display (time reduction 3) is completed, the third fluctuation display and the fourth fluctuation display are performed. This shows a case in which a fluctuation stop state for 40 seconds has occurred between the fluctuation display and.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs during the “preparation mode”, the production time of the lucky number increase production and the roulette chance production is not changed. That is, when the “preparation mode” is started, a lucky number increase effect for 20 seconds is executed, and then a roulette chance effect for 65 seconds is executed. At the start of execution of the roulette chance effect, it is uncertain whether or not to shift to the “renso mode”, so that the roulette chance effect is notified of a disconnection (the ball B falls in the release pocket). ). In the example of FIG. 115 (b), the player enters the second entrance 640a in the middle of the roulette chance effect for notifying the player, and a big win is obtained by drawing a special symbol. For this reason, in this control example, in order to notify the transition to the “ream home mode”, after notifying in the roulette chance effect that is once executed, and setting the ending effect of 5 seconds as usual, It is configured to execute the roulette chance effect again (execute the resurrection roulette chance effect). This revival roulette chance effect is executed for 30 seconds, and finally a ball falls into the winning pocket, and the transition to the “ream home mode” is notified. Then, after the end of the revival roulette chance effect, a 10-second ending effect is set. This ending effect is set to absorb the difference between the effect period and the “preparation mode” period due to the occurrence of the variable stop period, and the effect period can be varied according to the difference.

  As described above, when the transition to the “renso mode” is determined during the roulette chance production informing the player of the detachment, the player can be pleased by executing the revival roulette chance. In addition, even if a variable stop period occurs, an effect having a length corresponding to the variable stop period can be executed, thereby preventing (suppressing) the effect period from deviating from the “preparation mode” period. can do. In addition, when the fluctuation stop period is shorter than 30 seconds and the recovery roulette chance cannot be executed, a short display effect that ends in a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds) without the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is executed. Is done. When the variable stop period is shorter than 30 seconds, the short display effect informs whether or not the mode is shifted to the “renso mode”. Can be surely grasped by the person.

  Returning to FIG. 106 (a), the description will be continued. The game result setting table 202e is a data table that defines information (state setting information) for determining the gaming state after the big win is ended by lottery of special symbols. Further, the state setting table 202f determines various setting values (probability change flag 203f, time-short flag 203g, and time-short / medium counter 203h) related to the game state after the big hit based on the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e. It is a data table used for

  In this pachinko machine 10, based on winning the jackpot, the state setting information provided in the RAM 203 is set in the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 116 (a)) according to the winning jackpot type. Store in the storage area 203j (see FIG. 117). The state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is held for the jackpot, and at the jackpot end timing, various setting values (probability change flag 203f, time reduction flag 203g, and time reduction during the jackpot end) The counter 203h) is used for reading out and setting from the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 116B). More specifically, a state setting table 202f that defines various setting values (probability change flag 203f, hour / hour flag 203g, and hour / hour / hour counter 203h) relating to the gaming state for each value of the state setting information (see FIG. 116 (b)). Is used to select and set a combination of various setting values. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the random number value (counter value) itself acquired when the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640a is entered (start prize) is terminated. The game state after the jackpot is not determined based on the random number value (counter value), but the first entry 64 or the second entry 640a ( Only the state setting information value selected from the game result setting table 202e based on the random value (counter value) acquired with the start winning) is held in the jackpot.

  Here, if the random number value that is a big hit is configured to be kept during the fluctuation pattern production at the time of winning the big hit or during the subsequent big hit state, it becomes a big hit by reading the big hit random number by an unauthorized player A random value may be identified. Therefore, the timing at which the specified random number value appears is analyzed, and there is a possibility that a jackpot is likely to be illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in this control example, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into a state setting information value and held until the jackpot end time, and the gaming state after the jackpot end is determined based on the state setting information value. Since it is configured to set, it is possible to limit the period during which the random value itself, which is a special symbol jackpot, is held, to a short time. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value that is a big jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally acquired from the outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a big jackpot appears, and conduct the fraudulent act that allocates the jackpot based on the analyzed timing Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analysis timing is set on a so-called hanging board, random numbers are acquired at the timing when a random value that is a jackpot appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether or not the jackpot is determined is suppressed. Can do.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, various setting values (probability change flag 203f, time-short flag 203g, and time-short / medium counter 203h) related to the gaming state after the jackpot are being displayed during symbol fluctuation display for notifying the jackpot. Instead of holding during the subsequent jackpot (privilege gaming state), only the state setting information is held. Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all the various setting values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information value, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

  The game result setting table 202e and the state setting table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b), respectively. As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the game result setting table 202e, the jackpot ends for each gaming state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed and for each type of jackpot won by the special symbol lottery. The value of the state setting information, which is information for setting the gaming state after being played, is defined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the state setting table 202f, setting values related to the gaming state after the jackpot are defined for each value of the state setting information.

  More specifically, in the game result setting table 202e, “00H” is associated with “00H” as the value of the state setting information for “probability big hit AK” in the short time state of the normal symbol, and the short time state of the normal symbol Is associated with “05H” as the value of the state setting information. Similarly, “00H” is associated with “00H” as the value of the state setting information for “probability big hit A, H” in the normal state (non-short-time state) of the normal symbol, and the normal state (non-time-short state) of the normal symbol Is associated with “01H” as the value of the state setting information. Furthermore, “02H” is associated as the value of the state setting information with “probability variation jackpot C, F, J” in the normal state of the normal symbol (non-time-short state), and the normal state (non-time-short state of the normal symbol) ) Is associated with “03H” as the value of the state setting information, and for “normal jackpot A, B” in the normal state (non-short-time state) of the normal symbol Thus, “04H” is associated as the value of the state setting information.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the state setting table 202f, the value “00H” of the state setting information is “ON” as the probability variation flag 203f, the hour / short flag 203g, and the hour / middle counter 203h. , “ON”, and “0” are associated with each other. Although details will be described later, the probability change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is in a probability change state, and the time reduction flag 203g is a normal symbol time reduction state (that is, "" This flag indicates whether or not the “ream mode”), and the time reduction / intermediate counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of time reductions of the normal symbol (that is, the remaining number of time reductions in the “preparation mode”). Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203f is “ON”, the hour / hour flag 203g is “ON”, and the value of the hour / hour / counter counter 203h is “0”, the probability of the special symbol after the big hit ends and continues until the next big hit. It shifts to the short time state of the symbol (that is, “renso mode”). As described above, if the probability symbol jackpot (A to K) is normal in the short time state of the normal symbol, or if the probability symbol jackpot A, H is normal in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is the direct “renso mode”. (See FIGS. 107 and 108), the correct gaming state can be set after the jackpot is over by referring to the game result setting table 202e and the state setting table 202f.

  Further, in the state setting table 202f, for the value “01H” of the state setting information, “ON”, “OFF”, and “7” are respectively set as the probability variation flag 203f, the hour / hour flag 203g, and the hour / hour / hour counter 203h. It is associated. Therefore, when the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, “normal mode”) is “probability big hit B, E, I” and “01H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (FIG. 116 ( a)), after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the “preparation mode” in which the number of time reductions is seven.

  In the state setting table 202f, the value “02H” of the state setting information is associated with “ON”, “OFF”, and “1”, respectively, as the probability change flag 203f, the hour / hour flag 203g, and the hour / hour / hour counter 203h. It has been. Therefore, when the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, “normal mode”) is “probable big hit C, F, J” and “02H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (FIG. 116 ( a)), after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the “preparation mode” in which the number of time reductions is one.

  In the state setting table 202f, the value “03H” of the state setting information is associated with “ON”, “OFF”, and “0”, respectively, as the probability variation flag 203f, the hour / hour flag 203g, and the hour / hour / hour counter 203h. It has been. Therefore, when the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, “normal mode”) is “probability big hit D, G, K” and “03H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (FIG. 116 ( a)), and after the jackpot, it is possible to shift to “normal mode”.

  In the state setting table 202f, the value “04H” of the state setting information is associated with “off”, “off”, and “1” as the probability variation flag 203f, the hour / hour flag 203g, and the hour / hour / hour counter 203h, respectively. It has been. Therefore, when the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, “normal mode”) is “normal jackpot A, B” and “04H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (FIG. 116 (a)). Reference), after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol, and it is possible to shift to the “preparation mode” in which the number of time reductions of the normal symbol is one.

  In the state setting table 202f, the state setting information value “05H” is associated with “off”, “off”, and “0”, respectively, as the probability variation flag 203f, the hour / hour flag 203g, and the hour / hour / hour counter 203h. It has been. Therefore, when the normal symbol is in the short-time state (that is, “preparation mode” or “renso mode”), “normal jackpot A, B” and “05H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j. (See FIG. 116 (a)), after the jackpot, it is possible to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol and to shift to the normal state of the normal symbol (ie, “normal mode”).

  Thus, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the state setting information corresponding to the big hit type is read from the game result setting table 202e and stored in the state setting information storage area 203j. At the end of the process, the state transition as shown in FIG. 109 can be realized by reading and setting various setting values corresponding to the state setting information from the state setting table 202f. In other words, it is possible to realize the gameability of going back and forth between the three types of states “normal mode”, “preparation mode”, and “renso mode”.

  In the present control example, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into a state setting information value and held until the jackpot end time, and the gaming state after the jackpot end is set based on the state setting information value. Therefore, it is possible to limit the period during which the random value itself, which is a jackpot of the special symbol, is held for a short time. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value that is a big jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally acquired from the outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a big jackpot appears, and conduct the fraudulent act that allocates the jackpot based on the analyzed timing Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analysis timing is set on a so-called hanging board, random numbers are acquired at the timing when a random value that is a jackpot appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether or not the jackpot is determined is suppressed. Can do.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, various setting values (probability change flag 203f, time-short flag 203g, and time-short / medium counter 203h) related to the gaming state after the jackpot are being displayed during symbol fluctuation display for notifying the jackpot. Instead of holding during the subsequent jackpot (privilege gaming state), only the state setting information is held. Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all the various setting values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information value, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 117, the RAM 203 of this control example includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. A winning information storage area 203e, a probability change flag 203f, a short time flag 203g, a short time medium counter 203h, a winning number counter 203i, a state setting information storage area 203j, a state storage area 203k, and a pre-reading probability changing flag 203m. And at least a counter buffer 203y and other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing a winning to the first winning opening 64, and has four reserved areas (a reserved first area to a reserved fourth area). In each of these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning opening 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are stored in the common execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the common execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big special lottery drawing of the original special symbol is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information obtained by the prefetching (whether or not, variation pattern, etc.) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223a.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From this, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted. The prediction (prefetching) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation gaming state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . Thereby, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning can be accurately predicted.

  The normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. As in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in other reserved areas are stored. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable ball of the special symbol (first symbol) that is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B based on the first winning opening 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number (number of waiting times) up to 4 times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. They are added one by one (see S404 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 131).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 131 and S405 in FIG. 133). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203c is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the retained ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the number of held balls (standby) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the number of fluctuating display held balls increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S704 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 135).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S703 in FIG. 136: No).

  The probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability variation flag 203f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state, and if it is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). Indicates that there is. The initial value of the probability change flag 203f is set to OFF, and each time the jackpot ends, the state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. The probability variation flag 203f is set. That is, when “ON” is read from the state setting table 202f, the probability change flag 203f is set to “ON”, and when “OFF” is read, the probability change flag 203f is set to “OFF”. The Then, in the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) and the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134), it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state (S302 in FIG. 132, FIG. 134). When the next jackpot game is started, it is set to off (see S213 in FIG. 131).

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (FIG. 134), the value of the probability variation flag 203f is referred to. If the value is on, the first per-random number table for high probability is used. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation flag 203f is off, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a for low probability.

  The time-shortening flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot (that is, whether or not it is in “long-run mode”). At this time, if the value of the short flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the “ream mode”. Show. Note that, as described above, in this control example, in the “preparation mode” in addition to the “renso mode”, the normal symbol is in a short time state. The remaining number of times in the “preparation mode” is counted by the hour / hour counter 203h. That is, in this control example, the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, “normal mode”) is set only when the hour / short flag 203g is off and the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is zero.

  The short time flag 203g has an initial value set to OFF, and every time the jackpot ends, the state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. , The hourly flag 203g is set. That is, when “ON” is read from the state setting table 202f, the time reduction flag 203g is set to “ON”, and when “OFF” is read, the time reduction flag 203g is set to “OFF”. The Then, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), it is referred to to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short-time state (see S608, S614, 619 in FIG. 135), and the next jackpot game is started. (See S213 in FIG. 131).

  The hour / medium counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of times of a normal symbol (that is, the remaining number of times in the “preparation mode”). At this time, if the value of the short / medium counter 203h is larger than 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 has the normal number of time / short times remaining (that is, “preparation mode”), and the value of the short / middle counter 203h is zero. If there is, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in “preparation mode”. As described above, even if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, if the hour / hour flag 203g is on, it means that the normal symbol is in the hour / short state. That is, in this control example, the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, “normal mode”) is set only when the hour / short flag 203g is off and the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is zero.

  The initial value of the hour / middle counter 203h is set to 0, and each time the jackpot ends, a value corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. Is set as the value of the hour / minute counter 203h. That is, when “0” is read from the state setting table 202f, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is set to “0”, and when “1” is read, the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is changed. When “1” is set and “7” is read, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is set to “7”. Then, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), it is referred to to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short-time state (see S608, S614, 619 in FIG. 135), and the next jackpot game is started. The value is initialized to 0 (see S213 in FIG. 131).

  The winning number counter 203i is a counter for counting the cumulative number of balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 in each of the jackpot rounds. In each jackpot round, it is determined whether or not the end condition of each round is satisfied according to the value of the winning number counter 203i. The winning number counter 203i is incremented by 1 each time a winning to the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 is detected in the jackpot (see S1203 in FIG. 141). Then, when it is detected that the winning number counter 203i is 10 or more in the jackpot, the currently executed round is ended (see S1207 in FIG. 141). The initial value of the winning number counter 203i is set to 0, and the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0 when each round ends. The value of the winning number counter 203i is backed up even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.

  The state setting information storage area 203j stores (holds) the state setting information read from the game result setting table 202e in accordance with the jackpot type until the jackpot ends when the special symbol lottery is won. This is a storage area for storage. As described above, based on the state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j, various setting values corresponding to the gaming state after the end of the jackpot are read from the state setting table 202f and set (see FIG. 140). S1115).

  The state storage area 203k is a storage area for storing information indicating which period is the current big hit. Here, the jackpot is an opening period for notifying the start of the jackpot, a round period in which the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific prize opening 65a is opened and closed, and an ending period for notifying the end of the jackpot And at least. The state storage area 203k stores information for distinguishing which of the plurality of types of periods is the current period. More specifically, the jackpot is started, and during the opening period, “01H” is stored in the state storage area 203k, and in the first round, “02H” is stored in the state storage area 203k. First, “03H” is stored in the state storage area 203k, and “04H” is stored in the state storage area 203k in the ending period. On the other hand, in a state other than the big hit, “00H” is stored in the state storage area 203k.

  The initial value of the state storage area 203k is set to “00H”, and the stored value is backed up even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. The value stored in the state storage area 203k is referred to when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the current gaming state is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 based on the value stored in the state storage area 203k. A status command is set to Thereby, even if the power is cut off during the game, the gaming state grasped by the main control device 110 when the power is restored can be matched with the gaming state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) occurrence of wrinkles between the actual gaming state and the performance.

  The pre-reading probability changing flag 203m is used when the pachinko machine 10 prefetches a special symbol lottery result based on a random value (counter value) acquired in accordance with a start winning prize. A flag indicating whether the winning data should be analyzed as being in a probability state or whether the winning data should be analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a special symbol (low probability state in a special symbol). It is.

  When the pre-reading probability changing flag 203m is ON, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. On the other hand, when the pre-reading probability changing flag 203m is off, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. This pre-reading probability changing flag 203m is initialized to OFF when the RAM is initially set (see S916 in FIG. 138), and is set to ON whenever it is determined that the pre-reading lottery result is a probable big hit (see FIG. 133, S410, FIG. 134, S514). On the other hand, every time it is determined that the prefetched lottery result is usually a big hit, it is set to off (see S412 in FIG. 133 and S515 in FIG. 134).

  The counter buffer 203y includes the counters described above (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, variation type counter CS1, second random number counter C4. , A storage area for storing the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data. An area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the MPU 201 A stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Have.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 139), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process at power-on (see FIG. 138). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 137) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b). In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, an operation scenario table 222b, a rotational position determination table 222c, and an addition determination table 222d are defined.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is already well known and will be described briefly. However, the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and shows a rough variation indicated by the variation pattern command. More detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a from the contents (fluctuation time). As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode is determined from among a plurality of types by lottery.

  The operation scenario table 222b is an operation of an accessory when executing a movable effect in which at least one of the actors (the upper elevator unit 300, the liquid crystal elevator unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotation unit 600, etc.) is movable. It is a data table that defines the content (operation scenario). More specifically, it is a data table in which setting values (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction, etc.) set for various drive motors corresponding to each accessory are defined. Details of the operation scenario table 222b will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a block diagram showing the operation scenario table 222b. The operation scenario table 222b stores data for each type of accessory that can be driven (variable). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), the upper elevating / lowering unit table 222b1 to be referred to when the effect for driving the upper elevating / lowering unit 300 is set, and the effect for driving the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 are set. The liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit table 222b2 that is referred to when the operation is performed, the left swing unit table 222b3 that is referred to when the effect of driving the left swing unit 500 is set, and the effect of driving the rotation unit 600 are set. Rotation unit table 222b4 to be referred to in this case is defined. In addition, when it becomes a jackpot type (specific jackpot type) in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected, a specific opening in which the operation content of each accessory during the jackpot opening period is defined. Table 222b5, a specific ending table 222b6 in which the operation content of each accessory in a specific jackpot type ending period is defined, and the operation content of the initial operation of each accessory executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. An initial operation table 222b7 defined for each accessory is defined.

  Each of these tables will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 119 (b) to 120. FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-described upper lift unit table 222b1. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), in the upper lift unit table 222b1, settings are set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the setting progress based on the operation scenario. Values (operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) are defined.

  Here, the operation speed indicates the frequency with which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting one-step operation to the corresponding drive motor (upper lifting motor 341), and per second. This is expressed by the number of signals (pulses) output in (pps, pulses per second). For example, if the operation speed is 333 pps, it means that a signal (pulse) is output 333 times per second from the motor driver to the upper lifting motor 341. That is, it means that the upper elevating motor 341 is driven at a speed of 333 steps per second. The number of operation steps indicates the number of operations performed by the upper lifting motor 341. In other words, a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step from the motor driver to the upper lifting motor 341. ) Is output. For example, the number of operation steps 127 means that one step of operation is set 127 times for the upper lift motor 341. Furthermore, the operation direction means the drive direction (motor rotation direction) of the upper elevating motor 341, and two types of directions, a positive direction and a negative direction, can be set. In the upper lift motor 341, the direction from the ascending position (origin position) to the descending position is the positive direction, and the direction from the descending position to the ascending position (origin position) is the negative direction. By setting these set values for the motor driver for driving the upper elevating motor 341, the corresponding operation can be executed accurately.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the value “01H” of the action pointer 223g indicates that the lifting / lowering body 330 of the upper lifting / lowering unit 300 is lowered from the raised position (origin position) to the lowered position (outward movement action). Are associated. Specifically, 333 pps is defined as the operation speed, 127 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to drive the upper elevating unit 300 in the production. Note that 127 steps means the number of steps up to the lowered position.

  The value “02H” of the action pointer 223g is associated with an action for stopping (resting) the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 at the lowered position. Specifically, 333 pps is defined as the operation speed, 1000 is defined as the operation step, and “stop” is defined as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that the stop command is continuously issued 1000 times at an operation speed of 333 pps. Thereby, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 can be stopped at the lowered position for about 3 seconds (1000 times / 333 pps).

  The value “03H” of the action pointer 223g is associated with an action (return path action) for raising the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the lowered position to the raised position (origin position). Specifically, 333 pps is defined as the operation speed, 127 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. The END data is associated with the value “04H” of the motion pointer 223g. By reading this END data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Similarly, for the liquid crystal lifting unit table 222b2, the left swing unit table 222b3, and the rotation unit table 222b4, a motor driver corresponding to a drive motor that drives each accessory for each value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to each accessory. The setting contents to be set are specified.

  Further, FIG. 119 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned specific opening table 222b5. As described above, the specific opening table 222b5 is a jackpot type (specific jackpot type) in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected to each other in the jackpot opening period. It is a data table in which the operation content of is defined. Note that the specific jackpot type specifically refers to the opening pattern A (opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds 20 times) with respect to the first variable winning device 82a in each round of jackpot. It is a jackpot type in which a repeating open pattern is set.

  As described above, when winning the jackpot type in which the opening pattern A is set in the “normal mode”, the driving side slide member 420 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 are connected to each other. All the balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a are caused to flow down to the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520. Each time the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 (every time the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422), the normal symbol is displayed. A time suggestion effect that suggests whether or not a short state is set is executed.

  In order to execute the short suggestion effect at this time, in the present control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 are driven in the jackpot opening period in which the opening pattern A is set. , Before the first round of jackpot is started (that is, before the ball is ready to enter the first variable winning device 82a), these features are moved to the connected position. Has been. The operation content of each accessory during the opening period is defined in the specific opening table 222b5.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the specific opening table 222b5, for the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is driven from the lowered position to the connected position (see FIG. 9). Are associated with each other. Specifically, 500 pps is defined as the operation speed, 250 is defined as the operation step, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. By setting this operation content, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 can be arranged at the connection position.

  Further, for the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223g, the operation content for swinging the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the release position (origin position) to the connection position is defined. ing. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. By setting the content of this operation, the first passage forming member 520 can be arranged at the connection position. Therefore, since the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 previously arranged at the connecting position and the first passage forming member 520 can be connected, the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a is used as the first passage forming member. It can be guided (flowed down) to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 through 520.

  Further, the value “03H” of the operation pointer 223g is associated with END data indicating the end of the operation. By reading this END data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  As for the specific ending table 222b6, the operation content of the left swing unit 500 and the operation content of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 are defined in the same manner as the specific opening table 222b5. Specifically, settings for driving the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the connection position to the release position, and settings for driving the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 from the connection position to the lowering position. The contents are specified. The specific ending table 222b6 is only shown in which the direction of movement and the order of movement of the accessory are opposite to those of the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)), and therefore illustration is omitted.

  Next, details of the above-described initial operation table 222b7 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the initial operation table 222b7. As shown in FIG. 120, this initial action table 222b7 is associated with the value of the action pointer 223g, and the type of the accessory for which the action is set, and the set value for setting in the motor driver corresponding to the accessory. Is stipulated.

  Unlike the other tables defined in the operation scenario table 222b, the initial operation table 222b7 defines the operation end condition and the number of steps to be determined as abnormal, instead of defining the number of operation steps. That is, in the initial operation in the present control example, the one-step operation is performed at the operation speed and the operation direction defined in the initial operation table 222b7 until the arrival at various sensors provided for each accessory is detected. It is configured to execute repeatedly. For example, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is provided with a plurality of sensors for determining the lifting position. That is, when the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position (origin position), the liquid crystal origin sensor 418 that outputs H (high), and when the liquid crystal lift unit 400 is disposed at the connection position, the output is H (high). At least a liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 is provided. In the initial operation of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g, the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 detects that the connection position has been reached (the output of the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 becomes H). Until then, it is driven step by step in the positive direction (upward direction) at an operating speed of 500 pps.

  Further, during execution of the initial operation, if it is determined that the abnormality determination step value defined in the initial operation table 222b7 has been reached without the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 detecting the arrival at the connection position, the operation proceeds to the connection position. This means that the connection position has not been reached even though an operation having a sufficiently reachable number of steps is set. Therefore, in this case, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 441 for driving the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 fails and the operation corresponding to the instruction of the motor driver cannot be executed, or the gear and the motor are displaced, and the liquid crystal There is a possibility that a problem such as idling of the lifting motor 441 has occurred. For this reason, if the abnormality determination step value (1050 steps) is reached before the operation end condition of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is satisfied in the initial operation, an error is notified. By notifying this error, the store clerk in the hall can immediately recognize the occurrence of the problem, so that appropriate measures such as repair can be executed.

  Although the operation in the case of the operation pointer “01H” has been described as an example, the operation speed of each accessory, the operation end condition, the number of abnormality determination steps, The direction of movement is defined similarly. By executing the initial operation according to the initial operation table 222b7, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the objects are operating normally every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, by allowing the player to play the game after the initial operation is completed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in a state in which each accessory always operates normally.

  Returning to FIG. 118A, the description will be continued. The rotational position determination table 222 c is a data table in which information for specifying the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is defined from the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684. Details of the rotation position determination table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rotational position determination table 222c. As shown in FIG. 121, the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are pockets in which the detected portion 641 c is provided so as to differ depending on the phase (arrangement) of the rotation member 640. (Division member DV), pockets (division member DV) that are not provided are set. The rotational position determination table 222c in the present control example is a data table that defines combinations of outputs from the detection sensors A to F that are specified based on the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c for each pocket that is disposed at the drop position. Since the pockets P1 to P30 are arranged counterclockwise in this order, the arrangement of all the pockets can be specified if the pocket at the dropping position can be specified.

  As shown in FIG. 121, for the combination “L, L, H, H, L, H” of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F, a pocket P1 is defined as a pocket at the drop position. For this reason, when it is detected that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is L, L, H, H, L, and H during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the current It is determined that the rotation member 640 is the rotation position where the pocket P1 is disposed at the drop position.

  Similarly, for the combination “L, L, L, H, H, L” of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F, P2 is defined as the pocket at the drop position. Therefore, when it is detected that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is L, L, L, H, H, and L during the rotation operation of the rotation member 640, the current It is determined that the rotation member 640 is the rotation position where the pocket P2 is disposed at the drop position.

  Similarly, for the pockets P3 to P30, combinations of outputs from the corresponding detection sensors A to F are defined for the rotational position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121). As described above, since combinations of outputs of different detection sensors are associated with the pockets P1 to P30, the phase (arrangement) of the rotating member 640 is changed every time any of the pockets is arranged at the drop position. It can be accurately identified.

  Returning to FIG. 118A, the description will be continued. The extra discrimination table 222d is special when the entrance to the second entrance 640a is detected during the execution of the lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93A and 93B) and in the “normal mode”. It is a data table used in order to determine whether to increase a winning pocket (lucky number) when the lottery of the symbol 1 is newly suspended. Although not shown in the figure, the additional determination table 222d includes an additional high probability table in which an increase in the lucky number is determined with a relatively high probability (25%), and a lucky with a relatively low probability (5%). An additional low probability table in which an increase in the number is determined and an intermediate probability table in which an increase in the lucky number is determined with an intermediate probability (10%) between the two are provided. When the determination condition for determining whether or not to increase the lucky number is satisfied, the above-described three types of tables are used according to the situation (for example, whether or not the transition to the “long-run mode” is confirmed). Any one of them is selected and used to determine whether or not to increase the lucky number. Here, a random value (counter) used for determining (deciding) whether or not to increase the lucky number (winning pocket) is provided in, for example, the RAM 223, and the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 145). The value is updated every time

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 118B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a step counter 223e, an operation scenario flag 223f, and an operation pointer 223g. Returning origin flag 223i, initial operation flag 223j, hit position storage area 223k, lighting position storage area 223m, probability variation state flag 223n, short time state flag 223o, short time state counter 223p, and hit state Storage area 223q, operable type storage area 223r, correction position counter 223s, initial set flag 223t, rotation position storage area 223u, swing undetected flag 223v, swing timer 223w, and designated pocket storage Area 223x and above Counter 223av, production timer 223bv, increased production flag 223cv, roulette flag 223dv, swing production flag 223ev, ball drop possible flag 223fv, winning counter 223gv, discharge counter 223hv, power-off flag 223y and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 1), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, variation pattern, etc.) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various types of information (whether or not, variation pattern, etc.) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area. 223a is stored. More specifically, the extracted winning information is in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special symbol. Remembered. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (first symbol display device 37A, 37B (and third symbol display device 81)). It is a counter that is a variable display) and counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and holds it. When the number of balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2107 in FIG. 150). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on in a fluctuation pattern reception process executed when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 151), and is turned off when setting of fluctuation display is made. (See S3302 in FIG. 162). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, and uses the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command to display the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81 and the rendering unit 331). ), The display control of the variation effect is started so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2104 in FIG. 150), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3307 in FIG. 162). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The step counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of each accessory driven by the drive motor. The count reference (position where the number of operation steps is 0) is set to the origin position of each accessory. The step counter 223e is configured to separately count the number of operation steps for each type of accessory. That is, the step counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the lifting / lowering body 330 in the upper lifting / lowering unit 300, and the number of operation steps of the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 in the left swing member 500. As many counters as the number of drive motors for driving the accessory are provided.

  The step counter 223e outputs the execution signal (execution command) every time it receives an execution signal indicating that the operation of one step has been executed from any of the various drive motors provided in the pachinko machine 10. The counter value corresponding to the motor type is updated by 1 (see S2601 in FIG. 155). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, an origin return operation for returning various kinds of accessories to the origin position is executed. 0 is set for the value. By this origin return operation, the position where the value of the step counter 223e becomes 0 can be reliably set as the origin position of each accessory, so that the operating status (drive position) of each accessory can be accurately grasped. it can.

  The operation scenario flag 223f is a flag indicating which operation scenario is set among the operation scenarios corresponding to the rendering operation of each accessory specified in the operation scenario table 222b. The operation scenario flag 223f is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and the type of the operation scenario is associated with each bit. For example, the 0th bit of the operation scenario flag 223f corresponds to the upper lift unit table 222b1, and if the 0th bit is 1 (on), the upper lift unit table 222b1 is set as the operation scenario. And 0 (off) means that the upper lift unit table 222b1 is not set. Similarly, for the other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and if the corresponding operation scenario is not set, the corresponding bit is 0. Set to (Off).

  In the operation scenario flag 223f, when an operation scenario is set based on the variation pattern command in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151) (see S2204 in FIG. 151), the bit corresponding to the scenario is 1 ( ON) is set. In addition, each time the variation effect for which the operation scenario is set ends, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). With this operation scenario flag 223f, it is possible to easily determine the type of operation scenario currently set.

  The action pointer 223g is a pointer used to identify the progress status of the set action scenario. As described above, each data table constituting the operation scenario table 222b is defined by associating the value of the operation pointer 223g with the operation content to be set (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction). In this control example, the operation with the set content of 1 is set in the drive motor, and when the operation according to the set content is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223g is updated.

  The operation pointer 223g can update the pointer value separately for each set operation scenario. That is, the operation pointer 223g is a generic name for different pointers provided for each operation scenario. Each pointer constituting the operation pointer 223g is set to “01H” as a corresponding operation scenario is newly set. Thereafter, whenever the operation content corresponding to the pointer value is completed, the pointer value is updated (see S2612 in FIG. 155 and S2706 in FIG. 156), and the operation content corresponding to the updated pointer value is set. In addition, when the variation effect in which the corresponding operation scenario is set ends, the pointer value is reset to “00H”. By using the operation pointer 223g, the set operation scenario can be accurately grasped.

  The origin return in-progress flag 223i is executing an origin return operation (an operation for returning an accessory that has deviated from the origin position to the origin position) that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If this origin return flag 223i is on, it indicates that the origin return operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the origin return operation is not being executed. This origin return in-progress flag 223i is set to ON when the origin return operation is set during the origin return process (see FIG. 144) (see S1505 in FIG. 144). On the other hand, in the return to origin operation, it is set to OFF when it is determined that all the objects have returned to the origin position (see S2605 in FIG. 155). By using this origin return flag 223i, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the origin return operation is being performed.

  The initial operation in-progress flag 223j is a flag that indicates whether or not an initial operation that is executed to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally after the origin return operation is completed. . If this initial operation flag 223j is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being executed. This initial operation flag 223j is determined when it is determined that all the objects are placed at the origin position when the power is turned on (S1507 in FIG. 144) or after the origin return operation executed after the power is turned on. It is set to ON (see S2605 in FIG. 155), and is set to OFF when all the operations defined in the initial operation table 222b7 are completed (see S2709 in FIG. 156). By using the initial operation flag 223j, it can be easily determined whether or not the initial operation is being executed.

  The hit position storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the type of each of the pockets P1 to P30 of the rotating member 640 (whether it is a hit pocket or a release pocket) in the “continuous play mode suggestion effect”. In this control example, the lighting states of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are set with reference to the hit position storage area 223k. That is, the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, and the lighting area arranged on the back side of the detached pocket is set to a light-off state. Further, when the ball B is dropped from the holding piece 677 to any one of the pockets, the type of each pocket stored in the hit position storage area 223k is compared with the pocket arranged at the drop position, and the ball B It is determined whether or not it can be dropped into the pocket next to the pocket arranged at the dropping position.

  Details of the hit pocket storage area 223k will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the hit pocket storage area 223k is provided with a storage area corresponding to each pocket. Can be stored. Each storage area corresponding to each pocket is assigned 1 bit, and when each bit is H (1), it means that the corresponding pocket is a hit pocket, and if L (0) , Which means that the corresponding pocket is a detachment pocket.

  Here, as described above, when the roulette chance effect is started, the transition to the “renso mode” is confirmed (in the “renso mode suggestion effect” in the “preparation mode”, it is determined by a special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit), the ball B is allowed to fall into any of the hit pockets, and the ball B is dropped into the off-going pocket. On the other hand, when the roulette chance production has started, the transition to the “renso” mode has not been finalized (if the special symbol lottery executed by the start of the production is all off), the ball will be placed in one of the off pockets B is allowed to fall, and the ball B is allowed to fall into the hit pocket. In this control example, when the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied (when the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B is 1 second or less), the type of each pocket is determined with reference to the hit position storage area 223k. Then, it is determined whether or not the pocket that is placed next to the pocket that is currently placed at the drop position is a pocket that is allowed to drop the ball B in the current roulette chance effect. When the next pocket is a pocket that is allowed to fall, control is performed so that the sphere B is dropped with respect to the pocket. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from falling into a pocket different from the pocket of the target type, so that the ball B An accurate notification can be made according to the type of pocket that has been dropped.

  In FIG. 122, when pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30 are set as hitting pockets and the remaining other pockets are set as detaching pockets, they are stored in the hitting position storage area 223k. FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 122, H (1) indicating the hit pocket is stored in the storage area corresponding to the pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, P28 to P30, and the other pockets. L (0) indicating a detached pocket is stored in the storage area corresponding to.

  The lighting position storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the states of the lighting regions A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 (lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% or light-off state with a lighting rate of 0%). The lighting of each LED of the rear LED 625 is controlled according to the information stored in the lighting position storage area 223m.

  Details of the lighting position storage area 223m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lighting position storage area 223m. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the lighting position storage area 223m is composed of three storage areas of the first storage area 223m1 to the third storage area 223m3 indicating the lighting positions of the three LED bars 625a to 625c constituting the rear LED 625. It consists of two storage areas.

  The first storage area 223m1 is a storage area for storing the states of the lighting areas A1 to A6 of the LED bar 625a. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), among the lighting areas A1 to A6, H (1) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area with the lighting rate of 100%, and the memory corresponding to the lighting area in the unlit state. L (0) is stored in the area. In the example of FIG. 123 (b), H (1) indicating a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% is set in the storage areas corresponding to the lighting areas A3 to A5. On the other hand, L (0) indicating a light extinction state with a lighting rate of 0% is set in the storage areas corresponding to the lighting areas A1, A2, and A6.

  The second storage area 223m2 corresponding to the LED bar 625b and the third storage area 223m3 corresponding to the LED bar 625c also have the same configuration as the first storage area 223m1. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 123 (c) and 123 (d), data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting states of the lighting areas A7 to A12 is set in the second storage area 223m2. A storage area is provided, and the third storage area 223m3 is provided with a storage area for setting data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting states of the lighting areas A13 to A18.

  These three storage areas are sequentially updated according to the arrangement of the hitting pockets, and the lighting areas A1 to A18 are controlled according to the information stored in the respective storing areas, so that only the hitting pockets are seen. can do. As described above, since the rotation member 640 can only make 18/30 rotations while the back LED 625 makes one rotation, the type of each pocket and the type of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket are the rotation operation. It will shift according to the progress of. Therefore, in this control example, it is configured to correct the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 every time the back LED makes 1/3 round (that is, in units of one LED bar), and the hit pocket is always set. It is controlled so that it looks shiny. That is, each time the rear LED makes a 1/3 round, the storage area information corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is corrected in accordance with the deviation caused by the rotation operation. ing. Thereby, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in the appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket shines and the detached pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-corrected section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the release pocket.

  Returning to FIG. 118B, the description will be continued. The probability variation state flag 223n is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state. If the probability variation state flag 223n is on, this indicates that the special symbol is in a certain variation state, and if it is off, it indicates that the probability variation state is not present. The probability change state flag 223n is updated in accordance with a state command output to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the game state is changed in the main control device 110. That is, when the probability change state of the special symbol is notified by the state command, the probability change state flag 223n is set to ON (updated), and when the low probability state of the special symbol is notified, the probability change state flag 223n is set off (updated) (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The time-short state flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not the time-short state of the normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot (that is, the “rengo mode”). At this time, if the short state flag 223o is on, it indicates that the mode is “renso mode”, and if it is off, the mode is not “renso mode” (that is, “normal mode” or “preparation mode”). Indicates. At this time, the short state flag 223o is updated according to the state command output to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the gaming state is changed in the main control device 110, similarly to the probability change state flag 223n. In other words, when the “continuous mode” is notified by the status command, the short state flag 223o is set (updated) to ON at this time, and when “normal mode” or “preparation mode” is notified, The short-time state flag 223o is set off (updated) (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The time reduction state counter 223p is a counter for counting the remaining number of time reductions in the “preparation mode”. If the value of the short-time counter is 1 or more at this time, it indicates that the “preparation mode” (that is, the short-time state of the normal symbol) continues until the special symbol lottery is executed for the number of times corresponding to the counter value. On the other hand, if the counter value is 0, it indicates that the “preparation mode” is not set. Similar to the probability change state flag 223n and the time reduction state flag 223o, the hourly state counter 223p corresponds to a state command output to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the gaming state is changed in the main controller 110. Updated. That is, when the number of times (1 or 7) in the “preparation mode” is notified by the status command, the value of the time reduction counter 223p is updated to 1 or 7 according to the notified number. . On the other hand, when “normal mode” or “rendori mode” is notified by the status command, the value of the short state counter 223p at this time is set (updated) to 0 (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The hit state storage area 223q is a storage area in which information indicating which period is the big hit is currently stored, and has the same configuration as the state storage area 203k of the main controller 110. That is, in the jackpot opening period, “01H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q, “02H” is stored in the first round, “03H” is stored in the second round, and “03H” is stored in the ending period. 04H "is stored. On the other hand, in a state other than the big hit, “00H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q. At this time, the short state counter 223p is updated in accordance with the state command output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The operable type storage area 223r is information indicating whether or not each accessory is permitted to be operated in the origin return operation performed for each accessory when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or in the initial operation. Is a storage area in which is stored. This operable type storage area 223r is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each accessory of the pachinko machine 10 (upper lift unit 300, left swing unit 500, etc.) is associated with each bit of 1 byte. Yes. When 0 is stored in each bit (set to H), it is in a state where it is restricted to operate the accessory corresponding to that bit (origin return operation or initial operation for the accessory) If 1 is stored (set to L), it means that it is allowed to operate the accessory corresponding to that bit.

  The state in which the operation of the accessory (origin return operation or initial operation) is restricted is, for example, when the power is shut off during the big hit when the opening pattern A is set for the first variable winning device 82a, etc. It is. As described above, when the opening pattern A is set, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 are connected to the first variable winning device 82a. The winning ball can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. For this reason, if the configuration is such that the origin return operation and the initial operation are executed for all the objects regardless of the state when the power is shut off, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected when the power is shut off. Even in such a case, the connection is released by the origin return operation or the initial operation. For this reason, for example, when the ball enters the first passage forming member 520, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is instantaneously cut off, and when the power is immediately restored, the first passage forming member 520 passes. There is a possibility that the origin return operation and the initial operation are started during this, and the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released. That is, the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 may enter the back side of the pachinko machine 10 without entering the second passage forming member 422. As a result, there is a risk that problems such as wiring or circuit short-circuiting may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power-on can be accurately grasped also by the sound lamp control device 113 side by a state command output from the main controller 110 at the time of power-on. When the gaming state grasped from the state command is in the middle of the big hit set in the release pattern A, it corresponds to the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 in the operable type storage area 223r. A 1 indicating that the operation is limited is stored for the bit (set to L). Therefore, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off while the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected, the connection is prevented (suppressed) from being released when the power is restored. be able to. Therefore, even if the power supply is restored while the sphere is passing through the first passage forming member 520, the sphere can surely flow down from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  The correction position counter 223 s is used to store any storage area when data in the lighting position storage area 223 m is rewritten in order to correct a shift in the correspondence relationship between the state of the lighting area provided in the rear LED 625 and the pocket of the rotating member 640. It is a counter indicating whether or not the data stored in (first storage area 223m1 to third storage area 223m3) should be rewritten. As described above, the rotating member 640 is provided with 30 pockets P1 to P30. On the other hand, 18 lighting areas A1 to A18 are provided as lighting areas for turning on or off each pocket. Further, in order to operate the pocket arranged in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) (that is, visible to the player) by following the lighting area arranged on the back side thereof, The rear LED 625 is configured to rotate at the same rotational speed. For this reason, since the rotating member 640 has only 18/30 rounds while the backside LED 625 makes one round, the correspondence between the pocket and the lighting area is shifted each time the second section S2 is entered. Therefore, in this control example, when any of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged for the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) that the player cannot visually recognize (difficult), each of the LED bars constituting the LED bar is configured. By switching the state of the lighting area, a shift in the correspondence between the pocket and the lighting area is corrected. When the correction is executed, the type of the LED bar 625 to be corrected is specified from the value of the correction position counter 223s. Thus, no matter how much the back LED 625 rotates, the correspondence between the type of each pocket in the first section visible to the player and the lighting state of the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket Can be immobilized. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the position of the hit pocket from the appearance of each pocket.

  The correction position counter 223 s is configured as a loop counter that counts up by 1 in the range of “0” to “2” and returns to “0” when the value is updated in the state of “2”. If the value of the correction position counter 223s is “0”, it indicates that correction is performed for each of the lighting areas A1 to A6 constituting the LED bar 625a. If the value is “1”, the LED bar 625b is constituted. The lighting areas A7 to A12 to be corrected are indicated to be corrected. If the value is “2”, the lighting areas A13 to A18 constituting the LED bar 625c are indicated to be corrected. The correction position counter 223s is updated by one in the lighting setting process for setting and correcting the lighting states of the lighting areas A1 to A18 (see S2912 in FIG. 158).

  The first set flag 223t indicates that the first lighting areas A1 to A18 are turned on after the rotating member 640 (and the rear LED 625) configured to simulate roulette starts rotating operation in the “ream mode suggestion effect”. It is a flag indicating whether or not state setting has been executed. If the initial set flag 223t is on, it means that the first lighting state has been set after the start of the rotation operation. If it is off, the first lighting state has not been set. Means that. During the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 and the back LED 625, the initial set flag 223t is referred to. When the initial set flag 223t is off, all the lights are turned on when the origin of rotation of the back LED 625 is reached. The lighting states of the areas A1 to A18 are set. On the other hand, when the initial setting completed flag 223t is on, it means that the first lighting state has already been set, and therefore the rear LED 625 makes 1/3 round, and the arrangement of any LED bar is corrected. Each time it matches the section RA, the lighting state of the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA is corrected. This initial set flag 223t is detected after the start of the “ream mode suggestion effect”, when the arrangement of the rear LED 625 is first set to the origin position (the output of the origin sensor becomes H), and each lighting area When the lighting states of A1 to A18 are set, it is set to ON (see S2908 in FIG. 158). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the “renso mode suggestion effect”.

  The rotational position storage area 223u is a storage area for storing the current arrangement of the rotating member 640. In this rotational position storage area 223u, every time it is detected that any of the pockets is arranged at the fall position based on the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 while the rotational member 640 is rotating. The information corresponding to the pocket placed at the drop position is stored (S2803 in FIG. 157). Based on the information stored in the rotation position storage area 223u, the current arrangement of the rotation member 640 can be specified while the rotation member 640 is rotating.

  The swing undetected flag 223v is a flag indicating whether or not the ball B is detected at least once by the ball detection sensor 679 after the swing effect is started. If the swing undetected flag 223v is on, it means that the sphere B has not been detected once by the sphere detection sensor 679. On the other hand, if the swing undetected flag 223v is off, it means that the ball B is detected at least once by the ball detection sensor 679 during the swing effect.

  As described above, in this control example, the period (amplitude) of the swing operation of the sphere B is determined based on the time interval at which the sphere detection sensor 679 detects the sphere B during the execution of the swing effect. The ball B is configured to be allowed to fall when the time is shortened (the cycle becomes 1 second or less). However, when the sphere B is first detected by the sphere detection sensor 679, the previous detection result does not exist and the time interval cannot be calculated. Therefore, in this control example, this swing undetected flag 223v is provided, and whether or not the passage of the sphere B has already been detected at least once by the sphere detection sensor 679 (whether or not the period can be determined from the previous detection result). The period of the swinging motion of the sphere B is determined only when the sphere detection sensor 679 is off. Thereby, it can discriminate | determine correctly from the period of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement of the sphere B.

  The swing undetected flag 223v is set to ON when the ball B is thrown by the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 during execution of the “ream mode suggestion effect” (see S3507 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when the passage of the sphere B is detected by the sphere detection sensor 679 in the state in which the swing undetected flag 223v is ON (see S1704 in FIG. 146).

  The swing timer 223w is used to measure a time interval at which the sphere B is detected by the sphere detection sensor 679 when the sphere B is swinging on the holding piece 677. The initial value of the swing timer 223w is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 every time the swing effect process for executing various settings during the swing effect is performed (see S1707 in FIG. 146). . Since the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the swing timer 223w. Is also executed in 1 millisecond units. On the other hand, the value is reset every time the passage of the sphere B is detected by the sphere detection sensor 679 (that is, the output of the sphere detection sensor 679 becomes H) (see S1704 and S1710 in FIG. 146). The period (amplitude) of the swinging operation is determined by the swing timer 223w, and the ball B is naturally dropped by dropping the ball B after the period becomes sufficiently small (after the period becomes 1 second or less). You can make it appear as if it is falling. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to hold the suspicion that the swinging motion of the ball B is controlled, so that the player can more enjoy the swinging motion of the ball B.

  The designated pocket storage area 223x includes a winning symbol in the “normal mode” (see FIG. 91A), a “preparation mode” notification symbol in the jackpot (see FIG. 92B), and a winning pocket position in the roulette chance effect (see FIG. 95 (b)) is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the lucky number (win pocket) used. Depending on the information stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x, it is used for displaying the lucky number in the “normal mode” (see Ds2 in FIG. 90A), lighting control of the hit pocket, and the like. Note that the player can select five types of lucky numbers.

  Here, the lucky number can be selected by the player from the displayed game menu screen by, for example, pressing the frame button 22 when the change is stopped. Specifically, selection of a lucky number is provided in one of the items on the game menu screen. And on the selection screen of a lucky number, it is comprised so that five numbers can be selected from 30 types of numbers shown by each pocket (division member DV). In the designated pocket storage area 223x, information corresponding to the five types of numbers selected on the lucky number selection screen is stored.

  When the lottery result of the special symbol in the “normal mode” is displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 based on the stored contents of the specified pocket storage area 223x, the result is stored in the specified pocket storage area 223x. The display contents are determined according to the lucky number. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, control is performed so that four types out of the five types of lucky numbers are selected and displayed one by one on each of the display units 331a to 331d (FIG. 163). (See S3408). On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of control, control is performed such that an outnumber other than the lucky number is displayed on at least one of the display units 331a to 331d (see S3407 in FIG. 163).

  In addition, when the jackpot type shifts to the “preparation mode” after the jackpot, one type of lucky number that is not displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d at the time of jackpot notification is notified of the “preparation mode”. It is set as a number, and is controlled so as to be displayed on the effect section a during the big hit. Furthermore, in the “renso mode suggestion effect” that is executed when the mode is shifted to the “preparation mode”, the pocket corresponding to the lucky number selected by the player based on the stored contents of the designated pocket storage area 223x is hit first. (S3102 in FIG. 160).

  In this way, the lucky number designated (selected) by the player is the jackpot notification in the “normal mode”, the “preparation mode” notification during the jackpot, It is commonly used for notifications that are advantageous to three types of players, notifications. Thereby, since it is possible to give the player the pleasure of selecting the lucky number, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The extra counter 223av is a counter for counting the total number of winning pockets added in the “addition effect” (see FIG. 96A) executed in the normal mode. This extra counter 223av is incremented by one when “addition effect” is set (see S2312 in FIG. 152). At the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”, the winning pocket is added by the winning pocket sorting process (see FIG. 160) based on the count value of the additional counter 223av.

  The effect timer 223bv is a timer that measures an elapsed time from the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. The value of the effect timer 223bv is set to 0 as an initial value, and is incremented by one each time the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed during the execution of the “ream mode suggestion effect”. (See S2007 in FIG. 149). Since the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed every 1 millisecond, the effect timer 223bv is counted up in units of 1 millisecond. For example, if the value of the effect timer 223bv is 1000, it means that 1 second (1000 milliseconds) has elapsed since the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. Whether or not the production time has ended is determined according to the value of the production timer 223bv, and the production mode is switched. That is, switching from the lucky number increase effect to the roulette chance effect in the “renso mode suggestion effect” and the change from the roulette chance effect to the ending effect are performed (S2004, S2008: Yes) in FIG. For simplification of explanation, in the following explanation, the lucky number increase effect is simply referred to as “increase effect”.

  The increasing effect flag 223cv is a flag indicating whether the increasing effect is being executed. If the increase effect flag 223cv is on, it indicates that the increase effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the increase effect is not being executed. This increased production in-progress flag 223cv is notified of the transition to the “preparation mode” in the status command output from the main control device 110 after the end of the jackpot (1 or 7 is set to the value of the time reduction status counter by the status command) )) Is set to ON (see S3006 in FIG. 159). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a value indicating the end timing of the increase effect (the start of the roulette chance effect) (that is, a counter value indicating 20 seconds after the start of the “ream mode suggestion effect”). Is set to off when

  The roulette flag 223dv is a flag indicating whether or not the roulette chance effect is being executed. If this roulette 223dv is on, it indicates that the roulette chance effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the roulette chance effect is not being executed. This roulette flag 223dv is a value indicating that the value of the production timer 223bv indicates the start timing of the roulette chance production (end of the increase production) (that is, a counter value indicating 20 seconds after the start of the “ream mode suggestion production”). Is determined to be on (see S2005 in FIG. 149). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a value indicating the end timing of the roulette chance effect (start of the ending effect) (that is, a counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”). Is set to OFF (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

  The swing effect flag 223ev is a flag indicating whether the swing effect is being executed. If the swing effect flag 223ev is on, it indicates that the swing effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the swing effect is not being executed. This swing effect flag 223ev is the driving timing of the pitching device 650 during the execution of the roulette chance effect, and is set to ON when the ball B is thrown (see s3505 in FIG. 164). In this control example, the time when 50 seconds have elapsed after the start of the “roulette chance effect” is set as the driving timing of the pitching device 650. On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a value indicating the end timing of the roulette chance effect (start of the ending effect) (that is, a counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”). Is set to OFF (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

  The ball dropable flag 223fv is a flag indicating whether or not the ball B can be dropped into any of the pockets when the ball B is swinging at the upper part of the holding piece 677. . If the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on, it means that the ball B can be dropped, and if it is off, it means that the ball B is restricted from dropping. To do. In this control example, when the momentum of the sphere B performing the swing motion is weakened and the cycle (amplitude) of the swing operation is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (1 second), the fall of the sphere B is dropped. It is determined that the state is possible, and this ball drop possible flag 223fv is set to ON (see S1711 in FIG. 146). Further, when the drop of the ball B is set, it is set to OFF (see S1807 in FIG. 147).

  The winning counter 223gv is a counter that counts the number of winning balls for the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specific winning port (second large opening) 65a in the jackpot. The value of the winning counter 223gv at the big hit (probability big hit B to D, normal big hit A) where the first path forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 are connected. Based on this, the number of balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a is counted, and a match with the number of balls discharged through the second passage forming member 422 is determined. The first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are disconnected when the number of winning prizes and the number of discharging matches. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released during the passage of the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball entering the first variable winning device 82a can be reliably transferred to the second passage forming member 422. Can flow down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited. This winning counter 223gv has an initial value set to 0, and is added to the value by 1 each time a large open mouth winning command for notifying the winning of a ball is received (see S2413 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of winning prizes and the number of discharges match, and the release of the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set, it is initialized to 0 (S2505 in FIG. 154). reference).

  The discharge counter 223hv has a first big hit (probable big hit B to D, normal big hit A) in which the first path forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 are connected. 2 is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the two-path forming member 422. The value of the discharge counter 223hv is compared with the value of the above-mentioned winning counter 223gv in the jackpot ending period. When the values coincide with each other, the release of the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set. The discharge counter 223hv has an initial value set to 0, and is incremented by 1 each time the discharge of the sphere is detected (the passage of the sensor member 422c is detected) (see S1902 in FIG. 148). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of winning prizes and the number of discharges match, and the release of the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set, it is initialized to 0 (S2505 in FIG. 154). reference).

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main controller 110 and the power-off process is executed (see S1619 in FIG. 145). Since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (for example, 100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 142), when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1308: Yes in FIG. 142), it is constant after the power-off flag 223y is set on. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (for example, 100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only a part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the work area information in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 142). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 150) of the audio lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. Further, the output side of the output port 239 is connected to the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331 of the upper lifting unit 300, and the rendering unit 422 a of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 uses the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit) based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. 331 and the display content of the effect part 422a). The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction for the instruction pointer 231a, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). ing.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory 234a is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, the NAND flash memory 234a reads the instructions constituting the control program. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) can be diversified and complicated. Production can be executed easily.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Are connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. In addition, an image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 or a normal use. Transfer to video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231, the third symbol display device 81, etc. (the third symbol display device 81, The second program storage area 234a1 for storing fixed value data for driving the effect unit 331 and the effect unit 422a), the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit) 422a) at least a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) may be diversified and complicated. it can.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, without providing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine). In addition, since it can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the rendering unit 422a), the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. An increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) can be executed. Yes, after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes this boot program. Thereby, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory 234a in that it takes a long time to output data after designating an address in reading the first page of data. There is a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) in the display control device 114 is immediately performed. There is a problem that it may not start.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM 234d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, And the control of the production unit 422a) can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a and stored.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S3602 in FIG. 165) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S3601 in FIG. 165) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM 233 constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 draws an image, and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) at a predetermined timing. DSP). The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 129), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, whereby the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol is displayed). An image is displayed on the display device 81, the effect part 331, and the effect part 422a). The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for the image for one frame and the display process for the image for one frame by performing the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Are processed in parallel within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example).

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for the next one frame image, and displays the image developed by the drawing in advance in the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit). 331 and the effect part 422a) are displayed.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image is immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Can do.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 or the like (the 3rd symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. The rendered image can be displayed on the rendering unit 331 and the rendering unit 422a).

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. The display on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) can be prevented from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), thereby simplifying the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640a is detected. The fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) based on the power-on fluctuation image is displayed in the gaming state at the time of power-on (whether “normal mode”, “preparation mode”, or “continuous villa mode”). Regardless, it is executed in the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the power-on main image and the power-on variation image on the third symbol display device 81, the display location according to the type of the image (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit) 331 and any one of the production parts 422a) are eliminated, and the processing can be speeded up. Therefore, it is possible to further shorten the period from when the power is turned on until the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on are displayed.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3603 and S3604 in FIG. 165).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 125 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display controller 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the state shown in FIG. 125 (b). As shown in Fig. 125, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol "O" in the lower right position toward the screen, and "O" as shown in Fig. 125 (c). A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 125 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 125 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the player starts playing, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640a is detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and 125 (c) are alternately displayed. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If a ball is detected at the first ball slot 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 126 (b) shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the rear surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 126, the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B is prepared in the character ROM 234 as an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 126 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage that is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only the image data corresponding to the partial area of the rear surface, that is, the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIG. 125 (a) to (b). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 125A and 125B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the resident video RAM 235 can be used when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the frame button 22. By using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the user, the initial position of the rear surface B is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Shown to be possible, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 124) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably. In addition, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 have overlapping image data corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the effect part 331 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described thirty types (main symbols) with the numbers “1” to “30” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when the production unit 331 performs a variation production, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. be able to. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640a is generated, the first design display devices 37A and 37B have started to produce a variation effect, but the effect unit 331 has been started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not immediately started at.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols not numbered "1" to "30", a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, and a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the effect unit 331 when the next variation effect associated with the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. Thereby, when a demonstration effect is displayed on the effect part 331, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing from the display image of the effect unit 331 that is not attached with numbers.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, but for resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). This is an area for storing unprocessed image data. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like ( By transmitting the image information to the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit). In step 422a), processing for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image read out from the other frame buffer is read out, and the read out frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Minute images can be displayed.

  Then, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and an image for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). The frame buffer from which information is read is designated by the MPU 231 by alternately switching one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Is done.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b is read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b has a third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit as time elapses) for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. 422a) a display data table describing display contents to be displayed, transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the display data table, and This is an area for storing a transfer data table that defines transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter uses the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b to display the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device). 81, the display of the effect part 331 and the effect part 422a) is controlled. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device The diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a).

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is a rendering mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) based on a command from the main control device 110. One display data table is prepared for each, for example, a variation effect, an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect.

  The variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) when the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Production. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on and the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is “0” for the effect unit 331 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “9” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and the rear image on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to a rear image for demonstration. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the effect part 331 and the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall related person can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table indicates that the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) (20 milliseconds in this control example). Is defined in detail for one frame worth of image (drawing content) to be displayed at that time.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined. ing.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates of the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one back image, four third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates either the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “city stage” or “empty stage”), or a back surface different from the back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the rear surfaces A and B as the drawing target when the rear surface type is specified to display either the rear surface A or B. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on this display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like). In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). For example), information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. Information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 127) includes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device) 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331) is simply replaced by the display data table buffer 233 d as appropriate. And the effect image which should be displayed on the effect part 422a) can be changed.

  Here, as with a conventional pachinko machine, the MPU 231 executes the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). When the program is configured to be activated, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited because a large load is applied to the process of starting and executing the complicated and enormous program as the production images are diversified. As a result, there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode as described above, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. In the pachinko machine 10, the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the like (the 3rd symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering are preliminarily based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. This is because the effect to be displayed on the part 422a) is determined. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 is displayed in advance on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. This can only be realized based on the configuration for determining the production mode.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 128 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Data is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 128).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 128, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 128, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the corresponding address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (first display). 3 design display device 81, production section 331, and production section 422a It can be displayed on.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. The main process (see FIG. 165) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S3605 in FIG. 165). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. Is set to OFF (see S5205 in FIG. 176 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3901 in FIG. 167 (b)). If the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 167) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 167 (b) S3909) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S5101 in FIG. 176 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 176 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) is executed to transfer image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display data table buffer 233d is connected to the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, And a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed on the effect unit 422a). The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 129), which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the like (3rd symbol display device 81, rendering unit 331, and rendering unit 422a) display the rendering corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. .

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 129) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 129), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering an image of each sprite designated in the data table, the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame (FIG. 167 (b) ) (See S3903)), pointer update processing (see S4805 in FIG. 167 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 (see S5001 in FIG. 175).

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 129), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Therefore, an effect that can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect part 331, and the effect part 422a) can be obtained simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Can be changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering an image of each sprite designated in the data table, the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. This drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. , Symbol 2,..., Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,. For each sprite (error symbol), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h produces the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. It is a counter that counts time. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data indicates the display time of one frame in the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) (in this control example, 20 milliseconds). The value divided by.

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 167 (b) Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4807 in FIG. 173). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5402 in FIG. 178).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Also, the image controller 237 reads out the previously drawn drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and displays the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display) together with the drive signal. By transferring the image information to the device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the image information is transferred to the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). A display process for displaying an image is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S3906 in FIG. 167 (b)) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b is read out to the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The rear image change flag 233w is used to determine whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Flag. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S4601 in FIG. 172 (a)). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 177), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S5310 in FIG. 177). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 172 (a ) (See S4602). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (see S4821 in FIG. 173). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S4106 in FIG. 169 (a), S4305 in FIG. 170 (a), S4405 in FIG. 170 (b), FIG. 171 (see S4506). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (S4814 in FIG. 173). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S4106 in FIG. 169 (a), S4305 in FIG. 170 (a), S4405 in FIG. 170 (b), FIG. 171 (see S4506). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 130 to 141. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup Processing and main processing will be described.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 999, 999, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132.

  After executing the special symbol variation process (S104), the start winning process (S105) is executed in accordance with the passage of the balls at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a. The details of the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134.

  After the start winning process (S105) is executed, a normal symbol variation process for executing a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the normal symbol variation process, a through gate passing process (S107) is performed in which a process associated with the passing of a sphere at the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is performed. The details of the through gate passing process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the through-gate passing process (S107), the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the special symbol variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is displayed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Or, it is a process for controlling the variable display of symbols and the like performed in the effect display units 331a to 331d.

  In this special symbol variation process (FIG. 131, S104), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot game is currently being played (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the effect display units 331a to 331d are displaying the jackpot of the first special symbol (including the special symbol jackpot game). , During the predetermined time after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends. If it is determined that the first special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202).

  If it is determined in the process of S202 that the first special symbol variation display is not being performed (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the reserved ball number N of the special symbol 1) is acquired ( S203), it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c ( In step S205, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c changed by subtraction is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 139) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S208). The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed. (S209). The variation display variation time executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S209: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S210), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S209, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S209: Yes), the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B A display mode corresponding to is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type (see FIGS. 107 and 108) is determined.

  After the process of S211 is finished, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol 1 variation start process is started. ) Is a jackpot of special symbols (S212). If the current lottery result is a big hit of the first special symbol (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203f and the hour / short flag 203g are set to OFF, and the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is initialized to 0 (S213). Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S214), and the process proceeds to S218. When the jackpot start of the first special symbol is set by the process of S214, if the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 139) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes, and the opening command Is set. As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S212, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S215), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero. If it is larger (S215: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S216), a status command for notifying the value of the hour / hour counter 203h after the subtraction is set (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. To do. The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, it updates the values of the probability change state flag 223n, the short time state flag 223o, the short time state counter 223p, and the hitting state storage area 223q according to the gaming state notified by the state command. To do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S215: No), the processes of S216 and S217 are skipped and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and then this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 132, S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 variation start process (S208). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol 1 fluctuation process (see FIG. 131) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (decision determination) of “special symbol jackpot” or “extra special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed on the display device 81.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Is acquired (S301).

  Next, referring to the state of the probability change flag 203f, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the special symbol (that is, the probability change flag 203f is on) (S302: Yes), the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 And a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number table 202a for high probability (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with 41 random numbers stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability one by one. As described above, 41 random numbers of “500 to 540” are set as special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203f is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a special symbol. Based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first per-random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the first special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). . Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 40 random number values stored in the first large random number table 202a for low probability. As described above, 40 random numbers of “0 to 39” are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the first special symbol. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. If the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), The current jackpot type is specified based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the hit type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1, and the big hit of eight kinds of special symbols is obtained. It is determined what kind of jackpot type is (probable jackpot A to probability jackpot G, normal jackpot A). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the probability change big hit A (2R probability change big hit) is in the range of “5 to 84”. It is determined that the probability variation jackpot B (2R probability variation jackpot) is in the range of “85 to 274”, it is determined that the probability variation jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot) is in the range of “275 to 774”, It is determined that the probability variation jackpot D (2R probability variation jackpot) is in the range of “775-804”, it is determined that the probability variation jackpot E (2R probability variation jackpot) is in the range of “805-874”, It is determined that the probability variation jackpot F (2R probability variation jackpot) is within the range of “875-974”, and is determined to be the probability variation jackpot G (2R probability variation jackpot), and is within the range of “975-999”. Usually jackpot It determines that (2R Normal jackpot) (see FIG. 107).

  In the process of S306, according to the determined jackpot type (any one of the probable jackpot A to the probable jackpot G and the normal jackpot A), the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined. Is set. Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot G, normal jackpot A) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the state setting information corresponding to the identified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e (S307), and the value of the read state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S308). Thereafter, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S309), and the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S310). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S310, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110B), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. (Variation time) is determined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S311). In the processing of S311, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on this value, the stop type to be displayed in the rendering unit 331 is set.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S312). Here, the display time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the changing time of the third symbol until the production unit 331 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S310, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the variation pattern ( (Variation time).

  When the process of S310 or the process of S312 is completed, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined by the process of S310 or the process of S312 is set (S313). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S309 or S311 is set (S314). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 139). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is (S315). When the process of S315 ends, the process returns to the special symbol 1 variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 130), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters, prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c is 4. If not less (S403: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N) of the ball counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 139) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  After the process of S406, each value of the pre-reading probability changing flag 203m and the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 Based on the above, the success / failure of the special symbol, the stop type and the variation pattern are predicted (pre-read) (S407), and the winning information command including the predicted success / failure of the special symbol, the stop type and the variation pattern is set (S407). S408). Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery predicted (pre-read) in the process of S408 is a probable big hit (S409), and if the special symbol lottery predicted (pre-read) is a promising big hit (S409). : Yes), the pre-reading probability changing flag 203m is set to ON (S410), and the process proceeds to S413.

  On the other hand, if the predicted special symbol lottery is not a promising big hit in the process of S409 (S409: No), then it is determined whether the predicted special symbol lottery is a normal big hit (S411). If the predicted special symbol lottery is a normal jackpot (S411: Yes), the pre-reading probability changing flag 203m is set to OFF (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. Also, in the process of S411, if the predicted special symbol lottery is not normally a big hit (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped and the process proceeds to S413.

  In the process of S413, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 640a (S413). If there is no winning at the second entrance 640a (S413: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640a (S413: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the winning (entering) at the second entrance 640a has been detected. A special figure 2 winning command is set (S414). The special figure 2 winning command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 winning command during the execution of the increase effect (lucky number increase effect), it determines whether or not to increase the lucky number (winning pocket).

  When the process of S414 is completed, a special symbol 2 winning process for executing a lottery of the special symbol 2 based on various counter values (random values) acquired based on the starting winning at the second entrance 640a is then performed. Is executed (S415), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. Details of the special symbol 2 winning process (S415) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 winning process (S415). As described above, the special symbol 2 winning process (FIG. 134, S415) is based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area by detecting the start winning to the second entrance 640a. Process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the effect unit 331. It is.

  In the special symbol 2 winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is changing (S501). If it is determined that the current display mode is changing (S501: Yes), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if the current display mode is not changing (S501: No), the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S502), and it is determined whether the value is 0 (S503). ). If it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S503: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S503: Yes), each counter (the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop) The value of the type selection counter C3) is stored in the common execution area (S504). Next, referring to the state of the probability change flag 203f, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability of the special symbol (S505). (S505: Yes), whether the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S504 and the first random number table 202a for high probability. The lottery result of “No” is acquired (S506). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with 41 random numbers stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability one by one. As described above, 41 random numbers of “500 to 540” are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the second special symbol. Is determined to be a big hit of the second special symbol. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S508.

  On the other hand, in the process of S505, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203f is off) (S505: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a special symbol. Based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S504 and the first per-random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S507). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with 40 random numbers stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability one by one. As described above, 40 random numbers of “0 to 39” are set as the special symbol jackpot value, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S508.

  In the process of S508, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol 2 acquired by the process of S506 or S507 is a special symbol jackpot (S508), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is ( S508: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S504, the current jackpot type (see FIG. 108) is specified, and the status setting information corresponding to the specified jackpot type is Read from the result setting table 202e (S509).

  Next, the value of the read state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S510). Thereafter, a display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S511), and a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S512). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S512, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110B), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. (Variation time) is determined.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determined in the processing of S512 is a probabilistic jackpot (S513). If the determined jackpot is a probable jackpot (S513: Yes), the pre-reading probing flag 203m is set to ON. (S514), the process proceeds to S518. On the other hand, if the determined jackpot is not a probable change jackpot (S513: No), the pre-reading probable change flag 203m is set to OFF (S515), and the process proceeds to S518.

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S508: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S516). In the process of S516, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the common execution area, the rendering unit In 331, a stop type to be displayed is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S517). Here, the display time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the changing time of the third symbol until the production unit 331 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S512, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the variation pattern ( (Variation time).

  When the processing of S517 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S512 or the processing of S517 is set (S518). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S511 or S516 is set (S519). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 139). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S519 ends, the process returns to the start winning process.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and the normal symbol (second symbol) variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 (not shown), This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S602). Is determined not to be in the variable display (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (S608). In the processing of S608, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time-short state if the time-shortage flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on or the value of the time-shortage counter 203h is 1 or more.

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the production unit 331 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol jackpot Includes during the predetermined time after the game ends. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S607 Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is within the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is within the range of “0-4, 205-239”. It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 110A).

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the second random number table 202c for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is “5”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. (See FIG. 110 (a)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S614), and it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short-time state (the time-short flag 203g is on or the value of the hour / short-time counter 203h is 1 or more). In the case (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640b attached to 640a is set to 1 second, the number of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S614, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is set. In addition to setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S619), and the normal symbol is in the short-time state (the time-short flag 203g is on or the value of the hour / short-time counter 203h is 1 or more). Is determined (S619: Yes), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S619, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds. (S621), and this process ends. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball enters the second entrance 640a. It becomes easy to do.

  In the process of S602, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the variable display (S602: Yes), the normal symbol variation time being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S622). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the process of S620 or S621 described later before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 (not shown).

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). . In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) displays “ “○” symbol is set to be stopped (lighted). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of removal is set by the processing of S618, the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) will display “ The “x” symbol is set to be stopped (lighted). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the processes of S613 and S618. 2 Stop display (lights up) on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether the current normal symbol lottery result is a win or not (S624). If it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is set (S625). If the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory will be performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 139) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S703). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 138), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S914 also in this case.

  In the processing of S905, when it is determined that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907). : No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case as well, the process proceeds to S914. As will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. 139, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 and sets an initial value so that the payout control of the game ball can be started. . After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S915, S916) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S915, S916) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, the respective values of the probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, the time reduction middle counter 203h, and the state storage area 203k are read (S910), and the read probability change flag 203f, time reduction flag 203g, time reduction middle counter 203h and state storage area 203k are read. A status command is set based on each value (S911). The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the sound lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the power is turned on (whether it is a special symbol probable change state or a big hit) by receiving the state command. As a result, it is possible to specify the type of an accessory that can be operated in the origin return operation or the initial operation, or to execute an effect corresponding to the state.

  When the process of S911 ends, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S912), and interrupts are permitted ( S913), the process proceeds to a main process to be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 130) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 131) and the start winning process (see FIG. 133) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, the ending command, and the like set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 140) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). The jackpot control process for opening or closing the 1 variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning port (large opening) 65a is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has passed or the ball has won a specified number. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the round is finished. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, the variation pattern is determined by the process of S310 or S312 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 or S517 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134). Is set, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B start the variation display according to the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the process of S310 or S312 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 or S517 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) are performed. When the variation time corresponding to the set variation pattern ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the process of S309 in the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) Alternatively, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the processing of S311 and the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) S511 or S516. Display (lights up).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 135) or the process of S621, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the fluctuation | variation display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 135), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 135). (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), it means that the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1009). ) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value (both 255 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 137 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1012 is executed. In the process at the time of power-off, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to another control device (the payout control device 111 or the voice lamp control device 113). Etc.) (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, and the initialization process (see S901 in FIG. 138) When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or the first variable prize is awarded. This is a process for executing opening / closing control of the device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 65a.

  In this jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 131) S214 is executed and the special symbol jackpot start is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), “01H” indicating the opening period is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1102), and an opening command is set. (S1103), the process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp control device It is transmitted toward 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. In the process of S1104, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning port (second large opening) 65a corresponding to the jackpot type is opened. A pattern is set (S1106). Specifically, as described above, when the jackpot type is any one of the probable jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A, the opening pattern A (0) as the opening pattern of the first variable winning device (first big opening) 82a. If the jackpot type is probable jackpot E to G, the first variable winning device (first jack opening) 82a is set. An opening pattern B (an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once) is set as the opening pattern. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is one of the probable jackpot A, the probable jackpot H to K, or the normal jackpot B, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a is a predetermined time (until 30 seconds pass) Alternatively, an open pattern is set that is released (until 10 balls are won).

  When the processing of S1106 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1107). The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S1107, the state storage area 203k is updated according to the number of rounds (S1108), and this process ends. Specifically, as described above, if the current round is a big hit, “02H” is stored in the state storage area 203k, and if it is two rounds, “03H” is stored. The reason why the updated value is not notified to the sound lamp control device 113 is that the sound lamp control device 113 is made aware of the number of rounds started by the round number command set in the processing of S1107. Because it can. Since the number of command outputs can be reduced, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all two rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set (S1110), 04H is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1111), and this process is performed. finish. The ending command set in the process of S1110 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the voice is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special gaming state) (S1112). If it is determined in the processing of S1112 that it is the jackpot end timing (S1112: Yes), the state setting table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is read (S1113) and the current jackpot is notified. Therefore, the state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read at the start of the variable display for the purpose (S1114).

  Next, a combination of setting values (probability change flag 203f, time-short flag 203g, and time-shortage counter 203h) corresponding to the state setting information is read from the read state setting table 202f (S1115), and the read setting value is changed to the probability change flag 203f, The hour / short flag 203g and the hour / short hour counter 203h are set (S1116). As described above, in this control example, the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e is held during the jackpot, and the gaming state is set based on the held state setting information when the jackpot ends. doing. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to set the gaming state after the big hit from the various counter values (random number values) acquired at the time of winning the start, so the state setting information is displayed as the state where the various counter values are held. It can be limited to a short time until it is stored in the state setting information storage area 202j. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value that is a big jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally acquired from the outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a big jackpot appears, and conduct the fraudulent act that allocates the jackpot based on the analyzed timing Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analysis timing is set on a so-called hanging board, random numbers are acquired at the timing when a random value that is a jackpot appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether or not the jackpot is determined is suppressed. Can do.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, various setting values (probability change flag 203f, time-short flag 203g, and time-short / medium counter 203h) related to the gaming state after the jackpot are being displayed during symbol fluctuation display for notifying the jackpot. Instead of holding during the subsequent jackpot (privilege gaming state), only the state setting information is held. Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all the various setting values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information value, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

  After the processing of S1116, "00H" meaning that the state storage area 203k is not a big hit is stored (S1117), and the gaming state after the big hit (probability change flag 203f, short time flag 203g, short time medium counter 203h, state A status command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the storage area 203k or the like) is set (S1118), and this process is terminated. The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the sound lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, it updates the values of the probability change state flag 223n, the short time state flag 223o, the short time state counter 223p, and the hitting state storage area 223q according to the gaming state notified by the state command. To do.

  In the process of S1112, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special gaming state) (S1112: No), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning port (second) A winning process is executed to execute control corresponding to the case where a ball wins a large opening (65a) (S1119), and this process ends. Details of the winning process (S1119) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1119). In this winning process (FIG. 141, S1119), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1201). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, an opening pattern is set for the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. And the interval period (3 seconds) after the end of the round. In the process of S1201, when it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S1201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1201: Yes), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning port (second large opening) 65a It is determined whether or not a winning is detected (S1202). If it is determined that a winning is detected (S1202: Yes), the winning number counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1203), and the winning in the big hit is controlled by the sound lamp. A large open mouth winning command for notifying the device 113 is set (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the sound lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 can determine the number of winning balls based on the received large opening entrance winning command.

  Further, in the big hit (probable big hit B to D, normal big hit A) where the first path forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 are connected, this large opening. The number of balls won to the first variable winning device 82a is counted based on the number of winnings obtained based on the mouth winning command (value of the winning counter 223gv) and discharged through the second passage forming member 422. A match with the number of spheres is determined. The first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are disconnected when the number of winning prizes and the number of discharging matches. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released during the passage of the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball entering the first variable winning device 82a can be reliably transferred to the second passage forming member 422. Can flow down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  In the process of S1202, when it is determined that no winning is detected at the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specific winning port (second large opening) 65a (S1202: No), the process of S1203 and S1204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1205. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203i is 10 or more (S1205). If the value is 10 or more (S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to S1207. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1205 that the value of the winning number counter 203i is less than 10 (S1205: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1206). Here, the round time means the opening time of the opening pattern set in the first variable winning device 82a or the opening time (30 seconds) set in the second specific winning port 65a.

  In the process of S1206, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1206: No), this means that the round end condition is not satisfied, and thus this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1206, when it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1206: Yes), the process proceeds to S1207. The processing of S1207 is executed when the upper limit number of balls have won the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a (S1205: Yes) or when the round time has elapsed ( S1206: Yes). That is, this is a case where a round end condition is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the end of the currently executed round is set (S1207), the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0 (S1208), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 164. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1620 (see FIG. 145) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (S1617: Yes in FIG. 145), it executes a power-off process in S1620. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1620 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), this startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S1620 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1620, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308. .

  In the process of S1302, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1620, This was started by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304), and it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1305). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  In the process of S1305, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set ( S1306). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  After the processing of S1306, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is executed (see S1619 in FIG. 145). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is executed, the process of S1308 with the power-off flag 223y turned on is the current status. This is a case where the raising process is started after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1310). The process proceeds to S1311. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag 223y is turned off, the process of S1308 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is a process for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, and S1310, which is a process for setting the power-off flag 223y to be off, are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1311.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1309 is that when the process from S1304 to S1308 is reached via the process in S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1311, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1311), and then interrupt permission is set (S1312). Thereafter, on-state setting processing for identifying the gaming state at the time of power-on is executed based on the state command received from the main control device 110 (S1313). Returning to origin is executed (S1314), and the process proceeds to main processing. The details of the on-loading state setting process (S1313) and the origin return process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, respectively.

  Next, referring to FIG. 143, the on-state setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the on-loading state setting process (S1313). This on-time state setting process (S1313) is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 142), and is a process for identifying the gaming state at the time of power-on as described above.

  In the on-time state setting process (S1313), first, the probability variation state flag 223n, the short time state flag 223o, the short time state counter 223p and the hit state are determined according to the state command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The value of the state storage area 223q is updated (S1401).

  As described above, the status command notifies each value of the probability change flag 203f at the time of power-on, the hourly flag 203g, the hourly / shortest counter 203h, and the state storage area 203k during the startup process of the main controller 110. (See S911 in FIG. 138). Based on this state command, in the process of S1401, the probability variation state flag 223n is updated so as to match the state of the probability variation flag 203f, and the time reduction state flag 223o is updated so as to match the state of the time reduction flag 203g. The short-time state counter 223p is updated to match the value of the counter 203h, and the hit state storage area 223q is updated to match the stored value of the state storage area 203k. Thereby, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched in the start-up process.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stored value in the hit state storage area 223q after the update is a value indicating a big hit (S1402). Here, as described above, if “01H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q, it indicates that the jackpot opening period, and if “02H” is stored, one round This indicates a period, and if “03H” is stored, it indicates a round period of two rounds, and if “04H” is stored, it indicates an ending period. On the other hand, if “00H” is stored, it indicates that the present is not a big hit.

  In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the value of the hit state storage area 223q is not a value indicating that the big hit (that is, “00H” is stored) (S1402: No), the process proceeds to S1403. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit state storage area 223q is a value indicating a big hit (that is, “01H” to “04H”) (S1402: Yes), It is determined whether “04H” indicating the ending period is stored in the state storage area 223q (S1404).

  In the process of S1404, if it is determined that the current ending period is in progress (S1404: Yes), a 1.5 second wait period is set (S1405), and the process proceeds to S1403. The wait period set here is set to delay the execution of the origin return process (see FIG. 144). By setting the weight period, it is possible to prevent the origin return operation from being performed and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 does not enter the second passage forming member 422 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  More specifically, in the big hit (probable big hit BD and normal big hit A) in which the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected, the connection is released during the ending period. Is driven to the origin position. The driving to the origin position is executed after it is confirmed that the value of the winning counter 223gv matches the value of the discharge counter 223hv during the ending period, and no sphere remains in the first passage forming member 520. The However, if the power is turned off during the ending period and the power is turned on again, the RAM 223 is initialized during the start-up process (see S1311 in FIG. 142), and the value of the winning counter 223gv or the value of the discharge counter 223hv Since the value is also cleared, it becomes impossible to determine whether or not a sphere remains in the first passage forming member 520 when the power is turned on. Therefore, in this control example, when it is determined that the power is shut off and turned on in the jackpot ending period, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected, and Even if a sphere remains in the first passage forming member 520, 1.5 seconds, which is a period during which the sphere in the first passage forming member 520 can sufficiently reach the second passage forming member 422, The home position return operation is waited. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the origin return operation from being performed while the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520 and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 from being released. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the ball does not enter the second passage forming member 422 but is injected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit (S1402: No), and in the process of S1403 executed after the process of S1405, the bits corresponding to all the actors in the operable type storage area 223r are operated on. 1 indicating possible is set (S1403), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the startup process. By setting the value (1) indicating that operation is possible for all the features by the processing of S1403, the origin return operation and the initial operation can be executed for all the features. Therefore, it can be confirmed whether or not all the objects are in a normally operable state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1404 that the present is not in the ending period (a value other than “04H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1404: No), It is determined whether it is during the opening period (whether “01H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1406). In the processing of S1406, when it is determined that it is during the opening period ("01H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1406: Yes), the first passage formation member 520, the second passage formation member 422 is set as a connection position (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. On the other hand, if the current time is not during the opening period in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), the process of S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1408.

  When the start-up process (see FIG. 142) is executed in the opening period, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are set to the connection positions by initializing the RAM 223 in the start-up process ( This is because the step counter 223e is initialized by S1311 in FIG. For this reason, when the power supply is shut off during the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 in the opening period of the probability variation jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A, the power is turned on again. Sometimes the arrangement of each member becomes unknown. Therefore, in this control example, the driving to the coupling position is set again regardless of the arrangement of the members. Thereby, the 1st channel | path formation member 520 and the 2nd channel | path formation member 422 can be reliably connected during an opening period.

  In the processing of S1408, in the operable type storage area 223r, the bit corresponding to the accessory (the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500) set at the connection position is set to 0, and 1 is set to the other bits. The setting is made (S1408), and this process ends. Accordingly, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be excluded from the origin return operation and the initial operation, so that the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be obtained in a big hit. And can be kept connected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the sphere passes through the first passage forming member 520. The malfunction which inject | emits from the opening part of the 1 channel | path formation member 520, and enters into the back side etc. of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the origin return process (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the origin return process (S1314). This origin return process (S1314) is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 142) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and a character that has been mutated from the origin position when the power is turned on is displayed. This is a process for returning to the position.

  In the origin return process, first, it is determined whether the current period is the wait period (S1501), and if it is during the wait period (S1501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. As described above, this wait period is set when the throwing state setting process is executed during the jackpot ending period (see S1405 in FIG. 143). It is set to prevent the return operation from being executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1501 that the present is not in the wait period (S1501: No), the value stored in each bit of the operable type storage area 223r is read (S1502), and the value is changed to 1 bit. It is determined whether all the origin sensors of the corresponding accessory are in the H output state (S1503). When it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of at least one of the combinations corresponding to the bit having a value of 1 is in the L state (S1503: No), the output corresponds to the origin sensor in the L state. An operation in the direction of the origin (origin return operation) is set for the accessory to be performed (S1504). Then, in order to indicate that the origin return operation is being performed, the origin return in-progress flag 223i is set to ON (S1505), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1503, when it is determined that all the outputs of the origin sensors of the objects corresponding to the bits whose value is 1 in the operable type storage area 223r are in the H state (S1503: Yes), the origin return is performed. Since it is not necessary to execute the operation, the start of the initial operation is set (S1506), and the initial operation in-progress flag 223j is set on to indicate that the initial operation is being executed (S1507). The process ends.

  By executing this origin return processing (S1314), each accessory can be returned to the origin position, and the subsequent initial operation can be started from the origin position.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601). If the time has not elapsed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1614 without performing the processes in S1602 to S1613. Whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the processing of S1601 is mainly processing related to display (production) in S1602 to S1613, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1614 and the fluctuation display setting process of S1615 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1614 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1615 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1603 to S1616 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1602). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1608 described later are set (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1605 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1605, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1607 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the change display performed in the effect part 331 is set based on the change pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S1608 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the rendering unit 331.

  When the process of S1610 is completed, the swing effect process for performing control during the swing effect in which the ball B swings on the upper portion of the holding piece 677 is executed (S1611). Next, a sphere that has passed through the second passage forming member 422 (discharged from the pachinko machine 10) is detected, and discharge detection processing for performing corresponding control is executed (S1612). Next, an effect setting process for controlling various effects performed during the execution of the “renso mode suggestion effect” is executed (S1613), and the process proceeds to S1614. The details of the swing effect process (S1611), the discharge detection process (S1612), and the effect setting process (S1613) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the process of S1614, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1614). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1615). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the rendering unit 331 to perform variation rendering (variation display). As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. And after completion | finish of a fluctuation | variation display setting process (S1615), the accessory operation | movement setting process for setting operation | movement of each accessory is performed (S1616). The details of the accessory action setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1616 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1617). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If it is determined in the processing of S1617 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1617: Yes), both the power interruption flag 223y and the power interruption processing flag are set to ON (S1619). The disconnection process is executed (S1620). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1621), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the processing of S1617 (S1617: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1618), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1618: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1618: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display content in the rendering unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the rocking effect process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the swing effect process (S1611). This swing effect process (S1611) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, various controls are performed during the swing effect execution. Is called.

  In the swing effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the swing effect flag 223ev provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is on (S1701), and if the swing effect flag 223ev is off (S1701: No). ) Since the swing effect is not being executed, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1701 that the swing effect flag 223ev is on (S1701: Yes), it is then determined whether the swing non-detection flag 223v is on (S1702). If the detection flag 223v is on (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the output of the sphere detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103) is in the H state (S1703). That is, it is determined whether or not the sphere B has passed the front side of the sphere detection sensor 679 provided in the upper center portion of the holding piece 677.

  In the process of S1703, when it is determined that the output of the sphere detection sensor 679 is not in the H state (that is, the output is in the L state) (S1703: No), the sphere passes through the front side of the sphere detection sensor 679. This means that the process is terminated and returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the processing of S1703, when it is determined that the output of the sphere detection sensor is in the H state (S1703: Yes), after the sphere B is thrown by the pitching device 650, the sphere B is first detected by the sphere detection sensor 679. Therefore, the swing undetected flag 223v is set to OFF, the swing timer 223w is reset (S1704), and this process is terminated. Thus, thereafter, every time the passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679, the cycle of the swing operation can be determined from the measured value of the swing timer 223w.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1702 that the swing undetected flag 223v is off (S1702: No), it is next determined whether the ball dropable flag 223fv is on (S1705). In the processing of S1705, when it is determined that the ball drop possible flag 223fv is on (S1705: Yes), the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion performed by the ball B is sufficiently small, and the condition for dropping the ball B Therefore, the fall control process (S1706) for determining the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and controlling the fall of the sphere B is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of the drop control process (S1706) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1705 that the ball drop possible flag 223fv is off (S1705: No), 1 is added to the value of the swing timer 223w (S1707), and then the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is output. Is in the H state (S1708). In the process of S1708, when it is determined that the output of the sphere detection sensor 679 is not H (that is, the output is in the L state) (S1708: No), the sphere B has not returned to the upper center of the holding piece 677. Since this indicates that the period cannot be determined, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1708 that the output of the sphere detection sensor is in the H state (S1708: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the value of the swing timer 223w is greater than 500 (S1709). ). In the process of S1709, if the value of the swing timer 223w is 500 or less (S1709: No), the period from when the sphere B is detected to pass by the previous sphere detection sensor 679 until the current pass is detected again. It means 500 milliseconds or less. That is, since it means that the oscillation cycle has decreased to 1 second (500 milliseconds × 2) or less, the ball dropable flag 223fv is set to ON (S1711), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the swing timer 223w is greater than 500 in the processing of S1709 (S1709: Yes), it means that the cycle of the swing operation performed by the ball B is relatively long (the amplitude of the swing operation is large). If the ball B is dropped in this state, it may appear unnatural. Therefore, the value of the swing timer 223w is reset without satisfying the drop condition (keeping the ball drop possible flag 223fv off). (S1710), and then returns to the main process.

  Next, the drop control process (S1706) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the drop control process (S1706). This drop control process (S1706) is executed in the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the drop control process (S1706), first, it is determined whether all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are L (S1801). When it is determined that the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S1801: Yes), the arrangement of the detected parts 641c and the detection sensors A to F is shifted, and the rotating member Since the arrangement of 640 cannot be specified, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1801 that at least one of the detection sensors A to F is not L (that is, at least one output is H) (S1801: No), the detection sensors A to F are detected. Based on the output of F and the rotational position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), the pocket disposed at the drop position (directly below the holding piece 677) is specified (S1802). Next, from the contact position storage area 223k (see FIG. 122), the pocket type of the pocket placed at the fall position next to the pocket currently placed at the fall position (whether it is a hit pocket or a release pocket) ) Is specified (S1803). Then, the identified pocket type is compared with whether or not the current roulette opportunity is successful (whether or not the transition to the “renso” mode is confirmed) (S1804), and it is determined whether or not the comparison results match (S1804). S1805).

  If the comparison result does not match in the processing of S1805 (S1805: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1805, if the comparison results match (S1805: Yes), the ball B is set to drop after 100 steps (that is, the holding piece 677 is driven to the immersive position) and is set. (S1806), the ball drop possible flag 223fv is set to OFF (S1807), and this process is terminated. Note that 100 steps is the number of steps by which the holding piece 677 is driven to the immersion position 0.2 seconds before reaching the next pocket. This 0.2 second is set to be substantially the same as the drop time of the sphere B dropped from the holding piece 677. Thereby, at the timing when the next pocket is arrange | positioned to a fall position, the ball | bowl B can be made to enter into the next pocket just.

  As described above, in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in this control example, the type of the pocket to be placed next at the drop position and the drop control of the sphere B based on the discrimination result are determined as follows. It is configured to be executed before being placed in. That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersive position at a timing at which the ball B can be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the dropping position). Can be driven (immersive). Therefore, the sphere B can be more reliably dropped into the targeted type of pocket. Therefore, the ball B falls into the hit pocket even though it does not shift to the “renso mode”, or conversely, the transition to the “renso mode” is confirmed, It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from coming off and falling into the pocket.

  In this control example, when it is determined that the ball is to be dropped into the next pocket, the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersive position after the rotation of the rotating member 640 for 100 steps regardless of the arrangement of the sphere B. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the holding piece 677 may be immersed in the immersing position at a timing when the ball B reaches the center portion of the holding piece 677 in the swinging operation. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation is determined every time the sphere B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the determination is made. The cycle of the swing operation is configured to be stored (updated) in the RAM 223. Then, when the value reaches 100 steps, the value of the swing timer 223w (the elapsed time since the passage of the sphere B is detected by the previous sphere detection sensor 679) is referred to, for example, the latest swing stored in the RAM 223. When it is determined that the value is close to the cycle of the moving operation (for example, a value of 90% or more of the cycle of the latest swing operation), the holding piece 677 may be controlled to be immersed as it is. On the other hand, if the value is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the period of the latest swinging operation) with respect to the cycle of the latest swinging operation, the holding piece 677 is immersed after waiting until the predetermined ratio is reached. You may control so that it may be immersed in a position. With this configuration, when the ball B is rolling toward the outside direction (left end or right end direction) of the holding piece 677, or arranged near the end (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677. In this case, the holding piece 677 can be prevented (suppressed) from immersing into the immersive position. That is, when the holding piece 677 is immersed, the sphere B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without proceeding in the other direction. Therefore, since the time from when the holding piece 677 is immersed into the immersive position until the ball B starts to fall can be shortened, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

  In this control example, when it is determined that the ball B can be dropped to the pocket placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position, the rotation operation for 100 steps is executed. After that, the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersing position, but the present invention is not limited to this. A range in which the sphere B can be reliably dropped into the pocket at the dropping position without dropping into the pocket at the dropping position and two pockets adjacent to the dropping position (for example, after 100 steps to 120 steps) It is good also as a structure dropped at random every time in the range. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the timing at which the sphere B falls, so that it looks more natural than when the sphere B is dropped at the same timing every time (the action of the sphere B is only gravity). The ball B can be dropped as if it was falling at the end).

  Next, the discharge detection process (S1612) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This discharge detection process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and passes through the second passage forming member 422 as described above (pachinko machine). 10 is a process for detecting a sphere (discharged from 10) and performing corresponding control.

  In the discharge detection process (see FIG. 148), first, it is determined whether or not a ball entering the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 has been detected (S1901). If no ball is detected (S1901: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1901 that a ball entering the second passage forming member 422 has been detected (S1901: Yes), the ball that won the first variable winning device 82a passes through the first passage forming member 520. Since it means that the second passage forming member 422 has been normally reached, first, 1 is added to the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S1902).

  When the processing of S1902 ends, it is then determined whether or not a discharge standby flag (not shown) is on. This discharge waiting flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period (discharge waiting period) set after all the big hit rounds are completed in order to discharge all the winning balls to the first variable winning device 82a. is there. In the processing of S1903, if it is determined that the discharge standby flag is off (S1903: No), it means that it is not the discharge standby period, and means that it is during the jackpot round period, so the normal symbol time-saving state Is set to execute the time suggestion effect (see FIGS. 92A and 92B) that suggests whether or not is set (S1904), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1903 that the discharge waiting flag is on (S1903: Yes), the value of the winning counter 223gv is read (S1905), and the value of the read winning counter 223gv is the discharging counter. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of 223hv (S1906). In the process of S1906, when the value of the read winning counter 223gv does not match the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S1906: No), this process is terminated as it is to continue the discharge standby period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1906 that the read value of the winning counter 223gv matches the discharging counter 223hv (S1906: Yes), all the balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a are normally second. It means that it has been discharged from the passage forming member 422. Therefore, the process for releasing the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is executed. Specifically, “01H” is set to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific ending table 222b6 (S1907), and an operation command for notifying the operation content according to the value of the operation pointer 223g is set. (S1908). Then, the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv are reset to 0 (S1909), and this process ends.

  By executing this discharge detection process, all the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a are discharged through the second passage forming member 422 and then the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming. The connection (connection) with the member 422 can be released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 149, the effect setting process (S1613) in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. This effect setting process (S1613) is one process in the main process (see FIG. 145), and as described above, a process for controlling various effects executed during the execution of the “ream mode suggestion effect”. It is.

  In the effect setting process (see FIG. 149), first, it is determined whether or not the increased effect flag 223cv is on (S2001). Is added (S2002), and it is determined whether or not the value of the effect timer 223bv after the addition is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (lucky number increase effect) (S2003).

  In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: Yes), the roulette chance effect is set (S2004), and the increase effect flag 223cv is turned off. At the same time, the roulette flag 223dv is set to ON (S2005), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is not a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: No), the process of S2004 and S2005 is skipped and the process is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the increasing effect flag 223cv is not on (S2001: No), it is next determined whether or not the roulette flag 223dv is on (S2006), and is determined to be off. If this is the case (S2006: No), this means that the “renso mode suggestion effect” is not being executed, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2006 that the roulette flag 223dv is on (S2006: Yes), the roulette chance effect (see FIGS. 95A and 95B) is currently being executed. Next, 1 is added to the effect timer 223bv (S2007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the effect timer 223bv after the addition is a timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008). ).

  In the process of S2008, when it is determined that the effect timer 223bv is not a timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008: No), this process is ended as it is to continue the roulette chance effect. On the other hand, in the process of S2008, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008: Yes), the roulette chance effect is ended and the “ream mode suggestion effect” First, the roulette flag 223dv and the swing effect flag 223ev are set to OFF (S2009).

  When the processing of S2009 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the transition to the “renso mode” is notified (the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket) in the current roulette chance effect (S2010). When the transition to the “renso mode” (falling to the hit pocket) is notified (S2010: Yes), the display time of the ending image so that the ending image continues to be displayed until the running big hit variation ends. Is set (S2011), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2010 that the current roulette chance effect does not notify the transition to the “ream villa mode” (S2010), then the current roulette chance effect is notified of the detachment (disappearance). If it is determined that the ball B has been dropped into the pocket (S2012) and that no disconnection has been reported (the ball B has not been dropped into the pocket) (S2010: No), a roulette chance effect This means that the ball B has not been dropped (the result of the roulette chance effect has not been notified) in spite of having reached the end timing of the operation, and thus a malfunction such as a malfunction has occurred in the holding piece 677. There is a possibility. Therefore, in this case, an error display is set by setting a display error command (S2013), and this process ends. By executing the error display by the display error command, the hall clerk can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem. Accordingly, it is possible to promptly take appropriate measures such as repair.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2012 that the release has been notified (the ball B has been dropped into the release pocket) (S2012: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being displayed. If it is determined (S2014) and it is not changing (S2014: No), the display of the ending image is set to 5 seconds (S2015), and this process is terminated. In addition, at the end timing of the roulette chance effect (at the time of 85 seconds from the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”), the fluctuation stop state is the lottery of special symbols for the short time set as the “preparation mode”. This is a case where the fluctuation is stopped before the process is executed. Therefore, when the probability variation jackpot is reached within the remaining number of time reductions thereafter, the mode shifts to the “renso mode” after the probability variation jackpot ends. In this case, a resurrection roulette chance effect (see FIG. 115B) is executed, and control is performed so that the ball B falls into the winning pocket.

  In the processing of S2014, when it is determined that the current special symbol variation display is in progress (S2014: Yes), it is determined whether the variation type is outlier variation (S2016). (S2016: Yes), as the display time of the ending image, the remaining time until the run-off variation being executed is completed is set (S2018), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2016 that there is no out-of-range fluctuation (that is, jackpot fluctuation is being executed) (S2016: No), a revival roulette chance effect (see FIG. 115 (b)) is set (S2017). This process is terminated. By executing this effect setting process (see FIG. 149), an appropriate effect can be executed in the “renso mode suggestion effect”.

  Next, a command determination process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1614). This command determination processing (S1614) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In this command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2101). If it is determined in step S2101 that a variation pattern command has been received (S2101: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2102), and the process returns to the main processing. Details of the variation pattern command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2103). When the stop type command is received (S2103: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2104), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2105). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2103: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2106). If it is determined that the held ball number command is received (S2106: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 is displayed. The value (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2107). In the processing of S2107, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S2107 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is set to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 by the processing of S2107. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203c. Therefore, even when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, Or the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 at the time of lottery of the special symbol. When the processing of S2107 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S2106: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S2108). In the process of S2108, if a prize information command is received (S2108: Yes), a prize information command process for setting an effect corresponding to the prize information is executed (S2109), and this process is terminated. Details of the winning information command processing (S2109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2108 that no winning information command has been received (S2108: No), then a command relating to jackpot (ie, opening command, round number command, large opening winning command, ending command) It is determined whether any of them has been received (S2110). In the process of S2110, when it is determined that a command related to jackpot is received (S2110: Yes), a hit related command process for executing processes corresponding to various commands related to jackpot is executed (S2111). Exit. Details of the hit-related command processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154.

  On the other hand, if a command related to jackpot is not received in the process of S2110 (S2110: No), it is then determined whether an execution command is received from any motor driver (S2112). If the execution command is received in the process of S2112 (S2112: Yes), the progress of the operation of the accessory driven by the motor driver is determined according to the execution command output from the various motor drivers, and the progress is made. The execution command process for performing the control according to is executed (S2113), and this process is terminated. Details of the execution command process (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the execution command is not received in the process of S2112 (S2112: No), it is then determined whether the status command is received (S2114). If the status command is received (S2114: Yes), The gaming state notified by the state command is determined, a state command process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S2115), and this process is terminated. Details of the status command process (S2115) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

  On the other hand, if the status command is not received in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is then determined whether a special figure 2 winning command is received (S2116). In the process of S2116, if a special figure 2 winning command has been received (S2116: Yes), a special figure 2 winning command process for setting a corresponding effect in accordance with the entry to the second entrance 640a is performed. Execute (S2117), and this process is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 winning command process (S2117) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2116, when it is determined that the special figure 2 winning command has not been received (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command. Is executed (S2118), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the fluctuation pattern command process (S2102) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern command processing (S2102). This variation pattern command process (S2102) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and is a process for specifying the variation pattern (variation time) from the variation pattern command and setting the action of the accessory. is there.

  In the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 151), first, the variation start flag 223c is set to ON (S2201), and a variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2202). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory operation scenario (S2203), and if there is no accessory operation scenario (S2203: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2203 that there is an accessory action scenario (S2203: Yes), the corresponding action scenario of the accessory is set (S2204), and then this process ends.

  Next, details of the winning information command process (S2109) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This winning information command process (S2109) is a process executed when a winning information command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and as described above, a process for setting an effect according to the winning information. It is.

  When the winning information command process (see FIG. 152) is started, first, the winning / not-stopping type, the stop type, and the variation pattern are extracted from the received winning information command, and are used as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 233. Store (S2301). Next, each process of S2302 to S2313 for setting an extra effect (see FIG. 96 (a)) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is executed. As described above, this extra effect is executed when the winning at the first entrance 64 is suspended in the “normal mode”, and the “preparation mode” and the “renso mode” are performed in the reserved ball. This is an effect to make the player expect the transition.

  The processing of S2302 to S2313 for setting an extra effect will be described more specifically. First, in the process of S2302, it is determined whether or not the time-short state flag 223o is on (S2302). If it is determined that it is on (S2302: Yes), the current state is the “village mode” (“ This means that it is not “normal mode”, and no additional effect is executed regardless of whether or not the winning information is correct. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the time-short state flag 223o is off (S2302: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time-short state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S2303).

  In the process of S2303, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S2303: Yes), it means that the current state is “preparation mode” (not “normal mode”), and whether or not the winning information is correct Regardless of whether or not the additional effect is not executed, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2303, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is 0 (S2303: No), next, the value of the addition counter 223av (the number of additions) is 3 which is the upper limit value. (S2304), if it is the upper limit value, the additional effect is not set and the present process is terminated. In the present control example, the upper limit value of the additional number is uniformly set to three, but is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number may be increased as the lottery result advantageous to the player is held. Thereby, the more the lottery result advantageous to the player is held, the more the number of executions of the additional effect is increased. Therefore, the player's expectation can be enhanced as the additional effect is executed.

  In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the value of the extra counter 223av is less than the upper limit value (less than 3) (S2304: No), each hold currently held from each area of the winning information storage area 223a is performed. The winning information corresponding to the ball is read (S2305), and the read winning information includes any of probability variation jackpots B, C, E, F, and normal jackpot A (reserved). It is determined whether or not (S2306). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type for shifting to the “preparation mode” is held.

  In the process of S2306, when it is determined that the jackpot that shifts to the “preparation mode” is not held (S2306: No), the jackpot type that falls outside the hold and is not given the “preparation mode” (after the jackpot “ This is a case where only the “normal mode”) is included, so that a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player is reserved as compared with other cases. Therefore, in this case, it is determined whether or not to perform the extra effect based on the extra low probability table in which the extra effect is determined in the extra discriminating table 222d (ie, 5%) ( S2310), the process proceeds to S2311.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2306, when it is determined that the jackpot type that shifts to the “preparation mode” is held (S2306: Yes), then the setting is made after the jackpot type that shifts to the “preparation mode” ends. In the “preparation mode” (ordinary symbol time-short state), it is determined whether the probability variation jackpot is held (S2307), and when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot in the “preparation mode” is held (S2307: Yes), because it means that the transition to the most advantageous “renso mode” has been confirmed, in the additional determination table 222d, the ratio that the additional effect is determined is the lowest (that is, 25%). Based on the low probability table, it is determined whether or not an extra effect is executed (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2311.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when the probability variation jackpot within the “preparation mode” (normal symbol time-short state) is not suspended (S2307), only the “preparation mode” that is relatively advantageous to the player is available. Since the ratio is determined, the rate of determining the additional effect in the additional determination table 222d is based on the intermediate probability table between the low probability table and the high probability table (that is, 10%). It is determined whether or not to perform (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2311.

  In the processing of S2311 executed after any of S2308 to S2310 is executed, it is determined whether or not the execution of the additional effect is determined in the processing of S2308 to S2310 (S2311), and the execution of the additional effect is determined. If this is the case (S2311: Yes), 1 is added to the extra counter 223av (S2312), execution of the extra effect is set (S2313), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2311 that the execution of the extra effect has not been determined (S2311: No), the processing of S2312 and S2313 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  By this winning information command processing (see FIG. 152), the rate at which the extra effect is determined according to the contents of the reserved ball can be varied. Thereby, the player can be expected to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the extra effect. For example, an extra effect is usually executed when a jackpot type for which “preparation mode” is set after the jackpot is put on hold, so it is usually a big jackpot (when the bonus effect is not executed). The game can be played with higher expectations. This is because, if the jackpot is reached, the expectation to shift to the “preparation mode” will increase.

  In addition, if the player wins the game as expected, the player can recognize that the player has a higher expectation level for shifting to the “preparation mode” than when normal (when the extra production is not executed). In the jackpot game, it can be expected more strongly that the lucky number is displayed on the effect section 422a. In addition, at the time of performing the extra effect, the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “renso mode” is pending compared to the case where the transition to the “renso mode” is not confirmed. Since the execution ratio of the extra production is configured to be high, when the “preparation mode” is notified as expected by the player, the player expects that the transition to the “renso mode” is higher than usual. Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the “renso mode”. Therefore, by executing the extra effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation step by step, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 153, the win related command processing (S2111) will be described. This hit-related command process (S2111) is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 150). is there.

  When the hit related command processing (see FIG. 153) is started, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2401). ˜D and normal jackpot A are discriminated as opening (S2402). That is, it is determined whether or not the first variable winning device 82a is a big hit for which the opening pattern A is set.

  In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the command is an opening command for any of the probable jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A (S2402: Yes), the first path forming member 520 and the second path forming member 422 are In order to drive to the connection position, “01H” is set to the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) (S2403). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read from the specific opening table 222b5, an operation command for setting the read operation content in the motor driver is set (S2404), and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the opening command corresponding to the jackpot that is different from any of the promiscuous jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A is received (S2402: No), the first passage forming member 520 and the second jackpot Since there is no need to connect the passage forming member 422, the processing of S2403 and S2404 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2405.

  In the process of S2405, in order to start the jackpot opening effect, a display opening command is set (S2405), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 150). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display opening command and starts display control of the opening effect so that the big symbol opening effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S2401 that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include an opening command (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received. If a round number command has been received (S2406: Yes), first, the jackpot round number is extracted from the received round number command (S2407). Next, it is determined whether the specified number of rounds is the first round (S2408), and if it is the first round (S2408: Yes), an operation pointer corresponding to the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)). It is determined whether or not the value of 223g is “00H” (S2409). That is, it is determined whether the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 are operating. If it is determined that the value of the motion pointer 223g is a value other than “00H” (S2409: No), the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500, despite the opening period being ended, This means that the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is operating. The opening period is set to a specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) at the start of one round, because the time period is set to be long enough to place each of the above-mentioned items at the connection position. The fact that the operation details that have been performed are not completed may indicate that the drive motor has stopped or idle due to some abnormality, or that there is an abnormality in communication between the motor driver and the drive motor. Therefore, in this case, in order to display an error image for notifying an error, a display error command is set (S2410), and this process ends.

  By displaying an error image by an error command, it is possible to easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 for the hall clerk. Therefore, appropriate measures such as repair can be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which an abnormality has occurred.

  In the process of S2408, when it is determined that the number of rounds extracted from the round number command is not the first round (that is, the second round) (S2408: No), and in the process of S2409, the specific opening table 222b5 (FIG. 119). When it is determined that the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to (c) is “00H” (S2409: Yes), a display round number command for displaying the round number extracted in the processing of S2408 is displayed. After setting (S2411), this process is terminated.

  In the process of S2406, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S2406: No), it is then determined whether or not a large opening prize command has been received (S2412), If the large open mouth winning command has been received (S2412: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 223gv (S2413), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2412 that a large opening entrance prize command has not been received (S2412: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S2414), and if an ending command has been received. (S2414: Yes), it is determined whether the ending is a probability variation jackpot B to D or normal jackpot A (S2415). That is, it is determined whether the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are jackpot type endings that are driven to the connection position. And in the process of S2415, when it is determined that the ending is one of the probable big hits B to D or the normal big hit A (S2415: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 A connection release determination process for releasing the connection (connection) is executed (S2416), and the process proceeds to S2417. Details of the connection release determination processing (S2416) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2415 that the ending is not any of the probable jackpot B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2415: No), the process of S2416 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2417. To do. In the processing of S2417, a display ending command is set (S2417), and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the connection release determination process (S2416) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This connection release determination process (S2416) is a process for releasing the connection (linkage) between the first passage formation member 520 and the second passage formation member 422.

  In this connection release process (see FIG. 154), first, the values of the winning counter 223gv and the discharge counter 223hv are read (S2501), and it is determined whether or not these counter values match (S2502). If it is determined in the processing of S2502 that the read counter values match (S2502: Yes), all the balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a have reached the second passage forming member 422 (first passage). The sphere passing through the forming member 520 does not exist), and the processing of S2503 to S2505 for releasing the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is executed. .

  Specifically, “01H” is set to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific ending table 222b6 (S2503), and the operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read from the specific ending table 222b6. Then, an operation command for notifying the motor driver of the read operation content is set (S2504). Then, both the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharging counter 223hv are reset to 0 (S2505), and this process is terminated. Thus, after determining that the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a has reached the second passage forming member 422, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 ( With the configuration in which the connection) is released, it is possible to prevent the connection from being released while the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that a ball is injected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharging counter 223hv do not match in the processing of S2502 (S2502: No), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 223gv is larger than the value of the discharging counter 223hv (S2506). ), If the value of the winning counter 223gv is larger (S2506: Yes), it means that a part of the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a has not reached the second passage forming member 422. In order to wait until the unreached sphere reaches the second passage forming member 422, the discharge waiting flag is set to ON (S2507), and this process is terminated. By setting this discharge standby flag to ON, each time the above-described discharge detection process (see FIG. 148) is executed, it is determined that the value of the winning counter 223gv matches the value of the discharge counter 223hv. When they match, the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released.

  In the processing of S2506, when it is determined that the value of the winning counter 223gv is equal to or smaller than the value of the discharging counter 223hv (S2506: No), more balls than the number won to the first variable winning device 82a are in the second path. Since it means that it has been discharged through the forming member 422, some abnormality may have occurred. Therefore, in this case, in order to display an error image for notifying an error, a display error command is set (S2508), and this process ends. By displaying an error image by an error command, it is possible to easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 for the hall clerk. Therefore, appropriate measures such as repair can be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which an abnormality has occurred.

  Next, the details of the execution command process (S2113) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This execution command process (S2113) is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and is a process for executing control according to the progress of the operation set for each accessory as described above. .

  When the execution command process (see FIG. 155) is started, first, 1 is added to the value of the step counter 223e of the accessory corresponding to the received execution command (S2601). Next, it is determined whether the origin return flag 223i is on (S2602). If it is on (S2603: Yes), it means that the origin return operation is being performed. It is determined whether or not it exists (S2603). That is, it is determined whether or not all the objects have returned to the origin position by the origin return operation. In the processing of S2603, when it is determined that there is an origin sensor whose output is L (S2603: Yes), it means that the origin return operation of the accessory corresponding to the origin sensor has not been completed. In order to execute the origin return operation, this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2603 that the outputs of all the origin sensors are in the H state (all the articles have returned to the origin position) (S2603: No), the origin return operation has been completed. Next, the start of the initial operation is set (S2604). This initial operation is executed in order to determine whether or not each accessory can operate normally by setting a predetermined operation for each accessory. As described above, the operation content in this initial operation is defined in the initial operation table 222b7. That is, in the process of S2604, “01H” is set to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the initial operation table 222b7, and the operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read from the initial operation table 222b7. Set the command. When the process of S2604 ends, the origin returning flag 223i is set to OFF and the initial operation flag 223j is set to ON (S2605), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2602 that the origin return flag 223i is off (S2602: No), it is then determined whether the initial operation flag 223j is on (S2606). That is, it is determined whether or not the initial operation is being executed, and if it is determined that the initial operation flag 223j is on (S2606: Yes), an initial operation process for executing control in accordance with the progress of the initial operation. Is executed (S2607), and this processing is terminated. Details of this initial operation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S2606 that the initial operation flag 223j is off (S2606: No), then, whether or not the execution command received this time is an execution command output from the motor driver of the rotation unit 600. Is discriminated (S2608). That is, it is determined whether or not the command is an execution command for notifying that the rotation operation for one step of the rotation member 640 has been executed. In the process of S2608, when it is determined that the execution command is output from the motor driver of the rotation unit 600 (S2608: Yes), the rotation setting process for controlling the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 (and the rear LED 625) is performed. It performs (S2609), performs the lighting setting process for controlling the lighting state of each lighting area | region A1-A18 of back LED625 (S2610), and complete | finishes this process. Details of the rotation setting process (S2609) and the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, respectively.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2608, when it is determined that the execution command received this time is not a command corresponding to the rotation unit 600 (S2608: No), the role corresponding to the execution command is then determined by the execution command received this time. It is determined whether the number of operation steps set for the object has been reached (S2611). For example, when an execution command corresponding to the motor driver of the upper lift unit 300 is received, the number of operation steps is determined from the set operation scenario (upper lift unit table 222b1) and the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the operation scenario. Is read. If the step counter 223e value is equal to or greater than the operation step specified in the operation scenario, it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2611 that the set number of steps has been reached (S2611: Yes), then 1 is added to the action pointer 223g of the accessory (operation scenario) corresponding to the execution command received this time (S2612). ), The operation content corresponding to the added pointer value is read from the operation scenario table 222b (S2613). Then, an operation command for instructing the corresponding motor driver to read the operation content is set (S2614), and this process is terminated.

  Next, details of the initial operation process (S2606) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This initial operation process (S2606) is one of the execution command processes (see FIG. 155), and is a process for executing control according to the progress of the initial operation as described above.

  When the initial operation process (see FIG. 156) is started, first, the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the operation scenario of the initial operation is read (S2701), and it is determined whether the operation end condition corresponding to the pointer value is satisfied. (S2702). For example, if the value of the current motion pointer 223g is “02H”, it is determined that the end condition is satisfied when the upper elevating unit 300 reaches the lowered position and the left swing unit 500 reaches the connected position. (See FIG. 120).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2702 that the currently set operation end condition is not satisfied (S2702: No), then the initial operation is performed based on the value of the current operation pointer 223g and the value of the step counter 223e. It is determined whether or not the number of abnormality determination steps defined in the table 222b7 (see FIG. 120) has been reached (S2703). In the process of S2703, when it is determined that the number of abnormality determination steps has not been reached (S2703: No), an additional operation for one step is set (S2704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormal determination step number has been reached (S2703: Yes), it is confirmed that the end condition is not satisfied even though the operation having the sufficient number of steps is set to satisfy the end condition. means. For this reason, there is a possibility that the drive motor is not operating normally, or there is a malfunction such as an abnormality in communication between the motor driver and the drive motor. Therefore, in this case, an error display is set by setting a display error command (S2705), and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S2702 that the currently set operation end condition is satisfied (S2702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the initial operation (S2706). The value of each bit in the operable type storage area 223r is read (S2707). Then, it is determined whether the data of the initial operation table 222b7 corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g after the addition is END data (whether the initial operation is completed) (S2708), and the END data is read (initial operation is completed). (S2708: Yes), the initial operation flag 223j is set to OFF, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2708 that the initial operation has not been completed (S2708: No), it is then determined whether or not the initial operation of the accessory corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g can be executed. (S2710). That is, it is determined whether or not the action is the initial action of the accessory corresponding to the bit whose value is set to 1 in the operable type storage area 223r. In the process of S2710, when it is determined that the initial action of the accessory corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223g can be executed (S2710: Yes), the value of the action pointer 223g after 1 is added by the process of S2706 Is read from the initial operation table 222b7 (S2711), an operation command corresponding to the read operation content is set (S2712), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2710 that the initial action of the accessory corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223g is not executable (the corresponding bit of the actionable type storage area 223r is 0) (S2710: No) ), The process proceeds to S2706, and the processes of S2706 to S2710 are repeated until the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the accessory capable of executing the initial action is reached.

  Next, the details of the rotation setting process (S2609) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This rotation setting process (S2609) is one process in the execution command process (see FIG. 155), and is executed to control the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 (and the rear LED 625) as described above.

  When this rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) is executed, first, it is determined whether the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are all L (S2801), and all the detection sensors are detected. If the outputs of A to F are in the L state (S2801: Yes), the state in which the arrangement of the rotating member 640 cannot be specified (all the non-detecting parts 641c are arranged outside the detection range of the rotational position detection sensor 684). This process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2801, when it is determined that any of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S2801: No), then, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F The rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121) is compared, and the arrangement of the rotation member 640 (the pocket at the drop position) that matches the combination of the current outputs is specified (S2802). Then, the rotational position storage area 223u is updated from the specified arrangement (S2803).

  When the processing of S2803 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the ball drop possible flag 223fv is on (S2804). If it is off (S2804: No), it means that the condition for dropping the ball B is not satisfied. Therefore, this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S2804, when it is determined that the ball drop possible flag 223fv is on (S2804: Yes), based on the arrangement stored in the rotational position storage area 223u and the stored contents of the hit position storage area 223k. Then, the type of pockets for 5 pockets (whether it is a hit pocket or a disengagement pocket) is read from the pocket at the drop position (S2805). Then, the five types of pockets that have been read out are compared with the types of pockets in which the ball B is dropped in the current roulette chance effect (S2806).

  When the processing of S2806 is completed, it is next determined whether or not all the comparison results in the processing of S2806 are inconsistent (S2807). If it is determined that all of the comparisons are inconsistent (S2807: Yes), the ball B is dropped. Since the pockets that can be rotated are not arranged at the falling position while rotating at least five pockets by the rotation operation, the rotation speed of the rotation member 640 is set to a high speed (for example, 300 pps) (S2808). As a result, the time until the target pocket type is placed at the drop position can be shortened, so that the ball B does not fall for a long time after the period of the swing operation is short (1 second or less). It is possible to prevent the swinging operation from continuing. Therefore, the sphere B can be dropped with a natural appearance.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2807, it means that a target type of pocket is arranged at the drop position before it passes through five pockets by the rotation operation. Therefore, in this case, the sphere B can be dropped with a natural appearance without changing the rotation speed, so the process of S2808 is skipped and the present process ends.

  Next, the details of the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This lighting setting process (S2610) is one process in the execution command process (see FIG. 155), and is a process for controlling the lighting states of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 as described above.

  When the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the initial setting flag 223t is on (whether the lighting states of the lighting areas A1 to A18 have been set) (S2901). If it is off (S2901: No), it is then determined whether the output of the origin sensor (not shown) of the back LED 625 is on (H) (S2902). That is, it is determined whether or not the LED bar 625a is arranged to match the correction section RA (see FIG. 100A) (S2902). If it is determined in the process of S2902 that the output of the origin sensor is OFF (L) (S2902: No), this process is terminated as it is not the timing for setting the lighting state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is on (H) in the process of S2902 (S2902: Yes), a process for setting the lighting state for each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is performed. . More specifically, first, the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 is reset (S2903), and the rotation position determination table 222c is read (S2903). Next, the current arrangement of the rotation member 640 is specified based on the read rotation position determination table 222c and the combination of outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 (S2905).

  When the processing of S2905 is completed, next, the types of all the pockets arranged in the range from the pocket at the current drop position to the pocket of the previous five to the pocket of the 12th are read from the hit position storage area 223k (S2906). ). That is, the type of the pocket arranged on the front side of each lighting area A1 to A18 is specified. Then, the lighting position storage area 223m (see FIG. 123) is updated according to the type of each pocket read out in the process of S2906. As described above, H is stored as data in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket, and data is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area arranged on the back side of the detached pocket. L is stored as Based on the data (lighting data) stored here, the LED in the lighting area corresponding to the storage area where H is stored is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% (that is, lighting corresponding to the lighting rate of 100%). A control command is output), and the LED in the lighting area corresponding to the storage area in which L is stored is set to a light-off state with a lighting rate of 0%. When the process of S2907 is completed, the value of the correction position counter 223s is initialized, the initial set flag 223t is set to ON (S2908), and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S2901 that the initial set flag 223t is on (S2901: Yes), the state of each lighting area A1 to A18 is switched in accordance with the progress of the rotation of the rotating member 640 (correction). Execute the process for Specifically, first, the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is 864 (that is, the number of steps corresponding to 1/3 of a round from the origin position) or 1728 (that is, 2/3 from the origin position). It is determined whether the number of steps is equal to the number of rounds (S2909). In the process of S2909, when it is determined that the value of the step counter 223e is neither 864 nor 1728 (S2909: No), it means that the LED bars 625b and 625c are not in a state of matching the correction section RA. It is determined whether the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is on (S2910).

  In the process of S2910, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is off (S2910: No), the LED bar 625a also does not coincide with the correction section RA (all of the LED bars 625a to 625c are the correction section). Does not match RA). Therefore, in this case, since the arrangement is such that the lighting state cannot be corrected (switched), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2910, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is on (S2910: Yes), the rotation operation step counter 223e is reset to 0, and the process proceeds to S2912. If it is determined in step S2909 that the value of the step counter 223e is 864 or 1728 (S2909: Yes), the processes in steps S2910 and S2911 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2912.

  In the process of S2912, the value of the correction position counter 223s indicating the type of the LED bar for which the current lighting state is corrected (switched) is updated by 1 (S2912). Next, the rotation position determination table 222c is read (S2913), and based on the read rotation position determination table 222c and the combination of outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684, the current rotation member is read. The arrangement of 640 is specified (S2914). Then, the type of each pocket arranged in the correction section RA (whether it is a hit pocket or a detached pocket) is read from the hit position storage area 223k (S2915), and the lighting position is stored according to the read pocket type. In the area 223m, the storage area corresponding to the LED bar indicated by the correction position counter 223s is updated (S2916), and this process ends.

  By executing this lighting setting process (see FIG. 158), the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is corrected every time the back LED makes 1/3 round (that is, in units of one LED bar). Can do. That is, every time the back LED makes a 1/3 turn, information on the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) Correction can be made in accordance with the deviation of the correspondence relationship with A1 to A18. Thereby, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in the appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket shines and the detached pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-corrected section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the release pocket.

  Next, the details of the status command process (S2115) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This status command process (S2115) is one process of the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and is a process for executing various controls in accordance with the status command received from main controller 110.

  In this state command process (see FIG. 159), first, the probability variation state flag 223n, the short time state flag 223o, the short time state counter 223p, and the hitting state storage area 223q are each updated based on the received state command (S3001). . Next, it is determined whether the current status command is a command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002), and if it is not a command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002: No), this processing is terminated as it is. . Whether or not the output is made at the end of the big hit is determined based on, for example, the stored value of the winning state storage area 223q. Specifically, when “04H” indicating that the ending period is stored in the winning state storage area 223q and a new state command is received, the state command output at the end of the jackpot Is determined. This is because the state does not change during the jackpot ending period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3002 that the status command received this time is a command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002: Yes), the value of the time reduction status counter 223p after being updated based on the status command Is greater than 0 (S3003). That is, it is determined whether the number of time reductions has shifted to the “preparation mode” once or seven times after the big hit, and it is determined that the state has not shifted to the “preparation mode” (the time reduction state counter 223p is 0). In this case (S3003: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S3003: Yes), a hit pocket distribution process (S3004) for determining the arrangement of the hit pocket is executed. Details of the winning pocket sorting process (S3004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the winning pocket is set (determined) by the winning pocket sorting process (S3003), the start of the increase effect (see FIGS. 93A and 93B) is set (S3005), indicating that the increase effect is being performed. Therefore, the increasing effect flag 223cv is set to ON (S3006). Then, by resetting the effect timer 223bv, the time of the effect period from the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect” is started (S3007), and this process is ended.

  Next, the details of the winning pocket sorting process (S3004) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The winning pocket distribution process (S3004) is a process for determining the arrangement of the winning pockets as described above.

  When the winning pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) is started, first, five pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are read (S3101), and the read pockets are used as the winning pockets in the winning position storage area 22k. Setting is performed (S3102). That is, H is stored in the storage area corresponding to the read pocket.

  When the processing of S3102 is completed, the value of the addition counter 223av is then read (S3103), and it is determined whether the read value of the addition counter 223av is greater than 0 (S3104). In the process of S3104, when it is determined that the value of the extra counter 223av is 0 (S3104: No), it is not necessary to increase the winning pocket, and thus this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3104, when it is determined that the value of the read addition counter 223av is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S3104: Yes), an additional pocket for the value of the addition counter 223av is additionally set ( Therefore, the processing of S3105 to S3110 is executed. Specifically, first, a hit pocket (win position) is read from the hit position storage area 223k (S3105), and it is determined whether or not there is a place where five or more hit pockets (win positions) are continuous. (S3106).

  In the process of S3106, when it is determined that there is a place where five or more hit pockets are continuous (S3106: Yes), out of the out-of-pocket pockets, other than one place before and after the place where five or more hit positions are continuous One place is selected from the extra pocket (S3108), and the process proceeds to S3109. The reason for restricting the addition of further hitting pockets before and after five or more consecutive points is that if the hitting is continued too much, it may be difficult to drop the ball B naturally. That is, when it is detected that the period of the swinging motion of the sphere B is shortened at the timing when the hitting pocket reaches a position where the hitting pocket continues during the execution of the roulette chance effect to notify the come-off, the hitting pocket becomes continuous. Sphere B must be dropped after passing through the part. Therefore, a state in which the cycle of the swing motion is short (the swing motion is weak) continues for a long time, and the player may feel uncomfortable with the ball B not falling easily. Therefore, in this control example, a limit is imposed on the number of consecutive hit positions, and the state where the ball B cannot be dropped is prevented from continuing for a long time.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3106 that there is no place where five or more hit pockets are continuous (S3106: No), one additional position is selected from all the out pockets (S3107). ), The process proceeds to S3109. In the process of S3109 executed after the process of S3107 or S3108, the winning position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected additional position becomes the winning position (S3109), and the value of the additional counter 223av is decremented by 1 (S3110). The process proceeds to S3104 again. Thereafter, each processing of S3104 to S3110 is repeatedly executed until the value of the addition counter 223av becomes 0, and this processing is terminated when the value of the addition counter av becomes 0.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command process (S2117) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 161. This special figure 2 winning command process (S2117) is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 150). When a ball enters the second entrance 640a during the increase effect, the winning pocket Is a process for determining whether or not to increase.

  In this special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether or not the increasing effect flag 223cv is on (S3201). If it is off (S3201: No), it is not an increasing effect. This process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the increasing effect flag 223cv is on (S3201: Yes), then the data in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3202). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of hit pockets is 5 which is the upper limit value (S3203), and if it is the upper limit value (S3203: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the number of winning pockets is less than the upper limit value (S3203: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning holding ball exists in the winning information (S3204). If there is no winning holding ball (S3204: No), it is then determined whether or not the big hit variation is being executed (S3205). Then, when there is no winning holding ball and the big hit fluctuation is not being executed (S3204: No, S3205: No), the ratio of the addition to be selected is 5%, and the addition is performed based on the low probability table. Is determined (S3206), and the process proceeds to S3208. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3204 that there is a big hit reservation ball (S3204: Yes), and when it is determined that the big hit change is being executed in the process of S3205 (S3205: Yes), an extra is added. Based on the added high probability table in which the selected ratio is 25%, it is determined whether or not to add (S3207), and the process proceeds to S3208.

  In the process of S3208 executed after the process of S3206 or S3207, it is determined whether or not the addition has been determined (S3208). If the addition has not been determined (S3208: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3208, if the addition is determined (S3208: Yes), the winning pocket (hit position) is read from the hit position storage area 223k, and five or more hit pockets (hit positions) are continuous. It is determined whether or not a location exists (S3209).

  In the processing of S3209, when it is determined that there is a place where five or more hit pockets are continuous (S3209: Yes), out of the detaching pockets, other than one place before and after the place where five or more hit positions are continuous One place is selected from the removal pocket (S3211), and the process proceeds to S3212. The reason for restricting the addition of further hitting pockets before and after five or more consecutive points is that if the hitting is continued too much, it may be difficult to drop the ball B naturally. That is, when it is detected that the period of the swinging motion of the sphere B is shortened at the timing when the hitting pocket reaches a position where the hitting pocket continues during the execution of the roulette chance effect to notify the come-off, the hitting pocket becomes continuous. Sphere B must be dropped after passing through the part. Therefore, a state in which the cycle of the swing motion is short (the swing motion is weak) continues for a long time, and the player may feel uncomfortable with the ball B not falling easily. Therefore, in this control example, a limit is imposed on the number of consecutive hit positions, and the state where the ball B cannot be dropped is prevented from continuing for a long time.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3209, when it is determined that there is no place where five or more hit pockets are continuous (S3209: No), one additional position is selected from all the removal pockets (S3210). ), And the process proceeds to S3212. In the process of S3212 executed after the process of S3210 or S3211, the hit position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected added position becomes the hit position (S3212), and the added hit position is notified (FIG. 93B). Reference) is set, and this process ends.

  By executing this special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161), a lottery (discrimination is performed) as to whether or not the winning pocket is increased every time a ball enters the second entrance 640a during the execution of the increase effect. ) And you can increase your pocket when you win the lottery. Therefore, since the ball can be actively launched aiming at the second entrance 640a during the execution of the increase effect, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the special figure 2 winning command process of the first control example, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is made different depending on whether or not the transition to the “ream mode” has been confirmed. However, the variation of the lottery probability may be further increased. For example, when the transition to “renso mode” is confirmed and when it is undecided whether or not to transition to “renso mode” (the number of start prizes in the short-running state is the short-term period The probability (ratio) that the increase in the hit pocket is determined may be different between the case where it is determined that the mode is not shifted to the “ream home mode”. Specifically, for example, when the transition to the “renso mode” is confirmed at the time of the lottery, a relatively high probability (for example, 25% of the case where the player enters the second entrance 640a) If the winning pocket (lucky number) is increased at a ratio of (the ratio), and it is determined that the mode does not shift to the “renso mode”, the probability is relatively high (for example, the second entrance 640a). The winning pocket may be increased at a rate of 5% when the ball enters the ball. In addition, when it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “renso mode”, the probability between the above two cases (for example, a ratio of 10% when entering the second entrance 640a) It may be configured so that the hit pocket is increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have variations in how to increase the winning pockets, so that the interest in the lucky number increase production is further improved. In this case, the probability that the hit pocket is increased may be varied according to the number of time reductions set as the “preparation mode”. That is, when the “preparation mode” with one short-time period is set, the probability that the pocket is increased is lower than when the “preparation mode” with seven short-term periods is set. May be. More specifically, for example, the winning pocket (lucky number) may be increased at a rate of 8% when the shortening period is 1 and 12% when the shortening period is 7 times. As a result, it is possible to predict a short time period from the increase of the winning pocket (lucky number), so it can be expected to shift to the “renso mode” by increasing the winning pocket. In addition, it is possible to expect 7 short time periods that are advantageous to the player (there are many opportunities to shift to the “renso” mode).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the variable display setting process (S1615) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1615). This change display setting process (S1615) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the effect part 331 to execute the change effect, 110 is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3301). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S3301: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S3306. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S3301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S3302), and then, in the process of S2202 of the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151), the fluctuation starts. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3303).

  Based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3304). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, and displays the variation effect so that the variation display of the symbol is performed in the effect unit 331 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Control begins.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3305). In the process of S3305, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3306.

  In the process of S3306, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3306). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3306: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, and therefore, this fluctuation display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3306: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3307), and then in the process of S2105 of the command determination process (see FIG. 150), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3308).

  Next, a display number selection process for determining a display number displayed in the effect section 331 is executed (S3309). Details of this display number selection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S3309 ends, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type indicated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is generated, and the command is displayed as the display control device 114. (S3310), and this process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed by the effecting unit 331. Stop display is controlled.

  Next, the details of the display number selection process (S3409) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This display number selection process (S3409) is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162), and is a process for determining the display number displayed in the effect section 331 as described above.

  When this display number selection process (see FIG. 163) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current state is the normal symbol time-short state (S3401). That is, it is determined whether or not the time-short state flag 223o is on or the value of the time-short state counter 223p is 1 or more. If it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S3401: Yes), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (that is, “normal mode”) (S3401: No), then the lucky number stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x (the jackpot symbol) ) Is read out (S3402), and then it is determined whether the lottery result of the current special symbol is a big hit (S3403).

  In the process of S3403, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out (S3403: No), three different types are randomly selected from 30 types (numbers assigned to the respective pockets P1 to P30). (S3404). Then, it is determined whether or not all the selected three types of numbers are lucky numbers (big hit symbols) defined in the designated pocket storage area 223x (S3405), and at least one of the at least three types is a lucky number. Is determined to be a different off number (S3405: No), one of the remaining 27 types excluding the three types selected in the process of S3404 is selected as a stop symbol (S3406). The process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3405 that all the three types are lucky numbers (big win symbols) (S3405: Yes), the remaining one number (symbol) is assigned as an unselected number. A random selection is made from among them (S3407), and this process ends. Four types of numbers (symbols) selected in the processes of S3404 to S3407 are set as outlier stop symbols displayed on the rendering unit 331.

  In S3403, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big win (S3403: Yes), four types out of five types of lucky numbers (winning numbers) read from the designated pocket storage area 223x are selected. A random selection is made (S3408). Then, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot to which the “preparation mode” (ordinary symbol time-short state) is given (S3409). If the “preparation mode” is not given (S3409: No), In the time suggestion effect (see FIGS. 92 (a) and (b)), one type (number of notification symbols) displayed on the effect part 422a is selected from the outlier numbers (S3410), and this process ends. To do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3409, when it is determined that the “preparation mode” is a jackpot to be granted (S3409: Yes), in the time suggestion effect (see FIG. 92 (a), (b)) in the jackpot, One number (notification symbol) displayed on the rendering unit 422a is selected from the lucky numbers (winning numbers) (S3411), and the process is terminated.

  By this display number selection process (see FIG. 163), five types of lucky numbers previously selected by the player can be set as jackpot symbols. In addition, the lucky number selected by the player can be set as a notification symbol for the “preparation mode”.

  Next, details of the accessory operation setting process (S1616) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This accessory action setting process (S1616) is one process in the main process (see FIG. 145), and is a process for setting the action of each accessory as described above.

  When the accessory operation setting process (see FIG. 164) is started, it is first determined whether it is the end timing of the wait period (S3501). This wait period may be set when the power is turned on, and as described above, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of power-on is the jackpot ending period, the start of the origin return operation is delayed to It is set in order to reliably discharge the sphere in the one passage forming member 520.

  If it is determined in the process of S3501 that it is the end timing of the wait period (S3501: Yes), then an origin return process is performed to return an accessory that has been mutated from the origin position to the origin position. (S3502), and this process ends. The origin return process (S3502) is the same as the origin return process (S1314) described with reference to FIG. 144, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3501 that it is not the end timing of the wait period (S3501: No), then it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of any accessory (S3503). If it is not the operation start timing (S3503: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3502 that it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S3503: Yes), then, “01H” is set to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the accessory that starts the operation (S3504). ), The operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read out from the table corresponding to the accessory starting the current operation in the operation scenario table 222b (S3505).

  When the processing of S3505 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the operation of the pitching device 650 has been read (S3506). By setting each effect flag 223ev to ON, it indicates that the ball B has been pitched (S3507), and the process proceeds to S3508. Note that, as described above, the pitching device 650 is set to operate when 50 seconds have elapsed since the start of the roulette chance effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3506, when it is determined that it is not the operation of the pitching device 650 (S3506: No), the process of S3507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3508. In the process of S3508, an operation command is set based on the operation content read in the process of S3505, and this process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 178. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) in the display control device 114 is immediately performed. There is a problem that it may not start.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, And the control of the production unit 422a) can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3601), and the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and The display control device 114 is activated so that various controls on the rendering unit 422a) can be executed.

  Here, the boot process (S3601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S3601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, but the third symbol display device 81 and the like. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory 234a has a low read speed particularly when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3702). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701.

  In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a through the processing of S3702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S3702, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3703). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S3704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S3601 in FIG. 165). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S3602 in FIG. 165) (S3705), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S3601), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 166, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S3702 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S3703 to S3705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S3701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3701. The processing of S3703 to S3705 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S3702.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3703 to S3705 without performing the processes of S3701 and S3702. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 165. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, an image of a specific color is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). The image controller 237 is instructed to perform image drawing and display processing so that the image is displayed entirely. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Here, immediately after the power is turned on, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) depends on the model of the pachinko machine. It is set to be a different color. Thereby, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S3603). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3603, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3604). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3604, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S3605). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 176 (a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S5102 in FIG. 176 (a)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 125 is drawn. Determination processing (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S3909 in FIG. 167 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. In the case of being through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S3605, interrupt permission is set (S3606). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3801), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 167 (b). FIG. 167 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and After specifying an image to be displayed on the rendering unit 422a), a drawing list (see FIG. 129) of the image is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. It instructs the execution of the drawing process and the display process.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S3901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), a command determination process (S3902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3903) is performed. Run.

  In the command determination process (S3902), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172.

  In the display setting process (S3903), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3902) or the like, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit). 331 and the effect part 422a) specifically specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S3904). In this task process, the information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect part 331, and the effect part 422a) specified by the display setting process (S3903) or the simple display setting process (S3909). Based on the content of the next one frame image to be specified, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified, and for each sprite, various kinds of drawing necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle. Determine the parameters.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S3906). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3904), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3905) are used. 129 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3907). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S3907, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on 81 etc. (the 3rd symbol display device 81, the effect part 331, and the effect part 422a) is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 125 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3908) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3909) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172, details of the above-described command determination process (S 3902), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 168, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4001). If there is no unprocessed new command (S4001: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3903) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4002), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S4003).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S4004). If there is a display variation pattern command (S4004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4005), the process returns to S4001.

  Details of the variation pattern command processing (S4005) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S4101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4101, for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the variable effect according to the set variable display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). During the time, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, and another variation display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is displayed by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. Since it is controlled, the player feels uncomfortable with the 3rd symbol display device 81 or the like (the 3rd symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering). It may continue watching a variation of the third symbol in 422a).

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4101 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S4103). Thereafter, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S4104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4105), both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S4106), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 169 (a)), the display setting process sets the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4105. The drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table thus specified, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing, and the necessary sprite image data is stored in advance in the set variable display data table. Character ROM 234 As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a Luo normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4104, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). In addition, the setting of the stop display is controlled.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4004 that there is no display variation pattern command (S4004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4006). If there is a display stop type command (S4006: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4007), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S4007) will be described with reference to FIG. 169 (b). FIG. 169 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S4201), the stop type table and the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)). Is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated each time is executed, and the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). The later stop symbol is finally set (S4202).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4202 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S4203), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, In addition, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4202 is described as type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the effect unit 422a). In the task process (S3904), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S4202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S4203, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4201, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the process of S4202.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol may be used) even if it is actually “out of special symbol”. The display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) display a stop symbol corresponding to “special symbol jackpot”, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 becomes “special symbol jackpot”. This could cause the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 to be reduced. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete losing, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol) Even if a completely out of stop symbol is displayed on the display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 168, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4006 that there is no display stop type command (S4006: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S4008). If there is a general opening command command (S4008: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S4009), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (a). FIG. 170 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4301). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4302), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S4303). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4304). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S4305), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 168, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4008 that there is no display opening command (S4008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S4010). If there is a round number command for use (S4010: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S4011), and the process proceeds to S4001.

  Details of the round number command processing (S4011) will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (b). FIG. 170 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S4401). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4402).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4404). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S4405), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4010 that there is no display round number command (S4010: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S4012), and the display If there is an ending command (S4012: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S4013), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S4013) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing an ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table It is set in the buffer 233d (S4501). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4502).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S4503). After that, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S4505). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S4506), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S4012 that there is no display ending command (S4012: No), it is then determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4014). If there is a change command (S4014: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S4015), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 172 (a), details of the back image change command processing (S4015) will be described. FIG. 172 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 177) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON. (S4601). Then, among the back image discrimination flags 233x provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other The back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S4602), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S4601 is turned on, the back image type after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S4602. Identify. If the specified back image type is the back B, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a back image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing (S3904), if it is specified that either the back A or B is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S4602 is set. From 233x, the rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4602, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S4014 that there is no rear image change command (S4014: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S4016). If (S4016: Yes), an error command process is executed (S4017), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S4017) will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4701). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S4702). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4701, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S4702 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4702, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S4016 (S4016: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S4018), and the process returns to S4001.

  In the process of S4001 that is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes). ), The processing of S4002 to S4018 is executed again. Then, the processing of S4001 to S4018 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S4001 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S3908) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 125 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 169 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 169 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 169 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4101. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S4102, processing for writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S3903), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 173, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4801). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4801: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S4802 to S4804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4801: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S4802), S4803 to S4804 By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4803, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4803). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4803: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4804).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). First, referring to the error determination flag, error warning images corresponding to all error determination flags set to ON are displayed as the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The warning image data to be displayed in () is expanded (S4901).

  In the task processing (S3904), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4901, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4902), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 173. After the warning image setting process (S4804) or in the process of S4803, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S4803: No), the process proceeds to S4805.

  In S4805, pointer update processing is executed (S4805). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S5001). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S5001, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S5002). As a result, if it is End information (S5002: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S5003). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S5003: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S5004), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S5005), and this process is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). ) Can repeatedly display demonstration effects.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5003, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S5003: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S5006), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S5002: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4806). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S4806 together with the warning image developed in advance, and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4807), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4808). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4808: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S4808: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S4809).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is on (S4809: Yes), the confirmed display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d because the confirmed display effect has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect is performed. (S4810), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4811). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4812), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4813). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4814), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S4815), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third) in accordance with the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Further, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit) can be easily obtained by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table. The effect displayed in 422a) can be changed to the final display effect. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S4815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) in the next variation effect. Used to identify the third symbol to be used. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S3904), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop pattern of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop pattern determination flag set in S4815, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off in the processing of S4809 (S4809: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4816). If the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S4816: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demonstration display data table is displayed as display data. The data is set in the table buffer 233d (S4817), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4818). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4819). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4820), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4821), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is finished, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (first The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81, the effect part 331, and the effect part 422a).

  In the process of S4816, if the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4816: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. End and return to V-interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S3909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 125B and 125C) be stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 176 and FIG. 177, details of the transfer setting process (S3905) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 176 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Is executed (S5102), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 176 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S5101, that is, if it is off (S5101: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S5103), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S5102), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (b). FIG. 176 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S5102).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S5201), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S5201: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S5202). In the process of S5202, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S5202 that the transfer process has not been completed (S5202: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5202: Yes), the process proceeds to S5203. Also, as a result of the process of S5201, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203.

  In the process of S5203, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S5203). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S5203: No), that A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S5204), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S5203 (S5203: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S5205), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3909 in FIG. 167 (b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like ( A normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) (see S5101: No in FIG. 176 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S5103), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S5103).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4805) of the display setting process (S3903) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S5301). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S5302), and if it is transfer data information (S5302: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S5303, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S5304), and the process proceeds to step S5305.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S5302 (S5302: No), the processes of S5303 and S5304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5305. In the processing of S5305, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S5305), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S5305: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S5306).

  In the process of S5306, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S5306 (S5306: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5306: Yes), the process proceeds to S5307. Also, as a result of the process of S5305, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S5305: No), the process proceeds to S5307.

  In the process of S5307, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5307). If the transfer start flag is on (S5307: Yes), there is image data to start transfer, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S5308), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S5303 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S5313. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5307: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S5309).

  If the back image change flag 233w is on (S5309: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S5310), it is provided for each back image type. Of the back image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S5311). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S5312), and the process proceeds to S5313.

  In the process of S5309, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S5309: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  If the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no image data. Accordingly, in the process of S5315, if the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is the rear A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S5313, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5313). The determination in the process of S5313 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S5313 (S5313: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5313 (S5313: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S5314). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S5314, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S5315), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the details of the above-described drawing process (S3906), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3905), the drawing list shown in FIG. 129 is generated (S5401). That is, in the process of S5401, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3904). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3905), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S5402). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer is displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S5402, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S5403). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 167 (b)) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example has a configuration in which three types of modes, ie, “normal mode”, “preparation mode”, and “renso mode” are provided. In order to shift to the most advantageous “renso mode”, first, it is necessary to first shift from the “normal mode” to the “preparation mode”. In other words, it is necessary to shift to the time-saving state where the time-saving period is once or seven times. Then, by making a probable big hit during the “preparation mode”, it is possible to shift to the “renso mode” that is most advantageous to the player.

  For this reason, it is possible to make the player strongly expect that it will be a big hit in the limited number of times (1 or 7) set as the “preparation mode”. Therefore, the interest in the game in the “preparation mode” can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, a plurality (five types) of identification information (lucky numbers) used to notify the player of an advantageous state is set. Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional type gaming machine, the display is subjected to a variable display of symbols, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. However, in this conventional game machine, only a predetermined combination of symbols is used for winning notification, and when performing other notifications (for example, notification of a probable change state, etc.), different notification modes (for example, In general, the notification is performed in a display effect or the like that fights the enemy. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to understand the content of the notification because the notification mode is not uniform. In addition, a notification mode for reporting a result advantageous to the player is generally executed in a predetermined mode, and there is little room for the player to intervene.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the identification information (lucky number) for notifying an advantageous state is a role for notifying a special symbol jackpot in the “normal mode” (see FIG. 91 (a)), A role for notifying whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” after the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 92 (b)) and whether or not to shift from the “preparation mode” to the “continuous villa mode” are notified. It also serves as a role. Since the lucky number is used for various notifications that are advantageous to the player, the player can easily understand the result of each effect only by grasping the lucky number. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more understandable presentation. In addition, it is all lucky that the special symbol jackpot notification in the “normal mode”, the “preparation mode” notification executed in the jackpot, and the “renso mode” notification executed in the “preparation mode” are all lucky. An effect aimed at acquiring the number is executed. Therefore, these three types of different notifications can make the player feel as if they were one production. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect with a sense of unity. Further, in this control example, the player can arbitrarily select (set) identification information (lucky number) for notifying the player of an advantageous state. Therefore, since the notification mode suited to each player's preference can be executed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in this control example, when a big hit is made in the “normal mode”, an entertaining effect (short-time notification effect) for notifying whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” that is more advantageous than the “normal mode” is a big win Configured to run in. The short time notification effect is executed every time it is detected that the ball has reached the second passage forming member 422 via the first passage forming member 520 provided on the downstream side of the first variable winning device 82a. . Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to launch the ball in an attempt to actively enter the ball into the first variable winning device 82a. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be increased.

  Moreover, the 1st channel | path formation member 520 and the 2nd channel | path formation member 422 are comprised during the jackpot opening period, and when the jackpot ends, the connection is cancelled | released. Here, if the connection is immediately released at the end of the last round of jackpots (2 rounds), if there is a ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 at the end of the final round, that ball There is a possibility that the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are separated before reaching the second passage forming member 422. That is, the sphere that has flowed down the first passage forming member 520 may be injected from the opening portion of the first passage forming member 520 in an unexpected direction without entering the second passage forming member 422. . In this case, the emitted sphere may enter the substrate portion or the wiring portion, which may cause a failure such as a short circuit.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, in the jackpot ending period, when the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 82a coincides with the number of discharges from the second passage forming member 422, the first passage forming member 520 is used. And the second passage forming member 422 are disconnected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball entering the first variable winning device 82a is formed as the second passage. It is possible to reliably flow down to the member 422. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  In addition, in this control example, when entering the “preparation mode”, the “renso mode suggestion” is used as an entertainment effect to suggest whether or not to shift to the “renso mode” that is most advantageous to the player. It is configured to execute “production”. In the “renso mode suggestion effect”, the transition to the “renso mode” is made depending on which pocket of the plurality of pockets provided on the rotating member 640 configured to simulate roulette is dropped. Notify if you did. More specifically, when a plurality (30 types) of pockets are assigned to a hit pocket and a disengagement pocket, and the ball B falls into the hit pocket, it indicates that the mode has shifted to the “ream home mode”. Therefore, since attention can be paid to the type of pocket in which the ball B falls, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the “renso mode suggestion effect”.

  On the back side of the rotating member 640, a rear LED 625 that illuminates the hit pocket from the back side is provided in order to make the hit pocket stand out (assuming it looks shiny). The rear LED 625 is configured to rotate in the same direction at the same rotational speed as the rotating member 640. In this backside LED 625, a plurality of lighting areas (lighting areas A1 to A18) for illuminating an area for one pocket from the back side are arranged at equal intervals. On the other hand, there are 30 types of pockets provided in the rotating member 640, and the diameter of the rotating member 640 and the diameter of the back LED 625 are configured to be substantially the same by providing a plurality of sections with different intervals between the pockets. Has been. For this reason, since the rotation member 640 can only make 18/30 rotations while the back surface LED 625 makes one round, according to the rotation amount of the rotation member 640, each pocket provided in the rotation member 640, and each lighting area A1-A18. The correspondence relationship with is shifted.

  Here, as a method of matching the correspondence between the lighting region and each pocket, a method of matching the number of regions of each lighting region of the rear LED with the number of each pocket provided in the rotating member 640 can be considered. When the number of regions is increased in accordance with the number of pockets, the number of LEDs increases, leading to an increase in cost and power consumption. Moreover, since the size of the LED bar (LED substrate) increases, there is a problem that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 is wasted. Furthermore, in order to save space, when each lighting area of the backside LED 625 is configured to vary the interval between the lighting areas according to the rotational position (similar structure to the rotating member 640), the first section of the rotating member 640 is used. Corresponding to S1, it is necessary to provide a section in which the LED bars are folded (that is, the interval between the lighting areas is narrow). Therefore, each LED bar needs to be configured to be switchable between a normal state (see FIG. 97) and a folded state according to rotation. However, unlike the pocket, the LED bar is provided with a circuit for lighting each LED, so that when folded, the circuit pattern printed on the board, the wiring, etc. are disconnected, and the LED bar May not light up. On the other hand, when the number of pockets of the rotating member 640 is reduced to 18 and the interval between the pockets is always constant (interval when arranged in the second section in this control example) (on the back LED 625) There is a problem that variations in production are reduced due to a decrease in the number of pockets, in the case where each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 provided and each pocket has a one-to-one correspondence.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, one of the members (ie, the back LED 625) (ie, the back LED 625) that performs a rotation operation with respect to each other (ie, the back LED 625) is operated every time a predetermined condition is met (back Every time the rotation amount of the LED 625 becomes 1/3 round, it is corrected (switched) in accordance with the other operation. By this correction, the lighting area arranged on the back side of the contact pocket among the pockets of the rotating member 640 is controlled so that it always looks shiny. That is, each time the rear LED makes a 1/3 round, the storage area information corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is corrected in accordance with the deviation caused by the rotation operation. ing. Thereby, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in the appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket shines and the detached pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-corrected section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the release pocket.

  Further, in this control example, in the “normal mode”, it is configured to be able to execute “addition effect” for expecting that a lottery result advantageous to the player is put on hold. Here, conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that executes a specific effect (so-called “holding notice effect”) every time the number of held balls increases. This hold notice effect is generally controlled so as to be easily executed when an advantageous lottery result (for example, a win or the like) is put on hold. However, this conventional game machine merely suggests whether an advantageous lottery result has been put on hold, and a hold ball other than the hold ball on which the hold notice effect is executed (for example, the hold on which the hold notice is executed). It was not possible to have a sense of expectation for a holding ball that was held before the ball).

  On the other hand, in this control example, a plurality of advantageous states are provided, and a transition to a more advantageous state (ranking up) is made in stages according to the lottery result of the special symbol. And it is set as the structure which becomes easy to perform a superposition effect, so that the reservation ball | bowl which transfers to a more advantageous state by prefetching is hold | maintained. Thereby, the player can be expected to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the extra effect. For example, an extra effect is usually executed when a jackpot type for which “preparation mode” is set after the jackpot is put on hold, so it is usually a big jackpot (when the bonus effect is not executed). The game can be played with higher expectations. This is because, if the jackpot is reached, the expectation to shift to the “preparation mode” will increase. In addition, if the player wins the game as expected, the player can recognize that the player has a higher expectation level for shifting to the “preparation mode” than when normal (when the extra production is not executed). It is possible to strongly expect that the lucky number is displayed on the effect section 422a during the jackpot game. In addition, at the time of performing the extra effect, the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “renso mode” is pending compared to the case where the transition to the “renso mode” is not confirmed. Since the execution ratio of the extra production is configured to be high, when the “preparation mode” is notified as expected by the player, the player expects that the transition to the “renso mode” is higher than usual. Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the “renso mode”. As described above, in this control example, the player can expect the player to gradually shift to a plurality of advantageous states by executing one additional effect. Therefore, since a sense of expectation can be given to all the lotteries corresponding to the held balls that are held at the time when the extra effect is executed, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  In this control example, when the sphere B is dropped into the pocket of the rotating member 640, the sphere B is swung on the holding piece 677 and then moved to a target type pocket (a hit pocket or a release pocket). It is configured to drop.

  Here, when the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677, if the ball B is allowed to drop regardless of the swinging state (cycle, amplitude, etc.), Despite the state where the period (amplitude) is large (the state in which the swinging motion of the sphere B is likely to continue for a while), the sphere B falls or the state (amplitude) of the swinging operation is extremely small ( In some cases, the sphere B may continue to be held on the holding piece 677 despite the appearance that the sphere B is likely to fall. That is, there is a possibility that the operation of the sphere B may appear unnatural (such as falling in an operating situation that is unlikely to fall, or not falling indefinitely in an operating situation that is likely to fall). Also, a method of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the swing motion and dropping the sphere B when the elapsed time that would be a period (amplitude) that can be dropped with a natural appearance is reached. However, since the swinging motion of the ball B can be influenced by various conditions such as the angle and initial speed at the time of throwing, the way of assembling the holding piece 677, etc., the cycle (amplitude) can be dropped with a natural appearance. There is a possibility that individual differences may occur in the time until.

  On the other hand, in this control example, when the ball B is dropped, the cycle of the swinging operation is determined from the time interval when the ball B passes through the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the cycle of the swinging operation is sufficiently small. The ball B is configured to fall after it has been determined that it has become. Thereby, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance regardless of individual differences of the pachinko machine 10 or conditions (angle and initial speed) when the ball B is thrown. In other words, when the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677, the player can be focused by the operation of the ball B. it can.

  Further, in this control example, every time one of the pockets is arranged at the dropping position, the pocket arranged at the dropping position can be specified from the outputs of the detection sensors A to F. Here, every time a pocket is placed at the drop position, if it is determined whether or not the ball B can be dropped into the pocket, the fall of the ball B after the pocket is placed at the drop position. Is started, the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket at the drop position (it will fall into the next pocket). A time lag occurs when the holding piece 677 moves from the protruding position to the immersive position, and a time lag also occurs when the ball B falls from the upper part of the holding piece 677. This is because there is a possibility that the pocket at the dropping position may pass by the rotating operation before reaching the position.

  On the other hand, in this control example, when any of the pockets is arranged at the dropping position, the arrangement of the current rotating member 640 is specified from the pocket at the dropping position, and the next of the pocket arranged at the current dropping position is determined. The type of the pocket arranged at the drop position is specified, and it is determined whether or not the ball B can be dropped into the pocket. When it is determined that the ball B can be dropped into the pocket disposed at the drop position next to the pocket currently disposed at the drop position, the drop control of the ball B (the position where the holding piece 677 is immersed) The control of the movement is performed before the pocket is placed at the dropping position. That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersive position at a timing at which the ball B can be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the dropping position). It is configured to be immersive. By comprising in this way, the ball | bowl B can be more reliably dropped to the pocket of the target classification. Therefore, the ball B falls into the hit pocket even though it does not shift to the “renso mode”, or conversely, the transition to the “renso mode” is confirmed, It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from coming off and falling into the pocket.

  Further, in this control example, it is possible to execute a specific effect (that is, a “village mode suggestion effect”) over one or a plurality of times (one or seven times) set as the “preparation mode”. It is configured. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that can execute the same line of production over a plurality of fluctuation displays (for example, a fluctuation display for the number of held balls held at the start of the production) (so-called , "Continuous notice effect"). In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, depending on the number of times the same line of production is executed, the contents of the production, and the like. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the number of executions and the production time of the production depend on the holding ball, and therefore, if there are no or few holding balls, a sufficient production time cannot be secured. There has been a problem of reducing the amount.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a fixed time effect (that is, “ream mode suggestion effect”) can be executed regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls. Yes. And so that the `` preparation mode '' does not end during the performance of fixed time, even if a big hit in the middle of the number of time reductions, even if all the lottery of special symbols for the number of time reductions are missed, The variation pattern selection table 202d is defined so that the total variation time of the variation display executed in “is constant (more than the production time of the“ ream mode suggestion effect ”). With such a configuration, the execution time of the “preparation mode suggestion effect” can be sufficiently ensured, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, depending on the progress of the game at the time of starting the ending effect in the “renso mode suggestion effect” (the remaining change time of the change display currently being executed, the remaining number of short hours, etc.), the duration of the ending effect is set. It was configured to be variable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to match the end timing of the “preparation mode suggestion effect” with the timing at which the “preparation mode” actually ends, so that the player can grasp the game state more accurately. Can be made. Further, in this control example, the game is stopped in the “preparation mode suggestion effect”, and after the game is informed by the “preparation mode suggestion effect”, the player resumes the game and becomes a promising jackpot. When transition to “mode” is confirmed, a special effect (revival roulette chance effect) can be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the ending effect from continuing for the duration of the game stop period, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming bored. In addition, it is possible to appropriately notify the player whether or not the mode has shifted to the “renso mode”.

  In this control example, the identification information (lucky number) is used for notification of jackpot, notification of “preparation mode”, and notification of transition to “long-run mode”. The advantageous state to be done is not limited to this. For example, only a part of the three advantageous states may be notified using the lucky number, or another advantageous state may be notified in addition to the three states. Moreover, it is good also as what alert | reports the advantageous state different from said three states. In addition, as another advantageous state, for example, a lucky number may be used in order to notify whether or not it is a jackpot type in which a lot of prize balls are easily acquired in the jackpot opening period. In addition, for example, a lucky number may be used to inform whether the special symbol is likely to change in an advantageous state.

  In this control example, the rotating member 640 and the back LED 625 having different time required for one cycle of operation (one rotation operation) are configured to rotate at the same rotation speed, and a part of the rotation operation ( Each time the lighting state of each lighting region becomes a predetermined amount of rotation so that the correspondence between the pocket type and the lighting region arranged on the back side of each pocket is fixed However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arbitrary configuration as long as it is a plurality of movable objects that operate at different operation cycles. it can. For example, instead of the back LED 625, a rotating body that can be rotated at the same cycle as that of the back LED 625 is provided on the back side of the rotating member 640, and the movable body is movable at equal intervals with the pocket of the rotating member 640 with respect to the rotating body. It is good also as a structure which provides. As the movable object of the rotating body, for example, a movable object that is variable between an immersion position on the back side of the front view and a protruding position on the front side of the front view may be provided. A passing hole is provided for each pocket so that it can pass when the movable object changes to the protruding position, and the pocket in which the movable object protrudes to the near side through the passage hole is hit by the pocket. It is good also as a structure shown as. In this case, control is performed so that the correspondence between the movable object that can be changed to the protruding position and the contact pocket is fixed in a section that the player can visually recognize (see, for example, the first section S1, FIG. 54). The movable object arranged in an arrangement that is difficult (impossible) to be visually recognized by the person may be corrected according to the pocket type of the pocket arranged in the section that can be visually recognized by the subsequent rotation operation. As a result, the correspondence relationship between the rotating member 640 and the rotating body can be made constant irrespective of the amount of operation of the rotating operation in the section visible to the player.

  In this control example, one of the actors (the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625) that rotate with each other (that is, the rear LED 625) is operated (lighted state) every time a predetermined condition is satisfied (the amount of rotation of the rear LED 625). However, the present invention is not limited to the rotation operation. In a plurality of actors that operate in a section that is visible to the player and a section that is invisible (difficult) to the player, some of the functions of other actors may be moved to other parts that are invisible (difficult) The present idea can be applied as long as the correction is made in accordance with the movement of the object. For example, in two types of actors that reciprocate by a horizontal movement between a section that is visible to the player and a section that is difficult to visually recognize, the actions of the actors arranged in the difficult-to-view section are matched with the actions of other actors. By correcting, it may be controlled so that the correspondence between the two types of bonuses in the section visible to the player matches.

  In this control example, in the rotating member 640 that performs the rotation operation and the backside LED 625, the lighting area that shines the hitting pocket of 1 is changed according to the timing (the amount of rotation of the backside LED 625), so that the hitting pocket is always lit. Although it is configured to keep the appearance, it is not necessarily limited to the accessory that rotates. You may apply this idea with respect to the display apparatus which can change display content, and the backlight which illuminates a part or all of the display apparatus from the back side. Specifically, for example, a roulette image that is rotating with respect to the display device is displayed, and a backlight disposed on the back side of the display area in which the image of the hit pocket is displayed, It is good also as a structure set to the lighting state brighter than the display area displayed. And it is good also as a structure which switches the lighting position of a backlight dynamically according to the operation | movement of the image of a hit pocket. By configuring in this way, the hit pocket can always have a bright appearance, so that it can be more easily recognized whether or not it is a hit pocket.

  In this control example, when five types of identification information (lucky numbers) are displayed one by one on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the rendering unit 331, the jackpot is notified and the rendering unit 422a However, the “preparation mode” is notified when the remaining lucky number is displayed, but the information used for the notification is not limited to the lucky number. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of conditions (so-called missions) for transitioning to an advantageous state are notified to the player, and a jackpot is notified when some of the notified conditions are achieved. . Moreover, it is good also as a structure which transfers to "preparation mode" by achieving one part or all part of the remaining conditions which are not achieved during jackpot. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports transfer to "renso mode" by achieving a part or all of unachieved conditions in "preparation mode". The conditions for shifting to an advantageous state include, for example, “to generate an effect that a specific character appears”, “to generate an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22”, and “hold” “Accumulating one or more balls”. These conditions may be displayed in place of the lucky number in the third symbol display device 81, for example. Moreover, when displaying each condition, what is necessary is just to display in the aspect (for example, drawing a double line with respect to the achieved condition etc.) which can recognize easily whether each condition was achieved. In this way, by achieving a plurality of conditions, it is structured to step up to a more advantageous state, and pay more attention to whether or not each condition is achieved. Can be done. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. A part or all of the achieved condition may be returned to the unachieved state under the specific condition. The specific condition is, for example, when a special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) since the previous condition was achieved, or when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the previous condition was achieved, etc. It is. Further, the conditions may be configured so that the player can select them, or may be configured to be selected automatically (for example, randomly when the power is turned on).

  In this control example, when the ball passes the sensor member 422c provided in the second passage forming member 422, the winning ball is discharged to the first variable winning device 82a (the first passage forming member 520 is changed). It was determined that it passed. Then, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected until the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 82a matches the number of discharges from the second passage forming member 422. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is only necessary to prevent the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 during the passage of the ball through the first passage forming member 520. It is good also as a structure which restrict | limits that connection is cancelled | released for predetermined time (for example, 1.5 second) after detection. The 1.5 seconds is a value obtained by adding a margin to the time required for the ball to pass through the first passage forming member 520, and the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a is given a margin. It is time when it can be made to flow down to the 2nd channel formation member 422. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released while the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520. Generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction which the sphere currently passing through the 1st channel | path formation member 520 will be inject | emitted from the opening part of the 1st channel | path formation member 520, and will enter into the back side etc. of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  In this control example, the lighting area on the back side of the winning pocket is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, and the back side of the detached pocket is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%. It is not a thing and a lighting rate can be defined arbitrarily. For example, you may set the lighting rate of the lighting area | region arrange | positioned at the back side of a detached pocket to 10%. Thereby, it is possible to make the numbers attached to the pockets easier to visually recognize while having a darker appearance than the hit pocket. Further, for example, the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket may be set to 80%. By reducing the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket, the power consumption of the LED can be reduced.

  In the present control example, only two types of hitting pockets and disconnecting pockets are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a pocket type, there may be a pocket type that may or may not be hit (for example, the hit expectation is 50%). As a result, even if the ball B falls due to the roulette chance production, if it falls into a pocket with an expectation of 50%, it will not be determined whether or not to shift to the “renso mode”. Can last longer.

  In this control example, only two types of lighting states, namely, a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% and a lighting state with a lighting rate of 0% are set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and variations may be increased. For example, a lighting area arranged on the back side of a part of the hitting pocket is set to a lighting rate of 100% and a lighting frequency of 320 Hz, and a lighting area arranged on the back side of the hitting pocket different from the part of the hitting pocket. May be lit at a lighting rate of 80%. To select different lighting rates, for example, the back side of the hit pocket, which is a pocket that is adjacent to both sides, is turned on at a lighting rate of 100%, and the location where the hit pockets are continuous has a relatively dark lighting rate of 80%. It may be set. When the hit pockets are continuous, it looks brighter than when both sides are separated (lighting rate 0%), so that even if the lighting rate is reduced to 80%, it can be made sufficiently bright. Thereby, the power consumption of LED can be reduced, without changing an appearance greatly. Further, for example, a lighting region arranged on the back side of each winning pocket may be turned on at a lighting rate of 50% and a frequency of 12 Hz, and the ON period may be reversed between the nearest winning pockets. By reducing the frequency to 12 Hz, the player can perceive the on-period and off-period, and by reversing the on-period (lighting phase), each winning pocket can be made more conspicuous.

  In addition, when giving a variation in the lighting state of the lighting area | region of the back side of a contact pocket, it is good also as a structure which outputs a lighting control command at a different timing for every lighting state. As described above, in this control example, the lighting control command is output to the LED driver by the serial transfer method. For this reason, it takes time from the start of output of data (lighting control command) to the end compared to the parallel transfer method. More specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 234, in order to notify the LED driver of a command for notifying one lighting state, a plurality of data such as lighting area data and lighting rate data are used. Must be output in order (see FIG. 234). Further, in order to check whether each output data is normally received by the LED driver, every time 8 bits of data are output, a signal indicating that 8 bits of data has been received is received from the LED driver. It is configured to wait until. Therefore, when the lighting control command for notifying the setting of some lighting areas is output, and then the lighting control command for notifying the setting of other lighting areas is output, a configuration corresponding to a plurality of lighting states is output. It takes a longer time to finish outputting all the lighting control commands to the LED driver. For this reason, there is a possibility that the process cannot be shifted to another process for a relatively long time. On the other hand, it is good also as a structure which outputs a lighting control command at the timing which changes for every lighting state (for example, one lighting state for every loop of one main process (refer FIG. 145)). With this configuration, the process for setting the lighting control command can be distributed over a loop of a plurality of main processes (see FIG. 145). Therefore, since the processing time for one time for outputting the lighting control command can be shortened, other processing can be executed normally. Moreover, since the lighting control command generated per loop of the main process can be reduced, the processing load when generating the lighting control command can be reduced. In addition, as a method of distributing the setting timing of the lighting control command to a loop of a plurality of main processes, for example, the lighting position storage area 223m of the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is updated and the corresponding lighting control command is set. (See S2907 and S2916 in FIG. 158), only a lighting control command corresponding to one lighting state is output, and a flag (lighting unset flag) indicating that another lighting state that has not been set exists. Set it to ON. Then, in the next loop of the main process (see FIG. 145), or when the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed after the execution command is received next, the lighting unset flag may be on. For example, a lighting control command corresponding to an unset one lighting state may be output.

  In this control example, every time the back LED 625 makes one third round in the “renso mode suggestion effect”, the lighting state of the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA is corrected to match the arrangement of the hit pocket. However, it is not always necessary to perform correction for each LED bar. The correction section RA can be arbitrarily determined within a range that is not visible (difficult) to the player. For example, it is good also as a structure which correct | amends the lighting area | region arrange | positioned in the symmetrical position of a fall position one by one, and correct | amends the lighting state of nine lighting area | regions arrange | positioned in the upper half each time the back surface LED 625 makes a half circle. It is good also as a structure.

  In this control example, every time one of the LED bars is arranged in the correction section RA in the “ream mode suggestion effect”, the arrangement of the hit pocket is read from the hit position storage area 223k and switched to the corresponding lighting state. Although it was configured, it is not limited to this. A data table (lighting control scenario) that defines combinations of hit pockets and timed changes in the lighting state of each lighting region in each combination may be previously defined in the ROM 222. That is, the correspondence between the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the lower half of the back LED 625 visible to the player and the pocket arranged in front of each lighting area is rotated according to the combination of the hitting pockets. What is necessary is just to prescribe | regulate the time-dependent change of a lighting state to ROM222 so that it may not change irrespective of the progress of operation | movement. In this case, in order to make the arrangement of the rotating member 640 at the start of the lighting control the same as the arrangement of the lighting areas A1 to A18, during the ending of the “renso mode suggestion effect” or to “preparation mode” Rotating member 640 and rear LED 625 are rotated until a predetermined arrangement (for example, an arrangement in which pocket P1 is in the drop position and rear LED 625 is in the origin position) during a jackpot game before the transition is made. You may let them. And the lighting control scenario may prescribe | regulate the time change of a lighting state from the predetermined specific arrangement | positioning as a starting point. By configuring in this way, during the execution of the “ream mode suggestion effect”, the lighting state of each lighting area is simply set according to the lighting control scenario, and any LED bar is arranged in the correction section RA. Determination processing, determination processing of the lighting state of each lighting area included in the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA, and the like can be omitted, so that the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. it can. In addition, instead of prescribing the lighting control scenario in advance, a lighting control scenario is generated from the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and the arrangement of the rear LED 625 at the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect” and stored in the RAM 223. It is good also as a structure to keep. By comprising in this way, a lighting control scenario can be set irrespective of arrangement | positioning of the rotating member 640 or back LED625.

  In this control example, it is determined whether or not the transition from the special symbol lottery result executed in the “preparation mode” to the “renso mode” has been confirmed, and the pocket type (winning pocket or It was configured to identify the detachment pocket. Then, after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the sphere B becomes 1 second or less, when the pocket type that can first drop the sphere B is arranged at the drop position, the sphere B is dropped into the pocket. However, the pocket to be dropped is not limited to this. For example, when the ball B is dropped with respect to the detachment pocket (the transition to the “long-run mode” has not been determined), the sphere B may be controlled to fall into the detachment pocket adjacent to the hit pocket. Good. Thereby, even in the case of detachment, it can be expected that the ball B will fall into the hit pocket until just before it falls. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the player's roulette chance production. Similarly, when dropping into the hit pocket, it may be controlled to drop into the hit pocket adjacent to the release pocket. As a result, even when the ball is dropped into the hit pocket, it can be difficult to determine which pocket type the ball B falls into, so that the roulette chance effect can be enjoyed to the end.

  In this control example, due to the game being stopped in the “preparation mode”, for example, the production time of the “renso mode suggestion effect” with a fixed (fixed) production time and the time until the “preparation mode” ends. In the case of a shift, it was configured to be able to absorb the shift by varying the ending performance stage time of the “renso mode suggestion effect”, but the gap between the end timing of the “preparation mode” and the effect period has been eliminated. The configuration for doing this is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the player is in a state where the player is not playing a game, the “ream mode suggestion effect” may be interrupted until the game is resumed. That is, it is good also as a structure which matches the execution period of "renso mode suggestion effect" with the change time of a special symbol. In this case, whether or not the game is stopped may be determined based on, for example, whether or not the handle 51 is operated, or a predetermined time (for example, 10) after entering the second entrance 640a. The determination may be made based on whether or not a second or more has elapsed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect time of the “renso mode suggestion effect” from deviating from the time until the “preparation mode” ends. Also, in order to match the time until the “preparation mode” ends with the performance time of the “renso mode suggestion effect” (to reduce the deviation), the first special symbol after the transition to the “preparation mode” It is good also as a structure which waits for the start of "renso mode suggestion effect" until the fluctuation | variation of this is performed. With this configuration, even when the number of reserved balls has shifted to “preparation mode”, the start timing of “preparation mode suggestion effect” and the first special symbol lottery in “preparation mode” Therefore, the time until the “preparation mode” is completed and the production time of the “renso mode suggestion production” can be matched (shift is reduced).

  In this control example, when the number of hit pockets is increased in the increase production, the number of consecutive hit pockets is limited to a predetermined number (five consecutive) or less, but the number of consecutive pockets is limited to the hit pocket. Is not something The number of consecutive detachment pockets may be limited to a predetermined number (5 consecutive) or less. That is, in the increase effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the winning pockets are preferentially arranged for sections where the detaching pockets are six or more continuous. With this configuration, when the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket in the “roulette chance effect”, the ball B is dropped when the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second). It can suppress that only a pocket passes out of a position and passes. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress an unnatural appearance such as the swinging motion of the sphere B being stopped before the hit pocket is placed at the falling position, it is distrustful to the player. Can be prevented more reliably.

  In this control example, every time an extra effect is executed, one is added to the value of the extra counter 223av. In other words, it was configured to determine the addition of one pocket per addition for each addition production, but the number of pockets to be added in one addition production is not limited to one and is arbitrary. You may decide to the number of. In addition, taking into account the lottery results that are on hold and the five types of winning pockets (lucky numbers) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x, a convenient number for naturally dropping the ball B is set. It is good also as a structure. Specifically, for example, when an addition effect is executed based on the fact that the lottery result corresponding to the probability variation jackpot in the “preparation mode” is put on hold (when the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket), In the case where an extra effect is executed based on the fact that the jackpot to which the seven preparation modes are given has been put on hold (when there is a possibility that the ball B will fall into the hit pocket according to the result of the subsequent lottery), the designated pocket A winning pocket (lucky number) preselected by the player is read from the storage area 223x, and the initial arrangement of the winning pocket and the release pocket is determined. Then, the number of sections in which the number of out-of-pocket pockets is six or more is determined, and at least a numerical value equal to or greater than the number of the sections is added to the counter 223av (adding the number of hit pockets equal to or more than the determined number of sections) It is good. Then, when determining the position of the added winning pocket in the “preparation mode”, the winning pocket may be preferentially arranged in a section where there are six or more disengaged pockets. By configuring in this way, the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the sphere B becomes a predetermined period (1 second) or less, and when the sphere B is dropped into the hit pocket, it comes off at the dropping position and the pocket continues. It can prevent (suppress) that the situation where the ball | bowl B cannot be dropped by being arrange | positioned will generate | occur | produce. That is, the swing operation of the ball B after the condition for dropping the ball B is established and before the pocket of the type corresponding to the effect result of the roulette chance effect (the hit pocket) is arranged at the drop position. Can be prevented (suppressed) from being stopped, and the ball B can be reliably dropped into a target type pocket (a hit pocket) while the ball B is swinging. Therefore, the sphere B can be dropped with a more natural appearance. In addition, for example, when it is determined that the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket, when there is a possibility that the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket, and when the ball B is dropped into the off pocket The number of additional selected items may be different depending on the case where the number is selected. That is, when it is determined that the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket, it is configured so that a larger number of added balls can be easily selected, and it is determined that the ball B is dropped into the off pocket. In such a case, it may be configured such that a small number of additional items is easily selected. By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the “renso mode” can be suggested to the player by the notified number of additions.

  In this control example, when the ball B is performing a swing motion on the upper portion of the holding piece 677, the swing motion amplitude is determined from the time interval at which the passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679. Is set to permit the fall (the ball drop possible flag 223fv is set to ON), but different control may be executed based on the detection result of the ball detection sensor 679. For example, it is good also as a structure which changes the aspect of a music according to the space | interval by which the passage of the sphere B is detected by the sphere detection sensor 679. More specifically, for example, when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650, the drum roll sound (music) is set to flow, and the cycle (amplitude) of the swing operation of the ball B becomes smaller. Alternatively, the music may be controlled so that the drum roll tempo becomes faster. Thereby, it can be made to feel that the fall timing of the ball | bowl B is approaching, so that the tempo of a music becomes quick, and a player's expectation can be improved according to the tempo of a music.

  In this control example, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, the arrangement of the LED bars coincides with the correction section RA regardless of the arrangement of each lighting area (whether or not the player is visually recognizable). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lighting area arranged in a position where the player is difficult to visually recognize (for example, the correction section RA) may be set to a light-off state with a lighting rate of 0%. If any LED bar arrangement matches the correction section RA, a new (correction) lighting state set for each lighting area constituting the LED bar (without reflecting immediately). ) It is memorized, and the new lighting state memorized for the lighting area that has passed through the correction section RA (moved to an arrangement that can be visually recognized by the player) is sequentially reflected. Also good. By configuring in this way, correction is performed while maintaining the correspondence between the type of pocket (placement pocket or removal pocket) arranged at a position where the player can visually recognize and the lighting area arranged on the back side thereof. All the lighting areas arranged in the section RA (a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize) can be set to a light-off state with a lighting rate of 0%. Therefore, the power consumption consumed by the back LED 625 during the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be reduced.

  In this control example, when it is determined in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) that the ball is to be dropped into the next pocket after the pocket currently placed at the drop position, the rotating member 640 is independent of the arrangement of the sphere B. Although the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersing position after the rotation operation of 100 steps (approximately 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed in the dropping position), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the holding piece 677 may be immersed in the immersing position at a timing when the ball B reaches the center portion of the holding piece 677 in the swinging operation. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation is determined every time the sphere B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the determination is made. The cycle of the swing operation is configured to be stored (updated) in the RAM 223. When the value reaches 100 steps, the value of the swing timer 223w (the elapsed time since the passage of the sphere B was detected by the previous sphere detection sensor 679) is referred to, and the timer value stored in the RAM 223 is the latest. When it is determined that the value is close to the period of the swinging motion (for example, a value of 90% or more of the period of the latest swinging motion), the holding piece 677 may be controlled to be immersed as it is. On the other hand, if the timer value is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the period of the most recent swing operation) with respect to the cycle of the most recent swing operation, the holding piece waits until the predetermined ratio is reached. You may control so that 677 may be immersed in an immersion position. With this configuration, when the ball B is rolling toward the outside direction (left end or right end direction) of the holding piece 677, or arranged near the end (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677. In this case, the holding piece 677 can be prevented (suppressed) from immersing into the immersive position. That is, when the holding piece 677 is immersed, the sphere B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without proceeding in the other direction. Therefore, since the time from when the holding piece 677 is immersed into the immersive position until the ball B starts to fall can be shortened, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

  In this control example, when the ball B is swinging, it is determined that the ball B can be dropped with respect to the pocket arranged at the drop position next to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position. In this case, the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersing position after the rotation operation for 100 steps is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Randomly every time within a range (for example, within a range after 100 steps to 120 steps) in which the sphere B can be reliably dropped into a pocket placed next to the fall position after the pocket placed at the current fall position. It may be configured to drop. More specifically, in the process of S1806 of the drop control process (see FIG. 147), instead of setting the fall after 100 steps, a process of randomly selecting the number of steps in the range of 100 steps to 120 steps, It is only necessary to execute a process for setting the holding piece 677 to be immersed in the immersion position after the selected number of steps has elapsed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the timing at which the ball B falls. Therefore, compared with the case where the sphere B is dropped at the same timing every time, the sphere B can be dropped with a more natural appearance (appearance as if the sphere B is falling by the action of only gravity).

  In this control example, the type of the pocket placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position is determined, and if it is determined that the ball B can be dropped, the next drop Although it is set as the structure which controls so that the ball | bowl B may be dropped with respect to the pocket arrange | positioned to a position, it is not necessarily required to be dropped to the pocket arrange | positioned to a fall position next. For example, each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position, in addition to determining the type of pocket that is placed at the drop position next to that pocket, the type of pocket that is currently located at the drop position is also determined. More as a configuration to do. When it is determined that both the pocket currently arranged at the dropping position and the pocket arranged at the next dropping position are pocket types capable of dropping the ball B, the pocket is placed at the dropping position. You may set fall control (immersion operation of the holding piece 677) at the timing which may fall to the arranged pocket. More specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the timing of the drop control is determined randomly in a range after 5 steps to 120 steps. The range after 5 steps to 99 steps is a timing at which the ball B may fall into the pocket currently located at the drop position. After 100 steps to 120 steps, the next drop position This is the timing when the sphere B falls in the pocket arranged in the. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the ball B falls can be made more random, so that it is difficult for the player to hold the suspicion that the ball B is intentionally dropped into a predetermined pocket. Can do. Therefore, the interest with respect to a player's roulette chance production can be further improved. Further, for example, it may be configured to discriminate between the pocket type of the pocket placed next at the drop position and the pocket type of the pocket placed next at the drop position. If it is determined that the two types of pockets are both pockets capable of dropping the ball B, the drop control (holding piece 677 is set at random) within a range in which the two types of pockets can be dropped. You may set the timing. Alternatively, the type of the pocket at the drop position, the type of the pocket to be placed at the next drop position, and the type of the pocket to be placed at the next drop position may be determined. Then, the pocket arranged next at the dropping position is a type capable of dropping the ball B, and any pocket adjacent to the pocket arranged next at the dropping position is a type capable of dropping the ball B. In such a case, it is also possible to randomly set the fall control of the ball B (the holding piece 677 is immersed) within a range in which the ball B can drop into any of a plurality of adjacent pockets that can drop the ball B. Good. Even when configured in this manner, the sphere B can be dropped with a more natural appearance as described above. Therefore, the interest with respect to a player's roulette chance production can be further improved.

  In this control example, the type of the pocket placed at the fall position next to the pocket currently placed at the fall position is discriminated to determine whether or not the ball B can be dropped. It is not necessary to determine the type of the next pocket each time the is placed at the drop position. Any configuration that can set the fall control of the sphere B before the pocket of the type that can drop the sphere B is arranged at the drop position, for example, one of the pockets that can drop the sphere B is possible. You may comprise so that identification is possible whether it is the pocket arrange | positioned in the near side. That is, for each of the pockets P1 to P30, a flag may be provided in the RAM 223 to indicate whether the pocket is one immediately before the pocket where the ball B is dropped. Then, at the stage where the type for dropping the ball B is determined in the roulette chance effect, the flag corresponding to the pocket arranged immediately before the type of pocket capable of dropping the ball B is set to ON, and the other pockets The flag corresponding to is set to off. After that, after the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the sphere B becomes equal to or less than the predetermined cycle (1 second), each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position, a flag corresponding to the pocket at the drop position is set. It may be determined whether or not it is set to ON, and in the case of being ON, for example, the drop control after 100 steps may be set. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to determine the pocket type of the pocket to be placed next at the dropping position, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the ball B can be dropped, and it is only determined whether or not the flag is on. Since it can be determined whether or not the sphere B is dropped simply by doing, the processing load required to determine whether or not the sphere B can be dropped can be reduced.

  In this control example, in the rotational position determination table 222c of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F and the pocket arranged at the drop position when the output is combined. Stipulated the correspondence relationship. Further, the order in which the pockets provided in the rotating member 640 are arranged is also defined. And although it was set as the structure which specifies arrangement | positioning of the present rotating member 640 from the pocket of the fall position specified from the combination of the output of each detection sensor AF, and the order that a pocket is arrange | positioned, The method for specifying the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the combination of outputs from the detection sensors A to F and the arrangement of pockets starting from the drop position in the case of the combination may be defined for the rotational position determination table 222c. Then, a storage area for storing the current arrangement of pockets starting from the drop position may be provided in the RAM 223. Each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position (ie, the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all shifted from the L state to the output of any of the detection sensors to the H state), the detection sensor A configuration may be adopted in which the current pocket arrangement starting from the drop position corresponding to the output combination is read from the ROM 222 and stored in the RAM 223. Thus, in order to determine whether or not the ball B can be dropped by configuring the RAM 223 to store the current arrangement of pockets starting from the drop position, the drop is performed. In the control process (see FIG. 147), when a pocket placed at the drop position next to the pocket placed at the drop position is specified, it is only necessary to read the pocket from the predetermined storage area of the RAM 223 (that is, drop). It is not necessary to perform a two-step process of specifying the position arrangement and specifying the pocket next to the drop position), and the process can be simplified. The same applies to the case of changing the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the back LED 625. It is only necessary to read the pocket from the determined storage area of the RAM 223 and determine the type of each read pocket. It can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 194. In the first control example described above, in the roulette chance effect, when the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677, the ball B passes the center of the holding piece 677 (the front side of the ball detection sensor 679). From this interval, the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B is determined. When the determined period is a predetermined period (that is, 1 second) or less, the ball B is allowed to fall. Thereby, the sphere B can be dropped into any of the pockets after the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation is sufficiently narrow. Thereby, it can be made to look like having fallen naturally compared with dropping the ball B in the state where the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is large, such as immediately after the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural with respect to the falling position of the ball B and having doubts about the roulette chance effect result, so that the roulette chance effect can be more enjoyed.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, instead of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, a holding piece 6770 that can be driven to tilt in the left-right direction is provided. Then, the inclination of the holding piece 6770 is made variable in accordance with the arrangement of the spheres B in the upper part of the holding piece 6770. This inclination is configured such that as the sphere B is moved away from the center of the holding piece 6770 by the swinging operation, the inclination in the downward direction toward the center of the holding piece 6770 increases. Thereby, the inclination of the holding piece 6770 while the ball B is performing the swinging operation is always in a direction in which the ball B flows down toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 due to the excessive momentum of the swinging motion performed by the ball B. It can be securely held at the top and dropped into any pocket.

  In the first control example described above, the rotation member 640 is disposed (pocket disposed at the drop position) by a combination of outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F of the rotation position detection sensor 684. Was configured to identify. Thereby, when the lighting control of the back LED 625 is performed, only the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket set as the hit pocket according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately set to the lighting state. The player was able to easily recognize the hit pocket from the appearance. Also, when the ball B is dropped, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the lottery result of the special symbol executed in the “preparation mode” (that is, whether or not the mode shifts to the “ream mode”) Accordingly, it was configured to be able to be dropped into an appropriate type of pocket.

  In addition to this, in the second control example, after it is detected that the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are displaced (the output of at least one of the detection sensors is H), the detection sensors are performed over a plurality of operation steps. The outputs of A to F are monitored, and the present arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket arranged at the dropping position) is determined based on the detection results over the plurality of operation steps. With such a configuration, the output of one of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, or the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is moved to the detected position due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even when the arrangement timing is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that a holding piece 6770 is provided in place of the holding piece 677 and the sound lamp control device 113 is different. The configuration of the provided ROM 222 and RAM 223 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. . Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the structure of the holding piece 6770 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 (a) and (b). As described above, the holding piece 6770 is provided in place of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, and temporarily swings the ball B before dropping the ball B into any pocket. Used for.

  FIG. 179 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 6700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the holding piece retracting mechanism 6700 in this control example includes a holding piece 6770, a shaft support portion 6740 connected to the back side of the holding piece 6770, and an inclination provided on the shaft support portion. Gears 6730a and 6730b, a drive gear 6730c meshed with the tilting gear 6730a, a tilting motor 6750a for applying driving force to the drive gear 6730c, and a gearing 6730b. The drive gear 6730d and a retracting motor 6750b for applying a driving force to the drive gear 6730d. It should be noted that the configuration provided on the back side of the holding piece 6770 (the shaft support portion 6740, the tilting gear 6730, etc.) is provided on the back side of the front case 672 and cannot be viewed by the player. It is comprised so that it may become.

  Similarly to the holding piece 677 in the first control example, the holding piece 6770 is configured to hold the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 on the upper part thereof. This holding piece 6770 drives the in / out motor 6750b in the forward direction (clockwise direction) to drive the in / out gear 6730b meshed with the driving gear 6730d into the back side as viewed from the front. As a result, the holding position is changed to the separation position. On the other hand, by driving the in / out motor 6750b in the negative direction (counterclockwise direction), a driving force for pulling the in / out gear 6730b meshed with the drive gear 6730d toward the front side of the front view is given. As a result, the position is changed from the separated position to the holding position.

  Further, the holding piece 6770 in this control example can be tilted by driving the tilting motor 6750a. Specifically, by driving the tilting motor 6750a in the forward direction (clockwise direction), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the forward direction, and the tilting gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c is counterclockwise. Driven. Thereby, the rotational force of the tilting gear 6730a is transmitted to the holding piece 6770 via the shaft support 6740, and the holding piece 6770 rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is inclined in a direction downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction.

  On the other hand, by driving the tilting motor 6750a in the negative direction (counterclockwise direction), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the negative direction, and the tilting gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c is driven clockwise. . Thereby, the rotational force of the tilting gear 6730a is transmitted to the holding piece 6770 via the shaft support portion 6740, and the holding piece 6770 rotates clockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is inclined in a direction downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction.

  Next, a state where the holding piece 6770 is inclined will be described with reference to FIG. 179 (b). FIG. 179 (b) is a front view when the holding piece 6770 is inclined in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 179 (b), the holding piece 6770 can be tilted (rotated) to the left and right around the shaft support portion 6740. When it is detected that the sphere B swings to the right, the holding piece 6770 is rotated counterclockwise by the tilting motor 6750a to form a tilt in the downward direction from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front. (Refer to the solid line in FIG. 179 (b)). As a result, the momentum of movement of the sphere B in the right direction when viewed from the front is offset by the inclination formed by the holding piece 6770. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the sphere B from being ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770. In this control example, the inclination angle when the holding piece 6770 is inclined can be set in increments of 1 degree. Moreover, the maximum value of the inclination angle is 6 degrees in the left-right direction. This 6 degrees is an angle at which the player cannot perceive the inclination (becomes difficult) even if the holding piece 6770 is inclined. By setting the tilt angle to an angle that the player cannot perceive, it is possible to make the ball B feel as if it is swinging naturally.

  Further, when it is detected that the ball B swings to the left, the holding piece 6770 is rotated clockwise by the tilting motor 6750a, and the tilt is directed downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. (See the dotted line portion in FIG. 179 (b)). As a result, the momentum that the ball B moves to the left in the front view by the swinging operation is offset by the inclination formed by the holding piece 6770, and the ball B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770 ( Can be reliably prevented.

  As described above, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in the present control example is provided with two types of drive motors (the tilting motor 6750a and the retracting motor 6750b), and protrudes and sinks between the holding position and the separation position. In addition to the operation, it is configured to be capable of tilting in the left-right direction. This prevents the ball B from being ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770 when the ball B swings at the upper part of the holding piece 6770 because the momentum of the swinging operation is too strong. )can do. Therefore, the ball B can be reliably dropped into any of the pockets in the swing effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 180, a configuration for specifying the arrangement of the sphere B that performs the swinging motion on the holding piece 6770 will be described. FIG. 180 is a front view of the holding piece 6770. As shown in FIG. 180, on the back side of the sphere B that swings on the holding piece 6770, instead of the sphere detection sensor 679 provided in the front case 672 in the first control example, the sphere detection sensors 6790a to 6790a. 6790i is provided. These sphere detection sensors 6790a to 6790i have the same function as the sphere detection sensor 679 in the first control example, respectively, and detect that the sphere B is disposed (passed) in front of the front view. When the output is H and the front side is not blocked by the sphere B, the output is L. These sphere detection sensors 6790a to 6790i are arranged inside an opening 6780 provided in the front case 672 in the second control example.

  Specifically, the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i are arranged such that a ball detection sensor (swing center sensor) 6790e is provided above the center position of the holding piece 6770. Further, when the holding piece 6770 is equally divided into eight sections (first section to eighth section) in the horizontal direction, a sphere detection sensor (first section sensor) 6790a to sphere detection above the center position of each section. A sensor (fourth section sensor) 6790d, a ball detection sensor (fifth section sensor) 6790f to a ball detection sensor (eight section sensor) 6790i are provided. That is, the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790d and 6790f to 6790i are arranged at equal intervals from the left to the right in the front view in this order. In this control example, when the sphere B is swinging, the arrangement of the sphere B in the upper part of the holding piece 6770 can be specified based on the output information of each sensor. For example, if the sphere detection sensor 6790g is on, it indicates that the sphere B is disposed (passing) in the sixth section. For example, if the sphere detection sensor 6790b is on, it means that the sphere B is disposed in the second section (passing).

  In this control example, it is determined in which section the sphere B is arranged (passing) from the detection results of the respective sphere detection sensors 6790a to 6790i, and the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is varied according to the section. It is configured. That is, as the position of the sphere B moves away from the center of the holding piece 677, the inclination angle toward the center of the holding piece 6770 is increased, and the maximum inclination angle when reaching the first section and the eighth section ( That is, it is configured to be 6 degrees). Thereby, as the sphere B is further away from the center of the holding piece 6770, the force (gravity) in the direction of returning the sphere B to the center direction becomes stronger, and therefore the sphere B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770. Can be prevented. Therefore, the ball B can be reliably dropped into any of the pockets in the swing effect.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 183. First, with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 181 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG.

  The ROM 222 in this control example is different in that an amplitude determination table 222e and a swing angle determination table 222f are provided in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The amplitude discriminating table 222e corresponds to the output of the sphere B according to the outputs of the sphere detection sensor (first section sensor) 6790a to sphere detection sensor (eight section sensor) 6790i and the sphere detection sensor (swing center sensor) 6790e. 3 is a data table used for specifying the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the. The amplitude discrimination table 222e is referred to when the output of any sensor is switched from L to H during the swinging motion of the sphere B, and the amplitude of the swinging motion of the sphere B is determined. In this control example, based on the amplitude specified using the amplitude determination table 222e, it is determined whether or not the amplitude (cycle) of the swinging motion of the sphere B has become sufficiently short, and the drop condition is satisfied (ie, , The ball drop possible flag 223fv is set to ON). The amplitude referred to here is based on the width of the section (see FIG. 180). That is, the value indicates how many sections the sphere B is swinging. For example, when the amplitude is “4”, it indicates that the sphere B is swinging at an amplitude of four sections from the center of the holding piece 6770 to the left and right. In this control example, when the amplitude becomes “1” (that is, one section on the left and right), the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S5511 in FIG. 187).

  Details of the amplitude determination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 181 (b), the amplitude discrimination table 222e includes the type of the sphere detection sensor in which the previous output was detected as H and the sphere detection sensor in which the current output was detected as H. The amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B is defined in association with the combination with the type. More specifically, for the combination of the sensor type for which the previous H output was detected being the first section sensor 6790a and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time being the second section sensor 6790b, the amplitude is “4”. Is defined. This combination of sensor types is such that the ball B reaches the first section by rolling to the left in the swinging motion, and reaches the second section by rolling to the left after changing direction. Means that Therefore, since the ball B swings with an amplitude of four sections from the center of the holding piece 6770, “4” is set as the amplitude.

  For the combination of the sensor type for which the H output was detected last time being the second section sensor 6790b and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time being the third section sensor 6790c, “3” is defined as the amplitude. ing. This combination of sensor types is read out because the ball B rolls to the left in the swinging motion, reaches the second section, changes direction, and rolls to the left. This is a case where the third section is reached. Therefore, since the ball B swings with an amplitude of three sections from the center of the holding piece 6770, “3” is set as the amplitude. In addition, when the direction is changed in the first section and passes through the second section and the third section (when the amplitude is determined to be “4”), the amplitude is not overwritten. That is, in this control example, once the amplitude of the swing motion is determined based on the amplitude determination table 222e, the amplitude is not overwritten until the ball B is detected by the swing center sensor 6790e. . Thereby, the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B can be determined more accurately.

  Similarly, for the combination in which the sensor type in which the previous H output was detected is the third section sensor 6790c and the sensor type in which the H output was detected this time is the fourth section sensor 6790d, “2” is set as the amplitude. The combination of the specified sensor type for which the previous H output was detected is the fourth section sensor 6790d, the sensor type for which the current H output was detected is the swing center sensor 6790e, and the sensor type for which the previous H output was detected. For the combination of the sensor for the fifth section 6790f and the sensor type for which the H output is detected this time is the swing center sensor 6790e, “1” is defined as the amplitude. In addition, “2” is defined as the amplitude for the combination in which the sensor type for which the previous H output was detected is the sixth section sensor 6790g and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the fifth section sensor 6790f. For the combination of the sensor type for which the previous H output was detected as the sensor for the seventh section 6790h and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time as the sensor for the sixth section 6790g, “3” is defined as the amplitude. For the combination of the sensor type for which the previous H output was detected as the sensor for the eighth section 6790i and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time as the sensor for the seventh section 6790h, “4” is defined as the amplitude. .

  As described above, in this control example, the sphere detection sensors 6790a to 6790i are configured to be able to determine the amplitude according to the order in which the sphere detection sensors 6790a to 6790i are in the H output state. As a result, the amplitude of the sphere B can be accurately determined, so that the sphere B is dropped into any of the pockets at a more natural timing (after the swing operation amplitude becomes “1”). Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 181 (a), the description will be continued. The swing angle determination table 222f is a data table used for setting an inclination angle set with respect to the holding piece 6770 from the arrangement of the spheres B on the holding piece 6770. Details of the swing angle determination table 222f will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the swing angle determination table 222f. As shown in FIG. 182, the swing angle determination table 222f is referred to when the output of any of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i is in the H state, and detects the swing operation amplitude and the current H. The inclination angle (swing angle) set for the holding piece 6770 is defined in association with the type of sensor (current type).

  More specifically, 6 degrees is defined as the tilt angle (swing angle) set for the holding piece 6770 for the combination of the amplitude “4” and the current type sensor 1790a for the first section. For this reason, when the sphere B is swinging with an amplitude of four sections, if the sphere B is detected by the first section sensor 6790a, the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is set to an upper limit of 6 degrees. Is set. As a result, the holding piece 6770 tilts by 6 degrees in the downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. Can be rolled in the center direction.

  Similarly, for the combination of the amplitude “4” and the current type being the second section sensor 6790b, the inclination angle (swing angle) is 4 degrees, the amplitude is “4”, and the current type is the third section. For the combination of sensor 6790c, the inclination angle (oscillation angle) is defined as 2 degrees, the amplitude is “4”, and the current type is the sensor for 6th section 6790g as the inclination angle (oscillation angle) − Two degrees are specified. Further, for the combination of the amplitude “4” and the current type being the seventh section sensor 6790h, the inclination angle (swing angle) is defined as −4 degrees, the amplitude is “4”, and the current type is the eighth section. For the combination of sensor 6790i, −6 degrees is defined as the tilt angle (swing angle). Note that the negative angle means an angle at which the holding piece 6770 is inclined in a direction inclined from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front.

  Further, for the combination of the amplitude “3” and the current type being the second section sensor 6790b, an inclination angle (swing angle) of 5 degrees is defined, the amplitude is “3”, and the current type is the third section sensor. For the combination of 6790c, 3 degrees is defined as the tilt angle (swing angle), the amplitude is “3”, and the current type is the sensor for 6th section 6790 g, the tilt angle (swing angle) is −3. Degree is defined, the amplitude is “4”, and the current type is the seventh section sensor 6790h, the inclination angle (swing angle) is defined as −5 degrees.

  Further, for the combination of the amplitude “2” and the current type being the third section sensor 6790c, an inclination angle (swing angle) of 4 degrees is defined, the amplitude is “2”, and the current type is the sixth section sensor. For the combination of 6790 g, −4 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle).

  Thus, by adopting a configuration in which the inclination angle (oscillation angle) is varied in accordance with the arrangement of the sphere B and the amplitude of the oscillating motion of the sphere B, the sphere B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770. Can be prevented from popping out. The reason why the inclination angle is increased as the amplitude of the swinging operation is decreased is to prevent (suppress) the stop immediately when the amplitude is decreased. When the period from when it is determined that the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied and the swinging operation of the ball B stops immediately is short, the pocket where the ball B can be dropped becomes the drop position. There is a risk that the swinging motion of the ball B will stop before being placed on the player, and the player may feel distrust. On the other hand, in this control example, since the inclination angle (swing angle) increases as the amplitude decreases, the swinging operation can be continued longer. Therefore, the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket while the swinging operation is being performed (before the swinging operation is stopped).

  In this control example, the type of the sensor that detects the sphere B and the swing angle are defined for each amplitude, but only the sensor type and the tilt angle (swing angle) regardless of the swing operation amplitude. May be defined. Specifically, for example, the correspondence in the case of the amplitude “4” in the present control example may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the swing operation. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the swing angle determination table 222f while preventing the sphere B from being ejected outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In this control example, the upper limit value of the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees. Further, the correspondence relationship between the sensor type and the swing angle can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the sphere B does not eject outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 183, in the RAM 223 in this control example, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above, the amplitude counter 223iv, the previous type storage area 223jv, the current type storage area 223kv, and the location specification are being performed. A flag 223mv, an arrangement specified flag 223nv, a detection value storage area 223ov, and an amplitude determination flag 223pv are provided.

  The amplitude counter 223 iv is a counter that indicates the amplitude of the swing operation, and stores the amplitude (any one of values 1 to 4) read from the amplitude determination table 222 e. The amplitude counter 223 iv is overwritten on the read amplitude every time a different amplitude is read in the amplitude determination process (see FIG. 187) (S 5509 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, when it is determined that the amplitude of the swing motion has become 1, the value is initialized to 0 after the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S5512 in FIG. 187). The amplitude counter 223 iv determines whether or not the drop condition of the sphere B is satisfied and the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770.

  Each of the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv is a storage area for storing information indicating the sensor type (any one of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i). The previous type storage area 223jv stores the type of the sensor in which the previous passage of the sphere B was detected (previous type), and the current type storage area 223kv stores the type of the sensor in which the passage of the current sphere B was detected (current time). Type) is stored. Based on the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv, the amplitude of the swing motion performed by the sphere B is determined. This time, the type storage area 223 kv is the state of the sensor that is in the H output state when it is detected that any sensor is in the H output state in the swing effect processing 2 (see FIG. 185). The type is stored (see S1722, S1727 in FIG. 185). In addition, the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv is transferred to the previous type storage area 223jv until a sensor having a new output H is detected (see S1726 in FIG. 185).

  The arrangement specifying flag 223mv is a flag indicating whether the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is being specified. If this arrangement specifying flag 223mv is on, it means that the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is being specified, and if it is off, it means that the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is not being specified. This arrangement specifying flag 223mv is set to ON when the output of any of the rotational position detection sensors 684 is L and the output of any sensor is H (see S5903 in FIG. 193). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when the identification of the rotational position of the rotating member 640 is completed from the detection results over a plurality of steps (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194).

  The placement specified flag 223nv is a flag indicating whether or not the placement of the rotating member 640 has been specified. If this arrangement specified flag 223nv is on, it indicates that the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 has been specified, and if it is off, it means that the specifying of the rotating member 640 has not been completed. This arrangement specified flag 223nv is set to ON when the specification of the rotational position of the rotating member 640 is completed based on the detection result of the rotational position detection sensor 684 over a plurality of steps (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194). ). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when it is detected that all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 have been switched to L after the specification of the arrangement of the rotation member 640 is completed ( (See S5906 in FIG. 193).

  The detection value storage area 223ov is a storage area in which the detection values of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 can be stored for a plurality of steps (15 steps). When the above-described arrangement specifying flag 223mj is set to ON, the detection values of the detection sensors A to F are stored in the detection value storage area 223ov every time the rotating member 640 rotates by one step. If the stored values are normal when the detected values for 15 steps are stored, the rotational position member 640 is specified based on the stored values (S5807 in FIG. 192, FIG. 194). (See S6007).

  The amplitude determination flag 223pv is a flag that indicates whether or not the amplitude is determined based on the amplitude determination table 222e when the ball B is swinging in the upper portion of the holding piece 6770. If the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is on, it means that the amplitude has been discriminated (the sphere B is rolling toward the center of the movable piece 6770), and if it is off, the amplitude has been discriminated. (The sphere B is rolling in a direction away from the center of the movable piece 6770). This amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is set to ON when the amplitude is determined from the detection result of the sphere detection sensor when the sphere B is performing the swinging motion (see S5506 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, each time the passage of the sphere B is detected by the swing center sensor 6790e, it is set to OFF.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 194. First, with reference to FIG. 184, the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. The main process 2 (see FIG. 184) is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 145) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

  Of the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) in the second control example, the processes of S1601 to S1610 and S1612 to S1621 are S1601 to S1610 and S1612 of the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as that in S1621 is executed. In the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) in the second control example, when the process of S1610 is completed, the swing effect process 2 (S1631) is executed instead of the swing effect process (S1611) in the first control example. Is done. This swing effect process 2 (S1631) is similar to the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) in the first control example, and when the “ream mode suggestion effect” is being executed, the ball B is throwing device 650. Is a process for executing various controls from when the ball is thrown by the ball until the ball B falls into any of the pockets (during the swing effect). Details of the swing effect processing 2 (S1631) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) in this control example, after the effect setting process (S1613) is completed, the rotation setting process 2 (S1632) and the lighting setting process 2 (S1633) are executed, and the process is performed in S1614. Migrate to The rotation setting process 2 (S1632) is a predetermined value during the rotation of the rotating member 640, similar to the rotation setting process (see FIG. 155) executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 155) in the first control example. This is a process for changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 under the conditions. Further, the lighting setting process 2 (S1633) is a process for performing the lighting control of the rear LED 625, similarly to the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) in the first control example.

  Next, the above-described swing effect process 2 (S1631) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Of the swing effect process 2 (S1631) in the second control example, the processes of S1701, S1702, S1704, and S1705 are S1701, S1702, and the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) in the first control example. The same processes as those in S1704 and S1705 are executed.

  In the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in the second control example, if it is determined in the process of S1701 that the swing undetected flag 223v is on (S1701: Yes), the ball detection sensor 6890a. ˜6890i (see FIG. 180) is judged whether all outputs are in the L state (S1721). If all the outputs are L (S1721: Yes), the ball B is thrown, but the holding piece 6770 This means that this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1721, when it is determined that any of the outputs of the sphere detection sensors 6890a to 6890i is in the H state (S1721: No), the detection sensor type in which the output is in the H state is then set. Corresponding information is stored in the current type storage area 223kv (S1722). Next, 4 which is the maximum value is stored in the amplitude counter 223iv, and the amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON (S1723). This is because immediately after the ball B is thrown, the momentum of the ball B is the strongest, so the amplitude should be maximum. After the process of S1723, the process proceeds to S1704.

  Further, in the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in this control example, when it is determined in the process of S1705 that the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S1705: Yes), the drop control in the first control example. Instead of the process (see FIG. 147), the drop control process 2 is executed (S1724), and this process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 186, this drop control process 2 (S1724) is similar to the drop control process in the first control example (see FIG. 147). It is a process for dropping.

  In the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in this control example, when it is determined in the process of S1705 that the ball drop possible flag 223fv is off (S1705: No), the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i ( 180) (see FIG. 180), it is determined whether all the outputs are in the L state (S1725). If all the outputs are L (S1725: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1725 that the output of any sensor is in the H state (S1725: No), the information stored in the current type storage area 223kv is transferred to the previous type storage area 223jv. In step S1726, the current type storage area 223kv is overwritten with information corresponding to the type of the sensor whose output is detected to be H in the current step S1725 (S1727). As a result, the type of the sensor that detected the output of H this time is stored in the current type storage area 223kv, and the type of the sensor that detected the output of H in the previous processing of S1722 or S1727 is stored in the previous type storage area 223jv. I can keep it.

  After the processing of S1727, the amplitude of the swing motion performed by the ball B is determined based on the stored contents of the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv updated in each processing of S1726 and S1727. Amplitude discrimination processing is performed (S1728). Details of the amplitude discrimination processing (S1728) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the amplitude discriminating process (S1728) ends, the swing angle control process for setting the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 according to the arrangement of the sphere B is executed (S1729), and this process ends. . The swing angle control process (S1729) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the details of the above-described drop control process 2 (S1724) will be described. This drop control process 2 (S1724) is a process executed in place of the drop control process in the first control example (see FIG. 147) in order to drop the ball B into any of the pockets as described above. is there.

  Of the drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186) in the second control example, each process in S1803 to S1806 is the same as each process in S1803 to S1806 in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example. Processing is executed. Further, when the drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186) in this control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S1811). As described above, the arrangement specified flag 223nv is a flag indicating whether the specification of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 has been completed. When it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is not on (that is, off) (S1811: No), is the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 unknown and can the ball B be dropped? This means that it is in a state where determination of whether or not can not be made, and thus this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1811 that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S1811: Yes), then the pocket at the drop position is read from the rotation position storage area 223u, and the current arrangement of the rotation members 640 is determined. Is identified (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1803.

  With this drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186), the ball B is dropped into a pocket of an appropriate type according to whether or not the transition to the “long villa mode” has been confirmed, as in the first control example. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player whether or not to shift to the “renso mode”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, details of the amplitude determination processing (S1728) will be described. This amplitude determination process (S1728) is one process in the swing effect process (see FIG. 185), and is a process for determining the amplitude of the swing motion performed by the sphere B as described above. In this amplitude determination process (see FIG. 187), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the swing center sensor (sphere detection sensor) 6790e is in the H state (S5501), and if the output is in the H state (S5501). (S5501: Yes), it means that the ball B has reached the upper center of the holding piece 6770 by the swinging operation, so the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is set to ON (S5502), and this process is terminated. Thereby, when the ball B passes through the upper center of the holding piece 6770 and rolls to the opposite side, the amplitude can be determined. Therefore, each time the ball B rolls (swings) to the upper right side or the left side of the holding piece 6770, the amplitude of the swinging operation can be determined, so that the amplitude can be determined more accurately.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5501 that the output of the swing center sensor (sphere detection sensor) 6790e is not H (that is, the output is L) (S5501: No), then the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is turned on. Is determined (S5503). If the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is on (S5503: Yes), it means that the amplitude of the swinging motion has already been determined and is being rolled toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5503 that the amplitude determination flag 223pv is off (S5503: No), the amplitude determination table 222e (see FIG. 181 (b)) is read to determine the amplitude (S5504). ).

  Then, the sensor type stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv is compared with the specified contents of the read amplitude discrimination table 222e, and the combination in which the sensor type is specified in the amplitude discrimination table 222e. Is determined (S5505). In the process of S5505, when it is determined that a combination not defined in the amplitude determination table 222e is stored (S5505: No), it is determined that the sphere B has not reached the left end or the right end of the swing operation. This means that the amplitude cannot be determined from the combination of the current sensor type (the combination of the sensor type stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv). Return to effect processing 2 (see FIG. 185).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5505 that the combination of sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv is defined in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5505: Yes), the amplitude is determined. The flag 223pv is set to ON (S5506), and the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is read (S5507). Next, it is determined whether or not the read value of the amplitude counter 223iv matches the amplitude corresponding to the combination of sensors defined in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5508).

  In the process of S5508, when it is determined that the amplitudes match (S5508: Yes), it means that the amplitude of the swinging operation has not changed, so that the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is not updated and remains as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is different from the amplitude corresponding to the combination of sensors defined in the amplitude determination table 222e in the process of S5508 (S5508: No), the amplitude determination table 222e The read amplitude value is updated by overwriting the amplitude counter 223iv (S5509), and it is determined whether or not the updated amplitude counter 223iv is 1 (S5510). If the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is 1 (S5510), the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B is sufficiently small (the condition for dropping the sphere B into one of the pockets is satisfied). This means that the ball drop possible flag 223fv is set to ON (S5511), the amplitude counter 223iv is initialized to 0, and the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is set to OFF (S5512), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5510, when it is determined that the value of the updated amplitude counter 223iv is not 1 (S5510: No), the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B is relatively large, and the sphere B is dropped. This process may be terminated as it may cause an unnatural appearance.

  By performing this amplitude determination process (see FIG. 187), the amplitude of the swinging operation can be accurately determined based on the outputs of the plurality of ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i provided in the front case 661. Therefore, since the sphere B can be dropped after the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B becomes sufficiently small, the sphere B can be dropped from the holding piece 6770 with a natural appearance.

  Next, details of the swing angle control process (S1729) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This swing angle control process (S1729) is one process in the swing effect process (see FIG. 185). As described above, the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 according to the arrangement of the sphere B. Is a process for setting.

  When the swing angle control process (see FIG. 188) is executed, first, the value of the amplitude counter 223iv and the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv are read (S5601), and further the swing angle determination table. 222f (see FIG. 182) is read (S5602). Next, it is determined whether or not the combination of the value of the amplitude counter 223iv read out in the process of S5601 and the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv is defined in the swing angle determination table 222f ( (S5603), if it is determined that the combination is not defined in the swing angle determination table 222f (S5603), it means that it is not necessary to change the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770. Then, this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, when it is determined that the combination read in the process of S5601 is defined in the swing angle determination table 222f (S5603: Yes), the swing angle is associated with the combination. The tilt angle (swing angle) defined in the discrimination table 222f is set to the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 (S5604), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this swing angle control process (see FIG. 188), the tilt angle (swing angle) can be varied according to the arrangement of the sphere B and the amplitude of the swing motion of the sphere B (sphere B). ), The greater the distance from the center of the holding piece 6770, the greater the inclination toward the center of the holding piece 6770), so that the sphere B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770. It can suppress more reliably. Further, as described above, the swing angle determination table 222f is configured such that the tilt angle increases as the swing operation amplitude decreases, so that the swing operation immediately occurs when the amplitude decreases. Can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, since the swinging operation can be continued for a longer time, the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket while the swinging operation is being performed (before the swinging operation is stopped). .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the rotation setting process 2 (S1632) will be described. This rotation setting process 2 is one of the main processes 2 (see FIG. 184). As described above, the rotation setting process 2 is for changing the rotation speed of the rotation member 640 under a predetermined condition while the rotation member 640 is rotating. It is processing. Of the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) in the second control example, in the processes of S2801 and S2805 to S2808, S2801 and S2805 to S2808 of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed.

  Further, in the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) in this control example, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the ball drop possible flag 223fv is turned on (S2801: Yes), the arrangement specified flag 223nv is turned on. It is determined whether or not (S2811). If it is determined that the placement specified flag 223nv is not on (that is, it is off) (S2811: No), the current placement is unknown, and the pocket where the ball B can be dropped is in the vicinity of the drop position. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not they are arranged, this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process 2 (see FIG. 184).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2811 that the placement specified flag 223nv is on (S2811: Yes), information corresponding to the pocket placed at the drop position is read from the rotational position storage area 223u ( S2812), the process proceeds to S2805.

  By executing the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189), the positional relationship between the current drop position and the nearest pocket where the ball B can be dropped is grasped, and the rotation speed of the rotary member 640 is determined. It can be varied according to the relationship. As a result, it is possible to prevent the swinging operation from being continued for a long time after the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging operation performed by the sphere B is small. The sphere B can be dropped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 190, execution command processing 2 (S2121) executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 150) instead of the execution command processing in the first control example (see S2113, FIG. 155) will be described. To do. This execution command process 2 (see FIG. 190) is a role driven by the motor driver in accordance with the execution commands output from various motor drivers, similarly to the execution command process (see FIG. 155) in the first control example. This is a process for determining the progress of the movement of the object and performing control according to the progress.

  Of the execution command process 2 (see FIG. 190) in the second control example, the processes of S2601 to S2608 and S2611 to S2614 are S2601 to S2608 of the execution command process (see FIG. 155) in the first control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S2611-S2614 is performed. Further, in the execution command process 2 (see FIG. 190) in this control example, when the process of S2608 ends, the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are monitored over a plurality of steps (15 steps). (Sampling), an arrangement specifying process for specifying a pocket arranged at the dropping position is executed (S2621), and this process ends. Details of the arrangement specifying process (S2621) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the above-described arrangement specifying process (S2621). When this arrangement specifying process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the swing effect flag 223ev is on (S5701). If it is determined that it is off (S5701: No), the ball B swings. Before the operation is performed, an in-rotation specifying process for specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is executed (S5702), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5701 that the swing effect flag 223ev is on (S5701: Yes), the swing specifying process for specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 during the swing effect is performed. This is executed (S5703), and this process is terminated. The details of the specifying process during rotation (S5702) and the specifying process during swinging (S5703) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 to 194.

  First, with reference to FIG. 192, details of the identifying process during rotation (S5702) will be described. When the rotation specifying process (see FIG. 192) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the arrangement specifying flag 223mv is on (S5801), and it is determined that it is not on (that is, off). In this case (S5801: No), whether or not the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 has been displaced (the output of any of the detection sensors A to F has been switched from the L state to the H state). When the output is displaced, a non-specific time process for starting the specification of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is executed (S5802), and this process ends. Details of this non-specific processing (S5802) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5801 that the arrangement identifying flag 223mv is on (S5801: Yes), the combination of the detection values (outputs) of the detection sensors A to F is stored in each storage area of the detection value storage area 223ov. Among them, the data is stored in an empty area where no data is stored (S5803). Then, it is determined whether or not 15 combinations of outputs of the detection sensors A to F are stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S5804), and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached (S5804). : No), it means that the number of detections necessary for determining the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is not reached, so this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5804, when it is determined that the upper limit number (15 sets) of combinations of detection values is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S5804: Yes), it is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov. It is determined whether or not all combinations of detected values are the same (S5805). If it is determined that different combinations of detected values are stored in the detected value storage area 223ov (S5805: No), all the data stored in the detected value storage area 223ov is reset (S5806). This process is terminated. By resetting all the data, the combination of detection values can be stored again in the detection value storage area 223ov for each operation step until the upper limit (15 sets) is reached.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5805, when it is determined that the combination of all the detection values stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is the same (S5805: Yes), the rotational position determination table 222c is read and the detection sensors A to F are read out. A pocket defined in association with the combination of detected values is identified (S5807), and information corresponding to the identified pocket is stored in the rotational position storage area 223u (S5808). Then, the arrangement specifying flag 223mv is set to OFF, and the arrangement specifying flag 223nv is set to ON (S5809), and this process ends.

  By executing this specific processing during rotation (see FIG. 192), the output (detection value) combinations of the detection sensors A to F are monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps, and the detection result is changed. The pocket corresponding to the detection result can be specified after determining whether or not there is any. Therefore, the timing at which the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is arranged at the detected position due to the displacement of the output of any detection sensor due to noise or the like, or the rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even if it is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

  In this control example, if at least one of the combinations of detected values for 15 steps is different, the detected value is stored regardless of the timing at which the combination is stored and the number of times the different combinations are stored. Although the area 223ov is configured to be reset, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, out of the combinations stored in the detection value storage area 223ov, only the storage area where the different combinations are stored is cleared, and additional detection values are acquired and cleared for the number of times the different combinations are stored. It may be stored to determine whether all combinations match. This eliminates the need to acquire additional detection value combinations for 15 steps each time a combination of different detection values is included, thereby reducing the time required to specify the pocket at the drop position. it can.

  Next, details of the non-specific processing (S5802) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing this non-specific processing (S5802). In the non-specific processing (S5802), as described above, the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 is displaced (the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all in the L state, and the output of any one of the sensors is in the H state). This is processing for determining whether or not the rotation member 640 is arranged when the output is displaced.

  When the non-specific processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S5901). If it is off (S5901: No), the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are output. Whether all are L or not is discriminated (S5902). If it is determined in the process of S5902 that the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S5902: Yes), it means that no pocket is arranged at the drop position, and the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is detected. Since this cannot be done, this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5902, when it is determined that any of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S5902: No), this is because one of the pockets is arranged at the drop position. This means that the sensor output has been displaced. Therefore, in this case, in order to monitor the outputs of the detection sensors A to F over a plurality of operation steps in the rotation operation, the arrangement specifying flag 223mv is set to ON (S5903) and the rotation position is stored. The information stored in the area 223u and corresponding to the pocket placed at the previous drop position is cleared and reset (S5904), and this process is terminated. By turning on the arrangement specifying flag 223mv, in the subsequent rotation specifying process (see FIG. 192), in the process of S5801, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored over a plurality of steps. Each process of S5803 to S5809 can be executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S5901 that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S5901: Yes), then whether or not the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are all L. If it is determined that the outputs of all the sensors are L (S5905: Yes), the arrangement specified flag 223nv is set to OFF (S5906), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the output of at least one of the detection sensors A to F is H (S5905: No), this process is terminated as it is. By executing the processes of S5905 and S5906, the period during which the placement specified flag 223nv is turned on may be limited to only while the detected part 641c passes the positions of the detection sensors A to F. it can. That is, the period in which the arrangement of the rotating member 640 stored in the rotation position storage area 223u is referred to can be limited to the period during which the detected portion 641c passes the position of each of the detection sensors A to F. Therefore, the detected part 641c passes through the positions of the detection sensors A to F, and suppresses problems such as the drop of the sphere B being set, for example, in a state where two pockets are straddling the drop position. be able to.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 194, details of the swinging specific process (S5704) will be described. This identification process during swinging (S5704) is one process in the layout identification process (see FIG. 191), and as described above, is a process for identifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 during the execution of the swing effect. is there.

  When the swinging specific process (see FIG. 194) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the placement specific flag 223mv is on (S6001), and it is determined that it is not on (that is, off). If it is found (S6001: No), the above non-specific processing is executed (S6002), and this processing is terminated. This non-specific time process (S6002) is the same as the non-specific time process (S5802, see FIG. 193), which is one of the rotating specific processes (see FIG. 192). The explanation is omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6001, when it is determined that the arrangement specifying flag 223mv is on (S6001: Yes), the combination of the detection values (outputs) of the detection sensors A to F is stored in each storage area of the detection value storage area 223ov. Among them, the data is stored (stored) in an empty area where no data is stored (S6003). Then, it is determined whether or not 15 combinations of outputs of the detection sensors A to F are stored (stored) in the detected value storage area 223ov (S6004), and it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached. (S6004: No) means that the number of detections necessary for determining the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is not reached, and thus this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6004, when it is determined that the upper limit number (15 sets) of combinations of detection values is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S6004: Yes), it is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov. Of the 15 detection value combinations, it is determined whether 80% (2) or more have the same detection result (S6005). If it is determined that the combination of the same detection results is less than 80% (S6005: No), all the data stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is reset (S6006), and this process ends. To do. By resetting all the data, the combination of detection values can be stored again in the detection value storage area 223ov for each operation step until the upper limit (15 sets) is reached.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6005, when it is determined that 80% or more of the combinations of detected values among the 15 sets of detected values stored in the detected value storage area 223ov are the same (S6005: Yes), the rotational position The discrimination table 222c is read, a pocket defined in association with the combination of detection values of the detection sensors A to F is specified (S6007), and information corresponding to the specified pocket is stored in the rotational position storage area 223u ( (S6008). Then, the arrangement specifying flag 223mv is set to OFF, and the arrangement specifying flag 223nv is set to ON (S6009), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this specific processing during swinging (see FIG. 194), the combinations of outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F are monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps, and 80% or more. The pockets corresponding to the detection results that coincide with each other can be specified. That is, compared with the specifying process during rotation (see FIG. 192), the condition for specifying the pocket is made easier, so that the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket at the dropping position) can be specified earlier. Note that the specific processing during swing (see FIG. 194) is executed only during the execution of the swing effect. As described above, the swing effect is an effect in which the sphere B is finally dropped into one of the pockets. For this reason, if it takes time to specify the arrangement of the rotating member 640, the timing at which the ball B is dropped may be delayed, and the ball B may not be dropped into the target pocket. On the other hand, in the present control example, the determination process during swing (refer to FIG. 194) is executed while the determination condition is unsatisfactory (that is, the time until the arrangement is specified is relatively short). It is configured to do. Thereby, since arrangement | positioning of the rotating member 640 can be specified more rapidly, the ball | bowl B can be more reliably dropped to the pocket of the target classification.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the holding piece 6770 that can change the inclination angle is provided, and the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is variable according to the arrangement of the spheres B in the upper part of the holding piece 6770. The configuration is to let Here, when the ball B is swung, if the arrangement of the holding pieces 6770 is fixed, if the moment when the ball B is thrown is too strong (the initial speed is too fast), the ball B There is a risk of passing through the upper surface of 6770 and entering an unexpected position such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, as a method of swinging the upper portion of the holding piece 6770 regardless of the momentum of the ball B, a method of increasing the width of the holding piece 6770 or abruptly inclining from both sides of the holding piece 6770 toward the center. However, if the width of the holding piece 6770 is widened, it is necessary to secure a space for that, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design is reduced. In addition, when the inclination toward the center of the holding piece 6770 is made steep, the amplitude (cycle) of the swinging operation tends to be small, so that the time for the ball B to perform the swinging operation is shortened, and the ball B is dropped. There is a possibility that the sphere B may stop before it is made. In other words, there is a possibility that the ball B will not be dropped into the pocket even though the ball B is stationary, resulting in a very unnatural appearance.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is configured to be variable. Then, the inclination angle is controlled so that the inclination of the ball B toward the upper center of the holding piece 6770 increases as the sphere B moves away from the upper center of the holding piece 6770 by the swinging operation. Thereby, the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 while the ball B is performing the swinging operation can be set to the direction in which the ball B always flows down toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 due to the excessive momentum of the swinging motion performed by the ball B. It can be securely held at the top and dropped into any pocket. Further, by changing the inclination angle (swing angle) to hold the sphere B on the upper portion of the holding piece 6770, the holding piece 6770 can be prevented from being enlarged, so that the space can be saved. be able to. Therefore, the design freedom of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Further, in the second control example, the inclination angle (swing angle) becomes smaller as the ball B approaches the upper center of the holding piece 6770, so that the momentum of the swinging operation is reduced. It can be made difficult. Therefore, since the swinging operation can be continued for a longer time, the ball B can be reliably dropped into any of the pockets before the swinging operation of the ball B is stopped.

  In the second control example, when the outputs of the detection sensors A to F for detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 are displaced (the output of at least one detection sensor becomes H), a plurality of operation steps are performed. The outputs of the detection sensors A to F are monitored (sampled) over a period of time, and the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket arranged at the drop position) is determined based on the detection results over the plurality of operation steps. It is configured. With such a configuration, the output of one of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, or the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is moved to the detected position due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even when the arrangement timing is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

  In this control example, two types of specifying methods are provided as the specifying method of the rotational position of the rotating member 640. As a first method, a combination of outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over an operation step for a predetermined step (15 steps), and all detections for the predetermined step (15 steps) are performed. When the combination of values is the same, a method for specifying a pocket corresponding to the detection result is set. In this method, when the combination of at least one detection result is different from the combination of other detection results, the combination of detection results for a predetermined step is acquired again, and all the combinations of detection results match. The pocket type is specified only when it is done. According to this first method, the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is detected at the detected position due to the displacement of the output of any detection sensor due to noise or the like, or the rattling of the rotating member 640. Even in the case where the timing at which the rotation member is arranged is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

  On the other hand, as a second method, the combinations of outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F are monitored (sampled) over a predetermined step (15 steps) of operation steps, and the predetermined steps (15 steps). When combinations of detection values equal to or greater than 80% (ie, 12 steps) are the same among the combinations of detection values, a method is set for identifying a pocket corresponding to a combination of detection results that occupy 80% of the combinations. ing. Compared to the first method, this second method has a configuration that allows a maximum of 20% of the displacement of the detection result, which is inferior in terms of accuracy, but because the number of re-detections is small, until the pocket is specified Can be shortened. This second method is employed when the sphere B is dropped into the pocket. In order to determine whether or not to drop the sphere B, when specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640, if it takes time until the arrangement is specified, the timing of dropping the sphere B is also delayed. There is a possibility that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket. On the other hand, in the present control example, the determination process during swing (refer to FIG. 194) is executed while the determination condition is unsatisfactory (that is, the time until the arrangement is specified is relatively short). It is configured to do. Thereby, since arrangement | positioning of the rotating member 640 can be specified more rapidly, the ball | bowl B can be more reliably dropped to the pocket of the target classification.

  In the second control example, in the first method and the second method, the detection result of the rotational position detection sensor 684 for 15 steps is monitored (sampled), and based on the detection result for 15 steps. Thus, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified or the redetection is determined, but the number of monitoring (sampling) steps is not limited to 15 steps. What is necessary is just to determine arbitrarily according to the step number etc. which can detect the to-be-detected part 641c.

  In the second control example, it is determined which of the eight sections (first section to eighth section) the ball B is passing in the swing effect, and the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is determined. Although it was made variable, it is not restricted to this. While increasing the number of sections, the number of sphere detection sensors may be increased, or the number of sphere detection sensors may be decreased while decreasing the section. When the number of sections is increased, the arrangement of the spheres B can be specified more accurately, so that the angle of the holding piece 6770 can be set more finely. On the other hand, when the number of sections is reduced, the number of sensors can be reduced, so that the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. Moreover, the failure rate can be reduced.

  In this control example, in the swing angle discrimination table 222f (see FIG. 182), the type of sensor that detects the sphere B and the swing angle are defined for each swing motion amplitude of the sphere B. Regardless of the amplitude of the dynamic motion, only the sensor type and the tilt angle (swing angle) may be defined. Specifically, for example, the correspondence relationship in the case of the amplitude “4” in the present control example (see amplitude “4” in FIG. 182) may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the swing operation. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the swing angle determination table 222f while preventing the sphere B from being ejected outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In this control example, the upper limit value of the inclination angle (swinging angle) of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees. However, the player can arbitrarily set the range in which it is difficult to perceive that the inclination of the holding piece 6770 has been changed. It may be determined. Further, the correspondence relationship between the sensor type and the swing angle can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the sphere B does not eject outside the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In the second control example, when the rotating member 640 is rotating and any one of the pockets is arranged at the falling position before the ball B is thrown, the detection sensors A to 15 are processed for 15 steps. If the output of F is monitored and at least one of the combinations of the outputs for 15 steps is different, the detection value storage area regardless of the timing at which the combination is stored and the number of times the different combinations are stored. The configuration is such that 223 ov is reset (that is, monitoring of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is additionally performed for 15 steps), but is not limited thereto. For example, out of the combinations stored in the detection value storage area 223ov, only the storage area where the different combinations are stored is cleared, and additional detection values are acquired and cleared for the number of times the different combinations are stored. It may be stored to determine whether all combinations match. This eliminates the need to acquire additional detection value combinations for 15 steps each time a combination of different detection values is included, thereby reducing the time required to specify the pocket at the drop position. it can.

  In this second control example, when any of the pockets of the rotating member 640 is placed at the drop position, the output combinations of the detection sensors A to F are monitored for 15 steps, and all the combinations match. Is determined to identify the pocket at the drop position when it is determined that 80% of the 15 steps match (the second method). The number of steps for specifying (arrangement of rotating member 640) is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. By adopting the number of steps smaller than 15 steps (for example, 10 steps), it is possible to specify the pocket at the drop position (arrangement of the rotating member 640) more quickly. Further, by adopting a step number larger than 15 steps (for example, 18 steps), it is possible to specify the pocket at the drop position (arrangement of the rotating member 640) more accurately. Further, the number of steps for specifying the pocket at the fall position (arrangement of the rotating member 640) is not necessarily the same in the first method and the second method, and different steps are adopted. Also good.

  In the second control example, when any of the pockets of the rotating member 640 is placed at the drop position, the combination of outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored for 15 steps, and the detection results for 15 steps are detected. When at least one combination of different detection values is included in the above (the first method described above), or when it is determined that the combination of the detection value combinations is less than 80% during the 15 steps (the second method described above) The detection values for 15 steps are additionally monitored, but it is not always necessary to monitor 15 steps. For example, in the first method, when the detection value changes in the middle of 15 steps, monitoring of the additional 15 steps may be started at that time. For example, in the second method, if it is determined that the matching detection value is less than 80% (12 steps) of 15 steps even if it is less than 15 steps, an additional point is added at that time. You may comprise so that monitoring of 15 steps may be started. By comprising in this way, a pocket can be specified more rapidly.

  In this control example, when it is determined that the output of any of the detection sensors A to F is displaced while the rotary member 640 is rotating (the output of the sensor has changed from the state where all the outputs of the detection sensors are L). In addition, regardless of the type of sensor whose output is displaced, the configuration is such that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored during the rotation of 15 steps from that point. is not. For example, taking into account rattling of the rotating member 640, the detection value of the sensor that is most likely to detect the detected portion 641c among the detection sensors (for example, after reaching the first section S1) A configuration may be adopted in which monitoring of detection values for 15 steps is started when the detection sensor A) disposed at the position where the rotational operation is performed at the shortest distance is displaced. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the possibility that there is a combination of detected values that do not match among the detected values for 15 steps, so it is possible to make it difficult to re-execute monitoring. Therefore, the arrangement of each pocket of the rotating member 640 can be identified earlier.

  In this control example, for the configuration for determining the arrangement from the combination of the outputs of the six detection sensors, the first method (when the outputs for the predetermined steps are all the same, the output determined to be the same) However, the first method can be applied not only to a configuration including six detection sensors. The number of sensors may be large (for example, 10) or small (for example, a single sensor). Further, the first method can be applied to applications other than the use for specifying the arrangement. For example, when it is detected that the output of any of the sphere detection sensors 6790a to 6790i has switched from the L state to the H state, the output of the detection sensor is output a predetermined number of times (for example, over five main processes). It may be configured to monitor and detect that the ball B has passed through the detection sensor if all the outputs are H during a predetermined number of monitoring periods. With this configuration, when the output of the detection sensor instantaneously becomes H regardless of the passage of the sphere B due to the influence of noise or the like, the sphere B passes through the corresponding sensor from the H output. It is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that he / she did. Therefore, when the sphere B is swinging, the arrangement of the sphere B can be determined more accurately.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example described above, it is configured to determine whether or not to increase (add) the winning pocket (lucky number) in a predetermined period after the start of the “normal mode” and the “preparation mode”. . When the addition is determined, the increase pocket executed (added) in the increase effect executed in the “preparation mode” is randomly determined from the out-of-place pockets. As a result, in the “roulette chance effect” to be executed later, it is possible to make the ball B feel as if it is easy to fall into the hit pocket. The expectation for “mode” can be raised.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, when the addition is determined and the winning pocket is determined in the increase effect, a section in which the percentage of the winning pocket is intentionally provided is provided. Thereby, it is possible to allow the player to closely watch the correspondence between the arrangement of the section in which the ratio of the hit pocket is high and the momentum (cycle) of the swinging motion performed by the ball B above the holding piece 677. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the “roulette chance production”.

  Further, in the first control example described above, the control and effect modes in the “normal mode” and the “preparation mode” are mainly described.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, the chance eye continuous effect which is one of the interesting effects executed during the “renso mode” in the third symbol display device 81 will also be described. Although the details will be described later, the chance eye continuous production is a kind of entertainment production for suggesting whether or not it is a big hit in the “renso mode”.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in terms of the configuration is “chance eye continuous effect” which is an effect mode executed in the “renso mode”. Is added, the method of distributing the hit pockets distributed during the “preparation mode” is changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and A part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described above. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example described above, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 195 to 196, the “chance eye continuous effect” executed during the “renso mode” of the third control example will be described. This “chance eye continuous effect” is an effect of notifying that the result of the lottery is a big hit by stopping and displaying the chances a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.2 second intervals).

  Here, as in the first control example described above, the “ream mode” in the third control example is a hit short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) and a hit middle fluctuation (3 seconds) as fluctuation patterns at the time of big hit. Are selected at a ratio of about 1: 1. Further, as a fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation, the deviation short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) and the deviation middle fluctuation (3 seconds) are selected at a ratio of about 4 to 1.

  As a result, in the “renso mode”, a shorter variation time than the variation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the “normal mode” is determined. It can be executed quickly. In addition, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the “renso mode” from becoming monotonous.

  Moreover, in the “renso mode” during the shortage of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is easily opened, and the second entrance 640a is opened. Since it is easy to win, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640a so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”) and passed through the through gate 67. Thus, a game (so-called “right-handed game”) is executed in which the electric accessory 640b is opened and a big win is won by winning the second entrance 640a.

  As with the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example performs the lottery of the special symbol 2 that is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a. Configured not to be held.

  In a conventional gaming machine, in a predetermined gaming state (such as a short time) where the variation time is shorter than in a normal gaming state, the player is notified whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Since it is difficult to execute the effect to be performed in one variation time, an effect using a plurality of variation times is performed based on the winning information stored on hold (so-called “prefetching effect”).

  However, in the third control example, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is not suspended as described above, and the above-described “prefetching effect” cannot be executed. Therefore, the third control example is special for the player without using the “look-ahead effect” in a predetermined gaming state (“renso mode”) in which the variation time is shorter than that in the normal gaming state. As an effect that suggests whether or not the symbol lottery result is a big hit, a “chance eye continuous effect” can be executed.

  FIG. 195 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect mode corresponding to the hit middle fluctuation among the “chance eye continuous effect” executed during the “renso” mode. This middle fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that is selected when the jackpot is won, and includes a fluctuation time of 3 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. An effect mode corresponding to the hit middle fluctuation is selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process with reference to the consecutive middle big hit table 222a3 (see FIG. 198) (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  More specific contents will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 (a) is a timing chart showing a state in which the “third consecutive chance effect” is executed as an example of the effect mode corresponding to the hit middle fluctuation among the “chance eye continuous effect”. When this “three consecutive chance effects” is executed, the chance eyes are stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals within one fluctuation time.

  First, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), when the middle middle fluctuation in which the “third consecutive chance effect production” is set is started (executed), the pseudo fluctuation is first started (executed) (the pseudo fluctuation period is 0.2). Seconds). This pseudo fluctuation is a fluctuation pseudo fluctuation display until the third pattern is pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped) at the chance, and is 0.2 seconds which is the same as the fluctuation time when the short fluctuation is executed. The fluctuation time is set.

  It should be noted that a display mode (non-stop display mode) in which the third symbol is not recognized as being stopped by a specific symbol for the player during the period when the pseudo-variation is performed may be executed. The display mode may be changed so as to be switched, or the display mode may be such that only a specific symbol rotates. Further, the display mode may be such that the symbol itself is moved at a high speed or reduced to a level that is difficult to visually recognize so that the player cannot recognize the symbol that is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, when the pseudo-variation period (0.2 seconds) elapses, the chance (first chance) is stopped and displayed (the chance stop period is 0.5 seconds). This chance stop display is to display the 3rd symbol in a display mode (temporary stop display mode) that allows the player to recognize that the 3rd symbol is stopped at a specific symbol. The same time as the fixed time (0.5 seconds) in the case where is executed is set.

  This temporary stop display mode includes a display mode in which a specific symbol is slightly shaken in addition to the display mode in which the third symbol is completely stopped. By executing the chance stop display in this way, the player can recognize that one change has ended before the change time of the special symbol (three seconds in the case of a middle change) ends. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform an effect that allows the player to recognize that a plurality of variations are being performed while a single variation of the special symbol is being performed.

  As described above, when the middle fluctuation is executed, the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) and the chance stop period (0.5 seconds) become the short fluctuation fluctuation time (period) (0.2 seconds). Since it is set to be executed in the same period as the fixed time (period) (0.5 seconds), the chance eye stop display in the middle fluctuation can be displayed to the player without a sense of incongruity.

  When the chance stop period elapses, the third symbol is pseudo-stopped (the pseudo-stop period is 0.7 seconds). This pseudo stop is a pseudo display of a period until the next change is executed. In the third control example, as described above, the right-handed game is executed during the “renso” mode, so that the ball enters the second entrance 640a after the special symbol stops (start winning) However, there may be a non-game period before the special symbol change is executed again.

  Specifically, in the “renso mode” during the shortage of time, when a ball is passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) fluctuates for 3 seconds (see S620 in FIG. 135). If the lottery result of the symbol is a win (S615 in FIG. 135: Yes), the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is controlled to move twice so that one second is released (FIG. 135). (See S616). Accordingly, there may be a time lag after the special symbol change stops until the electric accessory 640b is opened and the ball enters the second entrance 640a. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example is configured so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a is not suspended. Therefore, there may be a non-game period in which no new special symbol change is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 195 (a), the description will be continued. The period in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped is a period for pseudo-displaying the period corresponding to the above-mentioned non-game period. By providing this pseudo-stop period, short fluctuations are executed a plurality of times. It is possible to execute a variation manner similar to the variation manner of the special symbol with one middle variation.

  Here, the display mode in the case of performing the pseudo stop may be any display mode that allows the player to recognize that it is a non-game period. For example, the display mode of the third symbol during the chance eye stop period A display mode in which the swing width is smaller than the display mode or a display mode in which the background image of the third symbol display device is switched from the background image corresponding to the variation of the special symbol to the background image corresponding to the non-game period may be used.

  In the third control example, the player does not feel uncomfortable as a pseudo-variation effect in which a plurality of variations are performed while one middle variation is being performed. In addition, a pseudo-variation period that is the same time as the fluctuation period of the short fluctuation is set, a chance stop period that is the same time as the symbol determination period of the short fluctuation is set, and a non-game period is displayed in a pseudo manner However, it is not necessary to provide all of these configurations.

  For example, the configuration of the pseudo stop period may be eliminated by extending the chance stop period by a period corresponding to the pseudo stop period and setting the chance stop period to 1.2 seconds. Even if it is such a structure, there exists an effect that a pseudo | simulation variation production can be performed, without giving discomfort to a player.

  The “three consecutive chance effects” shown in FIG. 195 (a) is based on the above-described pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds), chance eye stop period (0.5 seconds), and pseudo stop period (0.7 seconds). The constructed pseudo effect (1.4 seconds) is executed twice, and after the second pseudo effect, the third pseudo variation (0.2 seconds) is executed. The time until the end of the third pseudo variation is executed within the range of the special symbol variation time (3 seconds), and the third chance stop display (0.5 seconds) is displayed for the special symbol confirmation time (0). .5 seconds). Then, the jackpot is started (executed) after the stop display period of the third chance (special symbol confirmation time) has elapsed.

  As described above, the “three consecutive chance effects” shown in FIG. 195 (a) is the timing after 0.2 seconds, 1.6 seconds, and 3 seconds after the change starts, that is, 1.4 seconds. Since the chances are stopped and displayed three times at intervals, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the chances are stopped a plurality of times at predetermined intervals within the single fluctuation time in the “renso” mode. ing. Thereby, even if it does not use a "prefetching production | presentation" with respect to a player, it can be made to recognize that the production is performed over multiple fluctuations.

  In the “third consecutive chance effect” described with reference to FIG. 195 (a), the third chance stop display is executed using the special symbol fixed time (0.5 seconds). For example, the period until the third chance stop display is executed is executed within the range of the special symbol variation time (3 seconds), and the special symbol confirmation time (0.5 seconds) is the hit of the special symbol. A combination of the third symbols corresponding to (for example, a combination of the same number symbols) may be stopped and displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current variation is a hit.

  On the other hand, FIG. 195 (b) is a timing chart showing an example of an effect mode corresponding to a deviation middle fluctuation among “chance eye continuous effects” executed during the “renso” mode. This out-of-bounds middle fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that is selected when the jackpot is not won (it is out of the lottery for special symbols), and consists of a fluctuation time of 3 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. The The effect mode corresponding to the deviation middle fluctuation is selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process with reference to the consecutive middle jackpot table 222a3 (see FIG. 198) (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  More specific contents will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (b). FIG. 195 (b) is a timing chart showing a state in which “two consecutive chance effects for losing” is executed as an example of the effect mode corresponding to the losing middle fluctuation among the “chance eye continuous effects”. When this “2 consecutive chances for off-stage production” is executed, after the chances are stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval within one fluctuation time, the third symbol is finally stopped at the complete departure Is displayed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 195 (b), when an out-of-bounds middle change in which “out-going second consecutive chance effect” is set is started (executed), the “third consecutive chance eye” described above with reference to FIG. 195 (a). Similar to the “production”, the pseudo variation is executed twice. Thereafter, the third pseudo fluctuation is executed (0.2 seconds), and the stop display (0.5 seconds) of the complete deviation is executed using the fixed time of special symbol (0.5 seconds).

  As described above, in the “2 consecutive chance chance effects for losing” shown in FIG. 195 (b), the chance eyes are stopped and displayed at a timing of 1.6 seconds after 0.2 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Therefore, during the “renso mode”, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the chances are stopped a plurality of times at predetermined intervals within the one fluctuation time. Accordingly, there is an effect that the player can be recognized as if the effect is executed across a plurality of variations without using the “prefetching effect”.

  In addition, the first and second chances are stopped and displayed at the same timing (the timing after 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the fluctuation starts) as in the above-mentioned “three consecutive chance effects”. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the jackpot until the current fluctuation is completed (until the complete loss stops).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196 (a), description will be made on the effect mode in the case where the out-of-range short fluctuation and the hit short fluctuation are executed among the “chance eye continuous effects” executed in the “renso mode”. To do. FIG. 196 (a) shows that “chance eye effect” is executed in two consecutive fluctuations as an effect mode corresponding to the out-of-short-circuit fluctuation among “chance eye continuous effects” executed during “renso mode”. It is the figure which showed the timing chart when “chance eye production” is executed as the production mode which corresponds to the hit short fluctuation. This out-of-range short fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot is not won (winning out), and is composed of a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the outbreak short fluctuation is selected with reference to the consecutive outlier table 222a4 (see FIG. 199) in the fluctuation pattern selection process (S6107 in FIG. 206). The winning short fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that is selected when winning the jackpot, and the process of selecting the fluctuation time, the fixed time, and the production mode is the same as the above-described outlier short fluctuation, and therefore the description thereof is omitted. To do.

  More specific contents will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (a). First, as shown in FIG. 196 (a), when an out-of-range short fluctuation in which “chance eye effect” is set is started (executed), the fluctuation is started (executed) (the fluctuation period is 0.2 seconds). When the fluctuation period elapses, the chances indicating that the current fluctuation is not a hit (out of date) are stopped and displayed, and the symbol is confirmed (confirmation period 0.5 seconds).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the third control example has a pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) in which the fluctuation time (0.2 seconds) and the fixed time (0.5 seconds) in the short fluctuation are executed during the middle fluctuation. And the chance stop period (0.5 seconds) are set to have the same timing. Therefore, since it is possible to execute at the same timing as the pseudo effect produced during the middle change and the change effect in the short change, the player feels uncomfortable with the pseudo effect executed during the middle change. There is an effect that it can be eliminated.

  Returning to FIG. 196 (a), the description will be continued. After the chance stop display (first time) is executed, until the next change is started (until a new entry (start winning) occurs at the second entrance 640a), the change in the symbols stops. (Fluctuation suspension period) The background screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in order to make the player recognize that the 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed and the special symbol has not changed during the fluctuation stop period is changed from the changing background screen. The screen is switched to the background screen when the fluctuation is stopped.

  Then, when a new start winning is generated, a short fluctuation for detachment in which “chance eye effect” is set as the next fluctuation is started (executed), and the second chance time is stopped and displayed. About this short-circuit fluctuation for detachment, an effect based on the same effect mode as the first chance display is displayed.

  Next, the winning short fluctuation that is won by the jackpot is executed, the third chance is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot is started (executed) after the chance eye stop period has elapsed.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 198. In the third control example, the chance is won by winning and displaying a third chance stop at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval). Therefore, in the state where the short-circuit fluctuation for detachment with the “chance eye effect” set is executed twice in succession, the “short chance” The “effect” is configured so that it can be set, and the “chance eye effect” is not set when the next fluctuation is out and the short fluctuation occurs.

  By doing in this way, when the short fluctuation continues for a plurality of times, the chances of the plurality of times are stopped and displayed at a predetermined interval across the plurality of fluctuations even though the lottery result is out of place. This can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196 (b), description will be given of an effect mode in the case where the out-of-short-circuit fluctuation is executed three times in the “chance eye continuous effect” executed in “in the consecutive resort mode”. . FIG. 196 (b) shows that “chance eye effect” is executed continuously for two fluctuations as an effect mode corresponding to the outbreak short fluctuation among “chance eye continuous effects” executed during the “renso” mode, and then missed. It is the figure which showed the timing chart in the case where "normal production" is performed as a production mode corresponding to short fluctuation. This out-of-range short fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot is not won (winning out), and is composed of a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the outbreak short fluctuation is selected with reference to the consecutive outlier table 222a4 (see FIG. 199) in the fluctuation pattern selection process (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  First, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), after the outbreak short fluctuation with the “chance eye effect” set is continuously executed, and the outbreak short fluctuation fluctuates again, the effect corresponding to the outbreak short fluctuation As a mode, “chance eye effect” is not selected (see FIG. 199), and “normal effect” is executed as shown in FIG. 196 (b).

  The “normal effect” corresponding to the outlier short fluctuation is an effect mode in which the chance eye is not stopped and displayed, and after the fluctuation display is executed for 0.2 seconds, the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the completely outlier.

  In the third control example, an effect suggesting the result of the lottery (a so-called “chance eye continuous effect”) is executed by an effect mode in which the chances are stopped and displayed at a predetermined interval several times. A mode other than the chance stop display may be used as the mode executed in step (b). For example, the upper elevating unit 300 may be moved at a predetermined interval. Thereby, it becomes possible to suggest the result of the lottery using a configuration other than the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an enhanced effect.

  In the third control example, an interval of 1.4 seconds is provided as the predetermined interval. However, the interval may be shifted within a range that is difficult for the player to recognize, for example, an error range of about 0.2 before and after. The predetermined interval may be included. As a result, in the gaming state in which the winning information of the special symbol 2 is not stored on hold, it is possible to execute the “chance eye continuous effect” even when the variation of the special symbol is not immediately started.

  Furthermore, instead of stopping the chance eye at a predetermined interval, the lottery result may be suggested based on the number of times the chance eye is stopped and displayed within a predetermined period (variation time or number of fluctuations). .

  Next, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 199. FIG. 197 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), in the third control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a are partially changed with respect to each control example described above, and the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. The difference is that an additional area selection table 222g is added.

  Here, the variation pattern selection table 222a of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (b). FIG. 197 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a of the third control example. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the third control example is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and is roughly shown by the variation pattern command. It is a data table used in order to determine more detailed fluctuation | variation content from fluctuation | variation content (variation time).

  The variation pattern selection table 222a includes a normal middle big hit table 222a1, a normal middle drop table 222a2, a consecutive middle big hit table 222a3, and a consecutive big hit table 222a4.

  Based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the normal medium / big hit table 222a1 defines detailed production modes corresponding to variation types with a variation time of 7 seconds and 10 seconds (not shown). ) Here, an effect mode defined in the normal middle jackpot table 222a1 will be described. First, in the normal middle big hit table 222a1, a 7-second stop pattern and a 10-second stop pattern are defined as stop patterns of symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331.

  The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which the symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d are stopped and displayed at regular intervals. The 10-second stop pattern is the last of the display units 331a to 331d. It takes a long time for the symbols corresponding to the lucky number (for example, “2”, “7”, “13”) to be stopped on the display unit 331d after the symbols (for example, “2”, “7”, “13”) are stopped on the display unit other than the display unit 331d to be stopped. Stop pattern to be set.

  In addition, the normal middle / outside table 222a2 is also a detailed effect corresponding to the fluctuation types of the fluctuation time of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, similarly to the normal middle big hit table 222a1. Aspects are defined (not shown).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds are selected as the variation patterns that are selected when a normal big hit is won. The ratio is defined to be about 1: 1 (see FIG. 111 (a)). As a variation pattern that is selected in the case of normal misalignment, a variation pattern with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation time of 10 seconds It is defined that the ratio of the selected variation pattern is about 3 to 1 (FIG. 111 (b)). Therefore, when the 10-second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for jackpot.

  Further, the Renso middle jackpot table 222a3 is a table in which a detailed production mode is defined for the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 during the “renso mode”. The Renso medium jackpot table 222a3 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the Renso medium jackpot table 222a3. In the consecutive-village big hit table 222a3, “hit short fluctuation (0.2 seconds)” and “hit middle fluctuation (3 seconds)” which are fluctuation types indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, Corresponding to the value of the chance count counter 223qv and the value of the effect counter 223rv, the effect modes are “normal jackpot effect”, “one-shot chance chance effect”, “two consecutive chance chance effect”, “three consecutive chances” Four types of effect modes of “eye effect” are defined.

  More specifically, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “Short-short variation”, the value of the chance counter 223qv is “0, 1”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is In the case of “0 to 99”, “normal jackpot effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  The “normal jackpot effect” is, for example, a character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an effect to notify the player that the result of the current lottery is a jackpot within a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds. However, various symbols appearing around it (for example, a symbol with a letter “V” indicating a probable jackpot, a symbol with a 髑髏 mark indicating a normal jackpot (falling to “normal mode”), etc.) An effect of acquiring is executed. In addition, for example, an effect in which a mode (for example, a letter “V”) showing a probability variation jackpot is simultaneously displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the rendering unit 331, or a normal jackpot (falling to “normal mode”). An effect is displayed in which a mode (for example, a） mark) is displayed at the same time.

  Here, after the execution of the “normal jackpot effect” is determined, the character and various symbol designs (symbol design with the letter “V”, symbol design with the 髑髏 mark, etc.) appear, and the character However, if it is configured to execute an effect of acquiring symbol designs, it becomes necessary to execute a series of effects in 0.2 seconds, and the effect time is too short, and the player can fully understand the contents of the effect. There is a risk of disappearing. On the other hand, if it is configured to secure the production time by increasing the ratio of selecting (determining) a long variation time, a special symbol lottery is performed after one special symbol lottery is executed. There is a problem that it takes a long time to complete the game and the game is delayed. Also, the longer the variation time, the higher the possibility of entering the second entrance 640a during the change, but the entry to the second entrance 640a is not put on hold, so in the “renso mode” There is a risk that the more the ball enters the second entrance 640a, the more the ball feels wasted. That is, there is a possibility that the player may be dissatisfied.

  Therefore, in the “renso” mode in this control example, a character is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of whether or not the special symbol is changing. In other words, the character performing the effect of whether or not to acquire the symbol in the variation effect is displayed as a part of the back image. The variation effect is configured to execute a variation effect of an effect mode in which a symbol is acquired using a character previously displayed as a back image. By configuring in this way, the back image before the start of the change effect can be shown as if it is a part of the change effect, so the change time is extremely short (for example, 0.2 seconds). Even when the pattern is determined, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as with characters, images of various symbol designs (symbol designs with the letter “V”, symbol designs with a 髑髏 mark, etc.) appear randomly as part of the back image, The display position is also switched randomly. That is, for example, a symbol design with the letter “V” is framed in from the outside of the screen of the third design display device 81 and approaches the character, stays in the vicinity of the character for a predetermined time, and then moves away from the character. The pattern of the back image of the aspect which goes out of the screen out of the screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the aspect which performs the operation | movement which leaves | separates after the symbol design to which the hail mark was attached | subjected approaching a character similarly. Prepare the pattern of the back image and the pattern of the back image in which both the symbol design with the letter “V” and the symbol design with the 髑髏 mark move away from the character as well. Each of these back images is switched randomly. Then, in the state where any symbol design is close to the character (the distance that the character can naturally acquire the symbol design within a variation time of 0.2 seconds), the variation effect of the lottery result corresponding to the symbol design is started. In this case, the symbol pattern displayed as the back image is configured to set a variation pattern of a mode acquired by the character. By configuring in this way, the effect starts as if the effect has started before the change effect is started (when the corresponding symbol symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a part of the back image). It can be reminiscent. Therefore, even when a variation effect with a short variation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed, the effect can be enhanced. Further, it is possible to execute a natural flow effect as compared to the case where the effect is executed within a short fluctuation time. In this control example, when a game stop state is detected, the demo screen is a state where various symbol designs are close to the character (distance that the character can naturally acquire the symbol designs within a variation time of 0.2 seconds). The rear image in a still image mode is set. With this configuration, after a game is resumed, when a short fluctuation is determined per 0.2 seconds in the special symbol lottery executed first, the character is approached while the game is stopped. It is possible to execute the effect of acquiring the symbol corresponding to the current hit type among the symbol symbols that have been kept stationary in this state. Therefore, even when a variation effect with a short variation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed via the variation stop state, it is possible to execute an effect with a less uncomfortable aspect.

  The variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “Short-short variation”, the value of the chance counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 49”. In this case, “normal jackpot effect” is selected as the effect mode. Since this “normal jackpot effect” is the same as described above, its description is omitted.

  On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “Short-short variation”, the chance counter 223qv is “2”, and the effect counter 223rv is “50 to 99”. In this case, the “single chance chance effect for winning” is selected as the effect mode.

  This “one-shot chance chance effect for winning” is performed when the value of the chance eye counter 223qv is “2”, that is, in a state where the chance eye is stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval (approximately 1.4 seconds). It is an effect that is executed, and is an effect in which the chance is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of fluctuation. As a result, the two chances stopped before the “one-shot chance chance effect for winning” is executed, and the first chance stopped and displayed in this “one-shot chance chance effect for winning” It is possible to notify the player that a total of three chances have been stopped and displayed.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “middle variation”, the chance counter 223qv is “0”, and the effect counter 223rv is “0-29” “Normal jackpot effect” is selected as the effect mode. In the “ordinary jackpot effect” in the middle-middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds, the third symbol display is used as an effect to notify the player that the result of the current lottery is a big hit within the fluctuation time of 3 seconds. An effect in which the device 81 obtains a mode in which the character wins a jackpot (for example, a V mark) or an effect in which the mode in which the jackpot is displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 in order is displayed.

  On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “hit middle variation”, the chance counter 223qv is “0”, and the effect counter 223rv is “30 to 99”. In this case, “three consecutive chance effects” is selected as the effect mode. This “three consecutive chance effects” is the effect described with reference to FIG. 195 (a), and is an effect that the chances are stopped and displayed three times within one fluctuation time.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “middle variation”, the chance counter 223qv is “1”, and the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 49” “Normal jackpot effect” is selected as the effect mode. Since the “normal jackpot effect” is the same effect mode as the “normal jackpot effect” at the time of the hit middle fluctuation described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “hit middle variation”, the chance counter 223qv is “1”, and the effect counter 223rv is “50 to 99”. In this case, “winning second consecutive chance effect” is selected as the effect mode. This “winning second consecutive chance effect” is an effect that is executed when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is “1”, that is, in a state where the chance item is stopped and displayed once, and the fluctuation starts. This is an effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed at two timings after 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds. Thus, it is possible to notify the player that the chance eye has been stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals together with the effect mode executed in the previous change.

  Therefore, since it is possible to stop and display the third chance at predetermined intervals across multiple variations, multiple variations can be performed without using the “pre-reading effect” based on the stored winning information. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests whether or not the result of the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit for the player.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “middle variation”, the chance counter 223qv is “2”, and the effect counter 223rv is “0-9” “Normal jackpot effect” is selected as the effect mode. Since the “normal jackpot effect” is the same effect mode as the “normal jackpot effect” at the time of the hit middle fluctuation described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “hit middle variation”, the chance counter 223qv is “2”, and the effect counter 223rv is “10 to 99”. In this case, “winning single chance eye effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  This “one-shot chance chance effect for winning” is an effect that is executed when the value of the chance eye counter 223qv is “2”, that is, in a state where the chance eye is stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval. This is an effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the chance chance has been stopped and displayed three times at a predetermined interval (approximately 1.4 seconds interval) together with the effect mode executed in the previous variation. .

  Note that, when the “single chance chance effect for winning” is executed as the effect mode corresponding to the middle fluctuation of the hit, the chance (the third time at a predetermined interval from the previous fluctuation) is 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation starts. During the period (2.8 seconds) from when the second chance chance) is stopped to the end of the fluctuation, an image informing the player that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, a sound that congratulates the jackpot is output by a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, and an effect of lighting the lamp display device (such as the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227 is executed.

  As described above, in the third control example, in order to realize “chance eye continuous production” for notifying that the result of the lottery is a big hit when a plurality of chance eyes are stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals. The effect mode to be executed is selected by the Renso middle jackpot table 222a3. Furthermore, since the number of chance eyes to be stopped and displayed with the current fluctuation can be selected based on the value of the chance eye counter 223qv, the chance eyes are stopped at a predetermined interval across a plurality of fluctuations. Can be displayed. Therefore, even if the variation time of one time is short, the effect which suggests the result of the lottery using the variation of a plurality of times can be executed in an effect mode that can be easily recognized by the player.

  Returning to FIG. 197 (b), the description will be continued. The consecutive resort outlier table 222a4 is a table in which a detailed effect mode is defined for the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 during the “continuous resort mode”. A detailed description will be given of the extended-resort table 222a4 with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the consecutive resort outlier table 222a4. In the consecutive outing table 222a4, “outside short fluctuation (0.2 seconds)” and “outside middle fluctuation (3 seconds)” which are the types of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 are displayed. In association with the value of the chance eye number counter 223qv and the value of the effect counter 223rv, as the effect modes, “normal effect”, “single chance event effect for losing”, and “two consecutive chance effect effects for losing” are produced. Aspects are defined.

  More specifically, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “outside short variation”, the value of the chance counter 223qv is “0, 1”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is In the case of “0 to 79”, “normal production” is selected as the production mode.

  The “normal effect” is an effect that informs the player that the result of the current lottery is out of play within a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds. Specifically, an aspect in which the character cannot win a big win (for example, a V mark) on the third symbol display device 81 (failure effect), or an aspect in which the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 are out of place. The effect that is displayed at the same time is executed.

  Since this “normal effect” is a short-time fluctuation of 0.2 seconds, an effect in which the next fluctuation is executed without notifying the player that the lottery result is out of focus. May be used. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's willingness to play is reduced when the “displacement short fluctuation” is continuously executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “outside short variation”, the chance count counter 223qv is “0, 1”, and the effect counter 223rv. When the value of “80-99” is selected, “one-shot chance effect for losing” is selected as the effect mode.

  This “single chance chance effect for losing” is an effect that is executed when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is “0, 1”, that is, when the chance is stopped once or less due to the previous change. This is an effect in which the chance is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of fluctuation. Specifically, when the value of the chance eye number counter 223qv is “1”, when the “single chance chance effect for losing” is executed, the chance time is twice for the previous fluctuation and the current fluctuation. The display is stopped, and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is added to “2”. Therefore, for example, when “winning short fluctuation” is selected as the next fluctuation and “single chance chance production for winning” is executed as the production mode, the chances are stopped and displayed three times across the three fluctuations. It is possible to execute a jackpot after making it.

  Next, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “outside short variation”, the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 99” The “normal effect” is selected as the effect mode. Since this “normal effect” is the same effect mode as the “normal effect” at the time of the above-described short-circuit fluctuation, the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “outside short variation” and the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, that is, the chance interval is twice at a predetermined interval. In the case where the effect mode of “displacement short-circuit fluctuation” is selected in the stopped display state, it is specified that the effect mode in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed is not selected. This is to prevent the chance eye from being stopped and displayed three times at a predetermined interval across multiple changes. As a result, an effect mode in which chance chances are stopped and displayed is continuously executed a plurality of times, so that even though the lottery result is out of place, a plurality of chance eyes are crossed over a plurality of times at predetermined intervals. It is possible to eliminate the situation where the stoppage is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a highly reliable presentation mode can be provided to the player.

  On the other hand, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “outside short variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, the above-described operation is performed regardless of the value of the effect counter 223rv. “Normal effect” which is the same effect mode as “normal effect” is selected.

  Next, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “outside middle variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “0”, the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 0”. “59” is selected as “normal effect”, “60-89” is selected as “single chance chance effect for losing”, and “90-99” is selected as “second consecutive chance effect for losing”. The

  This “single chance chance effect for losing” is an effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped 0.2 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and “second consecutive chance chance effect for losing” is shown in FIG. 195 (b). As shown, it is an effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the fluctuation starts. As a result, the production mode corresponding to the out-of-middle fluctuation can be made to be the same as the production mode corresponding to the middle fluctuation in the middle, so that the player is interested in the production mode until the end of the fluctuation. And the effect of the pachinko machine 10 can be enhanced.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “outside middle variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “1”, the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 59”. In this case, “normal effect” is selected, and in the case of “60 to 99”, “single chance opportunity effect for losing” is selected.

  Finally, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is “outside middle variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, regardless of the value of the effect counter 223rv, “Normal production” is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 197 (a), the description will be continued. The added region selection table 222g is referred to when determining the winning pocket to be increased in the “increase effect” for increasing the winning pocket of the rotating member executed during the “preparation mode” (S6001 in FIG. 203). As described above, this “increase effect” is an effect that adds (adds) the number of winning pockets (number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance effect. By adding the winning pockets (lucky numbers), the roulette opportunity It is possible to make it seem as if it is easier to hit with the production (it is easier to shift to “renso mode”). Therefore, it is an effect that can increase the player's expectation for the roulette chance effect.

  In the third control example, when determining a winning pocket (lucky number) to be added (added) in the “increase effect”, an area that is easily added (easy selection area) and an area that is difficult to add (difficult selection area) Is different from the first control example described above in that a configuration is added in which the hitting pocket (lucky number) added (added) by “addition effect” is intentionally biased (not equalized).

  In this way, by providing a configuration in which the hit pocket (lucky number) added (added) by “increase production” is intentionally biased (not equalized), 30 pockets ( It is possible to intentionally provide a region (location) with a large number of hitting pockets and a region (location) with a small number of hitting pockets for the pockets P1 to P30). Therefore, an area that is easy to hit in the roulette chance production (area where the hitting pocket is set frequently) and an area that is difficult to hit (area where the hitting pocket is low) pass through, so the player falls in the timing when the ball B falls. Will look interesting and can enhance the production effect.

  Next, the details of the added area selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. 199 (b). FIG. 199 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the extra area selection table 222g. In this extra area selection table 222g, “easy selection area” and “difficult selection area” are defined in association with the possible values of the effect counter 223rv.

  More specifically, an “easy selection area” is associated with a range where the value of the effect counter 223 rv is “0 to 74”. As described above in the first control example, the effect counter 223rv is configured by a loop counter that can take 100 values “0 to 99”. Among these, since 75 values of “easy selection area” are selected from “0 to 74”, the probability (ratio) that “easy selection area” is selected by the additional area selection table 222g is 75% (75/100). ).

  The “difficult selection area” is associated with the range of the value of the effect counter 223rv of “75 to 99”. Of the 100 values that can be taken by the effect counter 223rv, since the value for selecting the “difficult selection area” is 25 from “75 to 99”, it is established that the “difficult selection area” is selected by the extra area selection table 222g. Is 25% (25/100).

  That is, for example, when four winning pockets (lucky numbers) are added (increased) by “addition effect”, an average of three winning pockets (lucky selection area) and an average of one winning pocket (lucky selection area) Number) is the selected ratio. As a result, it is possible to bias the pocket by hitting the area where the easy selection area is set. A configuration in which the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 are divided into “easy selection region” and “difficult selection region” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201. FIG. FIG. 200 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 200, the third control example is different from the above-described control examples in that the contents of the hit position storage area 223k are partially changed, and the chance count counter 223qv and the effect counter 223rv are It differs in the added point. Since other contents are the same as those in the above-described control examples, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the winning position storage area 223k whose contents are partially changed in the third control example will be described. The hit position storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the type of each pocket P1 to P30 of the rotating member 640 (whether it is a hit pocket or a release pocket) in the “renso mode suggestion effect” as described above. It is. In the hit position storage area 223k, a hit position is set based on the pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x in the hit pocket sorting process 3 (S3102 in FIG. 202). Next, with reference to FIG. 201, differences from the above-described first control example will be described in detail.

  FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit position storage area 223k. In the third control example, the success / failure types corresponding to the pockets P1 to P30 are stored, and the pockets P1 to P30 are divided into “first area” and “second area”. . As shown in FIG. 201, the “first region” is a region including pockets P1 to P15, and the “second region” is a region including pockets P16 to P30. By reading the stored information stored in the hit position storage area 223k configured in this way, in addition to the type set in each pocket P1 to P30, it is set in each area (first area, second area). It becomes possible to grasp the number of hit pockets. In this control example, the number of hit pockets included in the first area and the second area at the start of the increase effect (in a state where only the hit pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x is reflected as the hit position) It is determined that an area where a large number of hit pockets are set is set as the above-described easy selection area, and an area where the number of hit pockets is small is set as a difficult selection area. Thereby, since an increase effect can be executed in a state where the number of pockets included in the easy selection area is larger, the arrangement of the hit pockets can be biased toward the easy selection area.

  Returning to FIG. 200, the description will be continued. The chance number counter 223qv is a counter that counts the number of times the chance eyes are stopped and displayed across a plurality of fluctuations in the above-described “chance eye continuous effect”. The value of the chance eye number counter 223qv is referred to in the variation pattern selection process (S6106 in FIG. 206), and when “chance eye effect” is determined, the value corresponding to the determined “chance eye effect”, that is, Then, a value corresponding to the number of times the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the determined variation pattern is added (S6109 in FIG. 206). When the “chance eye effect” is not determined, that is, when the normal effect is determined, the value of the counter is initialized (S6110 in FIG. 206). Although not shown, the counter value is also initialized when the jackpot is executed when the value of the chance counter 223qv is not initialized.

  In this control example, when the chance eye effect is not determined, the value of the chance eye number counter 223qv is initialized. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the value of the chance number counter 223qv may not be initialized until a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the chance eye is stopped and displayed. As a result, when the chances are interrupted, a period in which the chances do not appear for at least 5 seconds can be set, so that it is possible to more clearly recognize whether or not the chances are consecutive. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misrecognizing the number of consecutive times of chances, thereby providing an easier-to-understand performance.

  The effect counter 223rv is a counter used for selecting various effects (“chance eye continuous effect”, “addition effect”, etc.), various lotteries, and the like in the audio lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the audio lamp control is performed. It is configured as a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99 in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the device 113. By using this effect counter 223rv, randomness can be ensured when various effects are selected.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206. First, FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a winning pocket sorting process 3 (S3011) executed in place of the winning pocket sorting process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example in the state command process (see FIG. 159). Of the winning pocket distribution process 3, the processes of S3101 and S3102 are the same as the processes of S3101 and S3102 of the winning pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example described above. The

  Further, in the hit pocket sorting process 3 (see FIG. 202) in this control example, after the read pocket is set to the hit position of the hit position storage area 223k by the process of S3102 (S3102), the hit position storage area 223k The number of hit pockets included in the first area and the second area is calculated (S3121). For example, if the winning pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are the pockets P9, P10, P11, P20, and P28, three pockets are included for the first region (pockets P1 to P15). It is calculated that two pockets are included in the second region (pockets P16 to P30).

  When the process of S3121 ends, next, based on the number of hit pockets of each area calculated in the process of S3121, it is determined whether the number of hit pockets included in the first area is larger than that of the second area (S3122). ). If it is determined in the process of S3122 that the first area has more pockets (S3122: Yes), the first area is set as an easy selection area and the second area is set as a difficult selection area. (S3123), the process proceeds to S3103.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3122 that the number of hit pockets is greater in the second area than in the first area (S3122: No), the second area is set as an easily selectable area, and the first area is selected. The difficult selection area is set (S3124), and the process proceeds to S3103.

  That is, in the processing of S3122 to S3124, processing for setting an area having a large number of winning pockets as an “easy selection area” in which the winning pocket is easily added (added) by “addition effect” is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to deviate more the area | region where a contact pocket is set with respect to 30 pockets (pockets P1-P30) provided in the rotation member 640, and can improve an effect.

  When the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area is the same, “easy selection area” and “difficult selection area” may be set at random, or a predetermined area May be set to be an “easy selection area”. Further, the number of types corresponding to the hit positions stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x is set to be an odd number so that the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area is not the same. It may be configured.

  In the third control example, a configuration is used in which the “easy selection region” and the “difficult selection region” are set based on the number of hit pockets set in the first region and the second region that are defined in advance. However, when the winning pocket is added (added) by the “additional effect”, it is sufficient if the area where the winning pocket is located is biased. For example, the center where the winning pocket is continuously set is used. The “first area” may be set in the area.

  This makes it possible to set the “first region” and the “second region” based on the hitting pocket position, so that the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 can be set. It is possible to further bias the region where the hitting pocket is set, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Returning to FIG. 202, the description will be continued. In the processes of S3103 and S3104, the same processes as the processes of S3103 and S3104 in the first control example described above are executed. Then, when it is determined in the process of S3104 that the value of the additional counter is greater than 0 (S3104: Yes), an additional position determination process for determining a pocket to be increased (added) is executed (S3125). ). Details of the added position determination process (S3125) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S3125 is completed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the addition counter 233av (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3104. Thereafter, the processes of S3104, S3110, and S3125 are repeatedly executed until the value of the addition counter 223av becomes zero.

  Next, details of the added position determination process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the added position determination process (S3125). The added position determination process (S3125) is a process for determining the position of the winning pocket to be added (added) in the “increase effect”.

  In the added position determination process (S3125), first, the added area selection table 222g is read (S6001), and an added area corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223rv is determined (S6002). Specifically, when the value of the acquired effect counter 223rv is “0 to 74”, the area set in the “easy selection area” is determined as the additional area, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223rv is “75”. In the case of “˜99”, the area set as the “difficult selection area” is determined as the additional area (see FIG. 199 (b)). As described above, the easy selection area and the difficult selection area are set according to the arrangement of the hit pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x at the start of the increase effect.

  When the processing of S6002 is completed, the winning position storage area 223k is read out, and it is determined whether there is a place where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more, that is, there is a place where 5 or more winning pockets are continuous (S6003). ). In the process of S6003, if it is determined that there is no place where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more (S6003: No), one additional position is selected from the pockets in which the type of removal is set (S6004). .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6002 that there are locations where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more (S6003: Yes), the winning locations of the pockets set with the detachment type are 5 consecutive locations. One additional position is selected from the removal pockets other than the front and rear one places (S6005).

  Here, the process executed in S6005 will be described. In this third control example, when the roulette chance effect is executed, the hit pocket is continuously set so that the ball B is dropped in the specified pocket (a hit pocket or a release pocket) without giving the player a sense of incongruity. The upper limit of the number to be set is set to 5. If the hitting pockets are too continuous, it will take time to pass the position where the hitting pockets are continuous when it is out of the roulette chance effect, and the swinging motion of the ball B will stop during the passing. Or, there is a possibility that the swinging operation has an extremely small amplitude. In this case, since the ball B does not fall and stays on the upper portion of the holding piece 677, it becomes a very unnatural appearance, which may cause the player to feel distrust. Therefore, during execution of the “increase effect”, it is necessary to control so that six or more hit pockets do not continue by adding. Therefore, the situation where the pockets that have already been set as the winning pockets are grasped and the position of the winning pocket to be added (added) is set by the “increase effect”. Thereby, it is possible to execute the roulette chance effect without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  When the processing of S6004 or S6005 is finished, the winning position storage area 223k is then updated so that the selected added position becomes the winning position (S6006), and this process is finished. This extra position determination process is also executed in the special figure 2 winning command process 3 (S2121) shown in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the special figure 2 winning command process 3 (S2121) executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. Of the special figure 2 winning command process 3 (S2121), the processes of S3201 to S3208 are the same as the processes of S3201 to S3208 of the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example described above, respectively. Processing is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S3208 that an extra position is to be added (S3208: Yes), an additional position determination process is executed (S3221), and then this process is terminated. Note that the additional position determination process executed in S3221 is the same as the additional position determination process executed in S3125 described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the third control example, since the added position determination process is executed also in the special figure 2 winning command process 3 (S2121), the pockets 30 (pockets P1 to P1) provided in the rotating member 640 are executed. It is possible to further bias the region where the hit pocket is set with respect to P30), and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the above-described special figure 2 winning command process 3 (see FIG. 204), when it is determined in step S3208 that an additional position is determined, an additional position determination process is executed. The “easy selection area” and the “difficult selection area” may be set again. Thereby, it becomes possible to deviate more the area | region where a contact pocket is set with respect to 30 pockets (pockets P1-P30) provided in the rotation member 640, and can improve an effect.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206, the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. This variation display setting process 3 is different from the variation display setting process of the first control example described above in that a variation pattern selection process (S3321) is added. In this variation pattern selection process (S3321), a process of selecting a variation pattern for executing the “chance eye continuous effect” described above is executed.

  First, FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 (S1641) executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example. Of the variable display setting process 3, the same processes as S3301 to S3303 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example described above are executed in the processes of S3301 to S3303.

  When the processing of S3303 ends, next, a variation pattern selection process (S3 21) for selecting an effect mode corresponding to the current variation pattern command is executed. Details of the variation pattern selection process (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. When this variation pattern selection process (S3321) is completed, the processes from S3 to 05 to S3 are executed, and this process ends. The processes in S3305 to S3310 are executed in the same manner as the processes in S3305 to S3310 in the first control example described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the above-described variation pattern selection process (S3321) will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process. As shown in FIG. 206, when the variation pattern selection process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the time-short state flag 223o is set to ON, that is, whether or not it is in the “long-run mode” (S6101).

  If it is determined that the time-short state flag 223o is set to ON (S6101: Yes), the table for the extended game corresponding to the current variation pattern is read from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S6105). Specifically, for example, if the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 indicates a fluctuation type (fluctuation pattern) corresponding to “winning middle fluctuation”, the middle and big hits from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. The table 222a3 is read out.

  Next, the value of the effect counter 223rv and the value of the chance eye counter 223qv are read (S6106), and the effect mode corresponding to the read values of the counters (the effect counter 223rv and the chance eye number counter 223qv) is determined (S6107). . Specifically, for example, when the Renso middle jackpot table 223a3 is read and the acquired value of the effect counter 223rv is “60” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “1”, “Two consecutive chance effects” is selected (see FIG. 198).

  When the processing of S6107 described above is completed, it is then determined whether or not a chance eye effect has been determined (selected) as the current effect mode (S6108). If it is determined in the process of S6108 that the chance effect is determined (selected) (S6108: Yes), the corresponding value is added to the chance counter 223qv (S6109), and the process proceeds to S6111.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6108 that the chance effect is not determined (selected) (S6108: No), the value of the chance number counter 223qv is initialized (S6110), and the process proceeds to S6111.

  On the other hand, if the time reduction state flag 223o is not set to ON (set to OFF) in the process of S6101, (S6101: No), the normal table corresponding to the current change pattern is selected as the change pattern. Read from the table 222a (S6102). Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 indicates a variation type (variation pattern) corresponding to “displacement middle variation”, the variation pattern selection table 222a is used for normal middle / out. Read the table 222a2.

  When the processing of S6102 is completed, the value of the effect counter 223rv is then read (S6103), the effect mode corresponding to the read value of the effect counter 223rv is determined (S6104), and the process proceeds to S6111.

  After the process of S6109, S6110, or S6104 is executed, in the process of S6111, the display variation pattern command for notifying the effect mode determined in each process is set (S6111), and this process ends. To do.

  As described above, in the third control example, when the addition is determined and the winning pocket is determined in the increase effect, a section in which the ratio of the winning pocket is intentionally high is provided. Here, if the arrangement of the hitting pockets is determined completely at random, the hitting pockets may be distributed evenly over the entire rotating member 640. In this case, when the ball B falls from the holding piece 677, there is no difference in the degree of expectation that the ball B will fall into the hit pocket. That is, even if the ball B is caused to perform a swinging motion and the player predicts a section (pocket) in which the ball B falls from the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging motion, a difference in expectation cannot be made. There is a fear. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the swing effect is lowered.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, since a section with a high percentage of hit pockets is intentionally provided, the arrangement of the sections with a high percentage of hit pockets and the swinging action of the ball B on the upper part of the holding piece 677 This makes it possible for the player to watch the correspondence with the momentum (cycle) more carefully. That is, the position (section) where the ball B falls is predicted from the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation, expecting the position (section) where the ball B falls to be a section where the percentage of the hit pocket is high. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game during the swing effect.

  Further, in the third control example, in the “renso mode” in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is mainly executed, the chance eye continuous effect in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed one or more times is configured to be executable. . Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that can execute the same line of production over a plurality of fluctuation displays (for example, a fluctuation display for the number of held balls held at the start of the production) (so-called , "Continuous notice effect"). In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, depending on the number of times the same line of production is executed, the contents of the production, and the like. However, in conventional gaming machines, the number of performances and the performance time are affected by the holding ball, so the continuous notice effect should be applied to gaming machines that do not have a function to hold the lottery result in the first place. I could not. In addition, some conventional gaming machines are configured so as to be able to produce an effect as if a plurality of times of fluctuating display is executed in one fluctuating display. There is also one that executes the above-described continuous notice effect with one variable display by executing the same system effect in the variable display. In this conventional game machine, a continuous notice effect can be executed regardless of the number of reserved balls, but since it is necessary to execute the effect within the range of the variable time set for variable display, a sufficient effect period is ensured. There was a problem that it might be difficult.

  On the other hand, in this control example, a specific effect (effect in which a chance eye is displayed) can be executed one or more times in one variable display. When executing the variable display, whether or not to set a specific effect for the variable display and the number of executions when executing the specific effect are executed before the variable display. It is configured to discriminate based on the history of specific effects. And based on the lottery result of the special symbol used as the opportunity of the said change display, it is set as the structure which makes the maximum continuous frequency | count of a specific production differ in the case of a loss and the case of a big win. By configuring in this way, in the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 where the lottery result of the special symbol is not put on hold, by performing a specific effect continuously over a plurality of variable displays, And have a sense of expectation for jackpots.

  Further, in this control example, when display of a chance eye is determined in a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, after the symbol fluctuation of 0.2 seconds is executed, the chance eye is 0.5 seconds. Stopped display. In addition, when the chance continuous production is determined in the middle fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 3 seconds, the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) and the chance temporary stop period (0.5 seconds) are changed to the 3-second fluctuation period. Is set one or more times. In this way, the pseudo fluctuation period and the fixed time during the middle fluctuation are set to be the same as the fluctuation time (period) (0.2 seconds) and the fixed time (period) (0.5 seconds) of the short fluctuation, respectively. Therefore, the chance eye stop display in the middle fluctuation can be displayed to the player without a sense of incongruity.

  In addition to the pseudo-variation period and the temporary stop period, a pseudo-stop period that artificially represents a period in which no new symbol change is started is provided as a pseudo-production that is executed during middle fluctuations. Change in the case of using a configuration that does not have a so-called hold storage function (a configuration in which the change display is executed discretely (non-continuously) even if the ball is continuously launched) Can be expressed.

  In the third control example, in the state where the outbreak short fluctuation for which the “chance eye effect” is set is executed twice in succession, when the next short fluctuation is determined to be a short fluctuation, Is configured to be settable, and when the next fluctuation is out and the short fluctuation, the “chance eye effect” is not set. In other words, only when the special symbol is a big win, the chances are allowed to be stopped and displayed three times in succession, and when the special symbol is not selected, the number of consecutive chances is limited to two. It is configured to do.

  With this configuration, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of consecutive chances, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. In addition, regardless of whether the chance chance continuous production is set in the middle fluctuation or the short fluctuation in which the chance eye stop display is set is repeated a plurality of times, the chance eye is stopped and displayed a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval. It can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

  In the third control example, as described above, the control for restricting the chance eye from being stopped and displayed is executed for continuous variable display. However, other configurations may be used, for example, After the chances are displayed twice in succession, until the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, the production mode in which the chances are stopped and displayed is not selected as the production mode corresponding to the variation that has been won out of place. It is good to do so. Thereby, an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

  In this third control example, as the “chance eye continuous effect”, the interval at which the chance eye stops is set to be a predetermined interval, but other configurations may be used, for example, a predetermined period ( A plurality of timings at which chance chances are stopped are provided within 3 seconds (a fluctuation time in which middle fluctuation is executed), and the chances are stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times (three times) in total at any timing. You may comprise. As a result, it becomes difficult to grasp at what timing the chances are displayed during the change of the special symbol, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  In addition, as a chance eye display mode in the case where the chance eye is stopped and displayed, a plurality of patterns of the 3rd pattern to be stopped and the background color are facilitated in advance, and the chance eye displayed in a specific display mode is 1 When the stop display is performed, the same value as that obtained when the normal chance is stopped and displayed three times may be provided. As a result, even if it is difficult for the chance item to be stopped and displayed for a predetermined number of times, that is, even if the chance item is not stopped and displayed for a certain period of time after the start of fluctuation, the winner is won. Since it is possible to execute an effect to notify this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the third control example, the chance eye displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an object appearing a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval) is used. For example, the upper elevating unit 300 may be moved at a predetermined interval. Thereby, it becomes possible to suggest the result of the lottery by using a configuration other than the display of the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with an enhanced effect.

  Furthermore, in the case of using a configuration in which a movable accessory associated with the pachinko machine 10 such as the upper lifting unit 300 is used, in addition to a configuration in which the same operation (swinging operation) is performed a plurality of times, It may be configured to move to the final stage by moving the movable accessory a predetermined number of times. By comprising in this way, since it can be made to recognize that the jackpot is approaching with respect to a player, an effect can be heightened.

  Note that even when a configuration in which a predetermined display mode (such as a chance eye) is stopped and displayed multiple times on the third symbol display device 81 as in the third control example is used, the predetermined display mode is stopped and displayed. You may display on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 the number display which displays the frequency | count performed, and the target display which displays the stop display frequency | count of the predetermined | prescribed display aspect required in order to alert | report that it has won the jackpot. Thereby, every time a predetermined display mode is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the jackpot is approaching the player, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  In the third control example, since the process of counting the number of chances is executed for the continuously executed change, the change in which the effect mode in which the chances are stopped and displayed is selected a plurality of times. In such a case, the chance mode can be stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times across a plurality of variations, and the rendering mode is controlled so that the predetermined number of chances are not stopped and displayed by the rendering mode corresponding to the variation that is won out of place. Therefore, the production effect is enhanced.

  In this way, instead of the configuration in which the chance stop display effect is executed for the continuously executed fluctuation, the chance eye stop display effect is executed in the predetermined time period. May be. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 that can select a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time as in the third control example, even if a non-continuous fluctuation is used, a predetermined number of chances can be stopped and displayed at a predetermined interval. It is. When such a configuration is used, an effect mode in which chances are stopped and displayed a plurality of times within a predetermined period is determined in advance, and the chances are displayed in a variable display corresponding to the timing at which the chances are stopped and displayed in the effect mode. May be configured to be stopped.

  By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to suitably execute the chance continuous production using the non-continuous fluctuation. When this configuration is used, it is preferable to provide a slight tolerance for the timing at which the chance eye is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the fluctuation | variation which can perform a chance eye | texture continuous production can be increased, and it becomes possible to raise the interest of a game.

  Further, in the third control example, when “displacement middle fluctuation” is determined in “chance eye continuous production”, the first or second chance is first (0.2 seconds after the fluctuation starts). After) or after the second time (1.6 seconds after the fluctuation starts), the stop display timing can be displayed. For example, the third time (the fluctuation starts when the “middle deviation changes”) The chance eye may be stopped and displayed at the stop display timing (after 3 seconds). With this configuration, a plurality of chances can be stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals across the middle fluctuation and the short fluctuation.

  Further, in the third control example, when the “addition effect” is executed, a configuration in which the hit pocket (lucky number) added (added) by the “addition effect” is intentionally biased (not equalized) is provided. Thus, intentionally providing a region (location) where the number of hitting pockets is set and a region (point) where the setting of hitting pockets is small for 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640. Can do. Therefore, an area that is easy to hit in the roulette chance production (area where the hitting pocket is set frequently) and an area that is difficult to hit (area where the hitting pocket is low) pass through, so the player falls in the timing when the ball B falls. Will look interesting and can enhance the production effect.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 214. In the first control example described above, the control and the production mode in the “normal mode” and the “preparation mode” are mainly described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, as one aspect of the entertainment effect in the “renso mode”, a method for improving the player's interest by the effect using the accessory (upper lifting unit 300). explain.

  Further, in the above-described first control example, when the bonus pocket is determined to be added in the increase effect executed in the first half of the “renso mode suggestion effect” (20 seconds from the start of the effect), the position of the winning pocket to be added is determined. Is determined at random within a range in which the hit pocket is not 6 consecutive or more. When the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be determined and the ball B can be dropped after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes sufficiently small. The ball B was held on the holding piece 677 until the possible pocket reached a position before the dropping position (0.2 seconds before reaching the dropping position).

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 in the roulette chance effect is calculated in advance during execution of the increase effect, and the additional position of the hit pocket is determined. Here, the back calculation method will be described in detail. Since the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 is 70 seconds after the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”, the ball B can fall through the swinging motion. It is about 75 seconds to 82 seconds after the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. Therefore, when the winning pocket is added when the transition to the “renso mode” is confirmed, the drop position is reached after about 75 seconds to 82 seconds after the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. A pocket to be arranged (or a pocket close to the drop position) is determined as an additional position by predicting from the current elapsed time and the rotational speed of the rotating member 640. On the other hand, if the transition to the “renso mode” has not been confirmed, the added position is determined avoiding the pockets that are predicted to be placed at the drop position after about 75 seconds to 82 seconds. As described above, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 at the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect” has a different configuration depending on the pocket in which the ball B was dropped in the previous “renso mode suggestion effect”. By arranging the rotation member 640 and determining the elapsed time, it is possible to easily predict a pocket to be placed at the drop position after about 75 seconds to 82 seconds. As a result, the ball B can be dropped into the hit or missed pocket with high accuracy, depending on whether or not the mode is shifted to the “renso mode”.

  In the first control example described above, the rotation member 640 is disposed (pocket disposed at the drop position) by a combination of outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F of the rotation position detection sensor 684. Was configured to identify. Thereby, when the lighting control of the back LED 625 is performed, only the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket set as the hit pocket according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately set to the lighting state. The player was able to easily recognize the hit pocket from the appearance. Also, when the ball B is dropped, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the lottery result of the special symbol executed in the “preparation mode” (that is, whether or not the mode shifts to the “ream mode”) Accordingly, it was configured to be able to be dropped into an appropriate type of pocket.

  In addition to this, in the fourth control example, when the detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are acquired, the detection results are displayed in the next pocket (current drop). It is configured to hold until the pocket placed at the position next to the pocket placed at the dropping position is placed at the dropping position. And it was set as the structure which discriminate | determines the presence or absence of abnormality by comparing the hold | maintained detection result and the new detection result acquired by arrange | positioning the next pocket to a fall position. That is, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are detection results of continuous (adjacent) pockets. Thereby, the breakage of the detection sensors A to F (or the breakage of the detected part 641c) can be detected.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
First, with reference to FIG. 207, the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. As shown in FIGS. 207 (a) to 207 (d), the ROM 222 of the present control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 (see FIG. 118 (a)) in the first control example and the variation pattern selection table 222a and the operation. The difference is that the contents of the scenario table 222b are partially changed. The other contents of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207 (a). FIG. 207 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a of the fourth control example. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fourth control example is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and is roughly shown by the variation pattern command. It is a data table used in order to determine more detailed fluctuation | variation content from fluctuation | variation content (variation time).

  As shown in FIG. 207 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222a in the present control example is composed of a normal middle / big hit table 222a1, a normal middle / outside table 222a2, and a continuous middle variation pattern selection table 222a5. Yes.

  Based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the normal medium / big hit table 222a1 defines detailed production modes corresponding to variation types with a variation time of 7 seconds and 10 seconds (not shown). ) Here, an effect mode defined in the normal middle jackpot table 222a1 will be described. First, in the normal middle big hit table 222a1, a 7-second stop pattern and a 10-second stop pattern are defined as stop patterns of symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331.

  The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which the symbols variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d are stopped and displayed at regular intervals. The 10-second stop pattern is the last of the display units 331a to 331d. It takes a long time for the symbols corresponding to the lucky number (for example, “2”, “7”, “13”) to be stopped on the display unit 331d after the symbols (for example, “2”, “7”, “13”) are stopped on the display unit other than the display unit 331d to be stopped. Stop pattern to be set.

  In addition, the normal middle / outside table 222a2 is also a detailed effect corresponding to the fluctuation types of the fluctuation time of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, similarly to the normal middle big hit table 222a1. Aspects are defined (not shown).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth control example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds are selected as the variation patterns that are selected when the normal big hit is won. The ratio is defined to be about 1: 1 (see FIG. 111 (a)). As a variation pattern that is selected in the case of normal misalignment, a variation pattern with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation time of 10 seconds The ratio at which the fluctuation pattern is selected is defined to be about 3 to 1 (see FIG. 111B). Therefore, when the 10-second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 207 (b), the details of the continuous variation pattern selection table 222a5 will be described. This variation pattern selection table 222a5 during consecutive resorts is a variation pattern selection table that is referred to in the “continuous resort mode” in which the time is short.

  As shown in FIG. 207 (b), when the variation type is a hit short variation (0.2 seconds), the normal jackpot effect is set for the value “0 to 99” of the effect counter 223sw. When the variation type is a middle variation (3 seconds), the upper swing effect is set for the value “0 to 99” of the effect counter 223sw. When the variation type is out-of-range short variation (0.2 seconds), a normal out-of-range effect is set for the value “0 to 79” of the effect counter 223 sw, and the value “80 to 99” of the effect counter 223 sw is set. On the other hand, an upper swing effect that is an effect mode accompanying the operation of the upper moving unit 300 is set. When the variation type is outlier middle variation (3 seconds), a normal outlier effect is set with respect to the value “0 to 89” of the effect counter 223sw, and an upper portion with respect to the value “90 to 99” of the effect counter 223sw. A rocking effect is set.

  Here, the upper swinging effect is an effect in which the upper swinging motion in which the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 is movable up and down is executed a predetermined number of times. Specifically, when the variation that the big symbol lottery result is a big hit is performed, the upper swing motion is performed 3 times (0 seconds, 1.4 seconds, 2.8 seconds after the start of the variation) The upper swing effect that is performed three times) is executed. In the upper swing effect that is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed once or twice is executed. As described above, since the number of times of the upper swing operation when the upper swing effect is set is varied depending on whether or not the big hit is made, it is possible to pay attention to the number of the upper swing operations. That is, the upper elevating unit 300 can be observed in the hope that the upper rocking motion is performed three times in succession. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the “renso mode” of the player.

  Next, the contents of the operation scenario table 222b in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207 (c). As shown in FIG. 207 (c), the operation scenario table 222b in the fourth control example swings upward relative to the configuration of the operation scenario table 222b in the first control example (see FIG. 119 (a)). The difference is that an effect table 222b8 is added. The upper swing effect table 222b8 is a table that is referred to when the upper swing effect executed in the present control example is set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 207 (d), the specified contents of the upper swing effect table 222b8 will be described. Similar to the other data tables defined as the operation scenario table 222b, the upper swing effect table 222b8 includes a motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the setting progress based on the operation scenario. ) Are defined for the setting values (operation speed (pps), number of operation steps, and operation direction).

  As shown in FIG. 207 (d), the value “01H” of the action pointer 223g indicates that the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 is lowered from the raised position (origin position) to the lowered position (outward movement action). Are associated. Specifically, 635 pps is defined as the operation speed, 127 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the upper elevating unit 300 is driven in the upper swing effect. Note that 127 steps means the number of steps up to the lowered position.

  Here, the operation speed of 635 pps means that a signal instructing driving for one step from the motor driver to the upper lifting motor 341 is output at a frequency of 635 pulses (steps) per second. The time required for the elevating body 330 of the elevating unit 300 to perform 127 step operations (moving from the origin position to the lowered position) is 127/635 seconds (0.2 seconds).

  The value “02H” of the action pointer 223g is associated with an action (return path action) for raising the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the lowered position to the raised position (origin position). Specifically, 635 pps is defined as the operation speed, 127 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. Therefore, the elevating body 330 of the vertical elevating body unit 300 moves from the lowered position to the raised position over 0.2 seconds. The END data is associated with the value “03H” of the motion pointer 223g. By reading this END data, it is determined that execution of all operations specified in the operation scenario has been completed.

  Thus, in the upper swing effect, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position over 0.2 seconds, and then moved from the lowered position to the raised position over 0.2 seconds. This is an effect of executing a swing operation for a total of 0.4 seconds for a predetermined number of times (three times for a big hit, one or two times for a big hit). As described above, the upper swing effect is executed as an effect that suggests a degree of expectation that is a big hit during the extended-village mode.

  As a result, whether or not the swing motion is executed at a predetermined timing (after 0 seconds (immediately after the start of change), after 1.4 seconds and after 2.8 seconds) after the change of the special symbol is executed (started). The player can be interested in this.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 in the present control example has an upper swing effect timer 223pw, an upper swing effect flag 223qw, and a sensor information storage area 223rw compared to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 118B). And the production counter 223sw are added, and the other configurations are the same. The same parts as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The upper swing effect timer 223pw is a timer counter for counting (clocking) the effect time (elapsed time from the start of the effect) of the upper swing effect. The upper swing effect timer is initialized to 0 when the upper swing effect is determined in the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213) (see S6135 in FIG. 213), and the upper swing effect is executed. When the upper swing effect process (see FIG. 214) is executed, 1 is added (see S6204 in FIG. 214).

  The upper rocking effect flag 223qw is a flag for determining whether or not the upper rocking effect is being executed. The upper rocking effect flag 223qw is an upper flag in the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213). When the swing effect is determined, it is set to ON (see S6133 in FIG. 213), and when it is determined in the upper swing effect process (see FIG. 214) that the upper swing effect has ended (a big hit is started) In the case (S6201: Yes), the third swing operation timing (S6207: Yes)) is set to OFF (S6202, S6208).

  The sensor information storage area 223rw is an area for storing (updating) the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684, and the output values of the detection sensors A to F are stored therein. It can be stored (updated) at least once. In the sensor information storage area 223rw, output values of the detection sensors A to F are stored (updated) in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210) (see S2836 in FIG. 210).

  Although details will be described later, in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210), the previously stored output values of the detection sensors A to F are compared with the current output values of the detection sensors A to F (S2833 in FIG. 210). ), The presence or absence of abnormality with respect to the detection values of the detection sensors A to F is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the previous output values of the detection sensors A to F match the current output values of the detection sensors A to F. If they match, there is no abnormality. Is determined to be abnormal.

  Here, the output values of the detection sensors A to F are six in total, which are associated with a total of five pockets, that is, a pocket where the ball B is dropped, two pockets on the right and two pockets on the left. Depending on the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c. As shown in the rotational position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), when the pocket that becomes the drop position is changed by one, the detected portion 641c detected by the detection sensors A to E is detected by the detection sensors B to B. It is moved to the position detected by F. The detected portion 641c detected by the detection sensor F is out of the detection range of the detection sensors A to F, and is moved to a position where the new detected portion 641c is detected by the detection sensor A. Therefore, when the output values of the detection sensors A to E do not coincide with the output values of the detection sensors B to F after one pocket at the drop position has changed, there is a problem such as damage to the detected part 641c. Can be determined.

  The effect counter 223sw is a counter used for selection of various effects (such as “upper swing effect”) and various lotteries in the sound lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. 4 (see FIG. 209), it is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. First, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 201 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The main process 4 in the fourth control example is that an upper swing effect process (S1651) is added to the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example, and in the command determination process (S1614). Instead of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157), the rotation setting process 4 (S2609, see FIG. 210) is executed, and instead of the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the command determination process (S1614). The special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117, see FIG. 211) is executed and the variable display setting process 4 (S1652, see FIG. 212) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (S1615). The other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the main process 4 in the fourth control example, similarly to the main process in the first control example (see FIG. 145), the processes of S1601 to S1610 are executed, and then the upper lift unit 300 is used in the “ream mode”. The upper swing effect process for setting the generated effect is executed (S1651), and the process proceeds to S1611. Details of the upper swing effect process (S1651) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the main process 4 (see FIG. 209) in the present control example, after executing the processes of S1611 to S1614, the variable display setting process 4 is performed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. (S1652), and the process proceeds to S1616. Details of the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the rotation setting process 4 (S2609) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The rotation setting process 4 (S2609) in the fourth control example is a process executed in place of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) in the first control example in the execution command process (see FIG. 155). Similar to the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157), this is a process for controlling the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 (and the rear LED 625).

  The rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example executes the process of S2831 instead of the process of S2801 with respect to the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) in the first control example, and S2832. To S2836 are added, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the rotation setting process 4 (S2609) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the outputs of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 have all changed from the L state. (S2831). That is, it is determined whether each detected portion 641c provided in the pocket has been displaced from the detection range of the detection sensors A to F into the detection range, and all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F remain in the L state. If it is determined that each detected portion 641c remains arranged outside the detection range of the detection sensors A to F (S2831: No), a new (next) pocket is arranged at the position where the ball B is dropped. When the output value of the detection centers A to F is stored in the previous sensor information storage area 223rw, the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation member 640 is equal to or less than the unit rotation amount (rotation amount moved by one pocket). In this case, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2831, the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are all L, so that the output of at least one of the detection sensors A to F is output. If it is determined that the position has been changed to H (S2831: Yes), a new (next) pocket is placed at the position where the ball B is dropped (the detection centers A to F of the previous sensor information storage area 223rw). Since the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotating member 640 has become the unit rotation amount since the output value was stored, in this case, the process proceeds to S2802. Even if the output values of the detection sensors A to F are not all L, if the output value of any of the detection sensors A to F has not changed from L to H (S2831: No), Since this is a case where the processing after S2802 is executed, in this case, this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S2802, the pocket at the drop position of the ball B is specified as in the first control example (S2802), and the rotational position storage area 223u is updated based on the specified pocket (S2803). Next, it is determined whether or not the detection by the detection sensors A to F after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is the first time (S2832). Specifically, it is determined whether or not an initial value is stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw. In the sensor information storage area 223rw, L (0) is set in all bits of the storage area for 2 bytes as an initial value when the power is turned on. In the process of S2832, when L (0) is stored in all the bits allocated to the sensor information storage area 223rw, it is determined that the detection is the first time.

  In the processing of S2832, when it is determined that the detection by the detection sensors A to F is not performed for the first time after the power is turned on (that is, the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F are stored) (S2832). : No), the previous output value (before the pocket position changes by one) stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw, and this time, any one of the pockets is newly placed at the drop position. The output values of the detection sensors A to F displaced as a result are compared (S2833). Specifically, as described above, among the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F, the five types of output values of the detection sensors A to E and the detection sensor B of the current output values of the detection sensors A to F. The five output values of ~ F are compared. Whether or not there is an abnormality in the detection result of the sensor can be determined only by the detection result of the detection sensors A to F with respect to the pocket arranged at the previous drop position and the detection result with respect to the pocket arranged at the current drop position. This is because the detected portion 641c detected by the detection sensors A to E is moved to a position detected by the detection sensors B to F when one pocket is changed. Therefore, if the output values of the detection sensors A to E do not match the output values of the detection sensors B to F before the pocket at which the drop position is changed, at least one of the detected parts 641c is damaged. Thus, it is possible to determine that a malfunction has occurred such as being unable to be detected by the detection sensor.

  When the processing of S2833 ends, it is then determined whether or not the comparison result executed by the processing of S2833 is abnormal (S2834). Specifically, it is determined that there is no abnormality when the output values of the previous detection sensors A to E match the current output values of the detection sensors B to F, and that there is an abnormality when they do not match. If it is determined that the comparison result is abnormal in the process of S2834 (S2834: Yes), error information is output (display error command is set) (S2835), and the process proceeds to S2836.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2832 that the detection by the detection sensors A to F is the first time (S2832: Yes), the process cannot be compared with the previous detection result, so the processes of S2833 to S2835 are skipped. Thus, the process proceeds to S2836. If it is determined in the process of S2834 that the comparison result is normal (S2834: No), the process of S2835 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2836.

  In the process of S2836, the value of the sensor information storage area 223rw is updated based on the current output values of the detection sensors A to F, and the process proceeds to S2804. In the processing of S2804 to S2808, the same processing as the processing of S2804 to S2808 of the first control example is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the rotation setting process 4 in the fourth control example, a plurality of pieces of detection information (output values) of the detection sensors A to F can be stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw. Among the detection information obtained at the timing when the sensor is placed at the drop position (the detection information of the detection sensors A to F stored last time and the detection information acquired this time), the detection information is the same if it is normal. By comparing the detection information of (range), it is possible to detect the failure of the detection sensors A to F or the breakage of the detected portion 641c.

  In the fourth control example, a configuration is used in which the previous detection information (pocket arranged at the previous drop position) and the current detection information (pocket arranged at the current drop position) are compared. Detection information acquired at three or more timings (for example, this time, the previous time, the timing when the pocket was placed at the previous drop time) may be compared. The presence or absence of can be determined.

  Further, in the fourth control example, the detection information (output value) of the detection sensors A to F used for specifying the pocket of the rotating member 640 is used, or the detection sensor A to F is broken or the detected portion 641 c is damaged. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately acquire detection information for detecting an abnormality in the detection sensors A to F or the detected part 641c. Therefore, the processing load by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  The configuration for detecting the failure of the detection sensors A to F or the breakage of the detected portion 641c is the combination of the detection result obtained when the pocket was placed at the drop position last time, and this time the pocket is dropped. The present invention is not limited to a mode in which the presence or absence of abnormality is determined by comparing with a combination of detection results acquired at the time of being arranged at a position. For example, the arrangement pattern of the detected portion 641c is stored (stored) in advance. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which it is determined whether or not an output value (detection information) output from at least one of the detection sensors A to F matches an arrangement pattern stored in advance. Even if comprised in this way, there can exist an effect similar to this 4th control example.

  Further, based on the output values (detection information) of the detection sensors A to F stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw, prediction detection information is generated by predicting at least a part of the detection information stored next time, and the prediction detection is performed. It may be configured to determine whether or not the information matches the detection information stored next time.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) in the fourth control example is different from the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example in place of the processes of S3209 to S3211. It is different in that the process is executed, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) in the fourth control example is started, first, the processes of S3201 to S3208 are executed as in the first control example. Then, if it is determined in the processing of S3208 that it is to be added (S3208: Yes), a pocket that falls within the dropable range is specified from the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 (S3231). Here, the timing at which the pitching device 650 performs the pitching operation (throwing the ball B onto the holding piece 677) is 50 seconds after the start of the roulette chance effect (70 seconds from the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”). After). A period from when the ball B is thrown to when the ball B is dropped through the swinging motion on the holding piece 677 is about 7 seconds to 10 seconds. For this reason, for example, when the processing of S3231 is executed 5 seconds after the “renso mode suggestion effect” is started, the pitching device 650 performs a pitching operation 65 seconds later, and 72 seconds to 75 seconds later. It can be determined that the sphere B falls. Then, the rotating member 640 rotates at a rotation speed capable of moving by one pocket per second. For this reason, in this specific example, the ball B drops after the rotation of 72 to 75 pockets (that is, 12 to 15 pockets after the pocket currently placed at the drop position). Then it is determined. In the process of S3231, seven pockets including a margin are determined as the dropable range. For example, in the above specific example, the 8th to 17th pockets are determined as the dropable range. That is, a margin of two pieces is taken before and after.

  When the processing of S3231 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a holding ball that is a big hit in the “preparation mode” (when the time reduction state counter is greater than 0) (S3232). In the process of S3232, if it is determined that there is a holding ball that is a probable big hit in the “preparation mode” (S3232: Yes), the pocket specified in the process of S3231 is selected as the added position (S3234), and the process of S3212 Migrate to

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3232 that there is no reserved ball that is a probable big hit during the preparation mode (S3232: No), a pocket different from the pocket specified in the processing of S3231 is selected as the additional position (S3233). ), The process proceeds to S3212.

  After the process of S3212, the process of S3212 and the process of S3213 are executed similarly to the first control example, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) of this control example, when it is determined in the process of S3232 that there is a reserved ball that is a probable big hit in the “preparation mode” (that is, in the roulette chance effect). , When the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket), the pocket that falls within the dropable range specified in the processing of S3231 is selected as the additional position. As a result, the pocket that can fall can be added as a hit position, so there are many hit pockets (lit pockets) in the range that can fall when the ball B is dropped (roulette chance production). Will be placed. As a result, it becomes easy to drop the sphere B into the hit pocket (lit pocket).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3232 that there is no reserved ball that is a probable big hit during the preparation mode (that is, in the case of the roulette chance effect, the ball B comes off and falls into the pocket), the identification in the processing of S3231 The pocket which is different from the pocket which becomes the fallable range is selected as the additional position. As a result, the pocket that falls within the fallable range is not added as a hit position, so the pocket that falls out of the fallable range (pocket that is unlit) when dropping the ball B (roulette chance production) Many will be placed. As a result, it becomes easy to drop the sphere B into the disengagement pocket (pocket that is turned off).

  Thus, in the special figure 2 winning command process 4 (see FIG. 211) in the fourth control example, the range in which the ball B can drop in the roulette chance effect is calculated based on the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650. The 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 are divided into a range where the ball B can fall (first region) and a range where the ball B does not fall (difficult) (second region). Classification.

  Then, based on the determination result of whether there is a hold that becomes a probable big hit during the preparation mode, that is, the determination result of whether the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket or the release pocket by the roulette chance effect, Since the area to be added is set to either the first area or the second area, even if the frequency of the effect of adding (adding) the winning pocket is increased, the ball B is appropriately selected for the lottery result of the special symbol. Can be dropped.

  In the fourth control example, as the first area that is the dropable range of the ball B, a range that is more than five that is the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers) that can be designated by the player (that is, the pocket 7). It is configured to set the number of pieces). Thus, even if the player sets the lucky number to five consecutive pockets, and the five consecutive pockets are all included in the dropable range (first region), the dropable range (first At least one out-of-area pocket can be set in one area. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately drop the ball B with respect to the lottery result of the special symbol.

  Next, details of the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the variation display setting process 4 (S1652) in the fourth control example, the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is executed instead of the process in S3304 with respect to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. The other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the variation display setting process 4 (S1652) in the present control example, as in the first control example described above, when it is determined in the process of S3301 that the variation start flag 223c is on (S3301: Yes), the process starts from S3302. The process of S3303 is executed. Then, the variation pattern selection process 4 is executed (S3331), the process proceeds to the process of S3305, the processes of S3306 to S3310 are executed as in the first control example, and this process ends. Note that the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a process for selecting a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Details of the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The flowchart in FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the above-described variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331). This variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a modification of part of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 206) in the third control example. Specifically, it is different in that the process related to the upper swing effect (S6131 to S6135) is executed instead of the process related to the chance eye effect (S6106, S6108 to S6110), and the other The point is the same. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the third control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331), first, it is determined whether or not the short-time state flag 223o is on (S6101). In the process of S6101, when it is determined that the time reduction state flag 223o is off (S6101: No), the normal effect mode is determined in the same manner as the variation pattern process in the third control example (see FIG. 206). (S6102 to S6104), a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined effect mode is set (S6111), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6101 that the time-short state flag 223o is on (S6101: Yes), the table for consecutive resorts (the variation pattern selection table 222a5 during consecutive resorts) is read from the variation pattern selection table 222a. (S6105). Then, the value of the effect counter 223sw is read out (S6131), and the effect mode is determined based on the read range change pattern selection table 222a5 and the value of the effect counter 223sw (S6107).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off and the effect mode determined in the process of S6107 is the upper effect mode (S6132). If it is determined in the process of S6132 that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (that is, the upper swing effect is already being executed) or the upper swing effect is not determined in the process of S6107 ( (S6132: No), the display variation pattern command for notifying the normal jackpot effect is set as the effect mode (S6111), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6132 that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off and the upper swing effect is determined (S6132: Yes), the upper swing effect flag 223qw is turned on. The setting is made (S6133), and the upper swing motion is set (S6134). By setting the upper swing operation in the process of S6134, the lift body 330 of the upper lift unit 300 is moved up and down based on the upper swing effect table 222b8 of the operation scenario table 222b described above.

  Thereafter, the upper swing effect timer 223pw is initialized to 0 (S6135), a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined effect mode is set (S6111), and this process ends.

  Thus, in the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) in the present control example, when the upper swing effect is determined (S6132: Yes), the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 is set to move up and down. At the same time, the upper swing effect timer 223pw is initialized to zero. Using the upper swing effect timer 223pw, the elapsed time from the start of the upper swing effect is measured, and when a predetermined time (1.4 seconds or 2.8 seconds) has elapsed, the upper lift unit 300 is again measured. The upper swinging motion for moving the lifting / lowering body 330 up and down can be executed.

  Next, details of the upper swing effect process (S1651) in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The upper swing effect process (S1651) is performed for a predetermined time (in this control example, from the start of the upper swing effect when the upper swing effect is determined (started) in the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) described above. 1.4 seconds and 2.8 seconds), and the upper swing motion is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the upper swing effect process (S1651), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is started (S6201). If it is determined in the process of S6201 that the big hit game has been started (S6201: Yes), the upper swing effect has started, but after that, the big hit game has started due to the occurrence of the big hit due to the hit short fluctuation. In this case, the upper swing effect flag 223qw is set to OFF in order to end the upper swing effect (S6202), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6201 that the big hit game has not been started (S6201: No), it is then determined whether or not the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (S6203).

  If it is determined in the process of S6203 that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off (S6203: No), the upper swing effect is not started, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (S6203: Yes), the process proceeds to S6204 to execute the upper swing effect.

  In the process of S6204, 1 is added to the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw (S6204). The upper swing effect process (S1651) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 209) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 described above. Therefore, the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is added every 1 ms by the process of S6204.

  When the processing of S6204 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw after the addition is 1400 (S6205). That is, it is determined whether 1.4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the upper swing effect.

  In the process of S6205, if it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw after the addition is 1400 (S6205: Yes), the upper and lower lifting units 330 of the upper lift unit 300 are moved up and down to move up and down. The swing operation is set (S6206), and the process proceeds to S6207.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is not 1400 (S6205), the process of S6206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6207. In the process of S6207, it is determined whether or not the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207). That is, it is determined whether or not 2.8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the upper swing effect.

  If it is determined in the processing of S6207 that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207: Yes), the upper swing effect flag 223qw is turned off because it is the end timing of the upper swing effect. After setting (S6208), the process proceeds to S6209.

  In the process of S6209, it is determined whether or not a big hit change is being executed (S6209). When it is determined that the big hit change is being executed in the process of S6209 (S6209: Yes), the upper swing operation is set (S6210).

  On the other hand, in the process of S6209, when it is determined that the big hit change is not executed (S6209: No), the process of S6210 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Here, the upper swing effect in the present control example is an effect in which the upper swing operation in which the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 moves up and down is executed up to three times as described above. If the upper swing motion is executed three times, it is limited to the case where a big hit is made thereafter. The upper swing motion is executed three times to notify the player that the jackpot has been won. it can.

  The processing of S6209 is already executed in the upper swing effect of the first time (immediately after the start of the upper swing effect) and the second time (1.4 after the upper swing effect is started). This is a case where the upper swinging operation is performed after 2 seconds). In this case, if the big hit change is being executed, the upper swing operation is set to execute the third swing operation (2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect). (S6210).

  On the other hand, if the big hit change is not executed (S6209: No), the upper swing effect is not set and the process is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a problem that the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is executed three times is executed even though it is not a big hit.

  As described above, the upper swing effect executed by the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331 in FIG. 213) and the upper swing effect process (S1651 in FIG. 214) of the fourth control example is output from the main controller 110. The first upper swing motion is executed based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the second upper swing motion is performed based on the elapse of a predetermined time (1.4 seconds) after the upper swing effect is executed. Executed. Then, if a special symbol that won the jackpot is changed when a predetermined time (1.4 seconds) has passed since the second upward swing motion was executed, the third upward swing motion is performed. Is configured to run.

  As a result, a special pattern fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is created with an upper rocking effect constituted by an operation mode (upper rocking movement) that is executed a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval). Can be executed without being affected by.

  Accordingly, as in the “upper middle fluctuation (fluctuation time: 3 seconds)” selected by the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a5 during the continuous play, three upper swing operations are completed during one change as the upper swing effect. In addition to the above case, an upper swing effect is started by “outside short fluctuation (variation time 0.2 seconds)”, which is different from the fluctuation in which the upper rocking effect is started. ")" Can be executed even when the upper swing effect is changed 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect.

  Therefore, a notification that notifies that a predetermined lottery result (big hit) has been won by executing a predetermined operation mode (upper swinging operation) a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval). An effect (upper swing effect) can be executed across a plurality of changes, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, even when a configuration that does not store a lottery of special symbols (a configuration without a so-called hold storage function) is used, such as the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, an effect that associates a variation of special symbols multiple times. Can be executed.

  Note that the configuration of the fourth control example may be used for the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for storing a special symbol lottery (winning information) (configuration for holding and storing). For example, a third upward swing motion is executed. At the timing of the determination, it is determined whether there is winning information that has been won in the jackpot in the winning information that is stored on hold, and if there is winning information that has been won in the jackpot, the third upward swing motion is performed. It may be configured to be executed. Thereby, the frequency with which the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times can be increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, the second upper swing operation is always executed 1.4 seconds after the upper swing effect is started. For example, the upper swing effect is started. It is determined whether the special symbol is changing when 1.4 seconds have elapsed since then, and when it is determined that the special symbol is changing, the second upward swing motion is executed. Also good. Thereby, it can be made to recognize that the upper rocking | fluctuation effect in which an upper rocking | fluctuation operation is performed with respect to a player is an effect relevant to the fluctuation | variation display of a special symbol, and can improve a production effect. effective.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 in the roulette chance effect is calculated in advance during the increase effect, and the additional position of the winning pocket is determined. That is, when the ball B is thrown, the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation performed on the upper part of the movable piece 677 is reduced, and the timing (period) that is natural when the ball B is dropped is calculated backward. The position where the winning pocket is added is determined from the period calculated in reverse and the result of the current roulette chance effect (whether or not to shift to the “renso mode”). Here, after the amplitude of the swinging motion of the sphere B is reduced, it waits until the pocket type corresponding to the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is arranged at the fall position, and the corresponding pocket type is When the configuration is such that the ball B is dropped at the timing at which it is placed at the fall position, the state where the corresponding pocket type is not placed at the drop position continues for a long time, which may cause the ball B to stop before dropping the ball B. There is. In other words, there is a possibility that the ball B will not be dropped into the pocket even though the ball B is stationary, resulting in a very unnatural appearance.

  On the other hand, in this control example, a section in which the sphere B can be dropped (a section arranged at the drop position when the period of the swinging motion of the sphere B becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period) In the case of increasing the hitting pocket by increasing the effect in advance at the start of the “mode suggestion effect”, the distribution of the hit pocket and the disengagement pocket in the section where the ball B can be dropped (addition is determined) In this case, whether or not to newly set a hit pocket for the section) is determined according to the result of the effect (whether the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket or dropped into the off-going pocket). By configuring in this way, in the section where the ball B can be dropped, it is possible to reliably arrange the type of pocket corresponding to the effect result. Therefore, the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the sphere B becomes a predetermined period (1 second) or less, and the sphere B can be surely dropped into the target pocket before the swinging motion of the sphere B stops. it can. Therefore, the sphere B can be dropped with a natural appearance and with high accuracy.

  In the fourth control example, when the detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are acquired, the detection results are arranged in the next pocket (current drop position). It is configured to hold until the pocket placed in the fall position next to the pocket is placed in the fall position. And it was set as the structure which discriminate | determines the presence or absence of abnormality by comparing the hold | maintained detection result and the new detection result acquired by arrange | positioning the next pocket to a fall position. That is, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are detection results of continuous (adjacent) pockets. Thereby, the breakage of the detection sensors A to F (or the breakage of the detected part 641c) can be detected.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, as one aspect of the entertainment effect in the “renso mode”, the player's interest is improved by the effect using the accessory (upper lifting unit 300). Specifically, the elevator 330 of the upper elevator unit 300 is configured to be able to execute an effect of moving up and down one or more times at predetermined time intervals (1.4 second intervals). The number of operations of the elevating body 330 varies depending on whether or not it is a big hit, and the number of operations is two or less in the case of losing, and three times of raising and lowering operations are allowed only in the case of a big hit. This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the number of times of lifting and lowering operation of the lifting body 330, so that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous in the “renso mode”. .

  As long as the jackpot is not started, the effect that the lifting body 330 performs the raising / lowering operation (upper swing effect) is the number of times determined regardless of the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (even if the variation time has elapsed). The lifting / lowering operation is continued until a predetermined time interval (1.4 second interval) is executed. Accordingly, as in the “upper middle fluctuation (fluctuation time: 3 seconds)” selected by the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a5 during the continuous play, three upper swing operations are completed during one change as the upper swing effect. In addition to the above case, an upper swing effect is started by “outside short fluctuation (variation time 0.2 seconds)”, which is different from the fluctuation in which the upper rocking effect is started. ")" Can be executed even when the upper swing effect is changed 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect. Therefore, a notification that notifies that a predetermined lottery result (big hit) has been won by executing a predetermined operation mode (upper swinging operation) a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval). An effect (upper swing effect) can be executed across a plurality of changes, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, it is possible to drop the ball B during execution of the “ream mode suggestion effect” (the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle). In the case where the hitting pocket is newly set in advance, the position of the new hitting pocket is determined in consideration of the section where the ball B falls. Whether there is a change in the section in which the ball B will fall at a predetermined timing in the “ream mode suggestion” production (for example, the start time of the roulette chance production or the pitch timing of the ball B by the pitching device 650). It is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines. Then, it is predicted at a section where the ball B is predicted to fall when the hit pocket is newly set, and at a predetermined timing (for example, the start time of the roulette chance effect or the pitch timing of the ball B by the pitching device 650). When the section where the sphere B is predicted to fall is shifted, the shift may be corrected. As a method of correcting the deviation, for example, by changing the rotational speed of the rotating member 640, the section in which the sphere B can actually fall is matched with the section predicted when the hit pocket is added. Alternatively, the ball B can actually fall by shifting the pitching timing by the pitching device 650 from a predetermined timing (that is, 70 seconds after the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”). The section may be configured to match the section predicted at the time when the hit pocket is added. By configuring in this way, the sphere B is more surely natural in appearance (the oscillating motion period of the sphere B is less than a predetermined period and the sphere B is not stationary). Can be dropped in the pocket.

  In this control example, when the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are acquired, the next pocket (the pocket arranged at the fall position next to the pocket arranged at the current fall position) falls as the detection result. It is configured to determine whether there is an abnormality by holding it until it is placed at the position and comparing it with the new detection result acquired by placing the next pocket at the drop position. The determination method is not limited to this. For example, each time the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are acquired, the combination of the detection results of the pockets to be arranged next at the drop position is predicted in advance from the arrangement of the rotating member 640 specified by the detection results. It is good also as a structure. In other words, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors for the pockets to be placed next to the drop position may be read from the rotation position determination table 222c and stored in the RAM 223. When the next pocket is actually placed at the drop position, the combination of the output of the detection sensor predicted in advance (stored in the RAM 223) matches the combination of the output of the actual detection sensor. It may be configured to determine whether or not. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is an abnormality such as breakage of each of the detection sensors A to F and breakage of the detected portion 641c, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. . In addition, for example, all the combinations of outputs of the detection sensors A to F are stored in the pocket arrangement order, and a detection result corresponding to the pocket arrangement order each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position. It is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines. With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine whether there is an abnormality in the detection sensors A to F and the detected portion 641c. Furthermore, for example, when the rotating member 640 makes one round, it may be configured to determine whether or not at least a part of the detected portion 641c is damaged by determining the number of times the detected portion 641c is detected. . As described above, the detected portion 641c is provided in 16 of the 30 pockets. For this reason, when the rotating member 640 makes one round, each of the detection sensors A to F should be in an H output state 16 times. Under this circumstance, if it is determined that the number of H outputs per round is less than 16, any of the detected parts 641c cannot be detected by the detection sensors A to F due to damage or the like. There is a high possibility. Therefore, in this case, by notifying the abnormality, it is possible to quickly cope with a malfunction such as damage to the detected portion 641c. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which compares the frequency | count that each detection sensor A-F will be in the state of H output in the 1st round time point, and discriminate | determines whether the frequency | count corresponds. Since the number of times that the output is in the H state during one revolution (the number of times each detected portion 641c is detected) should be common to all detection sensors, if the number of detections does not match, either detection sensor It can be determined that a malfunction such as a failure has occurred. Therefore, the malfunction of the detection sensors A to F can be easily determined.

  In the fourth control example, in the “renso mode suggestion effect” with a fixed effect time, the rotation member 640 is rotated at the start of the effect, and a rough section in which the ball B falls is predicted from the effect time and the like. However, the production time and the timing for starting the rotation of the rotating member 640 need not be fixed. For example, the control of the fourth control example can be applied even when the production time of the “renso mode suggestion production” has a variation and one production time is determined by lottery. In other words, when the effect time is determined, a rough section in which the sphere B is dropped may be predicted based on the effect time and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640. Similarly, in the case where a plurality of effect patterns in which one or both of the rotation speed of the rotation member 640 and the rotation speed are different are provided, the rotation time is started from the effect time. It is good also as a structure which estimates the rough area where the ball | bowl B is dropped from the rotational speed of the rotation member 640 by calculating backward the time until the ball | bowl B is thrown. With this configuration, when a winning pocket is added, it is possible to arrange a new winning pocket so that the type of pocket that drops the ball B is surely included in the predicted section in consideration of the production result. it can. Therefore, in each “renso mode suggestion effect”, the sphere B can be dropped to the type of pocket corresponding to the effect result. Furthermore, even in the case where the timing at which the production time in the “ream mode suggestion effect” is determined is slower than the timing at which the rotation member 640 starts the rotation operation, the control of the fourth control example is performed. Can be applied. That is, at the timing at which the production time is determined, a section where the ball B may fall is roughly predicted from the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, and the type corresponding to the current presentation result for the predicted section. What is necessary is just to set it as the structure which carries out the addition of a hit pocket so that a pocket may be arrange | positioned. Thereby, before the ball | bowl B completely stops rocking | fluctuation operation | movement, the ball | bowl B can be reliably dropped to the pocket corresponding to an effect result.

<Fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 225. In the first control example described above, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is moved to the connection position when a part of the big hit (the big hit where the opening pattern A is set) is made, and the first variable is performed. The ball that won the winning device 82a was used as a flow-down passage for flowing into the second passage forming member 422. In addition to this, in the present control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is configured to be moved as an effect suggesting an expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Thereby, the interest of a player can be improved.

  Further, in the first control example described above, when the sphere B is dropped in the “ream mode suggestion effect”, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is performed after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the sphere B becomes sufficiently small. And the ball B is held on the holding piece 677 until the pocket where the ball B can be dropped is a position before the drop position (0.2 seconds before the drop position is reached). .

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example is configured such that a drop position (pocket) where the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect is determined in advance. And according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it was configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as a hit position (whether or not to turn it on). As a result, the sphere B may be dropped with respect to a predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

  Further, in the first control example described above, the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 is constant (70 seconds after the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”). On the other hand, in this control example, in the roulette chance effect, a period for accepting the operation of the frame button 22 (for example, 3 seconds in one roulette opportunity effect) is provided, and the player operates the frame button 22. The ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 when it is detected. In addition, in a period during which the frame button 22 can be received, a pitching depressing effect (see FIG. 216) for prompting the player to press the frame button 22 is executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by the pitch pressing effect, the pitching device 650 pitches the ball B. Thereby, since the player can throw the ball B onto the rotating member 640 at an arbitrary timing, the player's willingness to participate in the roulette chance effect can be improved.

  It should be noted that the timing for starting the pitching depressing effect (period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted) is determined based on the rotational position of the rotating member 640. Thereby, the pitching press effect can be started at a timing at which it is easy to drop to a predetermined drop position (pocket) in the pitching press effect. In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 1.5 seconds) after the above-described pitch pressing effect is started, the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 is delayed. Configured. Thereby, the timing at which the ball B is thrown in the throwing press effect can be limited. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that the ball B falls into a pocket other than a predetermined pocket.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the RAM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The point is that some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 215, the effect aspect of the notice effect by the left swing unit 500 in this control example will be described. As described above in the first control example, in the “normal mode” of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit based on the number (number) displayed on the effect unit 331 of the upper lifting unit 300. Notification of whether or not. In addition to this, the present control example is configured such that an effect in which the left swing unit 500 can be moved up and down (left swing effect) can be executed as an effect suggesting an expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big hit. Has been. As the left swing effect, a first left swing effect with a relatively low expectation level for a big hit and a second left swing effect with a high expectation level for a big hit compared to the first left swing effect At least two types are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 215 (a), in the first left swing effect and the second left swing effect, first, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is moved from the release position to the release position and the connection position. Is moved up to an intermediate position. Thereafter, in the first left swing effect, the left swing unit 500 is moved down from the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the release position.

  On the other hand, in the second left swing effect, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the ascending operation is performed from the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the connection position. Then, it is lowered from the connection position to the release position.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, the left swing effect (first operation) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is movable according to the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. A left swing effect or a second left swing effect) is executed. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the highly anticipated second left swing effect is executed (ie, whether the left swing unit 500 moves up from the intermediate position). Improve the interest of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 216, a pitching press effect in the fifth control example will be described. The roulette chance effect in this control example is executed in the order of a pitch press preparation effect, a pitch press effect, and a swing effect. As shown in FIG. 216 (a), in the pitch depressing preparation effect, characters “throwing chance!” Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying this pitching press preparation effect, the player can recognize that the effect of pitching the ball B (throwing press effect) is executed by pressing the frame button 22. Although details will be described later, the timing of transition from the pitching press preparation effect to the pitching press effect (that is, the timing at which the pitching press effect is displayed) is based on the position information of the rotating member 640 and the information of the drop position storage area 223ex. Determined. Thereby, the pitching press effect can be started so that the pocket to be dropped during the execution of the pitching press effect for a total of 3 seconds (during the effect) is arranged at the drop position.

  As shown in FIG. 216 (b), the pitch depressing effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for urging the player to press the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is pressed during execution (displaying) of this pitching press effect, the ball B is pitched from the pitching device 650, and the process shifts to the swing effect (see FIG. 216 (c)). On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is not pressed during execution (displaying) of the pitching press effect, the ball B is pitched from the pitching device 650 after a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed, and the process shifts to the swing effect. (See FIG. 216 (c)).

  If the frame button 22 is pressed 1.5 seconds before the pitching press effect is started, the ball B is thrown after 1.5 seconds have passed since the pitching press effect is started. (In other words, the pitch is delayed). On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed after 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the pitch pressing effect, the ball B is pitched at the pressing timing. Thereby, the timing at which the ball B is thrown can be limited to the second half 1.5 seconds of the 3 seconds. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the sphere B falls into a pocket other than a predetermined pocket.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 in this control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 118) in that the contents of the left swing unit table 222b3 are partially changed. The other contents of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (a), the left swing unit table 222b3 in the present control example executes the first left swing unit table 222b3a for executing the first swing effect and the second swing effect. A second left swing unit table 222b3b is provided. In the left swing unit table 222b3, setting values (operation speed (pps), operation to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the setting progress based on the operation scenario. The number of steps and the operation direction) are defined.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 217 (b), the specified contents of the first left swing unit table 222b3a will be described. As shown in FIG. 217 (b), in the first left swing unit table 222b3a, the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g indicates that the left swing unit 500 is moved from the release position (origin position) to the release position and the connection position. Are associated with each other (the forward movement). Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the left swing unit 500 is driven in the first left swing effect. Note that 100 steps means the number of steps from the release position to the intermediate position.

  Here, as described above, the operation speed (pps) indicates the frequency (number of outputs per second) at which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) instructing one-step operation to the corresponding drive motor. . Therefore, the time required to move the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 at the operation speed of 200 pps for 100 steps to be displaced from the release position to the intermediate position is 100/200 seconds (0.5 seconds).

  The value “02H” of the action pointer 223g is associated with an action for stopping (stopping) the left swing unit 500 at the intermediate position. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 1000 is defined as the operation step, and “stop” is defined as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that the stop command is continuously issued 1000 times at an operation speed of 200 pps. Thereby, the left swing unit 1000 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 5 seconds (1000 times / 200 pps).

  The value “03H” of the action pointer 223g is associated with an action (return path action) for lowering the left swing unit 500 from the intermediate position to the release position (origin position). Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from the intermediate position to the release position over 0.5 seconds.

  The value “04H” of the action pointer 223g is associated with END data. By reading this END data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Next, the contents of the second left swing unit table 222b3b will be described with reference to FIG. 217 (c). As shown in FIG. 217 (c), the value “01H” of the motion pointer 223g in the second left swing unit table 222b3b is released as in the first left swing unit table 222b3a. An operation for moving up from a position (origin position) to an intermediate position (outward path operation) is associated. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is raised from the release position to the intermediate position over 0.5 seconds (100 steps / 200 pps).

  The value “02H” of the action pointer 223g is associated with an action for stopping (stopping) the left swing unit 500 at the intermediate position. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 500 is specified as the operation step, and “stop” is specified as the operation direction. That is, it is specified that a stop command is continuously output 500 times at an operation speed of 200 pps. Thereby, the left swing unit 500 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 2.5 seconds (500 times / 200 pps).

  The value “03H” of the motion pointer 223g is associated with a motion (forward motion) for raising the left swing unit 500 from the intermediate position to the connection position. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is raised from the intermediate position to the connection position over 0.5 seconds.

  The value “04H” of the action pointer 223g is associated with an action for stopping (stopping) the left swing unit 500 at the connection position. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 300 is defined as the operation step, and “stop” is defined as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that the stop command is continuously issued 300 times at an operation speed of 200 pps. Thereby, the left swing unit 500 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 1.5 seconds (300 times / 200 pps).

  The value “05H” of the action pointer 223g is associated with an action (return path action) for lowering the left swing unit 500 from the connection position to the release position (origin position). Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from the connection position to the release position over 1 second.

  The value “06H” of the action pointer 223g is associated with END data. By reading this END data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Next, the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 118B) in the effect counter 223ax, the throwing press effect setting flag 223bx, the throwing press effect flag 223cx, and the delayed throwing flag 223dx. And the drop position storage area 223ex are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The effect counter 223ax is a counter used for selection of various effects (such as “left-swing effect”) and various lotteries in the sound lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. (Refer to FIG. 145), it is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99.

  The pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is a flag used to determine whether or not to set the pitching press effect. This pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is set to ON when it is the start timing of the pitching press effect in the roulette effect in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) (see S2003: Yes in FIG. 222). The pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is referred to in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222), and when it is determined to be on (see S2023: Yes in FIG. 222), the pitching press effect setting process (see FIG. 223). Is executed. Then, in the pitching press effect setting process (see FIG. 223), when the ball B is pitched from the pitching device 650, it is set to off.

  The throwing press effect flag 223cx is a flag for determining whether or not a throwing press effect (see FIG. 216) that prompts the player to press the frame button 22 to throw the ball B is displayed. . This throwing press effect flag 223cx indicates that the throwing press effect is displayed when it is determined in the throwing press effect setting process (see FIG. 223) that it is the throw timing of the ball B (see S6404: Yes in FIG. 223). In addition to being set (see S6406 in FIG. 223), it is set to ON (see S6407 in FIG. 223). The throwing press effect flag 223cx is referred to in the throwing press effect setting process (see FIG. 223), and when it is determined to be on (S6408: Yes in FIG. 223), the frame button 22 is pressed. Then, the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set (see S6414 in FIG. 223), and the process shifts to the swing effect. Even when the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6408: No), the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set based on the elapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in this control example) (see S6414 in FIG. 223) and swings. Transition to production. Although details will be described later, the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set with a delay since the pitching is not permitted for a certain period (1.5 seconds) after the pitching press effect is started. Become.

  The delayed pitching flag 223dx is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed outside the pitching allowable period of the pitching pressing effect (period in which pitching is not allowed). The delayed pitch flag 223dx is set when the frame button 22 is pressed outside the pitching allowable period of the pitch press effect (within 1.5 seconds from the start of the pitch press effect) in the pitch press effect setting process (see FIG. 223). It is set to ON (see S6410 in FIG. 223). In the pitching press effect setting process (see FIG. 223), it is referred whether the delayed pitch flag 223dx is on when the pitching allowable period of the pitching press effect is reached (see S6412 in FIG. 223), and the delayed pitch flag 223dx is on. If it is determined that there is a pitching operation of the pitching device 650. That is, the pitching operation is executed with a delay until the pitching allowable period. Thereafter, the delayed pitch flag 223dx is set to OFF (see S6415 in FIG. 223).

  The drop position storage area 223ex is an area for storing information on a drop position (pocket) where the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect. In this drop position storage area 223ex, in the winning pocket sorting process 5 (see FIG. 224) executed at the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”, the next reserved ball (the special symbol lottery result executed first) is stored. It is determined based on whether or not it is a probable big hit. Specifically, when the next holding ball is a probable big hit, one of the pockets (pockets designated by the player) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223av is set as the drop position (S3122 in FIG. 224). If the next hold is not a big hit, a pocket other than the pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223av is designated as the drop position (see S3123 in FIG. 224). The drop position (pocket) stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is used when determining the start timing of the above-described throwing press effect (see S6404 in FIG. 223) or increasing the hit pocket in the increase effect (see FIG. 224). Reference is made to S3124 and S3221 of FIG.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 219 to 225. First, the drop control process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The drop control process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Similarly to the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example, the drop B ( This is a process for controlling the operation of the holding piece 677. In addition, about the same part as the fall control process (refer FIG. 147) in a 1st control example, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted and only a different part is demonstrated.

  In the drop control process 5 in the fifth control example, first, the processes of S1801 to S1802 are executed in the same manner as the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example. Then, the next pocket is calculated based on the pocket specified in the processing of S1802 (S1831). Here, the next pocket means a pocket arranged at the drop position next to the pocket specified in the process of S1802, for example, when the pocket specified in the process of S1802 is the pocket P1. The pocket P2 is specified as the next pocket. The pocket is calculated with reference to pocket arrangement information (not shown) stored in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the processing of S1831 is completed, next, information on the pocket (pocket for dropping the ball B) stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is acquired (S1832), and then stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. It is determined whether the pocket and the pocket (next pocket) calculated by the processing of S1831 match, that is, whether the pocket placed next at the dropping position is a pocket for dropping the ball B (S1833). ).

  In the process of S1833, when it is determined that the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex matches the pocket calculated by the process of S1831 (S1833: Yes), the process proceeds to S1806. On the other hand, in the process of S1833, if the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex and the pocket calculated by the process of S1831 do not match (S1833: No), then the value of the swing timer 223w is 100. It is determined whether it is less than (corresponding to 0.1 second) (S1834). In the process of S1834, it is determined whether the interval at which H (high) is output from the sphere detection sensor 679, that is, whether the half of the period in which the sphere B swings on the movable piece 677 is less than 0.1 second. Yes. This 0.1 second means that the ball B is movable piece 677 until H (high) is next output from the ball detection sensor 679 (until the timing at which the next ball B can be dropped can be set). It is set as a value indicating a state where there is a possibility of stopping at above.

  In the process of S1834, when it is determined that the value of the swing timer 223w is 100 or more (S1834: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the swing timer 223w is smaller than 100, that is, the ball B may stop on the movable piece 677 (S1834: Yes), the entire lighting position storage area 223m Is cleared (all bits are set to L) (S1835), and the process proceeds to S1806.

  Here, the processing of S1835 described above will be specifically described. As described above, the lighting position storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the states (lighting state or light-off state) of the lighting regions A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 (see FIG. 97). The lighting of each LED of the rear LED 625 is controlled according to the information stored in the lighting position storage area 223m. Therefore, by clearing all the information in the lighting position storage area 223m in the processing of S1835 (all bits are set to L), all the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are controlled to be turned off. .

  In the process of S1806, an operation setting is performed in which the effect ball (ball B) is dropped after 100 steps, and then the ball dropable flag 223fv is set to OFF (S1807), and this process ends.

  In this way, in the drop control process 5 (see FIG. 219) of the fifth control example, the pocket for dropping the ball B in the roulette chance effect is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex in advance, and then placed in the drop position. When it is determined that the pocket to be stored is a pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, the ball B is dropped. Thereby, since the sphere B can be appropriately dropped with respect to the preset pocket, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the sphere B falls into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

  In the fifth control example, after the swing effect is executed, the condition for dropping the ball B is not satisfied (the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex and the pocket calculated by the process of S1831). (Without matching (next pocket)), the amplitude of the sphere B swinging on the movable piece 677 has a predetermined amplitude (in this control example, the amplitude is such that half of the amplitude period is 0.1 second). ) When it becomes smaller, all the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the back LED 625 are set to the extinguished state, and thereafter, the process of dropping the ball B (abnormal process) is executed. As a result, the situation in which the ball B cannot be dropped into the target pocket (pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex) during the swing effect continues, so that the ball B can move to the movable piece 677 during the swing effect. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation where the player stops, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the swing effect executed based on winning the jackpot, when the process of S1835 described above is executed (all the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are set to the off state), The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect for notifying that the jackpot has been won after the swing effect has ended. Thereby, even when the ball B cannot be dropped, it can be made to appear as one mode of notification in the roulette chance effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the fifth control example, when the pocket placed next at the drop position is a pocket stored in the drop position storage area 222ex, the drop operation of the sphere B is set. The pockets identified based on the values (H (high) or L (low)) output from the detection sensors A to F and the rotational position determination table 222c, and the pockets stored in the drop position storage area 222ex. It may be calculated how many pockets are separated, and the timing for setting the falling action of the ball B may be set based on the calculation result. With this configuration, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the fifth control example, the number of steps output by the motor control IC (motor driver) of the rotation motor 631 is used to determine whether it is the timing to execute the dropping operation of the ball B. Other configurations may be used. For example, the determination may be made by a counter that is updated each time the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  Next, the variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variable display setting process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, similarly to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. In addition, about the same part as the fluctuation display setting process (refer FIG. 162) in a 1st control example, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted and only a different part is demonstrated.

  In the variable display setting process 5 in the fifth control example, first, after performing the processes of S3301 to S3305 in the same manner as the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) of the first control example described above, the left swing unit is used as a notice effect. The notice effect setting process for setting the effect to move 500 is executed (S3321), and the process proceeds to S3306. Details of the notice effect setting processing (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S3301, also when the fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S3301: No), the process proceeds to S3306. Thereafter, the processes of S3306 to S3310 are executed, and the variation display setting process 5 is terminated.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 221, the notice effect setting process (S3321) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The notice effect setting process (S3321) in the fifth control example is a process in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 220) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. .

  In the notice effect setting process (S3321), a process for setting a notice effect for moving the left swing unit 500 is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223ax. When the notice effect setting process (S3321) is executed, first, the value of the current effect counter 223ax is acquired, and it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223ax is 0 to 9 (S6301). If the value of the effect counter 223ax is not 0 to 9 (S6301: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the effect counter 223ax is 0 to 9 in the process of S6301 (S6301: Yes), the process proceeds to S6302 in order to set a notice effect that moves the left swing unit 500. As described above, since the effect counter 223ax is a loop counter of 0 to 198, a notice effect for moving the left swing unit 500 is set (executed) with a probability of 10/199 (ratio of about 5%).

  In the process of S6302, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current special symbol is a big hit (S6302), and if the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is out (S6302: No), the first left swing unit table 222b3a. “01H” is set to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to (see FIG. 217 (b)) (S6303), and the process proceeds to S6307. By the process of S6303, the first left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is movable to the intermediate position is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6302 that the current lottery result is a big hit (S6302: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223ax acquired in S6301 is a multiple of 4 (S6304). In the process of S6304, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223ax is a multiple of 4 (S6304: Yes), the motion pointer 223g corresponding to the first left swing unit table 222b3a (see FIG. 217 (b)) The value is set to “01H” (S6306), and the process proceeds to S6307. On the other hand, if the value of the effect counter ax is not a multiple of 4 in the process of S6304 (S6304: No), the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the second left swing unit table 222b3b (see FIG. 217 (c)) is set. “01H” is set (S6305), and the process proceeds to S6307. In the process of S6307 to which the process proceeds after any of the processes of S6303, S6305, and S6306 is executed, the operation content corresponding to the set operation pointer 223g is read and the operation content is notified to the motor driver (instruction) ) Is set (S6307), and the process is terminated.

  When the process of S6307 is executed via the process of S6306, the first left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is movable to the intermediate position is executed, and the process of S6307 is executed via the process of S6305. Then, the second left swing effect is performed in which the left swing unit 500 is movable to the connection position. The ratio at which each swing effect is set, as set in the process of S6304, is the first left swing effect with a probability of 3/4 and the second left swing effect with a probability of 1/4. Is set. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out and the notice effect is set, the first left swing effect is set with a high probability (1/4) and the first effect with a low probability (1/4). 2 Left swing effect is set. On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit and the notice effect is set, only the second left swing effect is set. Therefore, the second left swing effect is an effect with a high expectation level for a big hit, and the first left swing effect is an effect with a low expectation level for a big hit). Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 moves to the intermediate position, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the first passage forming member 520 moves further from the intermediate position to the connecting position. That is, attention can be paid to the operation of the first passage forming member 520, so that it is possible to improve the interest during the player's notice effect.

  Note that the selection ratio of the notice effect is not limited to the form of the present control example, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a win, the first left swing effect may be selected at a predetermined rate (for example, 1/10), or when the special symbol is off You may comprise so that a 2nd left swing effect may not be selected.

  Moreover, the aspect of the notice effect with the operation of the left swing unit 500 is not limited to two types, and may be more diversified. By diversifying the aspect of the notice effect, a variety of effects can be realized, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Different modes of the notice effect include, for example, a mode in which the intermediate position (or connection position) and the release position are reciprocated multiple times, a mode in which the intermediate position is stopped at different intermediate positions (for example, 50 steps from the release position), and an intermediate position. The mode etc. from which the stop time differs in are mentioned. Conversely, the mode of the notice effect may be reduced to one type. In this case, the data amount of the left swing unit table 222b3 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the fifth control example, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit by moving the left swinging unit 500 including the flow path through which the ball won in the first specific prize opening 82 passes during the big hit. The production suggesting the degree of expectation can be executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to make common the member which comprises the flow path which lets a ball pass, and the member used for production, and can utilize the limited space in the pachinko machine 10 effectively.

  Further, when the left swinging unit 500 having a flow path for passing a ball that has won a prize at the first specific winning port 82 where the ball can be won during the jackpot is a timing other than the jackpot (a timing when the special symbol is changing) Therefore, even if the left swing unit 500 is moved, the ball flow is not affected. That is, the left swing unit 500 can be used as a ball passage for passing a ball during a special game (during a big hit), and as a movable member for production during a normal game (during special symbol fluctuation).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is configured such that the big hit game is executed in a state where the left swing unit 500 is raised from the release position to the connection position. Therefore, for example, as an operation scenario of the left swing unit 500 defined by the left swing unit table 222b3 shown in FIG. 217 (a), an operation scenario that continues to stop at the connection position only when the big hit is won. It may be provided. By configuring in this way, the left swing unit 500 is not only an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big hit, but also as a notification means for notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. It can be used. Moreover, since the frequency | count that the left rocking | swiveling unit 500 moves can be suppressed, failure of a movable member can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the left swing unit 500 is moved as an effect, it is preferable to provide a determination unit that determines whether the left swing unit 500 is normally moving. As a result, it is possible to determine the abnormality of the left swing unit 500 before the big hit game is started, and the situation where the left swing unit 500 cannot be raised to the connection position during the big hit game and becomes abnormal in advance. It becomes possible to prevent (suppress).

  If it is determined that the left swing unit 500 is abnormal when the left swing unit 500 is moved as an effect, the determination result is notified and the left swing unit 500 is displayed during the big hit game. It is good to comprise so that the effect which does not move is performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect during the jackpot game. Here, the left swing unit 500 is provided with a flow-down passage 515 (see FIG. 36), and is configured so that the winning ball is discharged out of the game area while being positioned at the release position. That is, even if the left swing unit 500 is not moved, when a ball wins the first variable winning device 82a, the winning ball normally enters an unexpected position (such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10). Can be discharged).

  As an effect of not moving the left swing unit 500, for example, a big hit game is started with the left swing unit 500 positioned at the release position, and a ball that has won a prize at the first specific winning opening 82 flows down the flow down passage 515. What is necessary is just to comprise so that an effect may be performed in the effect part 422a of the liquid-crystal raising / lowering unit 400 in the state which is not connected with the left rocking | swiveling unit 500. In this case, since the sphere that has flowed down the left swing unit 500 does not pass through the sensor member 422c provided in the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, the progress of the effect displayed on the effect part 422a is determined as the first specific prize opening. Instead of executing on the basis of the ball won in 82, it may be configured to execute by operating the frame button 22, for example. That is, for example, every time the player presses the frame button 22, the design (number) is variably displayed in the rendering unit 422 a, and when the player is stopped and displayed with the lucky number, an effect of notifying the transition to the “preparation mode” is executed. It is good also as a structure.

  Furthermore, until a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the jackpot game ends, the prohibition process may be executed so that the notice effect using the left swing unit 500 is not selected. The fluctuation time during which the period from the end of the notice effect of the left swing unit 500 (6 seconds (see FIG. 217 (c))) to the start of the jackpot game is within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). In the set variation pattern, the prohibition process may be executed so that the notice effect using the left swing unit 500 is not selected. Accordingly, a predetermined interval (for example, 2 seconds) is provided between the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 executed during the big hit game and the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 executed during the normal game. be able to.

  The predetermined interval may be set to an interval that is longer than the retry period that is executed when a malfunction occurs in the movable operation of the left swing unit 500. As a result, even if the retry operation is executed in the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 during the big hit game or the normal game, it affects the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 executed when other conditions are satisfied. Can be suppressed, and an appropriate performance can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 222, the effect setting process 5 (S1613) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The effect setting process 5 (S1613) in the fifth control example is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) instead of the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) in the first control example, and is executed during the roulette chance effect. This is a process for setting a pitching press preparation effect (see FIG. 216 (a)) and a pitching press effect (see FIG. 216 (b)). In addition, about the same part as the effect setting process (refer FIG. 149) in a 1st control example, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted and only a different part is demonstrated.

  When the effect setting process 5 (S1613) is executed, first, after the processes of S2001 and S2002 are executed as in the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) of the first control example described above, the value of the effect timer 223bv is set. Is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the value of the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: Yes), a pitch press preparation effect that is an effect to notify the player that the pitch press effect is started. (See FIG. 216 (a)) is set (S2021), then the increasing effect flag 223cv is set to OFF, the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is set to ON (S2022), and this process is terminated. . In the process of S2003, if it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is not a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: No), the process is directly performed without executing the processes of S2021 and S2022 described above. finish.

  In the process of S2001, if it is determined that the increasing effect flag 223cv is off (S2001: No), it is then determined whether or not the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is on (S2023). If the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is on (S2023: Yes), in the process of S2023, a pitching press effect setting for setting a pitching press effect that is an effect that allows the player to determine the timing of pitching the ball B is set. The process (S2024) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2006. The details of the pitch pressing effect setting process (S2024) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S2023, when the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is off (S2023: No), the process of S2024 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2006. Next, the processing of S2006 to S2017 is executed in the same manner as the effect setting processing (see FIG. 149) of the first control example described above, and then this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to a flowchart of FIG. 223, a pitching press effect setting process (S2024) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The pitching press effect setting process (S2024) in the fifth control example is a process of the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. This pitching press effect setting process (S2024) is a process for setting a pitching press effect that is an effect that allows the player to determine the timing of pitching the ball B in the roulette chance effect by operating the frame button 22. is there.

  When the pitching press effect setting process (S2024) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the pitching press effect flag 223cv is on (S6401), and if the pitching press effect flag 223cx is off (S6401: No). Then, information on the drop position storage area 223ex is acquired (S6402), and information on the rotation position storage area 223u is acquired (S6403). That is, the information on the pocket in which the predetermined ball B is dropped by the process of S6402 is acquired, and the information of the pocket currently arranged at the drop position is acquired by the process of S6403.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is a pitchable timing (S6404). Here, the “renso mode suggestion effect” executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, as with the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, when shifting to the “preparation mode”, the “ream mode suggestion effect” that is a total effect period of 90 seconds. This “renso mode suggestion effect” is an increase effect (effect time 20) that increases (adds) a winning pocket based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a. Second), a roulette chance effect (directing period 65 seconds) for directing whether or not the ball B falls in the winning pocket, and an ending effect (directing period 5 seconds) indicating that the roulette chance effect has ended. ing.

  Furthermore, the roulette chance effect (direction time 65 seconds) described above is the first half in which the effect progresses in accordance with a notification mode indicating that the roulette chance effect has been executed, a notification mode for explaining the roulette chance effect, and a busy notification mode. (Throwing time 42 seconds), throwing press preparation effect (drafting time 5 seconds) and throwing press effect (maximum performance time 3 seconds) are executed, and pitching device 650 throws After the sphere B is oscillated at the upper part of the holding piece 677, the sphere B is composed of a second half portion (effect time 15 seconds) in which the oscillating effect is dropped.

  Here, the pitching press effect (maximum effect time 3 seconds) includes a pitch non-permissible period (1.5 seconds) that does not allow the pitching device 650 to pitch the ball B even if the player operates the frame button 22. The pitching allowable period (1.5 seconds) for allowing the pitching device 650 to pitch the ball B based on the operation of the frame button 22 is configured. In other words, the ball B is not thrown by the pitching device 650 even if the frame button 22 is operated for 1.5 seconds after the pitching press effect is started, and 1.5 times after the pitching press effect is started. Between 2 seconds and 3 seconds is a period in which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated by the player.

  Therefore, the timing at which the ball B can be thrown in the pitching press effect is 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitching press effect at the minimum, and 3 seconds after the start of the pitching press effect (the effect time of the pitching press effect is 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds). If the pitch pressing effect is less than 3 seconds, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated during the pitch pressing effect and the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650, the second half of the roulette chance effect is displayed. The difference is absorbed. As a result, when the player operates the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (within a period of 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the pitching and pressing effect is started), the player immediately instantly operates based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated. Since the ball B is thrown, it is possible to make it possible for the player to determine the pocket in which the ball B falls by himself, and to enhance the effect.

  Although details will be described later, in the fifth control example, if the frame button 22 is operated for 1.5 seconds after the pitch pressing effect is executed, the pitch is thrown at the timing when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. The pitching operation of the device 650 is configured to be executed. Accordingly, a period (1) in which the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 differs depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22 with respect to the period (3 seconds) in which the player can operate the frame button 22. .5 seconds) can be shortened.

  In the fifth control example, the swing effect (the effect period 15 seconds), which is the latter half of the roulette chance effect, is generated with an amplitude at which the ball B thrown by the pitching device 650 cannot swing on the movable piece 677. Oscillating sphere drop prohibition period (7 seconds), which is a period of movement (period in which the value of the oscillating timer 223w is greater than 500 (see S1709: Yes in FIG. 146)), and then oscillates with an amplitude capable of dropping. The period during which the sphere B can be dropped (maximum 3 seconds), which is a period (a period in which the value of the oscillating timer 223w is smaller than 500 (see S1709 in FIG. 146: No)), and a period during which the ball B is dropped. It consists of a ball falling period (5 seconds).

  Among these, the swingable ball dropping possible period (maximum 3 seconds) is set to a period longer than the period (1.5 seconds) at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 in the above-described pitching depression effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to drop the ball B into a predetermined pocket no matter what timing the player operates the frame button 22 during the pitching press effect. In addition, since a period during which a plurality of (three) pockets move is set as the swingable ball drop possible period, the accuracy of dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket can be increased.

  The ball drop period (5 seconds) is a period in which a notification effect is performed according to the type of the dropped pocket (winning pocket or detachment pocket) after the ball B is dropped into the pocket. Alternatively, it is configured to be extended by a time lag (difference between the actual production time and the set maximum time) generated in the swingable ball dropping period. Thereby, even if the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the timing at which the pitching device 650 pitches the ball B are different, the effect period of the “renso mode suggestion effect” can be matched with 90 seconds.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is high (the operation speed (500 pps) that takes 0.25 seconds to move one pocket is set), Two rotational speeds, ie, a low speed (operation speed (125 pps) in which the time required to move one pocket is 1 second) are controllable. This rotation speed is configured to be switched by outputting a signal for setting an operation speed (125 pps or 500 pps) from the sound lamp control device 113 to the motor driver.

  Note that in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example, the rotation member 640 is rotated at high speed until the throwing press effect is executed after the “ream mode suggestion effect” is executed, and the throwing press effect is executed. Then, the rotating member 640 is configured to rotate at a low speed.

  Returning to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above is configured such that the ball B can fall within a range of 10 seconds to 11.5 seconds after the throwing press effect is executed. Specifically, the ball B is dropped into the pocket after a pitching depression effect (maximum 3 seconds), a swinging ball falling prohibition period (7 seconds), and a swinging ball falling possible period (maximum 3 seconds). However, since there is a possibility that the pitching press effect is 1.5 seconds at the minimum, the pitching press effect is 10 seconds, which is the sum of the pitching press effect (3 seconds) and the swinging ball falling prohibition period (7 seconds). Is executed for the shortest period during which the ball can fall, and a throwing depression effect (1.5 seconds), a swinging ball falling prohibition period (7 seconds), and a swinging ball dropping possible period (3 seconds). The total 11.5 seconds is the longest period during which the ball can fall after the pitching press effect is executed.

  The pocket corresponding to the range 10 seconds to 11.5 seconds after the pitch pressing effect is executed during the pitch pressing effect in which the rotating member 640 is moving at a low speed is 10 and 10 from the pocket at the current drop position. Since it is 11 pockets ahead, is the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex acquired in S6402 the 10th and 11th pockets relative to the current pocket acquired in S6403? Is discriminated to determine whether the current time is the pitching possible timing (S6404).

  If the current time is not a pitchable timing (S6404: No), this processing is terminated as it is. In the fifth control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a high speed (500 pps) until a pitching press effect is executed in order to shorten the period until it is determined that it is possible to pitch in the process of S6404. (Time required to move one pocket is 0.25 seconds)). On the other hand, if the current timing is pitchable (S6404: Yes), the rotation speed of the rotating member is set to a low speed (125 pps (the time required to move one pocket is 1 second)) (S6405). The display of the effect is set (S6406), the throwing press effect flag 223cx is set to ON (S6407), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the throwing press effect flag 223cx is on in the process of S6401 (S6401: Yes), it is then determined whether the button (frame button 22) has been pressed (S6408). If the button (the frame button 22) is pressed (S6408: Yes), it is determined whether the current pitching allowable period (a period of 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the pitching pressing effect is executed) (S6409). ), If it is not the pitching allowable period (S6409: No), the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6410), and this process is terminated as it is. If it is the pitching allowable period (S6409: Yes), a pitching effect command is set (S6411), and the process proceeds to S6414.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6408, if the button is not pressed (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not the current pitching allowable period is set and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6412). If the current pitching allowable period is set and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6412: Yes), the process of S6411 is executed, and the process proceeds to S6414. On the other hand, if the current pitching allowable period is not set or the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to OFF (S6412: No), it is determined whether or not the pitching press effect display period has elapsed (S6413). If the pitching press effect display period has not elapsed (S6413: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if the pitching press effect display period has elapsed (S6413: Yes), the process proceeds to S6414.

  In the process of S6414, the pitching operation at the pitching position is set (S6414), the pitching depression effect in-progress flag 223cx, the pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx, and the delay pitching flag 223dx are set to OFF (S6415). Is set (S6416), the swing undetected flag 223v and the swing effect flag 223ev are set to ON (S6417), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, the fifth control example is configured such that the player can set the operation timing of the pitching device 650 based on the operation of the frame button 22. Therefore, it can be shown that the player can determine the pocket where the ball B falls by himself, and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, in this control example, the period during which the ball B is allowed to be thrown (half second 1.5 seconds) is shorter than the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid (3 seconds). . When the ball button 22 is operated in the first half of the first half when the ball B is allowed to be thrown and the ball B is thrown, the pitch of the ball B is delayed until the start timing of the period during which the ball B is allowed to be thrown. . Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control of dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket while making it possible for the player to determine the pocket in which the ball B is dropped by himself.

  In addition, the swingable ball dropping period (3 seconds) is longer than the difference period (1.5 seconds) at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 based on the player operating the frame button 22. Since it is configured to be set, it is possible to improve the accuracy of dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket no matter what timing the player operates the frame button 22.

  In the fifth control example, the pitching press effect is executed when it is possible to pitch based on the information on the drop position storage area 223ex and the information on the rotation position storage area 223u. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable with the swinging motion of the ball B in the chance effect.

  Furthermore, the rotational speed of the rotating member 640 is high (500 pps (the time required to move one pocket is 0.25 seconds)) and low (125 pps (the time required to move one pocket is 1 second)). The rotational speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a high speed until it is determined that it is a pitchable timing. Thereby, it is possible to shorten the period until it is determined that the pitch is possible and to smoothly perform the roulette chance effect.

  In addition, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is reduced during a period from when the pitching press effect that allows the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed to when the swinging effect in which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 ends. Is set. As a result, the player can carefully watch the roulette chance effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 224, the winning pocket sorting process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described.

  The winning pocket distribution process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, similarly to the winning pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example. In addition, about the same part as the winning pocket distribution process (refer FIG. 160) in a 1st control example, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted and only a different part is demonstrated.

  The winning pocket sorting process 5 in the fifth control example is a process for presetting a pocket in which the ball B falls in the roulette chance effect. When the hit pocket distribution process 5 is executed, first, after the process of S3101 is executed in the same manner as the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example described above, it is determined whether or not the next hold is a big hit. (S3121). If the next hold is a big hit (S3121: Yes), one of the read pockets is set as a drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3122), and the process proceeds to S3104.

  On the other hand, if the next hold is not a big hit in the process of S3121 (S3121: No), a pocket different from the read pocket is set as the drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3123), and the first control example described above is performed. The processes of S3104 and S3105 are executed in the same manner as the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160). Thereafter, the hit position is read from the drop position storage area 223ex (S3124), the hit position and the position that is not the drop position are selected as the additional positions (S3125), and the hit pocket sorting process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 160). ), The processing of S3109 and S3110 is executed. After executing the process of S3110, the process returns to the process of S3104 and the subsequent processes are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example, the drop position (pocket) where the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect is configured in advance. Then, according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as the hit position (whether or not to turn it on). As a result, the sphere B may be dropped with respect to a predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

  In the fifth control example, one pocket is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, but a plurality of continuous pockets may be stored in the drop position storage area 223ex.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special figure 2 winning command process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similarly to the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example. . In addition, about the same part as the special figure 2 winning command process (refer FIG. 161) in a 1st control example, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted and only a different part is demonstrated.

  The special figure 2 winning command process 5 in the fifth control example is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex when the winning command that is won in the big win is output in the increase effect executed in the “preparation mode”. A process for changing the pocket to the winning pocket is executed.

  When the special figure 2 winning command process 5 in the fifth control example is executed, first, S3201 is executed in the same manner as the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example described above. If the increased effect flag 223cv is off in the process of S3201 (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3213. If the increase effect in-progress flag 223cv is on (S3201: Yes), the fall position is read from the fall position storage area 223ex (S3221). It is determined whether or not it is a win (S3222). If it is a win that is a big hit during the time (S3222: Yes), the drop position is selected as the additional position (S3223), and the process proceeds to S3212.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3222, if the winning is not a big win in the time reduction (S3222: No), the winning position is read from the winning position storage area 223k (S3224), and a position different from the winning position and the falling position is selected as the additional position. (S3225), and the process proceeds to S3212. Thereafter, the processing of S3212 and S3213 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is configured to be movable as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. . Here, some game machines such as a pachinko machine include a variable member that is operated by a motor or the like. Some of these gaming machines can execute a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of variable members. However, if the number of variable members is increased to improve the production effect, the power consumption increases, the failure rate increases due to the increase in the number of parts, the cost of gaming machines increases, the wiring becomes complicated, etc. Various problems arise.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a flow path (first passage forming member 520) for discharging the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 in the jackpot game is provided for the player. It is set as the structure arrange | positioned in the visually recognizable position (front view left side with respect to the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81). This flow path (first passage forming member 520) swings between an arrangement (connection position) for discharging the winning ball to the first variable prize-winning device 82a and a home position (release position) in the big hit. It is configured to be possible. And it was comprised so that the movable production | movement which carries out the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement of a flow path was executable as a kind of the interesting production (production which suggests the expectation degree which becomes a big hit) normally performed (the state which is not in a big hit). In other words, the flow path (first passage forming member 520) for discharging the prize balls is also used as an entertainment effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of accessory items (variable members) from increasing too much, thereby reducing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10, reducing the failure rate and cost, simplifying the routing of wiring, etc. Can be realized.

  Further, in this control example, as an entertainment effect using the flow path (first passage forming member 520), the first passage forming member 520 moves (moves) from the release position to the intermediate position, and then returns to the release position. There are provided a left swing effect and a second left swing effect in which the first passage forming member 520 moves (moves) from the release position to the connection position and then returns to the release position. The second left swing effect is configured to be more easily selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit than the first left swing effect, and is difficult to select when the special symbol is lost. In other words, the second left swing effect with a large amount of movement of the first passage forming member 520 is configured to have a higher expectation level that is a big hit than the first left swing effect. Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 starts operating, the operation can be observed with the expectation that the first swing forming member 520 operates to the connection position. Therefore, the interest of the player in the “renso mode” can be improved.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example is configured such that a drop position (pocket) where the ball B is dropped in a roulette chance effect is set in advance in one place. And according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it was configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as a hit position (whether or not to turn it on). As a result, the sphere B may be dropped with respect to a predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

  In this control example, in the roulette chance effect, a period for receiving the operation of the frame button 22 (for example, 3 seconds in one roulette opportunity effect) is provided, and it is detected that the player has operated the frame button 22. In this case, the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650. In addition, in a period during which the frame button 22 can be received, a pitching depressing effect (see FIG. 216) for prompting the player to press the frame button 22 is executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by the pitch pressing effect, the pitching device 650 pitches the ball B. Thereby, since the player can throw the ball B onto the rotating member 640 at an arbitrary timing, the player's willingness to participate in the roulette chance effect can be improved.

  In the fifth control example, one pocket for dropping the ball B is set in advance, but it is not necessarily limited to one. As a position where the sphere B is dropped, a section where a plurality of pockets are continuous may be determined, and the section may be dropped into any of the pockets constituting the section. By configuring in this way, the degree of freedom in dropping the sphere B can be increased as compared with the case where the dropping position is limited to only one pocket. That is, when it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation is relatively large (for example, exceeds 1 second) at the stage of entering the section where the ball B is dropped, it is arranged behind the section. The ball B can be dropped after the period is reduced by dropping it into the pocket. On the other hand, when it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the oscillating motion is too small (for example, 0.5 seconds or less) when entering the section where the ball B is dropped, the section The ball B can be dropped before the ball B is completely stopped by being dropped into the pocket arranged in the pocket on the near side of the.

  In the fifth control example, the period of the swinging motion of the sphere B is set to a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) or less before one pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is arranged at the drop position. In this case, a special effect is executed. However, it may be controlled so that the target pocket is arranged at the dropping position before the predetermined period (0.2 seconds) is reached. More specifically, for example, at the start of the roulette chance effect, a pocket in which the ball B can be dropped is predicted from the time until the pitch pressing effect is started and the pocket currently arranged at the drop position. Then, it may be determined whether or not it matches with the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. If it is expected that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, the remaining time until the ball B can drop and the drop position storage area 223ex Based on the position of the stored pocket, the rotational speed of the rotating member 640 may be changed so that the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is arranged at the drop position at the timing when the drop can be performed. Good. Further, instead of or in addition to changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, for example, the execution timing of the pitching press effect may be changed. That is, by changing the timing at which the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650, the ball B can be dropped at the timing at which the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is placed at the drop position. It is good also as a structure. By comprising in this way, the ball | bowl B can be more reliably dropped to the target pocket.

<Sixth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 233. In the 1st control example mentioned above, it was set as the structure which performs alerting | reporting whether it is a big hit by displaying a symbol (number) on each display part 331a-331d of the production | presentation part 331. The third symbol display device 81 is basically used to display an entertainment effect, a display of the number of reserved balls, a breakdown of symbols (lucky numbers) that become a big hit, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the sixth control example, the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to execute dynamic display of identification information (decorative symbol variation display) indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. The decorative symbol variation display is executed regardless of the mode, and is executed corresponding to the variation display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, so that the lottery result of the special symbol can be confirmed regardless of the mode. .

  The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that a decorative symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an audio lamp control is performed. The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Is a point. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 226 (a) shows the display contents when the special symbol lottery is executed in the “normal mode” and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), when the special symbol lottery is executed in the “normal mode”, the symbol variation display is executed on the display units 331a to 331d as in the first control example. In addition, in the sixth control example, a decorative symbol (third symbol) is displayed in a variable display region (lower right region) Dd1 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape on the lower right side in front view of the third symbol display device 81. ) Is displayed.

  More specifically, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed in the variable display region (lower right region) Dd1. In each symbol row, a decorative symbol (third symbol) to which any number of 0 to 9 is attached is displayed in a prescribed order (descending order of numbers or ascending order). These three symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity and are displayed in a variable manner. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so that they appear in descending order in the left symbol row, and the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row and the right symbol row. In this variable display of decorative symbols, a decorative symbol (third symbol) with the same number attached to each symbol row is stopped and displayed, indicating that it is a big hit. On the other hand, if at least one of the decorative symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed in each symbol row is a decorative symbol (third symbol) with a different number, the special symbol of this time will not be selected. Indicates that there is. Note that the variable display region (lower right region) Dd1 has a smaller area than the display units 331a to 331d. Therefore, the player can confirm the lottery result of the special symbol by the variable display executed in each of the display units 331a to 331d.

  Further, FIG. 226 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the variable display corresponding to the off of the special symbol is finished in the “normal mode” and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 226 (b), when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “normal mode” elapses, the numbers (symbols) are stopped one by one in the display units 331a to 331d as in the first control example. Is displayed. In addition, in the sixth control example, in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81, the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by a combination of detachment. In the example of FIG. 226 (b), the decorative symbol with the number “6” added to the left symbol row is stopped and the symbol row with the number “4” attached to the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed. The symbol row with the number “3” attached to the symbol row is stopped and displayed. By displaying a decorative symbol (third symbol) with a different number, it is possible to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol has been lost.

  Next, display contents in the “preparation mode” will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 227 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the decorative symbol (third symbol). As shown in FIG. 227 (a), when the special symbol lottery is executed in the “preparation mode”, the decorative symbol (third symbol) is displayed in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1, as in the “normal mode”. ) Is displayed. This indicates that it is changing.

  FIG. 227 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the variation time has elapsed in the “preparation mode” and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 227 (b), the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display region different from the variable display region (lower right region) Dd1. FIG. 227 (b) shows an example in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the upper left region Dq1 having a horizontally long and substantially rectangular shape formed on the upper left in the front view on the display screen of the third design display device 81. In this example, in the upper left area Dq1, the decorative symbol with the number “1” attached to the left symbol row is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol with the number “8” attached to the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol with the number “9” attached to the right symbol column is stopped and displayed.

  In this way, in the “preparation mode”, the decorative symbol stop display is performed in a display area different from the variable display, so that the current time reduction in the “preparation mode” is not easily recognized from the stop-displayed decorative symbol. It is to do. If the variable display area Dd1 is configured to perform variable display and stop display even during the “preparation mode”, the variable display time of the decorative symbol executed in the “preparation mode” is easy by observing the variable display area Dd1. Will be recognized. As described above, in the “preparation mode” with one short time period, the long fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected regardless of the special symbol lottery result (see FIGS. 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the “preparation mode” in which the short-time period is 7 times, the long fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the case of a special symbol jackpot (see FIG. 112), and the fluctuation time is 3 in the case of being off Middle variation in seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed after 3 seconds from the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect” (when the long variation A is selected), it is a big hit or the short time period is 1 It is determined that this is the case where the special symbol is not set. In this case, the lottery of the special symbol will be lost and the possibility of shifting to the “normal mode” after the change will increase, so that the player may not be able to enjoy the subsequent “renso mode suggestion effect”. There is. Further, when the 1st to 6th special symbol lottery in the “preparation mode” in which the short-term period is 7 is not selected, middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected (see FIG. 113). In other words, if the fluctuation continues for 3 seconds or more in the second to sixth fluctuation display, it is a big hit without confirming the production result of “renso mode suggestion production” (with a probability of 97.5%) It will be recognized that it will shift to “Renso mode”. For this reason, it is highly probable to shift to the “renso mode”, and the player may feel that it is not necessary to confirm the subsequent “renso mode suggestion effect”.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the decorative symbol stop display is executed in a display area different from the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who has confirmed the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not stop display has been executed. Therefore, it can be difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the “renso mode” before confirming the result of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. A player's expectation can be maintained.

  Further, in this control example, in order to make it difficult to understand the timing of the stop display, the decorative symbol is displayed every time the variation is displayed for 3 seconds during execution of the long variation A (90 seconds) to the long variation G (72 seconds). Is switched to a display area (for example, the upper left area Dq1) different from the variable display area Dd1. The state where the display position is switched continues for 0.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds elapses, the display position is switched again to the variable display area Dd1. That is, the fluctuation display for 3 seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 and the fluctuation display for 0.5 seconds in an area (such as the upper left area Dq1) different from the fluctuation display area Dd1 are repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the break (change in display position) of the variable display in the fluctuation display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is set periodically in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, since it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not the mode is shifted to the “renso mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained until the end while the “renso mode suggestion effect” is being executed.

  Further, in the present control example, a plurality of display areas for displaying the stop symbols are provided in addition to the upper left area Dq1. Specifically, it is formed on the upper right side region Dq2 (see the dotted line on the upper right side of FIG. 227 (b)) formed on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81 and on the lower left side of the third symbol display device 81. A lower left side region Dq3 (see the dotted line on the lower left in FIG. 227 (b)) is provided. When the decorative symbol stop display is performed in the “preparation mode” (when the variation time has elapsed), and when the position where the variation display is performed during the execution of the long variations A to G is switched from the variation display region Dd1. One display area is selected by lottery from three types of display areas (upper left area Dq1, upper right area Dq2, lower left area Dq3). With this configuration, it is more difficult to visually recognize the display contents (whether the display position is stopped or variably displayed) when the display position is switched from the variable display area Dd1 to another display area. can do. Therefore, since it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not the mode is shifted to the “renso mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained until the end while the “renso mode suggestion effect” is being executed.

  In the present control example, the variable display area Dd1 is provided at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be arranged at an arbitrary position. Further, in the present control example, the upper left region Dq1, the upper right region are used as display regions when the stop display is performed in the “preparation mode” and when the display position is switched from the variation display region Dd1 during execution of the long variations A to G. Three types of display areas, the area Dq2 and the lower left area Dq3, are provided, but the display area is not limited to three. It is good also as a structure which provides more display areas, and may reduce it. Further, the arrangement of the display areas may be arbitrarily determined.

  In this control example, when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (the display position is simply moved). It is not limited. For example, even after the display position is switched, the variable display may be pseudo-displayed on the variable display area Dd1. As a result, when attention is paid to the variable display area Dd1, it looks as if the variable display is always continued during the “preparation mode” regardless of whether the variable display area Dd1 is stopped or changing. In the “preparation mode”, it can be more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. FIG. 228 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the ROM 222 in the sixth control example is provided with a symbol position selection table 222h in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 (see FIG. 118 (a)) in the first control example. The symbol position selection table 222h is a data table used for selecting a display area after switching when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1 in the “preparation mode”. Details of the symbol position selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 228 (b).

  FIG. 228 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the symbol position selection table 222h. As shown in FIG. 228 (b), in the symbol position selection table 222h, the display position of the decorative symbol (stop display or variable display) is defined for each value of the display position selection counter 223ay. The display position selection counter 223ay is configured as a loop counter that is updated regularly or irregularly within a range of “0 to 99”.

  In the symbol position selection table 222h, the upper left area Dq1 is associated with the range where the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is “0 to 39”. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223ay, 40 “0 to 39” are associated with each other. The probability (ratio) that the upper left area Dq1 is selected when switching (moving) to another area is 40% (40/100).

  Further, the upper right region Dq2 is associated with the range where the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is “40 to 79”. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223ay, 40 of “40 to 79” are associated with each other, so that the decorative symbol is displayed from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. When switching (moving) to another region, the probability (ratio) that the upper right region Dq2 is selected is 40% (40/100).

  Furthermore, the lower left region Dq3 is associated with the range where the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is “80 to 99”. Since 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223ay are associated with 20 of “80 to 99”, the decorative symbols are displayed from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. The probability (ratio) that the lower left region Dq3 is selected when switching (moving) to another region is 20% (20/100). The reason that only the lower left region Dq3 is selected has a high probability (ratio) because only this region has the same line of sight as the variable display region (lower right region) Dd1, so that the player can enter the variable display region Dd1. This is because there is a possibility of being visually recognized when attention is paid. Therefore, the selection ratio of the lower left side region Dq3 that is relatively easy to visually recognize is lowered so that the display content when the display position of the decorative symbol is switched is made difficult to be visually recognized. On the other hand, the reason why the ratio is not set to 0 is to make it difficult to predict the display position after switching. That is, as the number of display position candidates increases, it becomes more difficult for the player to predict the display position after switching, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern mode (stop display or variable display) after switching the display position. it can.

  In this way, by switching the display position of the decorative symbol using the symbol position selection table 222h, it is predicted whether or not the mode is shifted to the “renzo mode” before the result of the “renso mode suggestion effect” is notified. It can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, the “renso mode suggestion effect” can be enjoyed to the end.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 229, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in this control example has a display position selection counter 223ay, a display time timer 223by, and a display position storage. The difference is that an area 223 cy is provided.

  The display position selection counter 223ay is used to select a display area for displaying a decorative symbol from the symbol position selection table 222h described above. The display position selection counter 223ay is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the range of “0 to 99”, and is updated, for example, one by one between the processes of S1616 and S1617 of the main process. As described above, when the decorative design is switched (moved) from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to another area, the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is within the range of “0 to 39”. The upper left area Dq1 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative design. If the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of “40 to 79”, the upper right area Dq2 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative design, and if it is in the range of “80 to 99”, the decorative design is displayed. Is selected as the area to be displayed.

  The display time timer 223by displays the decorative symbol (third symbol) in the “preparation mode” in the region 1 (variable display region Dd1, upper left region Dq1, upper right region Dq2, or lower left region Dq3). It is a timer that measures the elapsed time of. This display time timer 223by has an initial value set to 0, and the value is added one by one in the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) during the decoration symbol change in the “preparation mode” (see FIG. 231). 231 (see S6503). Since the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230), the display time timer 223by is counted up every 1 millisecond. The display time timer 223by is reset to 0 every time the area (display position) where the decorative symbol is displayed is switched (see S6510 and S6513 in FIG. 231). Based on the value of the display time timer 223by, the decorative symbol is switched to another display position (display region) when 3 seconds have elapsed since the decorative symbol was displayed in the variable display region Dd1. Further, the display position (display area) of the decorative symbol changes to the variable display region Dd1 when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the decorative symbol was displayed in the upper left region Dq1, the upper right region Dq2, or the lower left region Dq3. Can be switched.

  The display position storage area 223cy is a flag indicating whether the display position (area) of the current decorative symbol is the variable display area Dd1, the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3. In the display position storage area 223cy, any one of four types of values “00H” to “03H” is stored. If “00H” is stored, the variable display region (lower right region) Dd1 is indicated. If "01H" is stored, the upper left area Dq1 is indicated, if "02H" is stored, the upper right area Dq2 is indicated, and if "03H" is stored, the lower left area Dq3 is indicated. Whether or not to change the display position of the decorative symbol is determined based on the value (elapsed time) of the display time timer 223by described above and the value stored in the display position storage area 223cy. That is, when 3 seconds elapses in a state where “00H” is stored in the display position storage area 223cy, the decorative design is switched to another display position (display area). In addition, when 0.5 seconds elapses in a state where any of “01H” to “03H” is stored in the display position storage area 223cy, the display position (display area) of the decorative symbol is changed to the variable display area Dd1. Can be switched.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Sixth Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 233. First, with reference to FIG. 230, the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. The main process 6 (see FIG. 230) is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 145) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 6 (see FIG. 230) in the sixth control example, in steps S1601 to S1614 and S1616 to S1621, S1601 to S1614 and S1616 in the main processing (see FIG. 145) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as that in S1621 is executed. Further, in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) in the second control example, when the process of S1613 is ended, the display position of the decorative symbol is selected according to the elapsed time during the decorative symbol variable display in the “preparation mode”. Display position selection processing is executed (S1661), and the process proceeds to S1614. Details of this display position selection processing (S1661) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) in the present control example, when the process of S1614 ends, the variable display setting process 6 is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. (S1662). The variation display setting process 6 is a variation for display based on a variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause variation display of identification information (symbol) in the rendering unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for generating and setting a pattern command. Details of the variation display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the variable display setting process 6 ends, the process proceeds to S1616, and thereafter, the same process as the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example is executed.

  Next, details of the display position selection process (S1661) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, this display position selection process (S1661) is a process for selecting the display position of the decorative symbol in accordance with the elapsed time during the variable display of the decorative symbol in the “preparation mode”.

  When the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S6501), and when it is determined that it is 0 (S6501: No) ) Means that the current state is not “preparation mode” (“normal mode” or “renso mode”), and there is no need to change the display position (display area) of the decorative symbols, so this processing is performed as it is. Exit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6501 that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6501: Yes), it means that the current state is the “preparation mode”, and the display position of the decorative symbol is changed. Since there is a possibility, next, it is determined whether or not the decorative symbol is currently being displayed (S6502). In the process of S6502, if it is determined that the variable display is not being performed (S6502: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6502 that the variable display is being performed (S6502: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the display time timer 223by (S6503), and the current display position (display area) Is read from the display position storage area 223cy (S6504).

  Next, based on the information read out in step S6504, it is determined whether the display position (display area) of the current decorative symbol is the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (whether the read value is “00H”). If the decoration symbol display position is the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (S6505: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the display time timer 223by is 3000 (S6506). That is, it is determined whether or not 3 seconds have elapsed since the display position of the decorative symbol has changed to the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. In the process of S6506, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by has reached 3000 (S6506: Yes), the symbol position selection table 222h is read (S6507), and the decorative symbol corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is read. Is specified (S6508). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of “0 to 39”, the upper left area Dq1 is specified as the area for displaying the decorative design, and “40 to 79” is displayed. If it is within the range, the upper right side region Dq2 is selected as the region for displaying the decorative design, and if it is within the range of “80 to 99”, the lower left side region Dq3 is selected as the region for displaying the decorative design (FIG. 228 (b)).

  When the process of S6508 is completed, the display position of the decorative symbol is then switched to the display position specified in the process of S6508 (S6509). In accordance with this switching, the value stored in the display position storage area 223cy is also updated. That is, it is updated to “01H” when switched to the upper left area Dq1, updated to “02H” when switched to the upper right area Dq2, and updated to “03H” when switched to the lower left area Dq3. The After the process of S6509, the value of the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 (S6510), and this process ends. By resetting the display time timer 223by, the elapsed time after changing the display position of the decorative symbol is newly measured, and the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the variable display area Dd1 when 0.5 second has elapsed. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6506, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 3000 (S6506: No), there is no need to switch the display position, so the processes of S6507 to S6510 are skipped and the present process is performed. End the process.

  Also, in the process of S6505, it is determined that the current display position of the decorative symbol is not the variable display area Dd1 (any one of “01H” to “03H” stored in the display position storage area 223cy). In the case (S6505: No), it is then determined whether the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511). That is, it is determined whether 0.5 second has elapsed since the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to any one of the left upper region Dq1, the upper right region Dq2, and the lower left region Dq3.

  In the process of S6511, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511: Yes), the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (S6512). “00H” indicating the variable display area Dd1 is stored in the position storage area 223cy. Then, the value of the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 (S6513), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6511, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 500 (S6511), it is not necessary to switch the display position of the decorative symbol to the variable display area Dd1, so the processes of S6512 and S6513 are skipped. Then, this process is finished as it is.

  By executing this display position selection process (see FIG. 231), when any of the long fluctuations A to G is executed in the “preparation mode”, the fluctuation display for 3 seconds and the fluctuation display in the fluctuation display area Dd1 are performed. The variation display for 0.5 seconds in the region different from the region Dd1 (any one of the upper left region Dq1, the upper right region Dq2, or the lower left region Dq3) is repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the break (change in display position) of the variable display in the fluctuation display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is set periodically in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, since it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not the mode is shifted to the “renso mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained until the end while the “renso mode suggestion effect” is being executed.

  Next, details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This variation display setting process 6 (S1662) is one process in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230). As described above, the variation of the identification information (design) in the rendering unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In order to generate and set the display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the display, it is executed in place of the variation display process in the first control example (see FIG. 162). Is done.

  Of the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 232), in each process of S3301 to S3310, the same processing as that of S3301 to S3310 of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example is executed. Is done. Further, in the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 232) in this control example, when the process of S3309 ends, a stop position selection process for selecting a display position for displaying the decorative symbols in the “preparation mode” is executed. (S3331), and the process proceeds to S3310. Details of the stop position selection processing (S3331) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing details of the stop position selection process (S3331). When the stop position selection process (see FIG. 233) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S6601). If the value is 0 (S6601), Is not in the “preparation mode”, and it is not necessary to change the display position of the decorative symbol from the variable display area Dd1 to another display position.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6601 that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S6601: Yes), it means that the current state is the “preparation mode”. Is read (S6602), and the display position of the decorative symbol corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is specified (S6603). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of “0 to 39”, the upper left area Dq1 is specified as the area for displaying the decorative design, and “40 to 79” is displayed. If it is within the range, the upper right side region Dq2 is selected as the region for displaying the decorative design, and if it is within the range of “80 to 99”, the lower left side region Dq3 is selected as the region for displaying the decorative design (FIG. 228 (b)). When the process of S6603 ends, the display position of the decorative symbol is then switched to the display position specified in the process of S6603 (S6604), and the process ends.

  By executing this stop position selection process (see FIG. 233), the decorative symbol stop display can be executed at a display position (display area) different from the variable display. ) It can be made difficult for the player who has confirmed Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been executed. Therefore, it can be difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the “renso mode” before confirming the result of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. A player's expectation can be maintained.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is configured to execute a display (decorative display of the decorative symbol) indicating the lottery result of the special symbol in the variable display area Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81. Yes. Thereby, the result of the variable display can be determined based on the stop symbol regardless of the mode.

  Further, in the present control example, in the “preparation mode”, the decorative symbol stop display is performed at a display position different from the variable display area Dd1. Here, if it is assumed that the variable display area Dd1 performs variable display and stop display even during the “preparation mode”, the decorative display variable display executed in the “preparation mode” by observing the variable display area Dd1. Time is easily recognized. As described above, in the “preparation mode” with one short time period, the long fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected regardless of the special symbol lottery result (see FIGS. 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the “preparation mode” in which the short-time period is 7 times, the long fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the case of a special symbol jackpot (see FIG. 112), and the fluctuation time is 3 in the case of being off Middle variation in seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed after 3 seconds from the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect” (when the long variation A is selected), it is a big hit or the short time period is 1 It is determined that this is the case where the special symbol is not set. In this case, the lottery of the special symbol will be lost and the possibility of shifting to the “normal mode” after the change will increase, so that the player may not be able to enjoy the subsequent “renso mode suggestion effect”. There is. Further, when the 1st to 6th special symbol lottery in the “preparation mode” in which the short-term period is 7 is not selected, middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected (see FIG. 113). In other words, if the fluctuation continues for 3 seconds or more in the second to sixth fluctuation display, it is a big hit without confirming the production result of “renso mode suggestion production” (with a probability of 97.5%) It will be recognized that it will shift to “Renso mode”. For this reason, it is highly probable to shift to the “renso mode”, and the player may feel that it is not necessary to confirm the subsequent “renso mode suggestion effect”.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the decorative symbol stop display is executed in a display area different from the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who has confirmed the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not stop display has been executed. Therefore, it can be difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the “renso mode” before confirming the result of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. A player's expectation can be maintained.

  Further, in this control example, in order to make it difficult to understand the timing of the stop display, during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G, the fluctuation display for 3 seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 is different from the fluctuation display area Dd1. The variation display for 0.5 seconds in (the upper left area Dq1 etc.) is repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the break (change in display position) of the variable display in the fluctuation display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is set periodically in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, since it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not the mode is shifted to the “renso mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained until the end while the “renso mode suggestion effect” is being executed.

  In the sixth control example, in the “preparation mode”, when it is determined that 3 seconds have elapsed since the variation display of the decoration symbol is executed in the variation display area Dd1, any display position of the decoration symbol is displayed. Although it is configured to switch to a position (any one of the upper left region Dq1, the upper right region Dq2, and the lower left region Dq3) or lottery (discrimination), it is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the variation display of the decorative symbol may be defined for each variation pattern (variation time) in a form including the display position for each passage of time. Specifically, for example, when a variation pattern command corresponding to the long variation A (90 seconds) is notified from the main control device 110, the display position switched from the variation display region Dd1 is the upper left region Dq1 → the upper right region. Dq2 → lower left region Dq3 → left upper region Dq1 →... And display region in lower left region Dq3 → upper right region Dq2 → left upper region Dq1 → lower left region Dq3 →. You may comprise so that the display mode of the present variable display can be selected from the mode which becomes. That is, in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, a plurality of variations of display modes with different display positions of the decorative symbols may be defined as the decorative symbol variation display mode. With this configuration, it is not necessary to execute a process for lottery (determination) of the display position at every elapse of time by the audio lamp control device 113, so that the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reduced. be able to.

  In this control example, the variable display area Dd1 is provided at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be arranged at an arbitrary position. Further, in the present control example, the upper left region Dq1, the upper right region are used as display regions when the stop display is performed in the “preparation mode” and when the display position is switched from the variation display region Dd1 during execution of the long variations A to G. Three types of display areas, the area Dq2 and the lower left area Dq3, are provided, but the display area is not limited to three. It is good also as a structure which provides more display areas, and may reduce it. Further, the arrangement of the display areas may be arbitrarily determined.

  In this control example, the display position of the decorative symbol is switched when three seconds have elapsed after the decorative symbol is displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (stop display timing or during variable display). It is not limited. Instead of switching the display position, the display mode of the variable display area Dd1 may be changed. For example, the variable display area Dd1 may be displayed in a reduced size for 0.5 seconds every 3 seconds, and a normal size display mode for 3 seconds and a display mode for 0.5 second reduced display may be repeated. When the reduced display is performed, the display may be reduced to a size that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, 1 mm in length × 1 mm in width). With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to see whether the decorative symbol is stopped or displayed while it is displayed in a reduced size. The same effect as in the case of changing the value can be obtained. In addition, since the lottery (determination) process for switching the display position can be omitted, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In this control example, when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (the display position is simply moved). It is not limited. For example, even after the display position is switched, the variable display may be pseudo-displayed on the variable display area Dd1. As a result, when attention is paid to the variable display area Dd1, it looks as if the variable display is always continued during the “preparation mode” regardless of whether the variable display area Dd1 is stopped or changing. In the “preparation mode”, it can be more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  This control example is configured to move the decorative symbol to another display position (display region) when three seconds have elapsed since the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the variable display region Dd1. However, the display time of the decorative symbols in the variable display area Dq1 is not limited to 3 seconds, and may be arbitrarily determined.

  In this control example, the decorative symbol is configured to be displayed for 3 seconds or 0.5 seconds at any of the four display positions, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decoration symbol display position (variation display or stop display) in the “preparation mode” may be constantly moved at high speed. Moreover, you may comprise so that a moving direction may also become random appearance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbol, and thus it is possible to prevent (suppress) the result of the “renso mode suggestion effect” from being predicted by the player. Therefore, the “renso mode suggestion effect” can be confirmed with a sense of expectation to the end.

  In each of the above control examples, after the ball B is swung over the holding piece 677 (or the holding piece 6770) in the “ream mode suggestion effect”, to the pocket of the type corresponding to the current effect result. However, the configuration for identifying the pocket indicating the production result is not limited to the sphere B formed of a sphere. For example, it is good also as a structure which drops the doll which imitated the character which appears in the one part production of the pachinko machine 10 to the pocket corresponding to the production result. In this case, instead of swinging the upper part of the holding piece 677 (holding piece 6770), a doll simulating a character is suspended above the drop position with a string or the like to perform a pendulum-like swinging action. It may be done. And it is good also as a structure which drops a doll to the pocket of the kind corresponding to this effect result, when the period (amplitude) of rocking | fluctuation operation becomes a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) or less. By configuring in this way, even if a doll that is not a sphere is used, the effect result can be clearly notified in the same manner as when the sphere B is used. In addition, after the production ends, the doll imitating the character as with the ball B can be collected and returned to the suspended state again so that the production of dropping the doll can be executed in each “renso mode suggestion production”. It may be configured.

  In each of the above control examples, a plate-like member to which numerals are assigned is adopted as each of the pockets P1 to P30. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotating member 640 may be replaced with an image by a liquid crystal display device or the like. In other words, for example, the 3rd symbol display device 81 may be enlarged, and the “ream mode suggestion effect” may be executed by causing the 3rd symbol display device 81 to display a roulette image. In this case, the sphere B may be replaced with video. That is, after the ball B is thrown in the “renso mode suggestion effect”, a series of effects of swinging on the holding piece 677 and then dropping into one of the pockets are all performed in the third symbol display device. It is good also as a structure performed with the image | video (image) displayed with respect to 81. FIG. By comprising in this way, the rotation member 640, the holding piece 677, the ball | bowl B, the pitching apparatus 650, etc. can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the upper end portion (the radially outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Absent. For example, the cover member that covers the open portion of the upper end portion of the first passage forming member 520 opens the sphere supply side in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e, and the sphere supply side The opposite side may operate in a manner that covers it. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matters other than spheres from entering the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the connection member 424 is rotated in contact with the first passage forming member 520 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the arrangement of the connection member 424 may be omitted. In this case, the product cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts required for the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Further, instead of the connecting member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be provided. In this case, the displacement of the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber elastic body caused by the first passage forming member 520 coming into contact with the rubber elastic body. be able to.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the driving side slide member 420 is driven by one rack 452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rack for driving the drive-side slide member 420 is composed of two layers of front and rear, and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down with the front rack and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down with the rear rack. And may be configured. In this case, when only one of the two-layer racks is in contact with the driven-side slide member 430 in the vertical direction, the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other, It is possible to switch between the case where the drive side slide member 420 passes the driven side slide member 430 and moves up and down independently.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b protrude outward from the circle formed by the tooth bases of the other gear teeth is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one of the contact part 351b and the receiving part 354b may be configured to be recessed toward the center side from the circle formed by the tooth base of the other gear tooth, and the other may be extended longer.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the portion that contacts the contact portion 351b is the adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape may be formed, and the portion and the contact portion 351b may be in contact with each other.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the portion that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a portion of the gear tooth that is formed in a tooth shape may be partially cut to form a surface that contacts the contact portion 351b.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the entire overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with each other, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the surface contact area may be reduced by providing a recessed portion that is recessed toward the rotating shaft at an intermediate position between the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right ascending restriction members 417 contact with the drive side slide member 420 at the same timing has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one of the left and right ascending restriction members 417 may be brought into contact with the drive side slide member 420. In this case, a left-right asymmetric load can be applied to the drive-side slide member 420, and the drive-side slide member 420 can be inclined even when the center of gravity of the drive-side slide member 420 is shifted to the left or right (one of the left and right). Can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the tip wall member 2560 is disposed at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an aspect in which a blower that sends air from the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the proximal end side is disposed, or an aspect in which a magnetic force generating device is provided at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 to adsorb a sphere by magnetic force Or the aspect which vibrates the front-end | tip of the 1st channel | path formation member 2520 to a rotation direction may be sufficient. In this case, the sphere can be prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward toward the distal end side in the released state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may provide the intermediate part which sinks between the base end part of the 1st channel | path formation member 2520, and a front-end | tip part (it may be comprised in a U shape). In this case, when the sphere remains in the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the sphere can be retained at the intermediate portion (position on the distal end side with respect to the base end portion), so that the communication state is changed. When this is done, it is possible to shorten the period until the ball is sent from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 are disposed on one side has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the base member 410, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for biasing the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 are set to the left side. There may be a difference between the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided and the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the right side. At this time, the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the right side of the front view is larger than that of the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the left side of the front view (the side on which the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is offset). It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, a load that changes the posture of the driven slide member 3430 counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 (the direction in which the driven slide member 3430 tilts due to the deviation of the center of gravity) is In the case where the driven side slide member 3430 changes its posture clockwise when viewed from the front due to the sudden vertical movement of the driven side slide member 3430, the change in the posture can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the driven-side slide member 430 falls after the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the lowered position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the driven side slide member 430 may be dropped in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the intermediate position. In this state, control (control to repeatedly switch between the rising operation and the lowering operation) may be performed in a mode in which the driving side slide member 420 is operated in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the driven side slide member 430. In this case, it is possible to produce an effect in which the driven-side slide member 430 is rebounded by the drive-side slide member 420 (such as being repeatedly rebounded).

  In each of the above embodiments, the divided member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 is separated by the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. Although the case where it drives is demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, The division member DV in the state by which the insertion part 644a of the connection link member 644 was inserted in the large diameter part 621a of the connection link effect | action groove | channel 621 is used as one side. You may drive by the rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638. FIG. In this case, since the interval between the divided member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent divided member DV is widened, the adjacent divided member DV, the one side rotational drive member 637, and the other side rotational drive member 638 Thus, the diameters of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the driving torque applied to the divided member DV (rotating member 640) from the one side rotation driving member and the other side rotation driving member.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the period during which the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 are divided members. Although the case where the period engaged with the driven part 641 of DV overlaps was demonstrated (refer FIG. 75), it is not necessarily restricted to this, The engaging part 637b of the one side rotational drive member 637 or others While one of the engaging portions 638b of the side rotation drive member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, the other is disengaged and the engagement portion of the one side rotation drive member 637 is engaged. 637b or one of the engaging portions 638b of the other side rotational drive member 638 may be disengaged during the period in which the other is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV.

  In this case, it is possible to avoid the engagement portion 637b of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other side rotation drive member 638 from being simultaneously engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. . That is, the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. Thereby, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, between the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638, a phase shift occurs due to dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance, drive tolerance of the drive motor 631, and the like. In the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the DVs in an endless manner, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the divided member DV. When a phase shift occurs while engaged with the portion 641, one section in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 is compressed and the other section is pulled, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. It becomes.

  On the other hand, as described above, the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. Thus, even if a phase shift occurs, it can be avoided that the rotating member 640 is affected by the influence. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members DV endlessly, the displacement can be stabilized.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the divided member DV is connected endlessly in the rotary unit 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the divided member DV is connected endlessly (from one end to the other end). Of course, it is possible to connect the dividing member DV between the first and second ends and to disconnect one end and the other end). In this case, for example, the segmented member DV connected endlessly may be displaced (moved) along the endless track in each of the above-described embodiments, or may be positioned along the endless track. The divided members DV connected in the end shape may be reciprocated (reciprocated).

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as a burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example the structure that restricts the rotation of the second gear 352 by the locking arc portion 351c>
A game machine comprising: a driving means; a transmission member that transmits a driving force of the driving means; and a displacement member that is displaced between a rising position and a lowering position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. The member includes a first gear and a second gear that is meshed with the first gear and disposed closer to the displacement member in the transmission path of the driving force than the first gear. The gear includes a contact portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is placed on the contact portion of the first gear. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by the contact.

  Here, there is a gaming machine comprising a driving means, a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member that is displaced between the raised position and the lowered position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted into the linear movement of the rack, and the displacement member is moved up and down between the lowered position and the raised position by the linear movement of the rack. There are some (Patent Document 1: JP 2012-80941 A, for example). In this case, when the driving force of the driving unit is released in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. For this reason, it is necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that energy consumption increases when the displacement member is held at the raised position. On the other hand, a crank mechanism is interposed in a part of the driving means, and the displacement member is not lowered from its raised position by its own weight even when the driving force of the driving means is released by utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism. There is also a known structure (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-140602). However, in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member is increased by the amount of the crank mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first gear includes a contact portion formed at a part of its tooth profile, and the first gear abuts when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. Since the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by the predetermined teeth of the second gear coming into contact with the portion, the displacement member does not move even if the driving force of the driving means is released. It is possible to suppress descending by its own weight. Therefore, energy consumption when holding the displacement member at the raised position can be suppressed. Further, the structure for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and it is not necessary to separately provide a crank mechanism, so that the transmission member can be reduced in size. it can.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and the first gear is brought into contact with the first gear in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that rotation of the second gear in a direction in which the displacement member ascends is restricted by contacting the receiving portions of the two gears.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, when the receiving portion of the second gear comes into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, the second gear rotates in the direction in which the displacement member rises. In other words, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the rotation of the second gear is restricted in both the forward and reverse directions, and rattling occurs in the displacement member held at the raised position. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the first gear is allowed to rotate in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the first gear is allowed to rotate in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered. There is no need to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear, and the first gear is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the lift position is reached. The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered is restricted, while the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered is allowed. Therefore, when the displacement member tries to descend from its raised position by its own weight, the predetermined tooth of the second gear is brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear and the displacement member. Can be held in the raised position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated along with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so as to be able to mesh with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction in which the displacement member is raised. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the tooth depth of the first gear is lower than that of the first gear, and the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tip surface of the tooth.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in the direction of raising the displacement member. Since the tooth depth is lower than the teeth of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the tooth tip surface, the first gear is moved in the direction of raising the displacement member. When the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the second gear can be rotated in the direction of raising the displacement member via the contact portion and the engagement of the predetermined teeth. As a result, a state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (the state where the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). Can be reliably formed.

  In the gaming machine A4, the abutment portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear. Possible areas can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position can be made gentle (the allowable amount is increased). As a result, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear.

  The contact portion of the first gear is a part that receives predetermined teeth of the second gear and restricts the rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member). Since it is enlarged, the strength can be secured.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the abutment portion of the first gear is formed such that the tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the first gear. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed such that its tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation center of the first gear. Therefore, the strength of the first gear can be improved while allowing the first gear to rotate until the predetermined tooth of the second gear is in contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear. Can be planned.

  Further, when the second gear is rotated in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered and the predetermined tooth of the second gear comes into contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear, the predetermined value of the second gear is determined. The direction of the force acting from the first tooth to the contact portion of the first gear is set to the direction toward the rotation axis of the first gear, so that it is possible to easily suppress the rotation of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends can be easily controlled, and even when the driving force of the drive means is released, the displacement member can be reliably prevented from being lowered by its own weight.

  In the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed at a part of its tooth shape, and the first gear is placed on the receiving portion of the second gear in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that rotation of the first gear in a direction in which the displacement member ascends is restricted by contact of a contact portion of the gear.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes the receiving portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and the first member is disposed in the raised position. The rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member ascends is restricted by the contact portion of the gear being brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear. It can function as a stopper that stops the rotation of the first gear after being placed in the raised position.

  In the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear is concave on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation shaft of the second gear, and the arc of the contact portion of the first gear A gaming machine A8 that is curved into an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the shape.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave side on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear and the first gear. Since it is curved and formed into an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the arc shape of the contact portion of the gear, when the contact portion of the first gear contacts the receiving portion of the second gear, both faces The contact portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the receiving portion of the second gear can reliably exert its function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is disposed at the raised position.

  Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in a concave arc shape toward the rotation shaft of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion is increased. Can be increased. Thereby, damage to the receiving part of the second gear when receiving the contact part of the first gear can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the displacement member is positioned at the end of the movable range in the upward direction.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear And the displacement member is positioned at the end of the movable range in the ascending direction, so that the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction of ascending the displacement member. Later, only the first gear can be rotated in the direction in which the displacement member rises while the second gear is stopped. Thereby, the state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (the state in which the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear) Can be reliably formed.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure that connects the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422>
A first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member In a gaming machine that can be formed in a separated state in which the first passage member or the second passage member is disengaged, the first passage member or the second passage member is displaceably disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. A gaming machine B1 comprising a connecting member that communicates between one end of each of the first passage member and the second passage member in a state of being displaced in contact with the other of the two passage members.

  Here, the first passage member and the second passage member are formed so that the sphere can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not There is known a gaming machine in which a separated state can be formed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-171636). In this case, due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of each part, it is inevitable that variations occur in the stop position when the first passage member is displaced and the arrangement position of the second passage member. Therefore, in the communication state, the first passage member and the second passage member are displaced from each other at the positions of the one end, so that it is difficult to stably feed the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the state is disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member and is displaced in contact with the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. Then, since the connection member which connects between the one ends of the 1st passage member and the 2nd passage member is provided, even when the position of the ends of the 1st passage member and the 2nd passage member has shifted, those one ends The displacement can be absorbed by the displacement of the connecting portion interposed between the two. As a result, ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized. Further, as the first passage member is displaced, the first passage member abuts on the connection member to displace the connection member, so that the driving force for displacing the first passage member can also be used, and the connection member is displaced. It is not necessary to provide a separate driving force.

  In the gaming machine B1, the connection member includes one side wall portion and another side wall portion that are opposed to each other with an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the one side wall portion is When the first passage member is located on the displacement locus of the first passage member and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the first passage member is displaced, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member. Since the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connecting member are connected in the communication state. The first passage member and the second passage member can be brought closer to each other, and the positional deviation between the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as a rotation tip side, and the connection member has a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the first passage member. When the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member, the connection member is rotated, The gaming machine B3, wherein the other side wall portion of the connecting member is adjacent to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as a rotation tip side, and the connection member is connected to the first passage. Since the rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connection member accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member can be smoothly performed. Moreover, the other side wall part of a connection member can be brought closer to the other end of a 1st channel | path member or a 2nd channel | path member by utilizing both rotation operation | movement.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, the connection member is configured such that one of the opposing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion has a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. A gaming machine B4, wherein the gaming machine B4 is a rolling surface when the ball is sent, and in the communication state, the one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding in the communication portion between the first passage member and one end of the second passage member. That is, since the communication portion between the one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member is a portion where the positional deviation becomes large, the ball feeding surface becomes unstable, so that the ball rolling surface is formed in the communication portion. One opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member, so that the ball can be rolled to stabilize the ball feeding.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be sent from one end of the first passage member, and in the release state, the ball in the first passage member A gaming machine B5, comprising a ball sending restricting means for restricting a ball from being sent from one end of the first passage member.

  Here, in the released state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated. When a ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball that has passed through the first passage member may fall out of the game area. Further, in the communication state, even when the sphere is supplied to the first passage member, if the sphere stays in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the release state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball staying in the ball will fall into the game area. If the sphere falls outside the game area, the movement of the movable member such as a gear or a crank mechanism may be hindered, or the sphere may be sandwiched to cause damage to the movable member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be sent from one end of the first passage member in the communication state. At the same time, since it is provided with a ball feeding restricting means for restricting the ball in the first passage member from being fed from one end of the first passage member in the released state, for example, when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, Even when the sphere stays on the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the release state, the sphere can be prevented from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

  In the gaming machine B5, the gaming machine B5 includes a cover body that is disposed at one end of the first passage member and that allows the passage of the sphere in the communication state and restricts the passage of the sphere in the release state. A gaming machine B6 characterized by forming means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, a cover serving as a ball-feeding restricting means that allows passage of the ball in the communication state and restricts the passage of the ball in the released state is provided at one end of the first passage member. Since the body is disposed, for example, even when the sphere is supplied to the first passage member in the release state, or even when the sphere remains in the first passage member and the transition is made from the communication state to the release state, It can suppress that a ball | bowl falls out of a game area | region from the end of a member.

  In the gaming machine B5, an urging member that applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that restricts the passage of the ball, and acts on the cover body in accordance with the displacement of the first passage member. And an action member that displaces the cover body in a direction that allows passage of the ball when at least the communication state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the gaming machine B7 includes a biasing member that applies a biasing force to the cover body and maintains the cover body in a position that restricts the passage of the ball. The body can be prevented from being inadvertently displaced, and as a result, the ball can be more reliably prevented from dropping from the one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in a direction allowing passage of the sphere, so that the sphere can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member.

  In this case, since the displacement of the cover body in the direction allowing the passage of the sphere is performed along with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the action member, the driving means for displacing the first passage member is displaced by the cover body. It can be used also as a drive means for making it possible to reduce the product cost accordingly.

  The acting member is positioned on the displacement locus of the cover body accompanying the displacement of the first passage member, and abuts against the cover body displaced along the displacement locus, thereby resisting the urging force of the urging member. Then, the driving force of the driving means for displacing the cover body (for example, the second passage member, the connection member, the member fixed to the game board, etc.) or the driving means for displacing the first passage member. Is transmitted to the cover body, and the cover body is displaced together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or a rack and pinion that converts the driving means and the driving force into a rotational motion or a linear motion and transmits it to the cover body. ) Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B5, the pitching restricting means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position in the released state.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the ball-throwing restricting means arranges the first passage member in the released state in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position. Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or even when the ball remains in the first passage member and the transition is made from the communication state to the released state, the ball goes out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. It can suppress falling.

  Note that the first passage member disposed in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is in the uppermost position in the released state does not require the whole first passage member to be inclined upward. There may be a region that is horizontal or inclined downward.

  In the gaming machine B5, the ball-throwing restricting means is characterized in that in the released state, the first passage member is disposed in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end. Game machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B5, the pitching restricting means is disposed in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end in the released state. Therefore, for example, even when the sphere is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the sphere remains in the first passage member and the transition is made from the communication state to the released state, the sphere starts from one end of the first passage member. Can be easily prevented from falling outside the gaming area.

  Further, when the communication state is formed, a state in which the entire first passage member is inclined downward from the other end to the one end can be formed, so that it is easy to send a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. , It is possible to suppress the ball from staying on the way. Therefore, when it transfers to a cancellation | release state, it can suppress that the ball | bowl which remained on the 1st channel | path member falls to a game area | region.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, a one-side position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage, and A displacing member that displaces a ball that flows down from the upstream passage to the downstream passage, and the case body is formed by opening both sides of the displacing direction of the allocating member. A gaming machine B10.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed with both sides of the displacing direction of the distributing member open, so that the case body can be moved to one side position or the other side position. Even when a sphere flows down between the sorting member and the case body that are displaced toward each other, the sphere that has flowed down can be prevented from being sandwiched between the sorting member and the case body.

  In the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the one side position, When the release state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the sorting member is disposed at the other side position.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B10, the sorting member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement member is disposed at one side position and the other side position in accordance with the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the driving means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the distribution member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, in the structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, when a displacement occurs between the distribution member and the first passage member due to the occurrence of control failure, The balls are distributed to the first passage member at the position (that is, the distribution member is disposed at one side position), and the balls may fall from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area. On the other hand, in the gaming machine B10, since the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, the displacement states of the distribution member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if a control failure occurs, it is possible to avoid the balls from being distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the sorting member is always positioned at the other side). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from dropping from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area.

  In the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion defining a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member serves as the distribution member.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion that defines a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is a distribution member. By sharing parts, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts. Moreover, the distributed sphere can be surely flowed down to the passage by using the wall portion defining the passage through which the sphere passes as a sorting member.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure that regulates the rebound of the driven-side slide member 430>
A guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and displaceable along the guide member between the raised position and the lowered position, and the displacement member supported at the lowered position A support member and an elevating member formed so as to be movable up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member is raised. In the gaming machine in which the displacement member is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position, A gaming machine C1 including a rise restricting member that restricts displacement.

  Here, a guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and displaceable along the guide member between the raised position and the lowered position, and the displaced member supported at the lowered position And a lifting member formed so as to be movable up and down along the guide member, the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the raising and lowering member as the lifting member rises, A gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from a raised position to a lowered position by its own weight as the elevating member descends is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is placed on the support member and supported by the support member, thereby maintaining the lowered position. However, since the displacement member is mounted on the support member and can be displaced in the upward direction along the guide member, rattling is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member in the lowered position There is a problem that is unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided along the guide member at the lowered position because the elevation member is provided to regulate the displacement of the displacement member in the upward direction when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position. Displacement in the upward direction can be restricted, and rattling caused by disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized.

  The gaming machine C1 includes an urging unit that urges the rise restricting member in a direction approaching the displacement member, and the displacement member contacts the rise restricting member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A separating action part for displacing the ascent restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member, and allowing the ascent restricting member to displace in the direction approaching the displaceable member at the lowered position and A gaming machine C2 comprising an engaging portion to be engaged.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the displacement member includes a separation action unit that displaces the rising restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, and a lowered position. Since the engagement portion that engages with the rise restricting member is provided, the restricted state by the rise restricting member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacement member by its own weight to the lowered position, and the restricted state by the rise restricting member is formed. There is no need to provide a separate drive source for this. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, the engagement between the rise restricting member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the rise restricting member to be displaced in the direction approaching the displacement member. The force necessary for releasing the engagement and the displacement of the ascending restriction member can be increased. As a result, even when a disturbance is input, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement between the rise restricting member and the engaging portion.

  In the gaming machine C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the disengagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the lifting member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the disengagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacing member is performed by raising the elevating member. Even if it is a case where it is going to crawl after being inputted, it can suppress that engagement with the engaging part of a raise control member and a displacement member being released carelessly.

  Further, since the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released by raising the elevating member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for releasing such engagement, and elevating The drive source for raising and lowering the member can be used as the drive source for releasing the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. .

  Further, when a separate drive source for releasing the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is provided, for example, due to the occurrence of control failure, In the state where the engagement is not released, there is a possibility that the elevating member rises and pushes up the displacement member. According to the gaming machine C3, the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released. When the displacement member is pushed up by the elevating member, the elevating member is engaged with the engaging portion of the displacement member. Can be surely released.

  In the gaming machine C3, the elevating member contacts the elevating restriction member when the elevating member is raised, and displaces the elevating restriction member, whereby the elevating restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member A gaming machine C4 comprising a release action portion for releasing the engagement.

  Here, the disengagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be performed by a push-up force when pushing up the displacement member as the elevating member moves up and down. Therefore, it is necessary to establish an engagement state that can be released by this, and it becomes difficult to perform strong engagement. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, vibration is generated by the reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, the lifting member is brought into contact with the lifting restricting member when the lifting member is lifted to displace the lifting restricting member. Since the release action part for releasing the engagement between the member and the engagement part of the displacement member is provided, even when the ascending restriction member and the engagement part of the displacement member are firmly engaged, the release is surely performed. be able to. In other words, since a strong engagement state can be formed, rattling of the displacement member due to disturbance can be suppressed and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized. In addition, vibration due to reaction when the engagement is released can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the engagement with the engaging portion of the displacement member is released, the ascent restricting member is the ascending / descending member that moves the displaceable member between the descending position and the ascending position. A gaming machine C5 that is abutted.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the engagement with the engaging portion of the displacement member is released, the ascending restriction member moves the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position. Since it abuts on the elevating member that moves up and down, it functions as a guide guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is raised and lowered. As a result, the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down with the lifting member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C5, a gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the ascending restriction member that is in contact with the elevating member is urged by the urging means in a direction close to the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the lifting restricting member that is in contact with the lifting member is biased by the biasing means in the direction approaching the lifting member, so that the lifting member is moved in a certain direction. The posture can be stabilized. Further, rattling of the elevating member can be suppressed by the elastic buffering action of the urging means.

  The gaming machine C6 includes a driving unit, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving unit, and a rack that meshes with the pinion. The rack is disposed on the lifting member, and the lifting member A gaming machine C7, wherein the biasing means is biased by the biasing means in a direction away from the pinion via a rise restricting member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the rotational motion of the pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the lifting member is raised and lowered along the guide member by the linear motion. The In this case, since the elevating member is biased in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the ascending restriction member, the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the elevating member rattles in the direction in which the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is narrowed, the biasing force of the biasing means acts in the direction to increase the distance, while the direction in which the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion widens In the case where the elevating and lowering member rattles, it can be regulated by the guide structure by the guide member that the interval is widened beyond a certain level. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion from being narrowed and the meshing resistance from becoming excessive.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming machine C8 is provided with a lowering restricting member that restricts a displacement of the elevating member in a descending direction when the elevating member pushes up the displacement member to the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, when the elevating member pushes the displacement member to the ascending position, the gaming machine C8 includes the descending regulating member that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction. The provided displacement member and elevating member can be supported by the lowering restricting member. As a result, the driving force for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be made unnecessary, so that the energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

  Further, since the restriction by the lowering restriction member is performed by raising the lifting member, there is no need to separately provide a driving source for forming the restriction by the lowering restriction member, and the driving source for raising and lowering the lifting member. Can also be used as a drive source for forming a restriction by the lowering restriction member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C8, the release of the restriction by the lowering restriction member is performed by lowering the lifting member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C8, since the release of the restriction by the lowering restriction member is performed by lowering the lifting member, it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing such restriction Therefore, the drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member can also be used as the drive source for releasing the restriction of the lowering restricting member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, when a separate drive source for releasing the restriction by the lowering restriction member is provided, for example, the raising and lowering member is lowered and driven in a state where the restriction by the lowering restriction member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure. Where there is a risk of overload acting on the source or damage to the lowering restricting member, etc., according to the gaming machine C9, it is possible to release the restriction by the lowering restricting member in accordance with the lowering operation of the lifting member. When the elevating member is lowered, it is possible to form a state where the restriction by the lowering restricting member is reliably released.

  If the lowering restricting member is not an elevating member but a structure that restricts displacement of the displacing member in the lowering direction, the structure for releasing the restriction by the lowering restricting member as the elevating member descends is complicated. However, according to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the lowering restricting member has a structure that restricts the displacement of the elevating member in the lowering direction, the release of the restriction by the lowering restricting member is accompanied with the lowering of the elevating member. The structure to be performed can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine C8 or C9, in a state where the lowering restriction member restricts the displacement of the elevating member in the lowering direction, the elevating restriction member is brought into contact with the elevating member, and the lowering restriction member acts as the elevating member. A gaming machine C10, wherein the abutting direction is different from the abutting direction of the ascending restriction member against the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in the gaming machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the lowering restricting member comes into contact with the elevating member is different from the direction in which the raising restricting member comes into contact with the elevating member. The regulating member and the raising regulating member can each suppress the rattling of the lifting member in different directions. As a result, the posture of the elevating member can be effectively stabilized.

  The gaming machine C10 includes a driving unit, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving unit, and a rack that meshes with the pinion, the rack is disposed on the elevating member, and the lowering restricting member includes: A gaming machine C11 which is brought into contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the rotational motion of the pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the lifting member is lifted and lowered along the guide member by the linear motion. In this case, the rack (elevating member) can be displaced in a direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, and the lowering restricting member is brought into contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the rack (elevating member) from being displaced in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack with respect to the pinion.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the ascent regulating member and the support member can contact the displacement member from one side and the other side across the guide member A gaming machine C12, which is disposed respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the one side and the other side where the rising restricting member and the supporting member sandwich the guide member Since the guide member is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement member, rattling in either direction of the displacement member toward the one side or the other side with respect to the guide member is regulated by the rise restricting member or the support member contacting each other. it can. Therefore, it can suppress effectively that the displacement member arrange | positioned by the descent | fall position originates in a disturbance.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the rise restricting member are in contact with the displacement member while being different in position along the extending direction of the guide member. A gaming machine C13, wherein the gaming machine C13 is disposed so as to be possible and the support member is disposed above the rise restricting member.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, the support member and the rising regulating member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position. Since the displacement member is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement member, the rattling of the displacement member in the oblique direction can be restricted by contact with the ascending restriction member and the support member. Therefore, it can suppress effectively that the displacement member arrange | positioned by the descent | fall position originates in a disturbance.

  In addition, since the support member is disposed above the ascending restriction member, the support member does not hinder the elevation member, and a space for the elevation member to ascend and descend can be secured. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure in which the detection part 641 of the rotating member 640 is detected by the detection sensor 684>
In a gaming machine comprising a movable member formed to be movable and a detection means for detecting the movement position of the movable member, the detection means is arranged at unequal intervals along the direction of movement of the movable member. A gaming machine D1 comprising a plurality of detected parts provided, and a plurality of detection sensors arranged on a movement locus of the detected parts.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a movable member formed to be rotatable and a detecting means for detecting a rotational position of the movable member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-46467). According to this gaming machine, the detection means includes a plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that are arranged to face each other with the slits interposed therebetween, and the light receiving unit receives light. The number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added, and the amount of rotation of the moving member from the reference position (that is, the rotational position) is detected based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. However, in this case, if a detection failure such as a light reception failure of the light receiving unit occurs, a deviation occurs between the rotational position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number, and the rotational position of the moving member cannot be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, it affects the subsequent detection results, and every time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the detection means is arranged on the moving member on the moving locus of the detected parts arranged at unequal intervals along the direction of movement of the moving member. Since a plurality of detection sensors are provided, the movement position of the moving member can be detected based on a combination of detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. In other words, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the plurality of detection sensors, and the past detection result of the detection sensor is required to detect the moving position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction. The plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the division members. A gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction. Are disposed on some of the plurality of divided members and not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are disposed on the basis of the distance between the divided members. Therefore, each time the moving member is displaced by an amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members, the combination of detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be varied. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the moving amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members as the minimum unit.

  Note that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members means that the plurality of detection sensors are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of divided members. Means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is disposed at a position where the presence or absence of the detected portion of the corresponding divided member can be detected.

  In the gaming machine D2, the moving member includes a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second interval in which the plurality of divided members are narrower than the first interval. And a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the dividing members in the first interval, and the movement locus of the detected part in the first interval A gaming machine D3, which is arranged above.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the moving member includes a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members are more than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval which is a narrow interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, a space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In this case, the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected part in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the divided members in the first section. It is possible to easily secure a space necessary for arranging the detection sensors. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (second interval) of the divided members in the second section, it is not necessary to consider the space for the arrangement of the detection sensor. A narrow interval can be set. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can also be suppressed from this point.

  In the gaming machine D3, the split member includes a main body member on which the detected member is disposed, and a link member that is connected to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member so that both ends are displaceable. The link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member, whereby the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased, and the link member is displaced in the first section. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it reaches the end, and the division member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of widening the interval between the adjacent division members.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the split member can be displaced at both ends of the main body member on which the detected member is disposed and the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. Since the link member is displaced relative to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member, the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased. And the structure for forming a 2nd area can be simplified.

  In this case, in the first section, the link member reaches the end of displacement, and the divided member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of increasing the interval between the adjacent divided members, so that the detected object in the direction of increasing the interval is detected. It is possible to suppress the position variation of the part. As a result, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D4, the split member includes a base member disposed so as to be displaceable, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. A link guide portion that acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, so that the main body member and the adjacent member are adjacent to each other. A gaming machine D5, wherein a posture of the link member with respect to a main body member of the divided member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the base member includes a main body guide portion that guides the main body member and a link guide portion that guides the link member when the divided member is displaced, When the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, the guide portion acts on the link member and changes the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. As the posture of the link member changes, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the guided portion of the link member is slidably inserted into the link guide portion of the base member. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the link guide portion of the base member is guided by the link member. Since the portion is formed in a groove shape that is slidably inserted, and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. Thereby, it is possible to reliably regulate the displacement of the divided member in the direction of increasing the interval between the adjacent divided members, and to suppress the position variation of the detected portion in the direction of increasing the interval. The detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the split member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, and abuts against the main body member of the adjacent split member in the first section. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a position, and the division member is restricted from being displaced in a direction of narrowing an interval between adjacent division members.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the split member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member. Since the displacement member is displaced to a position where it comes into contact with the main body member and the division member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of narrowing the interval between the adjacent division members, the detected portion in the direction of narrowing the interval is restricted. Can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure for adjusting the interval between the divided members DV in the moving member 640>
In a gaming machine including a movable member formed to be movable, the movable member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction. A second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that a section is formed.

  Here, a gaming machine including a moving member formed to be rotatable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of pieces of identification information can be displayed along the circumferential direction on the front surface of the moving member, and the player can visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more. Therefore, if the number of identification information displayed is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter and necessary for the arrangement. While the space increases, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the moving member includes a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members that are narrower than the first interval. Since the 2nd section connected with the 2nd interval is formed, compared with the case where the whole is connected with the 1st interval, the length of a moving member can be shortened. As a result, a space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed. That is, the space required for the arrangement of the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. Therefore, for example, when displaying the identification information on each divided member, it is possible to suppress the space necessary for disposing the moving member while securing the number of identification information displayed.

  In the gaming machine E1, the split member includes a main body member, and a link member connected to each of the main body portion and the main body portion of the adjacent split member so that both ends are displaceable. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body portion of the adjacent divided member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the split member includes a main body member and a link member that is connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member so as to be displaceable. In order to form the first section and the second section, the link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member so that the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased. Can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E2, the split member includes a base member disposed so as to be displaceable, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. A link guide portion that acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, so that the main body member and the adjacent member are adjacent to each other. A gaming machine E3, wherein a posture of the link member with respect to a main body member of the split member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the base member includes a main body guide portion that guides the main body member and a link guide portion that guides the link member when the divided member is displaced, When the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, the guide portion acts on the link member and changes the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. As the posture of the link member changes, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the dividing member includes a displacing member disposed on the main body member so as to be displaceable, and the displacing member is inclined toward the adjacent dividing member in the first section. In addition, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that in the second section, the posture is raised more than the posture in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the displacement member is inclined to the side of the adjacent divided member in the first section. It can be made easier. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be improved. Moreover, since the space | interval of a division member is widened in a 1st area, the space for a displacement member to incline can be ensured, and the displacement member can be enlarged correspondingly. Therefore, also from this point, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the second section, the displacing member is in a standing posture rather than the posture in the first section, so that the displacing member can be separated from the main body member of the adjacent divided member, and the main body members are correspondingly separated. The distance between them can be reduced. That is, the 2nd space | interval in a 2nd area can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space necessary for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is displaceably disposed on an upper surface of the main body member, and is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member in the second section. A gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed on the upper surface of the main body member so as to be displaceable, and in the second section, the upper surface of the adjacent divided member is higher than the upper surface of the main body member. Since it is disposed, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to each other until they come into contact with each other, and the interval between them can be made narrower. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space necessary for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E3, the main body guide portion of the base member has a circular track formed in the gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the track of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape, so that the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member. Can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E3, the track of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all of the plurality of divided members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. A gaming machine E7 characterized by having a radius equivalent to that of a circular arrangement.

  Here, a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members are connected in the circumferential direction at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval. When the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter referred to as “the former case”), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter referred to as “the latter”). Since the length in the circumferential direction can be shortened, the space necessary for disposing the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. However, when the tracks of the plurality of divided members are formed in a circular shape, the radius in the former case is made smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the divided member in the first section in the former case, the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member based on the number and radius of the divided members in the first section. Recall fewer numbers.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3, the track of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is such that all of the divided members are all Since the radius is equal to that of the circular connection by connecting in the circumferential direction at the first interval, the number of divided members is ensured and the space necessary for arranging the divided members is suppressed. However, the player can be reminded of the number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member.

<Concept of Invention with Drive Mechanism 630 as an Example>
A base member in which the guide portion is extended, a moving member formed by connecting a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and a driving force is applied to the moving member. Drive means, and the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member, whereby a first guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members to a first interval, and more than the first interval A second guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members at a narrow second interval, and the driving means includes a rotary drive member having an engaging portion that can be engaged with the divided member, and the rotational drive thereof. The gaming machine F1, wherein the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portions of the base member by rotating the members while engaging the engaging portions with the divided members.

  Here, a gaming machine including a moving member formed to be rotatable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of pieces of identification information can be displayed along the circumferential direction on the front surface of the moving member, and the player can visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more. Therefore, if the number of identification information displayed is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter and necessary for the arrangement. While the space increases, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and a section where the divided members are connected to the moving member at a first interval, and is narrower than the first interval. By forming a section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval, the number of divided members is ensured as compared with the case where the whole is connected at a first interval, while the plurality of divided members are secured. Space required for disposing the divided members can be suppressed, that is, when displaying the identification information on each divided member, the space necessary for disposing the moving member can be suppressed while ensuring the number of identification information displayed. I came up with it.

  However, a plurality of divided members are connected to a moving member to which a plurality of divided members are connected, at a section where the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval. There is a problem that it is difficult to displace the moving member with respect to the base member while forming the section to be formed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member, and thereby the first guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members to the first interval is narrower than the first interval. A second guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members at the second interval, and the drive means includes a rotation drive member having an engagement portion that can be engaged with the division member, and the rotation drive member is engaged. Since the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by rotating while engaging the portion with the divided member, the interval between the divided members is wide and the narrow interval (the first interval) The moving member can be displaced with respect to the base member while forming the section and the second interval section on the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine F2, wherein the rotation drive member is formed with a plurality of the engaging portions.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1, a plurality of engaging portions are formed on the rotation driving member, so that the transmission efficiency of the driving force from the rotation driving member to the moving member is improved. Can do.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the plurality of divided members are connected endlessly in the circumferential direction to form the moving member, and the driving means includes two rotation driving members, and the two rotations The gaming machine F3, wherein the driving member is disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the two rotation driving members are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, so that the rotation driving member is applied to the moving member. Can be distributed at different positions in the circumferential direction of the moving member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the moving member by suppressing the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members.

  In the gaming machine F3, the tracks of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member have a circular shape, and the second rotary drive member has a phase difference of 180 degrees in the circular track. A gaming machine F4, which is arranged at a different position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the two rotary drive members are circular trajectories. , The driving force from the rotation driving member can be applied to the two most distant positions of the moving member (plurality of divided members). The displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the second rotation drive member is configured such that the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member is disengaged from the engagement member of the one rotation drive member. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the engaging portions are arranged so that the phases thereof are different from each other so that the engaging members are engaged with the divided members.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the two rotary drive members are in contact with the other while the engaging portion of one rotary drive member is not engaged with the split member. Since the engaging portions of the rotation driving member are arranged to be different from each other so that the engaging portion of the rotation driving member is engaged with the split member, the engagement portion of one rotation driving member and the rotation driving member of the other rotation driving member are arranged. It can be avoided that the engaging portions are simultaneously disengaged from the divided members, and the transmission of the driving force from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be suppressed from being intermittent. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of divided members are connected endlessly as in the present invention, if the transmission of the driving force from the rotational driving member to the moving member becomes intermittent, the dividing is accompanied by the transmission and release of the driving force. Since the interval between the members is increased or decreased, the posture of the moving member as a whole becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, either one of the engaging portion of the one rotational driving member and the engaging portion of the other rotational driving member is always engaged with the divided member, and the driving force is always applied to the moving member. Can be formed, so that the interval between the divided members can be easily kept constant. As a result, even if the moving member is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members in an endless manner, the posture can be stabilized. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include engaged portions with which the engaging portions of the rotation driving unit are engaged, and the engaged portions are tracks of the plurality of divided members. A gaming machine F6, which is disposed on the outer peripheral side.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion to which the engaging portion of the rotation driving means is engaged, Since the portion is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the track of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (the plurality of divided members) relative to the amount of rotation of the rotation drive member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotation driving member is disposed at a position where the engagement portion can be engaged with the divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions. A gaming machine F7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the rotation drive member is a divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, between the divided members. Since the engaging portion is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member guided in a state where the interval is widened, interference between the adjacent divided member and the rotation driving member can be suppressed, and accordingly, the rotation driving member. The diameter of can be increased. As a result, the driving torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member displaced along the guide portion, thereby changing the interval between the split members to the first interval or the second interval. A third guide portion that transitions from the interval to the second interval or the first interval, and the rotation driving member is guided to the divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions. A gaming machine F8, wherein the engaging portion is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in the gaming machine according to any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotation driving member is a divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, that is, adjacent divided portions. Since the engagement portion is disposed at a position where the engagement portion can be engaged with the divided member whose interval with the member is changed from the first interval or the second interval to the second interval or the first interval, the guide portion The split member that receives a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotary drive member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the bending of the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members in the middle, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member includes a main body member that is displaced along the guide portion, one end of the main body member that is rotatably connected to the main body member, and another main body member of the adjacent split member. A link member whose ends are slidably coupled, and one end and the other end of the link member are respectively rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member, The interval between the adjacent divided members is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation driving member is a main body member of the divided member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected to the part. The game machine F9 is characterized in that one end of the link member is engaged at a position close to a portion where the one end of the link member is rotatably connected.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member is connected to the main body member displaced along the guide portion, and one end of the main body member is rotatably connected to the main body member. A link member whose other end is slidably connected to the main body member of the adjacent divided member, and one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member, respectively. Thus, the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation drive member is the main body member of the divided member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected. Since the one end of the link member is engaged at a position closer to the portion where the link member is rotatably connected than the portion to be rotated, the main body member of the split member is driven by the rotation drive member and displaced along the guide portion When that can be easily transmitted through the body member to the link member of divided member adjacent the displacement of the body member. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the gaming machine F10 is provided with driving gears arranged concentrically with a circle that is a track of the plurality of divided members and respectively meshed with the two rotary driving members.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the driving gears meshed with the two rotational driving members are provided, the two rotational driving members are synchronized by rotating the driving gears. It can be rotated in the state where it is done. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is disposed concentrically with the circular shape that is the track of the plurality of divided members, the drive gear and the two rotational drive members are movable members (a plurality of divided members) in the front view of the base member. It can arrange | position inward rather than the outer periphery of this movement locus | trajectory. That is, the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 are not protruded outward from the outer shape of the moving member, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

<Feature G group> (Bunny foot control)
A first flow path through which a game ball can flow, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and a game ball having entered the first flow path are determined. A first discriminating means capable of communicating with the first flow path and the second flow path so that a game ball can flow down at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path; Based on the determination result of the first determination means, the release determination means for determining whether the release condition capable of releasing the communication state is satisfied, and the release determination means A gaming machine G1 having maintenance means for maintaining the communication state until it is determined to be possible.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that executes a lottery in response to a start winning prize, and gives a winning state that is advantageous to the player when the lottery results in a specific lottery result. In this conventional game machine, a bonus is given to the player by causing the game ball to enter a specific entrance area that is opened (or expanded) when the hit state is reached. In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, a plurality of flow paths are provided inside the entrance area, and the benefits given according to the flow paths that pass through are made different so as to improve the interest during the hit state. (For example, JP2013-59445A). Of the plurality of channels, the channel through which the game ball travels is switched according to, for example, the hit type and the elapsed time.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there are cases where the traveling direction of the game ball cannot be completely controlled, and there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be flowed down suitably.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, the entry of the game ball into the first flow path is determined by the first determination unit. At least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to a communication state in which the first flow path and the second flow path communicate with each other and the game ball can flow down by the movable means. Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the release determination means determines that the release condition that can release the communication state is established, and the maintenance means determines that the communication state is maintained until the release determination means determines that the release condition can be released. Is maintained.

  As a result, the communication state is maintained until the release condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the game ball can be suitably flowed down.

  In the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G1 has second determining means for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the second flow path, and the release condition is determined by the first determining means. A gaming machine G2, which is established when the number of game balls matches the number of game balls determined by the second determination means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second flow path, a predetermined determination is performed by the second determination means. The release condition is satisfied when the number of game balls determined by the first determination means matches the number of game balls determined by the second determination means.

  Accordingly, the communication state can be maintained until the game ball flows down from one of the first flow path and the second flow path in the communication state to the other. That is, it is possible to suppress the release of the communication state during the flow from one flow path to the other flow path, and to reliably flow the game ball to the other flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that the flow destination of the game ball can be suitably controlled.

  In the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined period elapses after the first determination unit determines that a game ball has entered.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed since the first determining means determined that the game ball has entered, so that during the predetermined period The first flow path and the second flow path in communication with each other can be passed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the release of the communication state while the game ball is flowing down one of the flow paths, and to allow the game ball to flow down appropriately.

  In the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first discriminating unit finally discriminates the entry of the game ball in the one communication state. A gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first discrimination means finally discriminates the entry of the game ball in one communication state. Therefore, the communication state can be released after all the game balls that have entered the first flow path in the communication state have passed for a predetermined time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the release of the communication state while the game ball is flowing down one of the flow paths, and to allow the game ball to flow down appropriately.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, an open state in which the game ball can enter the ball entrance means, and a closure that makes it difficult to enter the ball than the open state A variable member that can be changed to a state, and a variable means that changes the variable member from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied when a specific condition is satisfied, A gaming machine G5, wherein the flow path is arranged at a position where a game ball entering the entrance means enters.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable member is varied between an open state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the open state. When the specific condition is satisfied, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state by the variable means. Here, the 1st flow path is arrange | positioned in the position where the game ball which entered the entrance means enters.

  Thereby, it can suppress that a communication state will be cancelled | released before the game ball which entered the ball entry means reaches the 2nd flow path. Therefore, when the ball entry means is in the open state, there is an effect that the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can be suitably flowed down.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the effecting means is executed, and the effecting means is based on the fact that a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed since the first determining means determined that the game ball has entered. The gaming machine G6 is characterized by having an effect changing means for changing the effect mode to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, based on the fact that a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed since the first discrimination means discriminates the entry of the game ball, the effect means The effect mode executed is changed by the effect changing means.

  As a result, it is possible to cause the player to launch a game ball aiming at the first road, with one of the pleasures of changing the effect mode executed by the effect means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G6, the effect means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path, and the game ball that has entered the first flow path reaches the second flow path during the predetermined elapsed period. A gaming machine G7 characterized by being configured for a period of time required to complete the game.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G6, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect means is disposed on the front side of the second flow path. And the period more than the period required until the game ball which entered into the 1st entrance means reaches the 2nd channel is set up as a predetermined elapsed period.

  As a result, since the effect mode executed by the effect means after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the effect means is changed, the game ball reaches the effect means for the player. As a result, it is possible to execute an appearance effect as if the effect mode has been changed. Therefore, since a novel production can be realized, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the second flow path depending on whether or not a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed, a configuration of a sensor or the like for determining whether or not a ball has entered the second flow path Can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine G7, the gaming machine G8 is characterized in that at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the rendering means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G7, since at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the rendering means, the rendering is performed while the game ball passes through the second flow path. A game ball can enter the inside of the means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel effect in which the effect mode executed by the effect means is changed when the game ball enters the effect means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, based on the game ball that has entered the second flow path, a second determination unit that performs a predetermined determination, an effect unit that performs an effect, and a determination result by the second determination unit. Based on this, the gaming machine G9 is characterized by having production varying means for varying the production mode executed by the production means.

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the game ball that has entered the second flow path, the predetermined determination is performed by the second determination means. Then, based on the determination result by the second determining means, the effect mode executed by the effect means is varied by the effect varying means.

  Thereby, in order to change an effect mode, a game ball can be struck out so that a game ball may enter into the 2nd channel to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G9, the effect means is disposed on the front side of the second flow path, and the second determination means determines that a game ball has reached the second flow path. A gaming machine G10 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G9, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect means is disposed on the front side of the second flow path. Then, it is determined by the second determining means that the game ball has reached the second flow path.

  As a result, since the effect mode executed by the effect means after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the effect means is changed, the game ball reaches the effect means for the player. As a result, it is possible to execute an appearance effect as if the effect mode has been changed. Therefore, since a novel production can be realized, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G10, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means, and the second determination means is located inside the effect means in the second flow path. A gaming machine G11 characterized by determining whether or not a game ball has flowed down the formed portion.

  According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G10, the following effects are produced. That is, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the rendering means. And it is discriminate | determined by a 2nd discrimination | determination means whether the game ball flowed down the part formed inside the production | presentation means among the 2nd flow paths.

  As a result, it is possible to realize a novel effect in which the effect mode executed by the effect means is changed when the game ball enters the effect means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G11, it is determined whether it is a release timing for releasing the communication state after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to the communication state by the movable means. The movable means has a determination means, and when the determination means determines that the release timing is satisfied, the release determination means determines that the release condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G12, wherein at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to release the communication state.

  According to the gaming machine G12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination means determines whether it is the release timing for releasing the communication state after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to the communication state by the movable means. When it is determined by the determination means that the release timing is reached, at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is movable based on the determination that the release condition is satisfied by the release determination means. It is moved by the means and the communication state is released.

  As a result, even if the release timing comes, the communication state can be maintained until the release condition is satisfied, so that even when the game ball advances to the first flow path just before the release timing, the game There exists an effect that a sphere can be made to flow down suitably.

  In the gaming machine G12, the release determination unit determines that the release condition is satisfied based on the elapse of a specific period after the determination unit determines that the release timing is reached. A gaming machine G13.

  According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G12, based on the fact that the specific period has passed since the determination unit determined that the release timing was reached, the cancellation determination unit determined that the cancellation condition was satisfied. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can be reliably discharged from the first passage and the second flow path during a specific period until it is determined by the release determination means that the release condition is satisfied. . Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball can flow down suitably.

  In the gaming machine G13, the specific period is equal to or longer than a period in which the gaming balls entering the first flow path are discharged.

  According to the gaming machine G14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G13, the specific period is configured to be a period longer than the period during which the game ball entering the second flow path is discharged, so it is determined that it is the release timing. There is an effect that the game ball that has entered the first flow path immediately before being discharged can be more reliably discharged while the communication state is maintained.

<Characteristic H group> (Control target is variable depending on the operation status (LED control of pocket))
A movable body in which a plurality of decoration parts are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, and a position of the decoration part arranged in the movable body can be varied corresponding to the movement of the movable body. A variable means and an actuating body capable of following the movable body and provided with a plurality of actuating parts smaller than the decoration part, and the actuating parts arranged on the actuating body are predetermined. An operation control means that can be operated for each number; a determination means that determines a specific decoration portion from the plurality of decoration portions; and a position corresponding to the specific decoration portion determined by the determination means A gaming machine H1 characterized by comprising: a discriminating means for discriminating an operating part, wherein the operating control means actuates the operating part based on discrimination information by the discriminating means.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that executes an entertainment effect using a plurality of effect members such as various kinds of accessories and display means. Some of these gaming machines can execute a wide variety of entertainment effects by operating a plurality of effect members in one effect. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it may be difficult to perform a unified performance using different performance members, and therefore it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the player's interest. was there. In addition, some conventional gaming machines can slide presentation members composed of liquid crystal display devices provided on the left and right sides of the game board in directions toward and away from each other. In some conventional gaming machines, the display mode displayed on the display screen of each effect member is varied according to the distance between the left and right effect members to improve the interest (for example, special features No. 2014-239965). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the two effect members are merely operated with respect to each other. For this reason, when the member for production | presentation is increased and symmetrical operation is impossible, there exists a possibility that operation | movement of the member for production | presentation cannot be set suitably.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, a plurality of decorative portions are arranged on the movable body, and the movable body is moved by the movable means. The position of the decorative portion arranged on the movable body is changed by the variable means corresponding to the movement of the movable body. The operating body moves following the movable body. The actuating body is provided with a plurality of actuating parts that are fewer than the decorative part, and the actuating parts are actuated by a predetermined number by the actuation control means. A specific decorative portion is determined by the determining means from the plurality of decorative portions, and an operating portion at a position corresponding to the specific decorative portion determined by the determining means is determined by the determining means. And based on the discrimination | determination information by a discrimination | determination means, an action | operation part is act | operated by an operation control means.

  Thereby, since the operation part corresponding to arrangement | positioning of a decoration part can be operated, the operation | movement with a sense of unity can be performed with a decoration part and an operation part. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1, the operating body is fixed with respect to the movable body.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the operating body is fixed to the movable body, so that the operation with a sense of unity is realized by the movable body's decorative portion and the working portion of the working pair. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the operation control unit is configured to determine the operation unit determined by the determination unit while the specific decoration unit is moved from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position. A gaming machine H3 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the discrimination means is discriminated while the specific decorative portion is moved from at least the first position to the second position different from the first position. Since the actuating part is actuated by the actuating control means, at least after the second position, the actuating part at a position corresponding to the specific decorative part can be controlled to be activated. Therefore, since the operation with a sense of unity can be realized by the decoration part and the operation part, there is an effect that the operation of the decoration part and the operation part having different numbers can be suitably set.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the game machine has position determining means capable of determining the positions of the plurality of decoration portions, and the determining means is based on the position determination information determined by the position determining means. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the operating portion at a position corresponding to the specific decorative portion is discriminated.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines H1 to H3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the positions of the plurality of decoration portions are respectively determined by the position determination means. Then, based on the position determination information determined by the position determination unit, the operation unit at the position corresponding to the specific decoration unit is determined by the determination unit.

  Thereby, since an operation part can be operated corresponding to the position of a plurality of decoration parts, there is an effect that operation with a sense of unity can be performed by a decoration part and an operation part.

  In the gaming machine H4, a plurality of protruding pieces are arranged at predetermined positions on the movable body, and each time the movable body moves to a plurality of predetermined movable positions, And detecting means capable of detecting the one or a plurality of protruding pieces set corresponding to the respective movable positions, and the position determining means is configured to detect the plurality of protrusions based on a detection result of the detecting means. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it determines the position of the decoration part.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of protruding pieces are arranged at predetermined positions of the movable body. Each time the movable body moves to a plurality of predetermined movable positions, one or a plurality of protruding pieces set corresponding to the respective movable positions are detected by the detecting means, and the detection is performed. Based on the detection result by the means, the positions of the plurality of decorative portions are determined by the position determining means.

  Thereby, since arrangement | positioning of a decoration part can be discriminate | determined by detecting a protrusion piece mechanically by a detection means, there exists an effect that discrimination | determination can be performed more correctly.

  In the gaming machine H5, different identification information is preset in each of the plurality of decoration portions, and the decoration portions corresponding to the identification information are arranged on the movable body in a predetermined order. The position determination means has identification information determination means for determining identification information of the decoration part located at a predetermined position based on a detection result of the detection means, and is determined by the identification information determination means. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the position of the remaining decoration portion is determined based on the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the following effects are produced. That is, different identification information is preset in each of the plurality of decoration portions, and the decoration portions corresponding to the identification information are arranged on the movable body in a predetermined order. Further, in the position determination means, the identification information of the decoration part located at a predetermined position determined in advance is determined by the identification information determination means based on the detection result of the detection means, and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means Based on the above, the positions of the remaining decoration portions are determined.

  As a result, it is possible to determine the positions of all the decoration parts simply by determining the identification information of the predetermined position. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide only detection means for detecting the decoration part arranged at the predetermined position. The number of means can be reduced. Therefore, since the number of parts can be reduced, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H4, the movable means moves the movable body in a predetermined movable pattern, and a positional information storage in which positional information of the plurality of decoration portions is stored corresponding to the movable pattern. And the position determining means determines the positions of the plurality of decorative portions based on the position information stored in the position information storage means based on information on the movable pattern in which the movable body is moved. A gaming machine H7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable body is moved by the movable means in a predetermined movable pattern. Corresponding to the movable pattern, the position information of a plurality of decorative portions is stored in the position information storage means. Based on the information of the movable pattern in which the movable body is moved, the positions of the plurality of decorative portions are determined by the position determining means from the position information stored in the position information storage means.

  Thereby, the position of the decoration part can be determined by simple control of simply reading out the position information stored in the position information storage means, so that the processing load when determining the position of the decoration part can be reduced. There is an effect that can be done. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide detection means such as a sensor, the number of parts of the gaming machine can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the movable body is disposed on the front side of the operating body, and the operating section is configured by a light emitting means that emits light to the decoration section located on the front side. A gaming machine H8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the movable body is disposed on the front side of the operating body, and the operating section emits light that emits light to the decorative section located on the front side. Since it is comprised by a means, it can be set as the shining appearance of the specific decoration part by the action | operation part. Therefore, there is an effect that a specific decorative portion can be made conspicuous.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the movable means rotates the movable body, and the movable pattern is a predetermined rotation pattern for rotating the movable body. A gaming machine H9 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the movable body is rotated by the movable means based on a predetermined rotation pattern defined as a movable pattern. While rotating, the operation part corresponding to a specific decoration part can be operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the rotation operation can be improved.

<Feature Group I> (Pocket position control)
In a gaming machine having a movable body movable within a predetermined movable range, a movable means for moving the movable body within the movable range, and a movable control means for moving and controlling the movable means, the movable body is: A plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions; and the gaming machine, when the movable body is moved to the predetermined plurality of predetermined positions, the plurality of detection units Detection means capable of detecting one or more detection units configured by a predetermined combination corresponding to each predetermined position, and a predetermined number of the detection units detected by the detection means In this case, a position based on a detection result detected by the detection means on condition that the detection unit detected by the detection means is constant while the movable body is moved by a predetermined amount. Discriminator to discriminate information Gaming machine I1, characterized in that the, and has a.

  Here, a gaming machine capable of executing a movable effect using movable means such as an accessory is known. In this conventional game machine, an accurate performance operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detecting means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the movable position of the movable means may be mistaken when an erroneous detection occurs by the detection means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, a plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions are provided on the movable body. When the movable body is moved to a plurality of predetermined positions, one or more detection units configured by a predetermined combination corresponding to each predetermined position are detected by the detection unit among the plurality of detection units. Is done. When a predetermined number of detection units are detected by the detection unit, the detection unit detects that the detection unit detected by the detection unit is constant while the movable body is moved by a predetermined amount. Based on the detected result, the position information is determined by the determining means.

  Thereby, since a detection part can be discriminate | determined more reliably, there exists an effect that the positional information on a movable means can be discriminate | determined correctly.

  In the gaming machine I1, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a determination unit that determines a specific predetermined position from the plurality of predetermined positions, and the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determination unit. And a notification means for executing a notification process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position when determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, a specific predetermined position is determined from a plurality of predetermined positions by the determining means. When the determining means determines that the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determining means, the notification means indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position is executed by the notification means.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the player can clearly recognize that the movable body has reached a specific predetermined position.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the detection means is arranged such that a multiplier of 2 with respect to the number of the detection means is larger than the plurality of the predetermined positions. I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the detection means is arranged so that the multiplier of 2 for the number of detection means is larger than a plurality of predetermined positions. The combination of the presence / absence of the detection unit at the position where the detection means is arranged can be made different at all the predetermined positions. That is, since the combination of the detection results by the detection means and each predetermined position can be in a one-to-one correspondence, there is an effect that the position of the movable means can be more accurately determined from the detection result by the detection means.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the movable body includes a plurality of decorative portions, and the decorative portions are respectively disposed on the movable body corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions. This is a gaming machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the decorative parts are arranged on the movable body corresponding to a plurality of predetermined positions, so that the appearance of the movable body decorated can do. Therefore, since the movable body can be noted, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the movable means rotates the movable body, and the plurality of predetermined positions are positions where the movable body is rotated at predetermined angles. Characteristic gaming machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable body is rotated by the movable means. A plurality of predetermined positions are arranged at positions where the movable body is rotated at predetermined angles.

  Thereby, when the movable body is rotating, the arrangement of the movable body can be determined at every predetermined angle, so that the rotation operation can be executed more accurately.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a determination unit that determines the specific predetermined position from the plurality of predetermined positions, and the specific predetermined position determined by the determination unit When the determination means determines that the movable body is moved, the determination means is configured to execute notification processing indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position, and the determination condition is satisfied. And a privilege granting unit for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination unit being a specific determination result, and the determination unit includes: The gaming machine I6 is characterized in that the specific predetermined position is determined based on a determination result of the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the determination unit determines a specific predetermined position from a plurality of predetermined positions, and the determination unit determines that the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determination unit. When it is done, a notification process that indicates that the movable body is at a specific predetermined position is executed by the notification means. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination is executed by the determination means, and based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result, a privilege advantageous to the player is granted by the privilege granting means. Further, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determining means based on the determination result of the determining means.

  Thereby, since the specific predetermined position according to the determination result of the determination means can be notified by the notification process, the determination result by the determination means can be clearly understood by the player.

  In the gaming machine I6, the game machine I6 further includes a selection unit that selects the predetermined position indicating that the determination result of the determination unit is a specific determination result by stopping the movable body among the plurality of predetermined positions, The determination means determines the specific predetermined position from the predetermined position selected by the selection means when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, and the determination result of the determination means If the result is other than a specific determination result, the specific predetermined position is determined from a position other than the predetermined position selected by the selection means.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I6, the following effects are produced. That is, among the plurality of predetermined positions, a predetermined position indicating that the determination result of the determination unit is a specific determination result when the movable body stops is selected by the selection unit. When the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means from the predetermined position selected by the selection means. When the determination result by the determination unit is other than the specific determination result, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determination unit from other than the predetermined position selected by the selection unit.

  Thereby, since it can be expected that the predetermined position selected by the selection unit is notified as the specific predetermined position, attention can be paid to the operation of the movable body. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I7, the movable body includes a plurality of the decorative portions respectively corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions, and the notification unit is configured to move the movable body to the specific predetermined position. Based on this, the gaming machine I8 is controlled so as to notify the player by moving a notification member relative to the decorative portion corresponding to the specific predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I7, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of decorative portions are respectively arranged on the movable body corresponding to a plurality of predetermined positions. Further, based on the fact that the movable body has moved to a specific predetermined position, the notification means is controlled to notify the player by moving the notification member relative to the decorative portion corresponding to the specific predetermined position.

  Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the operation of the movable body and the operation of the notification member. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Feature J group> (Next pocket control)
A movable body that is movable within a predetermined movable range and in which a plurality of decorative portions are arranged at different positions, a movable means that moves the movable body within the movable range, and an effect information determining means that determines predetermined effect information Based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means, the movable means moves the specific decorative part among the plurality of decorative parts of the movable body to a predetermined effect position. In the gaming machine having the control means, when the movable body is moved by the movable means, the storage means storing the arrangement information of the decoration portion arranged in the movable body, and the effect position Based on a determination unit for determining the decoration part and a determination result by the determination unit, the movement unit is moved to the effect position after the decoration part determined by the determination unit. Gaming machine J1, characterized in that the decorative portion are those having an identification means for identifying from the arrangement information stored in the storage means.

  Here, a gaming machine capable of executing a movable effect using movable means such as an accessory is known. In this conventional game machine, an accurate performance operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detecting means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such a conventional game machine, since the arrangement of the movable means cannot be accurately identified until the arrangement of the movable means is detected by the sensor, the degree of freedom of the rendering operation may be reduced. . That is, there is a problem that the interest of the player in the game cannot be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the arrangement information of the decoration part arranged on the movable body is stored in the storage means. When the movable body is moved by the movable means, the decoration part at the effect position is determined by the determination means, and based on the determination result by the determination means, the decoration position is set to the effect position after the decoration part determined by the determination means. The decoration part to be moved is identified from the arrangement information stored in the storage unit by the identification unit.

  As a result, it is possible to identify in advance that the specific decoration portion is arranged at the production position before the specific decoration portion is arranged at the production position, so that the production operation based on the production information is performed. Can increase the degree of freedom. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, identification information for identifying each decoration part is set in the plurality of decoration parts, and the specific decoration part determined by the effect determining means is the specific identification information. Is a game machine J2 that is set.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are achieved. That is, identification information for identifying each decoration part is set in the plurality of decoration parts. Specific identification information is set in the specific decorative portion determined by the effect determining means.

  Thereby, when specific identification information is set for a plurality of decoration parts, any specific decoration part may be moved to the effect position, so that the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the specific decoration part is moved to the effect position, the specific decoration part is notified that the specific decoration part is determined by the effect information determination means. A gaming machine J3 having a notification means for notifying the player by moving the player.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the specific decorative part is moved to the effect position, the notification member is moved to the specific decorative part to move the specific decorative part. Since the player is notified of the decoration member by the notification means, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation of the notification member. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to identify in advance that the specific decorative member is arranged at the production position before the specific decoration member is arranged at the production position, the decorative member is arranged before the production position. In addition, it is possible to start moving the notification member to a specific decorative member. Therefore, there is an effect that the notification member can be moved to the specific decorative member more reliably.

  In the gaming machine J3, the notification unit includes a spherical sphere configured as the notification member, a holding unit capable of holding the sphere in a holding position, and the holding of the sphere by the holding unit is released Further, the sphere is swung at a position where the sphere can be moved to the effect position, and a standby oscillating path capable of waiting for a predetermined period, and the sphere is moved from the standby oscillating path to the effect position. A gaming machine J4 having at least variable means for changing a traveling direction.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the notification means, the notification member is constituted by a spherical sphere pair, and the sphere is held at the holding position by the holding means. When the holding of the sphere by the holding means is released, the sphere is oscillated at a position where the sphere can be moved to the effect position on the standby oscillating path, and waits for a predetermined time. The moving direction of the sphere is changed by the variable means from the standby swing path to the effect position.

  Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the traveling direction of the sphere is changed from the standby swing path to the effect position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J4, the notification unit includes a variable control unit that varies the variable unit, and the variable control unit determines a timing for varying the variable unit based on an identification result by the identification unit. A gaming machine J5 that is variable.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the notification means, the variable means is varied by the variable control means. The timing at which the variable means is varied is determined by the variable control means based on the identification result by the identification means, and is varied.

  Thereby, since the timing for changing the variable means can be determined before the specific decoration part is changed to the effect position, the movement time for the sphere to move from the variable means to the effect position is taken into account. There is an effect that the sphere can be reliably moved to the effect position in a state where the decoration part is arranged at the effect position.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the movable body has detection units arranged at a plurality of positions, and the detection unit arranged at a predetermined number of predetermined positions can be detected. And a determining means for determining the decoration part located at the effect position based on a combination of the detection parts detected by the detecting means. Machine J6.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the detection units are arranged at a plurality of positions of the movable body. Detection means capable of detecting the detection unit are arranged at a predetermined number of predetermined positions, respectively. Based on the combination of the detection units detected by the detection unit, the decoration unit located at the effect position is determined by the determination unit.

  Thereby, since a detection part can be detected mechanically by a detection means, there exists an effect that the decoration part arrange | positioned in the production | presentation position can be discriminate | determined more correctly.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J6, the identification means determines a type of the decoration part that is moved to the effect position next to the decoration part determined by the determination means. A gaming machine J7.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J1 to J6, the type of decoration part that is moved to the effect position after the decoration part determined by the determination means is identified by the identification means. It is possible to identify in advance that the specific decoration portion is arranged at the effect position at the stage where the decoration portion before the decoration portion is arranged at the effect position. Therefore, since the freedom degree of the production | presentation operation | movement based on production | presentation information can be raised, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

<Characteristic K group> (specify pockets based on the output of multiple steps)
A movable body having a plurality of detection units at a predetermined position, a movable unit for moving the movable body, and a predetermined one of the plurality of detection units at a predetermined detection position with respect to the movable body moved by the movable unit. Detection means capable of simultaneously detecting the detection units arranged in a range over a predetermined period, determination means for determining a detection result by the detection means a plurality of times in a predetermined period, and the plurality of times by the determination means And a discriminating means for identifying the discriminant result identified as satisfying a predetermined predetermined condition as a regular discriminant result.

  Here, a gaming machine capable of executing a movable effect using movable means such as an accessory is known. In this conventional game machine, an accurate performance operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detecting means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, such a conventional gaming machine has a problem that, when an erroneous detection occurs by the detection means, the movable position of the movable means is mistaken and the movable means cannot be controlled appropriately.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the movable body provided with a plurality of detection units at predetermined positions is moved by the movable means. With respect to the movable body that is moved by the movable means, the detection sections arranged in a predetermined range among the plurality of detection sections at a predetermined detection position are simultaneously detected by the detection means over a predetermined period. The detection result by the detection means is determined a plurality of times in a predetermined period by the determination means, and among the determination results of the determination times by the determination means, the determination result satisfying a predetermined condition is identified as a normal determination result by the identification means. Is done.

  Thereby, when detecting the detection part of a movable body, since it can detect based on the discrimination | determination result which satisfy | filled the predetermined condition, a detection part can be detected correctly. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable body can be suitably controlled.

  In the gaming machine K1, a plurality of different decorative portions are arranged on the movable body, the detection means is configured by a predetermined number, and is arranged corresponding to the arrangement interval of the decorative portions, and the detection The part is arranged corresponding to the position of the specific decoration part among the plurality of decoration parts.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. In other words, a plurality of different decorative portions are arranged on the movable body. A predetermined number of detection means are arranged corresponding to the arrangement interval of the decorative portions. The detection part is arrange | positioned corresponding to the position of a specific decoration part among several decoration parts.

  Thereby, a detection part can be detected whenever a movable body moves the arrangement | positioning space | interval of a detection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the detection unit can be periodically detected while the movable body is moving.

  In the gaming machine K2, the plurality of decoration portions are arranged on the movable body at predetermined intervals, respectively, and the detection unit includes a plurality of decorations obtained by dividing the plurality of decoration portions into units corresponding to the predetermined number. The gaming machine K3 is arranged in the decorative portion so as not to have the same arrangement relationship with respect to the portion.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of decorative portions are respectively arranged on the movable body at predetermined intervals. The detection units are arranged so that the plurality of decoration units divided into units corresponding to a predetermined number do not have the same arrangement relationship.

  Thereby, since the arrangement of the detection unit detected by the detection means and the arrangement of the movable body can be in a one-to-one correspondence, there is an effect that the arrangement of the movable body can be accurately determined from the detection result by the detection means. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the detection means detects the detection unit in a predetermined order based on the movable body being moved by a predetermined movable amount. A gaming machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the detection unit detects the detection unit in a predetermined order based on the movable body being moved by a predetermined movable amount. Therefore, there is an effect that the arrangement of the movable body can be accurately determined based on the order in which the detection units are detected.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the identification unit is configured such that when the plurality of discrimination results by the discrimination unit include the same discrimination result more than a predetermined specific ratio, A gaming machine K5 that identifies the same discrimination result as a regular discrimination result.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the same discrimination results are included in a plurality of discrimination results by the discrimination means at a predetermined specific ratio or more. In this case, since the same discrimination result is identified as a regular discrimination result by the discriminating means, even if a part of a plurality of discrimination results becomes an incorrect discrimination result due to the influence of noise or the like, It is possible to prevent an erroneous determination result from being identified as a normal determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that more accurate discrimination can be executed.

  In the gaming machine K5, when the identification unit identifies that the same discrimination result included in the plurality of discrimination results by the discrimination unit is less than a predetermined specific ratio, The avoiding means for avoiding identification of the regular discrimination result from the discrimination results of the times, and the detection unit when the avoidance means avoids identifying the regular discrimination result by the avoiding means And a detection control means for performing control so as to be additionally detected over the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is identified that the same discrimination results included in a plurality of discrimination results by the discriminating means are less than a predetermined specific ratio, regular discrimination is performed from the plurality of discrimination results. The avoidance means avoids the result being identified. And when it is avoided that a regular discrimination | determination result is identified by an avoidance means, a detection part is controlled by a detection control means so that a detection part may be additionally detected over a predetermined period.

  Thereby, based on the additional detection result by the detection means, the regular determination result can be identified again by the identification means. Therefore, there is an effect that the regular discrimination result can be discriminated more reliably.

<Feature L group> (Control to drop the ball into the target pocket)
A movable body in which a plurality of different identification sections are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, and the identification section that is moved to a predetermined effect position when the movable body is moved by the movable means. When the discriminating means for discriminating information, the producing body used for the predetermined production, the holding device capable of holding at least the predetermined production is started, and the holding of the production body by the holding device is released, It is possible to detect a swinging means capable of swinging the effector at a position where the effector can be moved to the effect position, and a swinging state of the effector swung by the swinging means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a determination unit that determines the identification unit for moving the effect body from the plurality of identification units, and a swing state of the effect body is determined by the detection unit. When it is in a moving state And a moving means for moving the effector to the identification unit determined by the determination means based on the determination result by the determination means. .

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of flow paths is known. Among such conventional gaming machines, there are some which are advantageous or disadvantageous for a player by a flow path through which a sphere such as a game ball travels. In addition, a swing passage capable of swinging the sphere is provided on the upstream side of the branching position of each flow path, and the player can operate while the sphere is swinging in the shape of the swing passage. In contrast, there is one that can enhance the expectation for the sphere to flow down into a flow path that is advantageous to the above (for example, JP 2010-179166 A). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the mode of the swinging operation varies depending on the momentum when the sphere enters the swinging passage, the swinging before the player's expectation is sufficiently increased. In some cases, the sphere may flow down from the flow path to one of the flow paths. Therefore, there is a problem that the interest of the player in the game may not be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, a plurality of different identification units are arranged on the movable body, and the movable body is moved by the movable means. The movable body is moved by the moving means, and the information of the identification unit that is moved to the predetermined effect position is determined by the determining means. The effect body used for the predetermined effect is held by the holding means until at least the predetermined effect is started, and when the holding of the effect body by the holding means is released, the effect body can be moved to the effect position. The effector is rocked by the rocking means at a certain position. The swinging state of the effector swung by the swinging means is detected by the detecting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, an identifying unit for moving the effect body is determined by the determining unit from the plurality of identifying units. When it is detected by the detecting means that the swinging state of the effector is a predetermined swinging state, the effector is moved to the identification unit determined by the determining means by the moving means based on the determination result by the determining means. The

  Thereby, in the predetermined production each time, the production body can be moved to the identification section after being in the predetermined rocking state, so that the operation quality of the production body in the predetermined production can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the swinging motion of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, the effect body is constituted by a sphere, and the swinging means has a swing path capable of swinging the effect body. L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect body is composed of a sphere. The swinging means is provided with a swing path capable of swinging the effect body.

  As a result, the effector can be made to swing by reciprocating by rolling on the swing path, so that the effector can be swung simply by giving an initial speed in the direction of the swing path. Therefore, there is no need to provide a special configuration for causing the effector to perform the swinging operation, and thus the number of parts can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine L2, the detecting means includes an effect body detecting means for detecting the effect body swinging on the swing path at a predetermined position, and the swing width of the effect body by the effect body detecting means is equal to or less than a predetermined width. And a swinging width detecting means for determining whether or not the gaming machine L3.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, the following effects are produced. That is, in the detection means, the effect body that swings on the swing path is detected at a predetermined position by the effect body detection means, and the effect body detection means swings whether the swing width of the effect body is equal to or less than the predetermined width. It is discriminated by the width detecting means.

  Thereby, in each predetermined production, the production body can be moved to the production position after the rocking width of the rocking body becomes equal to or less than the predetermined width. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the operation of the director.

  In either the gaming machine L2 or L3, the moving means is formed of a part of the rocking path, and is formed in a rocking groove for rocking the effector and in front of the rocking groove, From the first position where the swinging piece communicates with the swinging groove and the swinging piece, the swinging piece formed with at least a flow-down groove for allowing the effector to flow down to the effecting position, A gaming machine L4, characterized by comprising swing piece moving means for moving the descent groove to a second position arranged on the swing path.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine L2 or L3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the moving means, it is formed of a part of the swing path, and is formed in a swing groove for swinging the effect body, and in front of the swing groove, for flowing the effect body down to the effect position. A swing piece having at least a flow-down groove is provided. The oscillating piece moving means moves the oscillating piece from a first position where the oscillating groove and the oscillating path communicate with each other to a second position where the flow-down groove is disposed on the oscillating path.

  As a result, it is possible to cause the effector to flow down from the descent groove to the effect position simply by moving the swing piece moving means to the second position, so that the structure for moving the effector to the effect position is provided. There is an effect that it can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine L2 or L3, the moving means includes a swing piece constituted by a part of the swing path, and swing piece tilting means for tilting the swing piece in the direction of the effect position. A gaming machine L5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2 or L3, the following effects are produced. That is, the moving means is provided with an oscillating piece constituted by a part of the oscillating path, and the oscillating piece is inclined by the oscillating piece inclining means toward the effect position.

  As a result, the effector can be moved to the effect position simply by dropping the effector from the tilted rocking piece, so that the configuration for moving the effector to the effect position can be simplified. There is an effect.

<Feature M group> (Roulette and dark zone)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination means for performing determination, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, a plurality of In the case where the discriminating body in which the different discriminating units are arranged, the determining unit that determines the specific discriminating unit among the discriminating units in the discriminating body, and the discrimination result by the discriminating unit are the specific discriminating results, A notification state setting unit that sets the specific identification unit to a notification state, and a specific effect that notifies the player of the determination result by the determination unit by the identification unit of the identification body based on the establishment of a specific condition. Specific presentation execution means, and the determination means divides the identifier into a plurality of areas, and among the areas, the high determination area having a high ratio determined by the specific identification section and the specific Identification part Gaming machine M1 proportion to be determined is low so that the low determining regions and are formed, characterized in that what determines the specific identification unit.

  Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a determination such as hitting is performed, and the determination result is rotated by arranging a plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of different symbols are arranged on the front side, and stopped at a predetermined position. It is notified by the combination of. As a result of the notification, there is proposed a gaming machine in which a game for changing a variable winning device is executed so that a gaming ball can be entered when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). In this case, the player plays the game with the expectation that the predetermined number of the same symbols will stop together, but for the rotating rotating body, the number of combinations of winning symbols is arranged respectively. The game is monotonous and the player gets bored early. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a problem that a player gets bored early.

  According to the gaming machine M1, a plurality of different identification units are arranged, and among the identification units, a privilege is given to the player when the identification unit determined as a specific identification unit is in a notification state. May be a specific identification unit, and the degree of expectation can be varied by the identification unit determined as the specific identification unit. Furthermore, the identification object is divided into a plurality of areas, and a specific area is formed such that a high determination area having a high ratio determined by a specific identification section and a low determination area having a low ratio determined by a specific identification section are formed. Since the discriminating unit is determined, the ratio of the specific discriminating unit varies depending on the region of the discriminating body, and the degree of expectation for the specific discriminating unit can be varied among the discriminating units. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation of the player can be changed, the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  The gaming machine M1 has a moving means for moving the identification body, and the notification state setting means moves the identification body by the movable means and moves the identification body to the specific identification section at a predetermined position. The gaming machine M2 is set to the notification state by stopping the determined identification unit.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1, the identification object is moved to enter a notification state in which a specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined position, whereby a determination result is obtained. Since the player is informed that the result is a specific discrimination result, the player can be interested in where the identifier is stopped, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M2, the effect body, moving means capable of moving the effect body to the predetermined position, and the effect body are moved to the predetermined position by the moving means in accordance with the timing when the identification body stops. A game machine M3, comprising: a movement control means for moving the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M2, the effector is moved to a predetermined position in accordance with the stop timing of the identification body, so that the identification unit stopped at the predetermined position can be easily understood by the player. There is an effect that it can be notified.

  In the gaming machine M3, the effect body has a rotation unit, and when the holding unit capable of holding the effect body and the holding by the holding unit are released, the effect body is shaken by the rotation unit. A game machine M4, wherein the moving means moves the effector from the swing path to the predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M3, the effector is moved to a predetermined position by the moving means after the effector is swung on the swinging path by the rotating portion. By giving interest to the movement to the part, there is an effect that the player can recognize the identification part stopped at a predetermined position in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, the rotation part can consider the member comprised by the spherical body, cylindrical shape, circular arc shape, etc.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, when the determination result is not a specific determination result, the notification state setting unit determines whether the specific identification unit located next to the specific identification unit is determined. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that an undecided identification unit is set to the notification state.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, if it is not a specific discrimination result, it is determined to be a specific identification unit located next to the specific identification unit Since there are no discriminating units in the notification state, it is possible to make the player think that the specific discriminating unit has been in the reporting state in a short time, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic N group> (Control to stabilize the swing width of the sphere)
An effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect, an effect body used as part of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and a swinging means capable of swinging the effect body within a predetermined range When the effector is swung by the swinging means, the determining means for determining the swinging state, and the swinging force applied to the effector is adjusted based on the determination result by the determining means. And a game machine N1 having adjustment means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of winning holes are arranged on the front side of the gaming area where game balls can flow down, and one of them is a game at the starting winning hole which is a start timing of the success / failure determination. A predetermined lottery is executed when the ball enters. When the lottery result is a win, a game in which the variable winning device is opened is executed, and the player can obtain a lot of prize balls and the like. In such a gaming machine, a flow path that makes it easy to win a prize opening such as a start prize opening is formed, and a game ball that falls into the flow path falls from directly above the start prize opening. Be induced to do. In addition, even for game balls that flow down the flow path that makes it easy to win a prize, the inclination angle of the flow path is varied to vary the rolling speed of the game balls so that the ease of entering the start prize opening changes. There has been proposed a gaming machine configured so that the game does not become monotonous by being configured so that the game can be played (for example, JP-A-2015-65977). Further, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that suppresses the game from becoming monotonous by improving interest. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the swinging force applied to the effect body is adjusted by the adjustment means based on the swing state of the effect body determined by the determination means, so that the swing that can improve the interest of the player. There is an effect that the director can be swung in a moving state, the trouble that the game becomes monotonous can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the production body is supported by a support (a thin wire such as a thread, a piano wire, or a thin shaft member) and is pivotally supported so as to swing, or swings from an upper part of a swing path such as an arc shape. It is conceivable to be swung by rolling or sliding on the road. Here, when the adjusting means is swung by the support body, it can be considered that a force is applied to the effect body or a force is applied to the support body. It is conceivable to vary the inclination of the swing path or to apply a force from the outside to the effector.

  In the gaming machine N1, the determining means determines at least the swing width of the effect body, and the adjusting means determines that the swing width is equal to or less than a predetermined swing width by the determining means. Furthermore, the gaming machine N2 is characterized in that it increases the swinging force on the effect body.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, the swinging width is determined by the determining means, and when the swinging width is equal to or less than the predetermined swinging width, the swinging force on the effector is increased. Therefore, the swinging state of the director is continued for a long time, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the adjusting means determines that the determination result by the determining means is larger than the predetermined swing width when increasing the swinging force on the effect body. A gaming machine N3 that stops an increase in swinging force with respect to the director.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the increase in the swinging force by the adjusting means is also stopped based on the fact that the swinging width of the effector is larger than the predetermined swinging width. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the swing width of the effector from becoming excessively large, adjust the swing width within a predetermined range, and provide a player with a stable performance.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the adjusting means moves the position of the effector so that the potential energy with respect to the effector is increased.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the adjusting means moves the position of the director so that the potential energy with respect to the director is increased, so the potential energy is converted into kinetic energy. By making it variable, there is an effect that the swinging width of the effector can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the effector has a rotating part that can be rotated and rolled, and the swinging means repeatedly changes the rotating direction of the rotating part. A gaming machine N5 having a rocking path that can be rotated.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines N1 to N4, the rotating part of the effector swings by rolling on the swing path, so that the effector can be swung with an easy configuration. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine N5, the swing path is configured in an arc shape.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N5, the swing path is configured in an arc shape, so that there is an effect that the turning portion of the effector can easily swing.

  In the gaming machine N5 or N6, the adjusting means is configured to increase the swinging force by changing the inclination of the swing path in the direction in which the effector swings.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N5 or N6, the adjusting means increases the rocking force by changing the inclination of the rocking path, so that the player naturally moves the rocking force to the player. There is an effect that it can be seen as if it is swinging.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the swinging means is capable of holding the rendering body at a position higher than the lowest end position when the effector is swung, and holding the holding means. A gaming machine N8 having a release means that can be released.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the swinging means is held at a position higher than the lowest position when the swinging means is swung by the holding means, and the releasing means Since the holding is released, there is an effect that the effector can be started to swing using the potential energy.

  In the gaming machine N8, the holding means holds the effect body at a position where the effect body can be guided to the swing path when the release means is released by the release means. A gaming machine N9 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N8, when the holding means is released by the releasing means, the effect body is guided to the swing path, so that the driving force is given to the effect body by an electric machine or the like. There is an effect that the effector can be smoothly swung by its own weight even if it is not.

  In the gaming machines N1 to N9, the adjusting means includes swing attenuation means for adjusting the swing width of the effector to be equal to or less than a specific swing width when a specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine N10 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine N10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines N1 to N9, when the specific condition is satisfied, the swing width of the effector is less than or equal to the specific swing width by the swing damping means of the adjusting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the swinging width can be changed intentionally and the interest of the player can be improved by diversifying the production.

<Feature O group> (Distinguish the pocket position to drop)
A movable body in which a plurality of different identification units are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, a movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and the movable body based on the establishment of a movable condition. Determining means for determining a movable pattern for moving the movable body, in which a stoppable range that can be stopped is set in advance, and the specific identifying unit is stopped at a predetermined effect position after being moved by the movable pattern If the movable body is moved by the movable pattern with the privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, the stoppage range is set based on the establishment of a specific condition. An identification unit determination unit that determines one identification unit from the identification unit, and a stop that stops the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination unit at the production position at a specific stop timing. Gaming machine O1, characterized in that those having a control means.

  Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a determination such as hitting is performed, a plurality of rotating bodies arranged with a plurality of different symbols are arranged on the front side, and a combination of symbols that stops at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a determination result. This is notified by performing rotation control based on the determination. As a result of the notification, there is proposed a gaming machine in which a game for changing a variable winning device is executed so that a gaming ball can be entered when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). Since the stop position of the rotating body is determined in advance before the rotation, it is impossible to make a novel effect such as changing the combination of symbols to be stopped depending on the state of the effect, etc. There was a problem of getting bored early. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and further, by providing a novel gaming machine, the game is prevented from becoming monotonous and the player gets bored early. It aims at providing the gaming machine which can suppress a malfunction.

  According to the gaming machine O1, the movable body is moved according to a movable pattern in which the movable body can be stopped in a predetermined pattern, and the specific condition is satisfied. One discriminating portion is determined from the set discriminating portions, and the movable body is stopped by the stop control means so that the discriminating portion stops at the production position. Therefore, the stop position of the movable body is kept until the specific condition is satisfied. Is not specified, and providing the player with a real-time effect has the effect of suppressing the game from becoming monotonous and preventing the player from getting bored early.

  The gaming machine O1 has determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the stop control means is configured to display the specific identification unit when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. A gaming machine O2 that is stopped at the production position.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O1, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the specific identification unit is stopped at the effect position, so the discrimination result by the discrimination means is There is an effect that the identification unit that stops at the effect position can be notified.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the gaming machine O3 has setting means for setting the specific identification unit from the plurality of different identification units based on the establishment of the setting condition.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, the specific identifying unit is set by a plurality of different identifying units by the setting means, so which identifying unit is set as the specific identifying unit. It is possible to make the player interested in and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine O3, the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on a player's selection.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine O3, at least one of the specific identification units is set by the setting means based on the player's selection. It can be set as a specific identification part, and there is an effect that the player can participate in the game and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O3 or O4, the setting unit sets the specific identification unit based on a determination result by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O3 or O4, the specific identification unit is set by the setting unit based on the determination result of the determination unit. This has the effect of allowing the player to predict the discrimination result.

  In any one of the gaming machines O2 to O5, the determining unit determines the movable pattern based on a determination result of the determining unit.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O2 to O5, the movable pattern is determined by the discrimination means based on the discrimination result, so that the movable pattern can be varied according to the discrimination result. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O6, a notification body for indicating that the identification unit is stopped at the presentation position, and a guidance for guiding the notification body to the identification unit stopped at the presentation position. And a game machine O7.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O6, the notification body is guided to the identification unit stopped at the production position by the guidance means, so the identification unit stopped at the production position is more There is an effect that it is easy to understand and can notify the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O7, the movable pattern is set with a variable setting period in which the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination unit can be varied. Game machine O8.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines O1 to O7, the movable pattern is set with a variable period in which the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination unit can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the identification part can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine O8 has an operation means that can be operated by a player, and the identification section determined by the identification determination means varies according to the timing at which the operation means is operated in the variable setting period. A gaming machine O9 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine O9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine O8, the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination unit is varied depending on the timing at which the player operates the operation unit. A game in which the operation means is operated so as to stop at the production position can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, since the identification unit determined by the timing operated by the player is varied, there is an effect that it is possible to easily perform control for stopping the identification unit corresponding to the determination result at the effect position.

<Characteristic P group> (Nail breakage determination)
In a gaming machine having a movable body movable within a predetermined movable range, a movable means for moving the movable body within the movable range, and a movable control means for moving and controlling the movable means, the movable body is: A plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions; and the gaming machine, when the movable body is moved to the predetermined plurality of predetermined positions, the plurality of detection units Among these, based on a detection means capable of detecting one or more detection units configured in a predetermined combination corresponding to each predetermined position, and a detection result detected by the detection means, A determination means for determining movable position information of the movable body; an abnormality determination means for determining whether the detection result detected by the detection means matches a preset abnormal condition based on establishment of the predetermined condition; Have Gaming machine P1, wherein those.

  Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a determination such as hitting is performed, a plurality of rotating bodies arranged with a plurality of different symbols are arranged on the front side, and a combination of symbols that stops at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a determination result. This is notified by performing rotation control based on the determination. As a result of the notification, there is proposed a gaming machine in which a game for changing a variable winning device is executed so that a gaming ball can be entered when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). The stop position of the rotating body is generally a method of detecting the position of the rotating body with a plurality of sensors or the like, but if a sensor failure or the like occurs, the rotating body may be stopped at an incorrect position. There has been a problem that, for example, an erroneous notification is given to the player. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of detecting a malfunction at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine P1, when the movable body is moved to a plurality of predetermined positions, one or more detection units configured by a predetermined combination for each predetermined position among the plurality of detection units. Is detected by the detecting means. The movable position information of the movable body is determined based on the detection result detected by the detection means. Therefore, it is possible to accurately identify to which predetermined position the movable body is moved by the movable position information. In addition, because the detection result detected by the detection means matches the abnormal condition based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, it is determined by the abnormality determination means. This has the effect of being able to detect and suppressing the erroneous movement of the movable body.

  In the gaming machine P1, based on the determination of the movable position information by the determination means, the movable position information storage means for storing the determined movable position information, and the detection unit at each of the plurality of predetermined positions And a collation data setting unit in which a detection result that should be detected when the detection unit is normally detected by the detection unit is set as collation data, and the abnormality determination unit is configured to detect the movable position by the determination unit. When the predetermined condition is met when the information is determined, it is determined whether the abnormal condition is met by the movable position information previously determined by the determining means and stored in the storage means and the collation data A gaming machine P2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine P1, the abnormality determining unit determines whether the abnormal condition is met by the movable position information determined by the previous determining unit and the collation data. It is possible to always monitor the movable position information when the is moved normally, and to detect the malfunction at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine P2, the abnormality determination unit determines whether the movable position information determined by the determination unit matches the next movable position information of the previous movable position information stored in the movable position information storage unit. The gaming machine P3 is characterized in that an abnormality is determined by determining from the verification data.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, it is determined from the collation data whether the movable position information determined by the determining means matches the next movable position information after the previous movable position information. Thus, the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means, so that the abnormality can be determined every time the abnormality is moved to the predetermined position, and the abnormality can be detected earlier.

  In the gaming machine P1, the abnormality determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied that the movable body has moved a predetermined amount, and whether the abnormality condition matches the abnormality condition based on the number of detection units based on the detection result of the detection means. A gaming machine P4, characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1, when the movable body moves by a predetermined amount, it is determined whether the abnormal condition is met based on the number of detection units detected by the detecting means. An abnormality can be detected every time the movable body moves by a predetermined amount, and there is an effect that an abnormality can be detected at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine P4, when the movable body moves by a predetermined amount, the gaming machine P4 has a detection number storage means in which the detection number of the detection unit normally detected by the detection means is stored in advance, and the abnormality determination means A gaming machine P5, wherein it is determined whether or not the number of the detection units detected by the detection means coincides with the detection number stored in the detection number storage means.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P4, it is determined by the abnormality determination means whether the number of detections stored in the detection number storage means matches in advance, so that the abnormality can be determined more accurately. There is an effect.

<Feature Q group> (LED lighting data is divided)
Based on a plurality of actuating parts, actuating data for actuating the actuating parts, actuating means for actuating the actuating parts, and actuating patterns for actuating the actuating parts based on establishment of predetermined conditions Based on the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determination means, the operation pattern determination means to determine, the acquisition means for acquiring the operation data of each of the operation parts, and the operation data acquired by the acquisition means A gaming machine Q1 having setting means for dividing and setting.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that includes a light-emitting means such as an LED and a production member such as a movable means such as an accessory. In such conventional gaming machines, a variety of performance operations are performed using a plurality of performance members, thereby improving the interest of the player. Also, in this conventional game machine, the production pattern of the production member such as the light emission pattern of the light emission means and the movable pattern of the movable means is previously stored in the storage means such as a ROM and executed. There is known a gaming machine that reads out an effect pattern corresponding to an effect to be performed and executes an effect operation of the corresponding effect member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-18495). However, when the number of effects members is increased, there is a problem in that the amount of setting data for setting the effect operation increases and the processing load increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, based on the operation data for operating the plurality of operating units, each operating unit is operated by the operating means. An operation pattern for operating each operating unit is determined based on the establishment of a predetermined condition by the operating pattern determining unit, and the operation data of each operating unit is acquired based on the operating pattern determined by the operating pattern determining unit. Obtained by means. The operation data acquired by the acquisition unit is divided and set by the setting unit.

  Thereby, compared with the case where operation data is collectively set by the setting means, the amount of data to be divided and set can be reduced. That is, since the processing load for setting the operation data can be distributed, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the setting means can divide and set the operation data in units of the operating unit.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1, the operation data is divided and set for each operation unit by the setting means, so that there is an effect that the processing load can be more finely distributed.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation data includes at least data specifying an operation mode when the operation unit is operated and data specifying the operation unit operated in the operation mode. Game machine Q3 to play.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation data includes data specifying an operating mode when operating the operating unit, and data specifying an operating unit operated in the operating mode Therefore, different operation modes can be set for the plurality of operation units. Therefore, since an operation mode can be diversified, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the acquisition means is capable of acquiring the operation data associated with data specifying a plurality of different operation units, wherein the data specifying a plurality of different operation modes is obtained. Machine Q4.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q3, the operation data associated with the data specifying the different operating portions is acquired from the data specifying the different operating modes by the acquisition means. Depending on the operation data acquired by the acquisition means, different operation modes can be set in different operation units. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation modes of the plurality of operation units can be further diversified.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the setting means divides and sets the operation data for each operation unit in which the same operation mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q4, the same operating mode can be set for the operating unit at the same timing, so that the same operating mode can be reflected at the same timing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the appearance quality of each operating part immediately after setting the operating data.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the operating unit is configured by a light emitting unit that emits light, and the operation data is configured by data for setting a light emission pattern by the light emitting unit. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are produced. That is, the operating part is constituted by a light emitting means for emitting light. The operation data is composed of data for setting a light emission pattern by the light emitting means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the processing load when setting the light emission pattern by the light emitting means can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q6, the operating data is set by a setting means in a serial communication system, and the gaming machine Q7.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q6, since the operation data is set by the setting means in the serial communication system, the data is set with a smaller number of wires compared to the parallel communication system. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced by reducing the number of wirings.

<Characteristic R group> (The mission set by the player (select a combination of winning symbols) continues until the big hit)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that performs determination, a display unit that displays identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit, and identification information based on a specific determination result is displayed on the display unit. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a bonus that is advantageous to the player is granted when a specific condition is satisfied. A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect to be notified, wherein the specific effect executing means executes the privilege game by the privilege game executing means from a period during which the identification information based on the determination result by the determining means is displayed. The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that at least the specific effect is continuously executed over a period of time.

  Here, the effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot has been won is executed during the normal gaming state, and the effect of notifying whether or not a privilege (for example, a probable gaming state) to be granted after the jackpot ends is granted A pachinko machine that is executed during a game (during a jackpot game) has been proposed (for example, JP 2009-178292 A). In this case, since independent productions are executed according to each gaming state, the production of notifying that the jackpot has been won and the production of notifying that the privilege is granted are executed in a series of productions. However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine R1, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given over a period in which the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means from the period in which the identification information based on the determination result by the determining means is displayed. The specific effect for notifying that it is performed is continuously executed. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the next privilege is given during the period in which the privilege game is being executed by the specific effect continuously executed. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the specific effect continuously executed in the privilege game, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the specific condition is satisfied when a plurality of different small conditions are satisfied, and the specific effect executing means is based on the determination result of the determination means being the specific determination result. The game machine R2 is characterized by executing the specific effect indicating that a predetermined number of the small conditions are established.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1, a specific condition is established when a plurality of different small conditions are established, and a specific effect is executed when a predetermined number of small conditions are established. Therefore, the player can recognize that the predetermined number of small conditions have been established by the specific effect, and thus there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easily understandable gaming machine for the player.

  In the gaming machine R2, the specific effect executing means performs a remaining specific effect indicating whether or not the remaining small conditions are satisfied among the plurality of different small conditions during the period in which the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A gaming machine R3 that is executed as the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R2, the remaining specific effect indicating whether the remaining small conditions among a plurality of different small conditions are satisfied is executed as the specific effect. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of remaining small conditions by executing the remaining specific effect, so that the player can expect the specific condition to be satisfied, and the player's There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, at least a normal privilege game advantageous to the player and a special privilege game advantageous to the player over the normal privilege game are set as the privilege game by the privilege game execution means. And a gaming machine R4 characterized by having a bonus game type determining means for determining the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, any of the normal privilege game set as the privilege game and the special privilege game advantageous to the player over the normal privilege game Kaga is determined by the privilege game type determining means. Therefore, since the variation of the privilege game advantageous to the player increases, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine R4, an indication that the special privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means by executing the remaining specific effect indicating that the remaining small conditions are satisfied during the privilege game. A gaming machine R5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R4, it is shown that the special privilege game is being executed when the remaining privilege effect is executed. There is an effect that can be provided.

  In the gaming machine R4 or R5, the special privilege game is a game machine R6 in which a special game state that is advantageous to the player is provided after the bonus game until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine R4 or R5, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is given until a predetermined condition is established after the bonus game. Therefore, since a more advantageous state can be given to the player, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Any one of the gaming machines R2 to R6 has a selection means that allows the player to select the small condition.

  According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R2 to R6, the player can select a small condition by the selection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

<Characteristic S group> (Increased roulette pocket)
A discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition; and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. In the gaming machine that the player has, when the display unit displays a plurality of different identification information and the plurality of different identification information displayed on the display unit, the player is stopped at a predetermined stop position. Identification information determination means for determining the specific identification information for notifying that the determination result is a specific determination result, and the identification information displayed on the display means when the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the effect is executed by the effect executing means for executing the effect of stopping the identification information of 1 at the stop position and the effect executing means, the determination is executed by the determining means. Gaming machine S1, and wherein the that the state, those having a variable setting means for variably set the identification information is determined as the specific identification information by the identification information determination means.

  Here, there is proposed a pachinko machine having a game characteristic that gives a bonus game (for example, a jackpot game) when a predetermined character of a plurality of characters displayed on the roulette wheel stops at a specific stop position ( For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2004-73580). In this case, it is necessary to control the roulette stop position based on the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a predetermined character is selected from a plurality of characters as a specific stop position. The roulette rotation operation becomes unnatural, and it is impossible to provide a suitable performance for the player, which reduces the player's willingness to play. It was.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, any one of a plurality of pieces of identification information displayed on the display means in the effect executed by the effect executing means according to the state where the determination by the determining means is executed. However, the variable setting means changes the specific identification information to notify that the determination result is a specific determination result (that is, that a privilege advantageous to the player is given). Thereby, the specific identification information can be varied in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable effect for the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine S1, a predetermined period is set in advance for the effect executed by the effect executing unit, and the identification information determining unit determines that the first period has elapsed during the predetermined period. A gaming machine S2 characterized in that specific identification information is determined.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine S1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect by the effect executing means is executed in a predetermined period set in advance. The specific identification information is determined by the identification information determination means based on the elapse of the first period of the predetermined period during which the effect is executed. Thereby, since specific identification information is determined when the first period has elapsed, the identification information can be dynamically displaced without a sense of incongruity in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a suitable effect for the player and to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the gaming machine S3 is characterized by having an acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information discriminated by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the discrimination information discriminated by the discriminating unit is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, so that the discrimination information is reliably acquired. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the effect is not executed by the effect executing means despite the determination condition being satisfied.

  In the gaming machine S3, storage means for storing at least the determination information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination condition is satisfied, and the determination condition corresponding to the determination information for the determination information stored in the storage means Pre-discriminating means for executing discrimination before establishment of the variable, and the variable setting means variably sets the identification information based on the discrimination result of the prior discrimination means. A gaming machine S4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine S3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit until at least the determination condition is satisfied. The discrimination information stored in the storage means is discriminated before the discrimination condition is established by the prior discrimination means, and the identification information is variably set based on the discrimination result of the prior discrimination means. This makes it possible to change the identification information before the presentation based on the discrimination information for which the identification information is to be changed. Therefore, the identification information can be displayed without any sense of incongruity in the presentation executed by the presentation execution means. Can be dynamically displaced. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a suitable effect for the player and to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

<Characteristic T group> (Bunny foot production)
A ball entry means having an opening for allowing a game ball to enter, an open state in which the game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means, and a closure in which the game ball is harder to enter than the open state A variable member that can be changed to a state, a variable means that can change the variable member between the open state and the closed state, and a position where the game ball that has entered the opening flows down and is visible to the player The first flow path disposed in the first position, the first position where the game ball that has entered the opening is allowed to flow down, and the second position where it is difficult to flow down. A gaming machine T1 comprising: a displacement means for displacing; and a displacement control means for moving the displacement means to at least the first position during a period when the variable member is in the open state.

  Here, as a game machine, a game machine that performs an effect of moving a movable member called a director on a game board is known as an effect for improving the interest of the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-2004). 121464). In this case, there is a problem that the installation space such as a prize opening necessary for the game machine is lost by providing the director.

  According to the gaming machine T1, during the period in which the variable member is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter the opening portion of the ball entry means, the first flow path disposed at a position that is visible to the player However, it is changed to the first position so that the game ball that has entered the opening flows down. Further, the first flow path can be displaced to the first position and the second position. As a result, when a game ball enters the opening of the ball entry means, the first flow path is changed to the first position so that the game ball can flow down to the opening of the ball entry means. When the game ball does not enter, the first flow path can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and can be used for effects and the like. Therefore, since the first flow path can be used for production, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and to secure an installation space on the game board.

  In the gaming machine T1, when the specific condition is satisfied, the variable member has a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game that is changed to the open state a plurality of times until the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable means. The displacement control means displaces the first flow path to the first position until a predetermined period elapses after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. T2.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T1, a privilege game in which the variable member is changed to the open state is executed a plurality of times until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the execution of the privilege game is finished. The first flow path is displaced to the first position until the predetermined period has elapsed. Accordingly, the first flow path is not displaced to the second position even though the game ball that has entered the opening of the ball entry means has not yet flowed down, so that the ball enters the opening of the ball entry means. There is an effect that the game balls that have been thrown can flow down without clogging.

  The gaming machine T1 or T2 has an effect execution means for executing an effect, and the effect execution means, as one of the effects, performs the displacement control in the first flow path except for the period during which the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine T3 that is displaced by means.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first flow path is displaced as one of the effects outside the period in which the privilege game is executed. Therefore, since the variation of production can be increased, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T3, the gaming machine T3 includes a determination unit that executes a predetermined determination based on establishment of a determination condition, and the privilege game execution unit is configured to determine whether the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. The award game is executed, and the effect executing means is one in which the first flow path is displaced by the displacement control means as one of the effects indicating the determination result by the determining means. Game machine T4.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination result becomes a specific determination result, the privilege game is executed, and the displacement of the first flow path is executed as one of the effects indicating the determination result. Therefore, it can be determined by the effect that the first flow path is displaced whether the determination result is a specific determination result, so the player pays attention to the effect that the first flow path is displaced, and the game Effect of improving the interest of the elderly.

<Characteristic U group> (time-out production)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination means for executing determination, a privilege granting means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, and a predetermined condition Until the determination condition is satisfied, the state setting means for setting the special gaming state in which the determination condition is easily satisfied, and when the special gaming state is set by the state setting means, the effect is executed in a predetermined period. An accompanying effect that executes an accompanying effect associated with the effect executed by the effect executing unit when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within a period in which the effect is executed by the effect executing unit. And a game machine U1 characterized by comprising execution means.

  Here, there is a pachinko machine in which a special game state (for example, a probability variation game state) different from the normal game state is executed for a predetermined period. In such a pachinko machine, an effect executed in a predetermined period as a technique for notifying the player using an effect executed in a predetermined period that the current gaming state is a special gaming state A pachinko machine has been proposed that changes the progress of an effect executed in a predetermined period when it is determined that the timing at which the game ends and the timing at which the special gaming state ends are different (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-2008). 173320). In this case, when the timing at which the effect executed in a predetermined period ends is different from the timing at which the special gaming state ends, control for changing the progress of the effect executed in the predetermined period is performed. There is a problem that the processing load becomes large.

  According to the gaming machine U1, a special game state is set in which a determination condition is easily set until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the special game state is set, an effect is executed in a predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed, the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed. Here, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the period in which the effect is executed, the display period of the effect ends even though the special gaming state is continued. In this case, the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed by the accompanying effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the special game state is continued. In addition, the effect is executed in a predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the period in which the effect is executed, the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed, so control for changing the content of the effect executed in a predetermined period is performed. There is no need to do it. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing load when performing the effect.

  In the gaming machine U1, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for obtaining discrimination information discriminated by the discrimination means when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and the acquisition means And a storage unit that stores at least the determination information obtained until the determination condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine U1, the following effects are achieved. That is, discrimination information is acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and the acquired discrimination information is stored until a discrimination condition is satisfied. As a result, even when the discrimination condition is not satisfied at the time when the game ball enters the entrance means and the discrimination information is acquired, the discrimination information can be stored in the storage means. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the case where the discrimination by the discriminating means is not executed even though the game ball has entered the entrance means, thereby suppressing excessive disadvantage to the player. There is an effect of being able to (prevent).

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the effect execution means indicates that the specific determination result is based on the fact that the determination means has determined that the specific determination result during the period of execution of the effect. Is executed for the remaining period. A gaming machine U3.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U1 or the gaming machine U2, when it is determined as a specific determination result in the period of executing the effect, the specific effect is executed in the remaining period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible for the player to easily recognize that a specific determination result has been obtained in the period during which the effect is executed.

  In any of the gaming machines U1 to U3, display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, and a dynamic display period for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means Determining means, and the predetermined condition is established based on the elapse of the dynamic display period based on the determination by the determination means for a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U3, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The predetermined condition is established based on the elapse of the dynamic display period based on the determination by the determination means for the predetermined number of times. Thus, based on the determination result during the period in which the special gaming state is set (that is, the period in which the effect until the predetermined condition is satisfied or the period in which the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed). The dynamic display of the identification information is displayed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, since the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result can be focused during the period in which the special game state is set, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Feature V group> (look ahead in RUSH)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for obtaining information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the information obtained by the acquisition means satisfying the determination condition A discriminating unit for discriminating based on the discriminating unit; a storage unit for storing the information acquired by the acquiring unit until at least the discriminating condition is satisfied; and a display unit for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result of the discriminating unit. And, when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege granting means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player, and the identification information displayed on the display means are dynamically displayed. Dynamic display means, dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means display period A dynamic display period storage means for storing at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period by a predetermined multiple or more; and the dynamic display period determination When the first dynamic display period is determined by the means, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect at the timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the first dynamic display period; and the determination means When the second dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the determination result by the specific determination result, the second dynamic display period is started from the start of the second dynamic display period. The first effect can be executed at the timing when one period has elapsed, and the first effect can be repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of times at the same timing each time the first dynamic display period elapses. Execution means and said discriminator If the decision result by is not the specific determination result, a game machine, wherein the first effect are those having a limiting means for limiting the number of times to be performed in a continuous below the predetermined number of times, the V1.

  Here, an effect (so-called quasi-continuous notice effect) that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot to the player by stopping and displaying a predetermined display mode a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display is proposed (for example, JP, 2008-161390, A). In order to execute this pseudo continuous notice effect, it is necessary to set the variation time of one special symbol variation to a time in which a predetermined display mode can be stopped and displayed a plurality of times, and the number of special symbol variations per unit time There was a problem that there were fewer. In addition, in a pachinko machine having a function (holding storage function) capable of storing special symbol winning information a plurality of times, a predetermined display mode using a special symbol variable display corresponding to a plurality of reserved winning information There has also been proposed an effect (so-called continuous notice effect) that suggests that the player is expected to win the jackpot by stopping and displaying a plurality of times (for example, JP 2010-207261 A). Since it is necessary to memorize a plurality of special symbol winning information in order to execute this continuous notice effect, a pachinko machine that is difficult to memorize a plurality of special symbol winning information or a pachinko machine that does not have a holding memory function is continuous. There was a problem that the notice effect could not be executed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine V1, a first dynamic display period determined as a dynamic display period of identification information, and a second dynamic display period that is longer than a predetermined multiple of the first dynamic display period, The first effect is executed at the timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the dynamic display period. In the second dynamic display period, after the first effect is displayed, the first effect is executed a predetermined number of times at the same timing each time the first dynamic display period elapses.

  As a result, the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period are executed in the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period while having different dynamic display periods from the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period. The execution timing of one effect can be matched. Therefore, the first effect is executed based on the fact that the second dynamic display period is set while increasing the variation of the dynamic display period (that is, the determination result is a specific determination result). Since it can be made to recognize with respect to a player, there exists an effect that the interest of a player can be improved.

  Further, the first effect is executed a predetermined number of times based on the determination result being a specific determination result, and when the determination result is not the specific determination result, the number of times the first effect is continuously executed is limited. As a result, the first effect is not executed a predetermined number of times regardless of the second dynamic display period (that is, the determination result is not a specific determination result). There is an effect that it can be provided.

  In the gaming machine V1, the dynamic display period determining means is configured to determine the first dynamic display period more easily than the second dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine V1, the first dynamic display period having a shorter display period than the second dynamic display period can be easily determined. This can prevent the dynamic display period from becoming long. Therefore, there is an effect that the game time is not delayed and the player is not bored.

  In the gaming machine V1 or V2, the first effect executing means executes the first effect based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the first effect is executed based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period. Accordingly, the first effect can be executed only when the first dynamic display period is started at a specific start timing, and the first effect displayed in the first dynamic display period is changed to the second dynamic display period. It can be made to coincide with the timing at which the first effect is displayed in the display period. Therefore, it can be made difficult for the player to determine whether the first effect is displayed in the first dynamic display period or whether the first effect is displayed in the second dynamic display period. There is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  The gaming machine V4 according to any one of the gaming machines V1 to V3, wherein the first dynamic display period is configured to be shorter than twice the rendering period of the first effect.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the first dynamic display period is configured with a period shorter than twice the effect period of the first effect. Accordingly, the first effect is not performed a plurality of times in the first dynamic display period, and it is only necessary to control whether or not the first effect is performed in the first dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that the control process for executing the first effect can be simplified in the first dynamic display period.

  Further, the first dynamic display period is a period shorter than twice the effect period of the first effect, that is, the effect period of the first effect is longer than half of the first dynamic display period. Thereby, even if the first dynamic display period is a short period, the effect period of the first effect can be sufficiently ensured. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the first effect.

<Feature W group> (Random display of decorative designs)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that performs determination, a display unit that displays identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit, and the identification information displayed on the display unit are dynamically displayed. A dynamic display means, an effect execution means for executing an effect, a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player after a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, and the display means for displaying the identification information And a display position determination unit that determines a position to be displayed each time the determination unit executes a determination.

  Here, a pachinko machine has been proposed that notifies a player of the special symbol lottery result using the identification information displayed on the display means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 6-134105). In this case, since the display means is composed of dot LEDs, there is a problem that the display position of the identification information displayed on the display means cannot be changed, and the interest of the player cannot be improved. .

  In addition, a pachinko machine that changes the display mode of a decorative symbol has been proposed for a pachinko machine that displays a decorative symbol that varies based on a lottery of a special symbol on a display means (for example, JP 2012-2358336 A). In this case, while the special symbol is being changed, the display mode of the decorative symbol can be changed to various modes to enhance the fun of the game, but the decorative symbol is also determined in accordance with the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Since the stop is displayed at the position, the player can easily grasp whether or not the special symbol has stopped (whether or not the special symbol has been changed) simply by confirming the predetermined position. For example, when executing a series of effects using a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, there is a problem that the stop display of the decorative symbols displayed on the display means reduces the effect of the series of effects.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine W1, when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, a privilege advantageous to the player is given. Each time the determination is performed by the determination unit, the display position determination unit determines the position where the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the determination result. Thereby, the position where the identification information is dynamically displayed can be changed every time the identification information is dynamically displayed. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the identification information, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, by determining the display position of the identification information to move to a plurality of locations at predetermined intervals by the display position determining means, it is possible to determine which display position at the timing when the identification information is stopped and displayed (timing when the special symbol is stopped) This makes it difficult for the player to grasp whether the identification information is displayed on the screen. Therefore, for example, when a series of effects using a plurality of special symbols is executed, the player can easily grasp the display contents (whether or not the identification information is displayed) displayed on the display means. This is advantageous in that the production effect of a series of effects can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine W1, the effect execution unit causes the display unit to display an effect mode as part of the effect, and the identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than a display area where the effect mode is displayed. A gaming machine W2 that is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine W1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect mode is displayed on the display means by the effect executing means as part of the effect. Furthermore, identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than the display area where the effect mode is displayed. Thereby, it can suppress that a player grasps | ascertains easily the display content (whether it has stopped) of identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine W1, the effect executing means displays an effect mode on an effect display means different from the display means as part of the effect, and the effect display means has a display area larger than the display means. A gaming machine W3 that is configured by the following.

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W1, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect display means is configured with a display area larger than the display means, and the effect execution means displays the effect mode that is part of the effect on the effect display means as part of the effect. Thereby, the effect mode which is a part of the effect can be displayed by the effect display means having a larger display area than the display means on which the identification information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the effect mode displayed on the effect display means, and to suppress the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, there is provided display position variable means for changing the display position of the identification information determined by the display position determination means during dynamic display of the identification information. This is a gaming machine W4.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the display position of the identification information determined by the display position determining means is variable during the dynamic display of the identification information by the display position variable means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the effect executing means executes the effect in a predetermined effect period that can be determined a plurality of times by the determining means, and is displayed on the display means. Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information, wherein the dynamic display period determining means is specified by the determining means in a state where the effect is being executed by the effect executing means. When the determination result is determined, the gaming machine W5 is set so that a period longer than the remaining period of the effect is easily determined as a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the following effects are produced. In other words, the effect is executed by the effect execution means in a predetermined effect period that can be determined a plurality of times by the determination means. The dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means. Then, the dynamic display period determining means sets a period longer than the remaining period of the effect as the dynamic display period when a specific determination result is determined by the determining means in a state where the effect is being executed by the effect executing means. Set easily. As a result, when a specific determination result is determined by the determination means, it is easy to determine a period longer than the remaining period of the effect executed by the effect execution means as the dynamic display period of the identification information based on the determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed in the middle of the production and the production effect is reduced.

  In the gaming machine W5, the dynamic display period determining unit determines a dynamic display period to be a first period based on the determination result of the determination unit being a determination result other than the specific determination result. The gaming machine W6 is characterized in that the production period executed by the production execution means is a period that is a predetermined multiple of the first period or more.

  According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W5, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period to be the first period based on the determination result of the determination means being a determination result other than the specific determination result, and is executed by the effect execution means. The production period is composed of a period that is a predetermined multiple of the first period or more. Thereby, in the case of a determination result other than a specific determination result, the number of determinations by the determination unit per unit time can be increased, and the determination efficiency can be improved.

  Furthermore, while the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means is displayed on the display means during the period of the effect executed by the effect execution means, the display position determination means determines the display position of the identification information, It becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the effect mode displayed on the effect display means, and it is possible to suppress the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). . Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  Note that by selectively adopting the configuration described in any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the above-described effects can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine W5 or W6, the game machine W5 or W6 has a state setting unit that sets a special state that makes the determination condition easy to be satisfied until the end condition is satisfied, and the effect execution unit sets the special state by the state setting unit. On the basis of this, the gaming machine W7 starts execution of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine W7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine W5 or W6, a special state in which the determination means is easily established is set by the state setting means until the end condition is satisfied. The execution of the effect is started by the effect execution means based on the setting of the special state. Thereby, there exists an effect that the production effect of the production performed for a predetermined period in a special state can be heightened.

<Characteristic X group> (Variable addition of roulette according to the time period)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit for performing determination, a display unit for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination unit, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display unit In this case, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, an identification object in which a plurality of different identification parts are arranged, and a specific identification part among the identification parts in the identification object are determined. Determining means for determining, when the determination result by the determining means is the specific determination result, a special state setting means for setting the specific identification unit to a special state different from normal, and based on the establishment of the specific condition A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for notifying a player of the determination result by the identifying unit of the identifier, and the specific identifying unit based on establishment of a predetermined condition during the execution of the specific effect. Append Gaming machine X1 to the additional setting means for setting, and the probability changing means for varying a probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied, characterized in that with.

  Here, there is proposed a pachinko machine having a game characteristic that gives a bonus game (for example, a jackpot game) when a predetermined character of a plurality of characters displayed on the roulette wheel stops at a specific stop position ( For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2004-73580). However, since the predetermined number of characters is not changed (added) during the execution of the roulette game, the notification mode indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot to the player does not change while the roulette game is in progress. During the execution of the roulette game, the player's willingness to play decreases, and the player may get bored early.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine X1, a specific identification unit among the plurality of identification units arranged in the identification body is determined when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result (that is, the player In a special state different from normal). That is, if any one of the specific identification units is set in a special state different from the normal state, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. When a specific condition is established when the specific effect is being executed, a specific identification unit is additionally set. Thereby, when a specific identification part is additionally set in a specific performance, the player feels that the possibility that an advantageous privilege will be given has increased, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  Further, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is varied by the probability varying means. That is, the probability that a specific identification unit is added can be varied. Therefore, since a change occurs in the probability that a specific identification unit is added, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine X1, the privilege granting unit is set to at least one of a first gaming state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player and a second gaming state that is advantageous to the player over the first gaming state. The probability varying means sets the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied higher when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine X2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine X1, a second one of the first gaming state advantageous to the player and the second gaming state advantageous to the first gaming state When the gaming state is set, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is set high. Thereby, when a predetermined condition is easy to be established, it becomes a case where it is easy to add a specific identification part. Therefore, since the player expects that the second gaming state is set by adding a specific identification unit, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine X1 or X2, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and an acquisition means for obtaining discrimination information discriminated by the discrimination means based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means The game machine X3 is characterized in that the additional setting means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine X3, information discriminated by the discriminating means is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (that is, information for providing the privilege granting means is acquired). When a game ball enters the ball means, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (that is, whether a specific identification unit is added). Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the ball entry means, and there is an effect that the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine X3, the additional setting means executes a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and the predetermined lottery is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result. A gaming machine X4 characterized in that it is determined that the condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine X3, a predetermined lottery is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result. A predetermined condition is established (that is, a specific identification unit is added). Therefore, since the specific identification unit is added based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, there is an effect that the player can be given an impression that the specific identification unit is added fairly.

  In the gaming machine X4, the probability varying means varies the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means.

  According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine X4, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be varied by the probability varying means. Therefore, since a change occurs in the probability that a specific identification unit is added, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine X4, the probability varying means sets a probability table in which the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means is set for each number of game balls entered.

  According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X4, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means is varied by setting a probability table set for each number of game balls entered. Therefore, since the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be easily changed, there is an effect that the control load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine X6, the probability varying means sets the first probability table as the probability table based on the first gaming state being set, and based on the setting of the second gaming state. The gaming machine X7 is characterized by setting a second probability setting table in which a lottery probability is set to be relatively higher than that of the first probability setting table.

  According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine X6, based on the setting of the first gaming state, the first probability table is set, and the second gaming state is set. A second probability setting table in which the lottery probability is set higher than the first probability setting table is set. Therefore, by setting the probability table according to the gaming state, it is possible to easily change the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means, so that the control load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

<Characteristic Y group> (When notifying in the case of a background effect, stop at a position where the effect can be achieved within 0.2Y when stopping temporarily)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit for performing determination, a display unit for displaying identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit, and a dynamic display for displaying the identification information displayed on the display unit Display means, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the determination result, and the determination result specific to the display means When the identification information indicating is displayed, a privilege granting unit for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, an effect dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying an effect on the display unit, and the dynamic display unit Stop control means for stopping dynamic display of the effect by the effect dynamic display means when the period during which the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed continues for a predetermined period or longer, and an identification based on the specific determination result When the information is dynamically displayed, there is an effect mode determining unit that determines a specific effect mode as the mode of the effect dynamically displayed by the effect dynamic display unit, and the stop control unit includes: The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that the dynamic display of the effect is stopped in a state where it can be switched to the specific effect mode and displayed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the identification information based on a specific discrimination result is dynamically displayed, a game machine in which an effect is dynamically displayed in a specific effect mode is known. Further, when the dynamic display of identification information is not continuously executed for a predetermined period or longer, for example, an effect such as a demonstration screen is displayed. In such a gaming machine, when a demonstration screen or the like is displayed, if the determination result is a specific determination result, it is necessary to switch the production from the demonstration screen to a specific production mode, and it takes time to switch the production. If this happens, there is a problem in that the player feels uncomfortable.

  Further, an effect is proposed in which a character (icon) symbolizing a privilege (bonus etc.) given to the player is displayed on the display screen of the display means, and that the privilege is given by acquiring the character. (For example, JP2013-236851A). In this case, the character (icon) symbolizing the privilege is displayed on the display screen after the special symbol change has started, that is, after the special symbol lottery result has been confirmed, and the special symbol lottery result is supported. Since the effect to perform (the effect of whether or not to acquire the character) is executed, whether or not to acquire the character after the character (icon) is displayed on the display screen during the variation time of one special symbol However, there is a problem that it is necessary to display the effect up to the result, and it is necessary to set a long variation time of the special symbol.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, when the identification information based on the specific determination result is dynamically displayed, the effect is dynamically displayed in a specific effect mode, and the dynamic display of the identification information is continuously executed for a predetermined period or longer. If not, the dynamic display of the effect is stopped in a state where the display can be switched to a specific effect mode. As a result, even when the dynamic display of the identification information is not continuously executed for a predetermined period or longer, even if the determination condition is satisfied and the dynamic display based on the specific determination result is executed, the dynamic display of the effect Can be displayed by switching to a specific effect mode. Therefore, since it is possible to produce a specific production mode without delay, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine Y1, the specific effect mode includes a notification mode indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result in a period from the start to the first effect period. Based on the result, the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is configured to be equal to or longer than the first effect period.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine Y1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific effect mode includes a notification mode that indicates that the determination result is the specific determination result in the period from the start to the first effect period, and the determination result is the specific determination result. The dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is composed of the first effect period or more. Thereby, when performing the production | presentation by the alerting | reporting aspect which shows that it is a specific determination result, the dynamic display period more than a 1st production period is determined. Therefore, it is possible to surely display the effect by the notification mode indicating that it is a specific determination result, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the effect dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the effect across the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times. A gaming machine Y3 that dynamically displays an effect mode that can be switched to the specific effect mode in accordance with the start timing.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, it is possible to dynamically display an effect across a plurality of times of dynamic display of identification information, and to switch to a specific effect mode in accordance with the dynamic display start timing of the identification information. Various effects are dynamically displayed. Thereby, when the dynamic display of identification information is started, the effect aspect which can be switched to a specific effect aspect is dynamically displayed. Therefore, even if the dynamic display period of the identification information is short, since it becomes possible to switch to a specific effect mode without delay after the dynamic display is started, it may give the player a sense of incongruity. There is no effect.

  In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the effect is that the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are dynamically displayed at least simultaneously, and the specific effect mode is the first effect symbol and the above-described effect A gaming machine Y4 that is displayed in contact with a second effect symbol.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, in the specific effect mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol that are dynamically displayed at the same time are displayed in contact with each other. Therefore, since the player can recognize that the specific effect mode is being executed by visually recognizing the contact between the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, it is possible to provide an easily understandable gaming machine for the player. effective.

<Feature AA group> (Roulette interruption control)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means, and a discrimination result based on a discrimination result by the discrimination means. A determination period determining means for determining a period until confirmation, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being determined by a specific determination result; In the gaming machine, the identification means in which a plurality of different identification information is set, and among the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means, the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result for the player. The identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information to be notified, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, one identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means in a predetermined production period, Selected When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect informing the notification mode indicating the identification information and the specific effect executing means, the specific determination result is determined by the determining means. And setting means for setting the specific identification information determined by the identification information determination means as the identification information selected in the specific effect, and the determination for a predetermined period during the effect period. A gaming machine AA1 having interruption means for interrupting the effect period when the case where the determination is not executed by the means continues.

  Here, a pachinko machine has been proposed that executes a specific performance regardless of whether or not there is a change in the special symbol during the period from the start of the short-time gaming state to the end of the short-time gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-2013). No. 236851). In this case, since the specific effect is started even if the special symbol is not changed during the short-time game, the special symbol that is executed only within the specific period of the short-time game state is not changed. Can be seen for a long time. Therefore, there is a problem that a sense of expectation for a specific performance is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AA1, discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the discrimination result is decided by the decision period decision means based on the discrimination result. The period until is determined. A privilege is given by the privilege granting unit based on the determination result being confirmed by the specific discrimination result. Then, among a plurality of different pieces of identification information set by the identification means, specific identification information for notifying that a specific determination result is determined by the identification information determination means is determined, and the specific identification information is notified to the player. The When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific effect is performed by the specific effect executing unit, and the notification mode indicating the selected identification information among the identification information set in the identification unit is determined in a predetermined effect period. Is executed. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the identification information determined by the identification information determining means is selected as the identification information selected by the specific effect based on the determination of the specific determination result by the determining means. The identification information is set by the setting means. Furthermore, when the case where the determination is not performed by the predetermined period determination unit continues during the production period, the production period is interrupted by the interruption unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where a specific effect executed using a predetermined effect period progresses while the determination means does not execute the determination, and therefore, expectation for the specific effect executed during the effect period There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the feeling from being impaired.

  In addition, by interrupting the production period, rather than executing control to change (extend) the content of the specific production executed during the production period so that the expectation for the specific production is not impaired, There is an effect that processing can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine AA1, the production period is set as the first production period until the first period elapses from the start, and the interruption means is not discriminated for the predetermined period in the first production period. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the interruption is executed based on the fact that the case has continued.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AA2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the period from the start of the production period until the first period elapses is set as the first production period, and the production period is performed by the interruption means based on the fact that the predetermined period determination is not performed in the first production period. Is interrupted. Thereby, the period which discriminate | determines whether an effect period is interrupted can be made into a part (1st effect period) of an effect period. Therefore, when the production period is resumed, it is possible to secure a predetermined production period, and it is possible to execute a specific production without impairing the player's expectation.

  In the gaming machine AA2, the interruption means determines whether or not the determination by the determination means is being executed in the predetermined period until the first presentation period elapses, and when the determination is not executed, The gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that the production period is interrupted based on the fact that the production period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AA1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined that the determination by the determining unit is not performed in a predetermined period until the first effect period elapses, the effect period is interrupted based on the fact that the first effect period has elapsed by the interrupting unit. . This makes it possible to make the timing at which the production period is interrupted constant. Thereby, since the remaining effect period when the effect period is restarted can be made constant, there is an effect that the processing load for executing the specific effect after the restart can be reduced.

  Of the effect periods, the first effect period may be configured to execute a predetermined effect regardless of the determination result by the determining means, and the specific effect may be executed after the first effect period elapses. Thereby, even if the production period is interrupted, the specific production can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the determination period determination unit determines the predetermined number of determination results within the effect period as a period until the determination result determined by the determination unit is determined. A gaming machine AA4 characterized by determining a period.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the period until the determination result determined by the determination unit is determined, the period is determined by the determination period determination unit so that the predetermined number of determination results are determined within the production period. Thereby, the determination by the determination means can be executed a plurality of times within the effect period, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Furthermore, even if a situation occurs in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is not performed during the performance period, that is, after the discrimination of 1 by the discrimination means, the game ball does not enter the entrance means, and the next discrimination is Even if a situation that is not executed occurs, the effect period is interrupted by the interrupting means, so that the expectation for the specific effect in the effect period is not impaired.

<Characteristics AB group> (Available period of button PUSH is different from notification.)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination means for executing determination, a privilege granting means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, and a game An operating means that can be operated by an operator, an effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which an operation by the operating means is effective, and when the effective period is set by the effective period setting means, the operating means Based on the operation, the effect execution means for executing the effect, the first period setting means for setting the first period within the effective period by the effective period setting means, and the operation means for the first period. When operated, the game machine AB1 includes delay means for delaying execution of the effect by the effect execution means until the first period elapses.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the display unit dynamically displays the discrimination symbol for a predetermined period, and then stops and displays the symbol based on the determination result. During the period in which the determination symbol is dynamically displayed, as the various effects, the player changes the effect mode based on pressing the operation means (for example, a button) that can be operated by the player, and the determination result is played in advance. There has been proposed a gaming machine that improves the interest of a player by displaying a notice or the like for giving a notice to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-185224). In this case, the period during which the player can operate the operation means is limited to the period during which the effect mode can be changed and displayed. When the player is notified of the period during which the player can operate, the period is short and the effective period. There is a problem that the operation means cannot be operated, and there is a problem that the game becomes difficult. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an easy game.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, when an effective period in which the operation by the operation means is effective is set, if the operation means is operated within the effective period after the first period of the effective period has passed, Is executed. On the other hand, if the operating means is operated before the first period of the effective period elapses, the execution of the effect is delayed. Therefore, the effective period can be set even during a period different from the start timing of the effect executed based on the operation means, the effective period can be set longer, and the player can operate the operation means. Since the period is long, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player play an easy game.

  In the gaming machine AB1, the effect executed by the effect executing means is such that an effect mode is determined based on a determination result by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is determined based on the determination result by the determining means. That is, the player can grasp the determination result by the determination means by visually recognizing the effect mode of the effect. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the production mode of the production, the operation of the operation means for displaying the production can be actively executed, and the player's willingness to participate can be improved. effective.

  Among the identification means in which a plurality of different identification information is set in the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, and the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means, the determination result is a specific determination result for the player The identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information for informing, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, one identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means in a predetermined execution period, When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect informing the notification mode indicating the selected identification information and the specific effect executing means, the specific determination is performed by the determining means. Based on the determination of the result, the specific identification information determined by the identification information determination means is set as the identification information selected in the specific effect. A setting means, wherein the presentation execution section, the gaming machine is characterized in that to perform the notification effect indicating the selected identification information in the specific effect AB3.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the following effects are produced. In other words, when a specific effect is being executed and a specific determination result is determined by the determination means, the notification effect based on the specific identification information for notifying that the determination result is the specific determination result by the effect execution means. Is executed. Thereby, when the determination result becomes the specific determination result during execution of the specific effect, the determination result is the specific determination in the effect by the effect executing means (that is, the effect based on the operation means being operated). A notification effect that enables the player to recognize that the result is a result is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect based on the operation of the operation means, and to improve the player's willingness to participate.

<Characteristics AC group> (Set the next roulette effect based on the previous stop position of the roulette)
A movable body in which a plurality of different identification units are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, a movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and the movable body based on the establishment of a movable condition. A determination unit that determines a movable pattern in which a stoppable range that can be stopped is set in advance, and a specific identification unit that is moved to the predetermined production position after being moved by the movable pattern determined by the determination unit. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when stopped, and when the movable body is moved in the movable pattern, set to the stoppable range based on the establishment of a specific condition An identifying unit determining unit that determines one identifying unit from the identified unit, and the identifying unit determined by the identifying unit determining unit is stopped at the production position at a specific stop timing. And a stop control means for determining the movable pattern in which the stoppable range to be stopped next is set in advance corresponding to the identification unit stopped by the stop control means. A gaming machine AC1 characterized by being.

  Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a determination such as hitting is performed, a plurality of rotating bodies arranged with a plurality of different symbols are arranged on the front side, and a combination of symbols that stops at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a determination result. This is notified by performing rotation control based on the determination. As a result of the notification, there is proposed a gaming machine in which a game for changing a variable winning device is executed so that a gaming ball can be entered when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). Even if the rotating body is stopped by one rotation effect, the expectation for the next rotation effect cannot be varied depending on the stop position, and the player gets bored early due to a monotonous game. There was a point. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and further, by providing a novel gaming machine, the game is prevented from becoming monotonous and the player gets bored early. It aims at providing the gaming machine which can suppress a malfunction.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, among the plurality of identification units in the movable body, the identification unit corresponding to the stoppable range set in the determined movable pattern is stopped at the predetermined effect position. As the movable pattern, when the movable body is stopped, a movable pattern in which a stoppable range to be stopped next is set in advance is determined. That is, the next stoppable range is determined in a state where the movable body is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to change the expectation of whether the specific identification unit stops at the production position from the position where the position of the movable body is stopped in accordance with the next stoppable range, and the specific identification unit does not stop at the production position. Even in this case, the stop position can be interested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine AC1, the movable pattern is a game machine AC2 in which a preset execution period is set.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC1, a preset execution period is set for the movable pattern of the movable body. Therefore, there exists an effect that the malfunction that a player gets tired early can be suppressed (prevented) because the movable body is extended.

  In addition, according to the configuration including the gaming machine AC1, the next stoppable range is determined in a state where the movable body is stopped. Therefore, even if the movable period of the movable body is a preset execution period, The stoppable range can be determined based on the execution period. That is, a stoppable range suitable for the period during which the movable body is moved (movable pattern) can be determined. For example, an identification unit that does not reach the effect position in the set period (movable pattern) is determined as the stoppable range. There is nothing. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable operation of the movable body does not become unnatural and it is possible to provide a suitable effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  The gaming machine AC1 or AC2 includes a determination unit that performs determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the stop control unit is configured to perform the specific identification when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. The gaming machine AC3 is characterized in that the part is stopped at the production position.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result, the specific identification unit is stopped at the effect position, so the determination by the determination unit There is an effect that the result can be notified by the identification unit stopping at the effect position.

  In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the gaming machine AC4 includes setting means for setting the specific identification unit from the plurality of different identification units based on establishment of a setting condition.

  According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the specific identification unit is set by a plurality of different identification units by the setting means, so which identification unit is set as the specific identification unit It is possible to make the player interested in what is done and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AC4, the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on the player's selection.

  According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine AC4, at least one of the specific identification units is set by the setting means based on the player's selection. It can be set as a specific identification part, and there is an effect that the player can participate in the game and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AC4 or AC5, the setting unit sets the specific identification unit based on a determination result by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AC4 or AC6, the specific identification unit is set by the setting unit based on the determination result of the determination unit. This has the effect of allowing the player to predict the discrimination result.

<Feature AD group> (Executed after entering the bunny foot effect)
A ball entry means having an opening for allowing a game ball to enter, an open state in which the game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means, and a closure in which the game ball is harder to enter than the open state A variable member that can be changed to a state, a variable means that can change the variable member between the open state and the closed state, a detection means that detects a game ball that has passed through the opening, and a passage through the opening The game ball is caused to flow down for a predetermined period of time and is guided to the effect body in which the effect is executed, and based on the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball is detected by the detecting means. An amusement machine AD1 characterized by having production varying means for varying production.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of winning holes are arranged on the front side of the gaming area where game balls can flow down, and one of them is a game at the starting winning hole which is a start timing of the success / failure determination. A predetermined lottery is executed when the ball enters. When the lottery result is a win, a game in which the variable winning device is opened is executed, and the player can obtain a lot of prize balls and the like. In such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a gaming ball flows down to a predetermined position by connecting a passage port through which a plurality of gaming balls can pass with a flow path member through which the gaming ball can flow down. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-133303). Further, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that suppresses the game from becoming monotonous by improving interest. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, the effect of the effector is varied by the effect varying means based on the elapse of a predetermined period from when the game ball that has passed through the opening is detected until it reaches the effector. It can produce so that the production | presentation of a production | presentation body may be changed when a ball | bowl guides to a production | presentation body. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand the timing at which the effect of the effector is changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AD1, the guiding path is configured by a visual recognition member that allows a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down inside the gaming machine AD2.

  According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine AD1, the guiding ball is configured so that the player can visually recognize the gaming ball flowing down inside, so that the gaming ball is guided to the director. This has the effect of making it easier to understand the timing at which the effect of the effector is varied.

  In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the guide path is configured to be movable at least between a first position where the game ball can be guided to the effector and a second position where it is difficult to guide the game ball to the effector, When the guide means is movable to the first position and the second position, and the variable means is configured to change the movable member to the open state, the guide path is moved from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine AD3 that is movable to one position.

  According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, when the variable member is in the open state, the guide path is moved to the first position, so that the variable member is in the open state. Can be notified to the player more easily.

  In the gaming machine AD2 or AD3, when the guide path is not moved to the first position, the gaming machine AD2 or AD3 has a discharge flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the opening. A gaming machine AD4.

  According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AD2 or AD3, the gaming ball that has entered the opening can be discharged from the discharge passage even when the guide path is not moved to the first position due to a malfunction or the like. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines AD1 to AD4, when the determination condition is satisfied and the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, the variable until the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine AD5, comprising: a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game in which a member is changed to the open state by the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine AD5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD4, when the discrimination result becomes a specific discrimination result, the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, so that the player's interest can be further improved. .

  In the gaming machine AD5, when the determination result is the specific determination result, the gaming machine AD5 has a determination unit that determines whether to set a special game state advantageous to the player after the privilege game by the privilege game execution unit. The game machine AD6 is characterized in that the effect body notifies the result of the determination by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AD6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD5, it is informed whether the special gaming state is set by the director, so that the effect that the game becomes monotonous can be suppressed even during the bonus game. is there.

  Any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 First entrance (part of entrance means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
113 Sound lamp control device (interruption means)
640 Rotating member (identification means)
640a Second entrance (part of entrance means)
S305, S508 Discriminating means S310, S312 Part of fixed period determining means S512, S517 Part of fixed period determining means S1102 Bonus granting means S2102 Specific effect executing means S2609 Identification information determining means S3004 Setting means

Claims (4)

A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter,
Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on a game ball entering the entrance means;
A determination period determining means for determining a period until the determination result is determined based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is determined by a specific discrimination result,
Identification means in which a plurality of different identification information is set;
Among the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means, identification information determination means for determining the specific identification information for notifying the player that the determination result is a specific determination result;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific effect in which one identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification unit and a notification mode indicating the selected identification information is notified in a predetermined effect period. Specific production execution means to be executed;
When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the identification information is selected as the identification information selected by the specific effect based on the determination result determined by the determining means. Setting means for setting the specific identification information determined by the determination means;
A game machine comprising: an interrupting means for interrupting the effect period when a case in which the determination is not performed by the determining means continues for a predetermined period during the effect period. The production period is set as the first production period until the first period elapses from the start,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the interruption unit executes interruption based on the fact that the case where the determination is not performed for the predetermined period continues in the first production period.   The interrupting means determines whether or not the determination of the determining means is executed in the predetermined period until the first effect period elapses, and when the determination is not executed, the first effect period has elapsed. The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the production period is interrupted based on the above.   The determination period determining means determines the period so that a predetermined number of determination results are determined within the effect period as a period until the determination result determined by the determination means is determined. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.

Images